%, 0^ 






/ 



8 * ^o. 












'■ 






' *p 






^ H/^i 






^ 












COETISA METHOD 




issn 




CORTINA METHOD 

INTENDED FOR USE IN SCHOOLS, ETC., AND FOR SELF-STUDY 

FRENCH 

IN TWENTY LESSONS 

WITH A SYSTEM OF ARTICULATION, BASED ON ENGLISH 

EQUIVALENTS, FOR ACQUIRING A CORRECT 

PRONUNCIATION 

BY 

R. DIEZ DE LA CORTINA 

EX-DIRECTOR OF "R. D. CORTINA ACADEMY OF LANGUAGES," IN NEW YORK; EX- 
INSPECTOR OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION IN THE ARGENTINE REPUBLIC; TECHNICAL 
COUNSELLOR OF THE MINISTRY OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION OF BOLIVIA; AUTHOR 
OF "SPANISH IN TWENTY LESSONS," "FRANCES EN VEINTE LECCIONES," 
"INGLES EN VEINTE LECCIONES," "VERBOS ESPANOLES," " MODELOS 
PARA CARTAS," THE " CORTINA SERIES," ETC., ETC. 

REVISED BY 

PROF. J. LEROUX 

PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AT THE IT. S. NAVAL ACADEMY 

TWENTY-THIRD EDITION 




NEW YORK 
R D. CORTINA COMPANY, PUBLISHERS 

1917 






Copyright, 1895, 
By R. D. CORTINA. 



Gift 

Miss Frances S.Hay 
July 18,1931 



INTRODUCTION. 

The publication of my two books : " Ingles en Yeinte 
Lecciones" for the use of Spanish speaking people, and 
" Spanish in Twenty Lessons" for English and American 
students, has been attended with a success so far exceed- 
ing my anticipations that I have been induced to write 
two additional works, based on the principles of my 
method of teaching languages, and intended for the use 
of Spanish, South American or English people desirous 
of studying the French language. 

The public and the majority of teachers of foreign lan- 
guages are already acquainted with the leading features 
of my plan; its aim is to enable the student to acquire 
thorough control of the language he is studying in the 
shortest possible time, and with the least possible strain 
upon his patience and mental faculties. I have tried to 
avoid the slow, monotonous and befogging processes 
which consist in impregnating the pupil's mind with a 
number of grammatical rules which are generally of no 
practical value in the end. 

My long experience in the teaching of languages and 
the close attention I have always given the subject have 
been of great help to me in the accomplishment of this 
object. The Method is based on such principles and laid 
out in such a way that it is adapted to the use of children 



VI CORTINA METHOD. 

as well as to that of adults. It is applicable to students 
endowed with only ordinary mental gifts as it is to those 
of superior intelligence ; it is also adapted to the use of 
those who have passed through only a rudimentary 
course of education as well as to that of men of higher 
attainments. I have made use of every possible means 
within my reach to make the work thorough and com- 
plete. A system of figured pronunciation and a number 
of vocabularies containing words of every day use have 
been introduced; the sentences of the dialogues have 
been carefully selected, progressing gradually from the 
most simple to the most complicated forms of speech; 
these have been supplemented with a literal and a free 
translation, the object of this being to make the student 
thoroughly familiar with the idiomatic spirit of the lan- 
guage as well as with the relative value of the most 
important expressions. The verb, that most important 
of all the parts of speech, has been the subject of special 
attention and study. Particular care has been taken to 
avoid all unnecessary or abstruse grammatical discus- 
sions, while nothing has been omitted which may be of 
practical use or of actual necessity. Such, briefly stated, 
is the material which I have employed to make the 
work not only interesting but thorough and effective. 

The results obtained by myself and by those who have 
done me the honor of adopting my method of teaching 
languages, should be the best proof of its thorough 
efficiency. The Medal of the First Class which was 
awarded me by the Department of Liberal Arts at the 
Chicago Exposition in 1893, and the fact that a number 
of governments have adopted the system officially, com 
stitute additional guarantees of the value of the work, 
and are the best I can offer to an indulgent public as an 



INTRODUCTION. Vll 

inducement to honor me with its approval and pat- 
ronage. 

I have no hesitation in declaring that teachers will 
secure prompt and satisfactory results if they will but 
interpret the system properly and thoroughly acquaint 
themselves with and appropriate its intent and rationale. 
I feel equally positive that pupils will acquire a thor- 
ough knowledge of the subject, easily and apparently 
without effort or fatigue, if they will carefully follow the 
instructions. Whenever any doubt occurs they should 
not hesitate to consult the book, but care should be taken 
not to make too free a use of the figured pronunciation 
or of the literal and free translations. These are only 
intended to assist them in cases of uncertainty and should 
be referred to as a last resort only. By adopting this 
plan they will acquire a prompt and thorough efficiency 
in the language, without having encountered any diffi- 
culty or any obstacle of importance. 

The work is divided into five books, each of which is 
composed of four lessons. These are selected in such a 
manner that the pupil learns the subject proper of the 
lesson, and at the same time is reminded of what he has 
learned previously and prepared for the lessons fol- 
lowing. 

The plan of the method is this : 

First — A minutely detailed study of the alphabet and 
of French pronunciation. 

Second — Each lesson is composed of two vocabularies 
in addition to the dialogues ; the one contains most of the 
locutions used in the dialogue, the other a number of 
words most commonly in use, so that the pupil at once 
finds himself interested in the subject and may attempt 
to construct sentences of his own. 



Vlll CORTINA METHOD. 

Third — A figured pronunciation, in English equivalents, 
which is repeated as often as necessary in order to famil- 
iarize the pupil with the accent of words, and to make 
him acquainted with the pronunciation of any new ones 
which may occur. 

Fourth — A literal translation of all the French idioms, 
and a free one of all the dialogues. The object of this is 
to instruct the student in all the idioms of both lan- 
guages and in their relative values. 

Fifth — In addition to the notes bearing on grammatical 
^points, each Book is supplemented with a Second Part 
treating of the verbs, of their conjugations and of their 
peculiarities. The first book treats of the regular verbs ; 
the second, of the auxiliary verbs ; the third of the irreg- 
ular, and the fourth of the passive, impersonal, defective, 
reciprocal and reflexive verbs. At the end of the first 
book there is a complete list of the regular verbs most 
commonly used in conversation ; at the end of the third 
book there is another list of the irregular verbs, and 
completing the fourth book still another which gives 
those verbs whose meaning varies according to the 
particle with which they are used when followed by an 
infinitive. 

Sixth — The four lessons of the fifth book are made up 
of a series of literary exercises j these are in an agreeable, 
instructive form. There are also a number of models for 
letters, a list of the most common abbreviations, another 
of French sayings and proverbs, one of proper names, 
and lastly a complete index, alphabetically arranged. 
The latter might aptly be called a synopsis of the work 
for general reference rather than an index, its object 
being to facilitate the student's work in case of any diffi- 
culty encountered. 



INTRODUCTION. IX 

Importance of the Study of French. 

Of all the requirements of modern life, the study and 
knowledge of living languages are without a doubt the 
most imperative. The increased facilities which have 
lately been established for rapid communication with 
foreign countries, and the consequent demands of com- 
mercial relations with them, have made the acquisition 
of foreign tongues almost a necessity. No one who lays 
any claim to any extensive knowledge of the world, to any 
standing in society or to any prominence in any of the 
numerous paths of modern life can afford to ignore them. 

A trip abroad has come to be considered almost an 
annual necessity for the sake of health, pleasure, educa- 
tion or business. In fact all the exigencies of modern 
life point to the necessity of learning foreign languages. 

No doubt, the peculiar circumstances in which differ- 
ent individuals may find themselves make their require- 
ments various and diverging in this respect. A student 
of the sciences will find German useful ; English is the 
language of commerce all the world over, and the Spanish 
language is required by all those whose affairs bring 
them into contact with Spain or any of the countries 
situated in that vast expanse of continent lying to the 
south of us, before which there is such a large and brill- 
iant future. There is one language, however, the general 
utility of which cannot be denied, and that is French, the 
international language of Europe, the court speech of 
Eussia and Turkey and, it may almost be said, of Ger- 
many, England and Italy, the only sure means of com- 
munication in the Orient and Africa, the recognized 
medium of diplomatic intercourse, the mark of social 
polish in the individual, the language of etiquette in all 
countries, the vehicle of so much that is novel and strik- 



X CORTINA METHOD. 

ing in science, literature and art, the tongue in which 
Racine, Moliere, Corneille, Fenelon and Victor Hugo 
expressed their thoughts. 

Added to this is that peculiar attraction which France 
exerts over all travelers, the undeniable charm which 
its capital, Paris, has for men of all classes and of all 
nations, impelling them to visit this capital of the civi- 
lized world as soon as they leave their own country. 

In some unaccountable way France has become, so to 
speak, the center from which radiate all kinds of infor- 
mation and knowledge ; she is the medium through 
which all the most recent achievements, discoveries and 
facts of modern science, literature and art are dissemi- 
nated throughout the world and proclaimed urli et orbe. 

Endowed with a remarkable power of assimilation of 
ideas, this country has a peculiar and unexplained apti- 
tude, a genius for diffusing everything that she has 
previously taken unto herself from others. Standing, as 
she does, in the van of literature, science, art and indus- 
try, it is to her we have to turn in order to learn all that 
is foremost and latest in all or any of these branches. 

Much more could be said on this subject, did space or 
time allow me to do so ; the few facts I have laid before 
the reader, however, should 'be more than sufficient to 
convince him of the " Importance of the study of French." 

E. D. de la Cortina. 



DIEECTIOlSrS. 

Les methodes sont les maitres 
des maitres. 

—Talleyrand. 

How to Study by This Method. 

At the beginning of each lesson the new words with 
their pronunciation as given in the vocabularies, must 
be carefully studied. The French headings of the les- 
sons and vocabularies should always be pronounced in 
that language, and should never be replaced by the cor- 
responding English names, although the words resemble 
one another and have been chosen on that account. 
Care must be taken to give each word its correct accent, 
but this can only be accomplished by reading the French 
aloud, clearly and distinctly. The French sentences 
must next be read until all the words can be pronounced 
without hesitation and until their meaning is thoroughly 
understood. The English translation is given in all 
cases, but must be referred to only when it is necessary 
for learning the meaning of a word or sentence. The 
pages opposite the French sentences are divided into 
two parts ; the figured pronunciation of the French is on 
the left, and the idiomatic English translation on the 
right. It will be noticed that in the column dedicated 
to the figured pronunciation there is a gradual omission 
of those words which are supposed to be known through 
having been already given one or more times, the result 



2 CORTINA METHOD. 

being that there thus remain only incoherent and incom- 
plete phrases. This is done with the view of causing 
the student to make an effort to remember the words the 
first time he sees them, and compelling him as soon as 
possible to read the French in its correct form and as it 
is printed on the corresponding page. Below the French 
sentences is their literal translation, which will be of 
great assistance in the study of their construction. The 
grammatical explanations in the foot notes are of much 
importance to the progress of the learner, and great 
attention should be paid to them. They will clear up 
many of the idiomatic difficulties, and prove helpful to 
the student at all times. After the French of the lessons 
has been thoroughly learned and understood, it is advis- 
able to make a written translation of the English into 
French without referring to the French sentences. 

Recitations. 

The recitation of lessons is not one of the characteris- 
tics of this method, for the principal object of the system 
is conversational practice on the words and sentences of 
the current lesson. To succeed in this the pupil must 
be well prepared before cQming to class, so that the 
whole of the time may be devoted to conversation. This 
should be always carried on in French, unless there should 
be an absolute necessity for the teacher to use English in 
helping the student to answer, or in giving any explana- 
tions that might be required during the first lessons. 

Each lesson is divided into two principal parts, viz. : 
a vocabulary of the most important series of words, 1 and 

1. As may be observed, from the first lesson to the eighth inclusive, there 
are two vocabularies ; the second is the one we are referring to, the first 
being only a kind of resume of the whole lesson, a knowledge of which will 
greatly facilitate the study of the phraseology in the following pages. 



DIRECTIONS. 3 

a phraseology of the most useful model sentences. The 
vocabulary in question has no connection with the phra- 
seology which follows it, but is intended to form the 
basis of a separate dialogue. This arrangement saves 
valuable space, and leaves to the professor's skill and 
intelligence or to the solitary student's personal effort, 
the task of developing what the book can only sketch. 
Neither in the practice of the vocabulary alluded to nor 
in that of the sentences ought there to be any recitation ; 
the system by which the professor asks in English and 
the student answers in French, or vice versa — which is 
the plan of the old methods — ought not at the present 
day to be used by anyone who knows how to teach lan- 
guages, it having become antiquated as useless and irra- 
tional. The professor will begin, then, the first lesson, 
for example, and with greater reason all the rest, by 
speaking in French and asking a student : De quoi est-il 
question dans la premiere legonf The latter will reply, 
always repeating the principal phrase of the question: 
Dans la premiere lecon U est question de la famiUe. The 
professor will next direct a student at one end of the 
class to question a scholar at the other end, the teacher 
bearing in mind that the farther the questioner is from 
the one who answers the better it is, because both, 
being obliged to speak loud and distinctly, make a 
greater effort and acquire greater accuracy of pronun- 
ciation : Monsieur , demandez a Monsieur , qui 

est le representant male de la famiUe ? The one addressed 
by the professor will ask the one he is to address: 
M. — — , qui est le representant male de la famiUe, or, de la 
race humaine ? Le representant male de la famiUe, or, de la 
race humaine, est Vhomme. Next the feminine is asked 
for in order to bring into the conversation the word 



4 CORTINA METHOD. 

femme (woman). Then the professor, always trying to 
use words which resemble one another in both lan- 
guages, will continue: L 7 homme et la femme se marient, 
qiCest Vhomme a la femme f Answer : Vhomme est le mari 
de la femme. M qui est la femme a Vhomme ? etc. "With 
reference to the " Nationalities" the same procedure will 
be followed: Quelle est votre nationalite ; la nationality de 
voire pere; de votre mere; d'un homme WItalie; des fils de 
M. Bismarck; des freres d J un homme de Eussief etc. Je 
suis frangais, mon pere est anglais, ma mere est anglaise, etc. 
In every class in which languages are taught a black- 
board is necessary for illustrating by examples as often 
as the opportunity presents itself of enabling the student 
to see clearly, easily and distinctly the reason of what is 
being demonstrated, without being compelled to over- 
strain his imagination. The instructor must try by 
every means in his power to make the pupil enjoy the 
lesson and long for it, instead of hating and fearing it. 
The end can be attained by interesting and amusing 
illustrations rather than by tedious disquisitions which 
perplex and disgust the pupil. During the conversation 
on the "Famille" and the "Nationalites," the blackboard 
must be made use of to illustrate the Article, the Plural 
Number, the Present tense' of the verb Stre, etc., etc. 
Any word which the student does not understand must 
be written, and the pupil must be brought to a knowl- 
edge of it by means of synonyms, assimilations, or by 
opposites, according to the judgment of the professor, 
before use is made of the English equivalent — an ; expe- 
dient to be avoided as much as possible. The same sys- 
tem must be used in the phraseology, and in all the 
lessons to the end of the book. Even when sometimes 
the subjects treated of may seem trivial to the learneiy 



DIRECTIONS. 5 

because they have no direct bearing on his profession or 
line of life, he must nevertheless give them all the 
importance which they really possess; for although he 
is neither a shoemaker, a tailor, a hatter nor a lawyer, 
for instance, he will some day need to buy shoes, clothes 
or a hat, or he will perhaps require the services of an 
attorney, and it will be extremely convenient for him 
to know the proper words and idioms connected with 
those occupations. Both master and scholar must 
imagine themselves as actually engaged in the busi- 
ness transactions which form the subjects of the conver- 
sations. 

The system on which is founded the Method we are 
giving to the public, offers the inestimable advantage of 
educating the student's ear, of exercising his organ of 
language and giving it flexibility for the emission of 
sounds hitherto foreign to it, of perfecting his pronun- 
ciation, and of familiarizing him with all the turns 
of the language he is studying. 

Time for Study. 

The idea of Prendergast, one of the ablest philologers 
of the world, that the times of study should be short but 
frequent, is not recommended by the author of this 
Method, because in this way it is very hard for the stu- 
dent to concentrate his mind sufficiently so as to arrive 
at the desired results ; and, besides this, persons engaged 
in their daily occupations seldom find the opportunity 
for study more than once a day, and all this must be 
taken into account. Study, then, should be taken up 
as often as practicable, and as long a time as possible 
should be devoted to it. 



6 CORTINA METHOD. 

For Self-Instruction. 

The directions under "How to Study by This Method" 
should be followed. After both vocabularies have been 
memorized the French sentences should be read until 
they can be repeated without dificulty, the English being 
referred to only when the sense is not understood. A 
written translation should then be made of the sentences 
into English, and this English should be retranslated 
into French, the mistakes being corrected by reference 
to the book when the whole lesson has been finished. 

For Conversation. — After the exercises have been writ- 
ten and properly corrected, the French sentences should 
be repeated aloud without the help of the book, so that 
a conversation may be carried on with oneself by asking 
and answering questions from the written exercise, refer- 
ring to the English of the text in case of doubt only. 

The Phonograph. — This marvelous invention, due to 
the genius of the immortal Edison, which has already 
introduced and will continue to produce in the future so 
great and so surprising a revolution in pedagogical 
studies, is a most powerful aid to the professor, who will 
find in it a faithful and lasting echo of his teachings, and 
a most useful help to the student, who will be able to 
repeat the lessons of the teacher and educate his ear — the 
chief element in the learning of languages — as often as 
the time at his disposal will allow and his love of study 
will suggest. The applications to instruction of which 
this invention is susceptible, are as incalculable as is 
immense the field which they open to the initiative and 
intelligence of those called to foment and propagate 
instruction ; such is the importance of these applications 
that they alone would suffice to constitute the glory of 
the distinguished inventor. 



DIRECTIONS. 7 

Pronunciation. 

"Representation of the French Sounds by the System of Diacrit- 
ical Marking (Figured Pronunciation). 

SIMPLE VOWELS. 

1. A has three sounds in French: a, a and a. In 
the figured pronunciation a will represent a sound ex- 
actly like that of a in the English word fat, a will repre- 
sent a sound like that of a in the English word ask, and 
a will represent a sound like that of a in the English 
word father. 

2. E has four sounds: e without an accent, which, 
when it is not mute, we shall distinguish by e in italics, 1 
as it cannot be accurately represented by English sound j 
e with the acute accent, also called closed e, represented 
in the figured pronunciation by ay, as in the English 
word bay; e with the grave accent, also called open e, 
represented in the figured pronunciation by the same 
sign as in French and pronounced as in ebb, but longer f 
e with the circumflex accent, also represented by the 
same sign as in French. 3 

E, called e mute, will, when sounded very slightly at 
the end of a word, be represented by e raised above the 
level of the word. 4 

1. This e is a shortened sound of the e in the English words her, term, etc. 

2. This open e is the lengthened sound of the e in the English words bet, 
less, men, etc. 

3. This sound is similar to the preceding one, but more prolonged. Open 
the mouth completely and give the letter a sustained sound. To accustom 
oneself to these different emissions of voice, e, e, e, e should be pronounced 
in an ascending scale, the mouth being opened little by little, until perfect 
facility is attained. 

4. For example, in presque (presk 8 ), almost, longue (lo^gu 6 ), long, etc., 
the sound of this • ought to be the same as that which we represent by e in 
italics, note 1, but very weak and merely as an aid to the pronunciation of 
the consonant which precedes it. 



8 CORTINA METHOD. 

3. I has a short and a long sound, as in the English 
words chin and machine. In the figured pronunciation 
they will be represented by i and ee respectively. 

4. O has also a short and a long sound, as in the Eng- 
lish words not and note. They will be represented by o 
and 6. 

5. TJ. The two sounds, short and long, of this letter, 
will both be represented by u printed in italics. 5 

6. Yis pronounced like i, No. 3, and will be represented 
accordingly. Between two vowels it is sounded like two 
f s, the first of which unites with the preceding vowel, 
forming a combination of letters which has a special 
sound, 6 and the second is sounded like i. 

COMPOUND VOWELS. 

They are so called as being a union of two or more 
vowels with the sound of one only. 

7. Ai, ay, are pronounced sometimes as ay and some- 
times as e, 2 and will be represented accordingly ; aie, ei, 
bye. 3 

8. Eu and oeu as e in italics, 1 except in the parts of the 
verb avoir (avwar'), to have, in which eu is sounded u, 
note 5. 

9. Au, eau, aux, 7 eaux, 7 aut, 7 eo, are pronounced 
like 6. 

10. Oi like wa. This combination may be regarded 
as a compound vowel. 

11. Ou, like English oo. 

5. To obtain them, open the lips as if to emit the sound of oo as in the 
English word too, and pronounce' an English e. 

6. This occurs generally with ay and oy, which are decomposed, accord- 
ing to the rule, into ai-i and oi-i, sounds which are represented, as will be 
seen in Nos. 7 and 10, by ay-ee and wd-ee : in pays (pay-ee') and nettoyer 
(netwa-ee-ay', or better, netwa-yay'), for example. 

7. These consonants are mute at the end of a word. 



DIRECTIONS. 



NASAL SOUNDS. 



12. The combinations am, an, em, en, will be repre- 
sented by o 11 . 9 

13. Aim, ain, eim, ein, im, in, ym, yn, will be 
represented by a 11 . 9 

14. Om, on, by 6 n . 9 

15. Urn, un, eum, by e n9 (e in italics pronounced as in 
her, term, etc.). 

CONSONANTS 

Are pronounced as in English, with the following 
exceptions : 

16. C with a cedilla (9), has the sound of s and will be 
so represented. Ch has the sound of the English sh, and 
we shall represent it so. 

17. G before e, i and y is pronounced like z in the 
English word azure, and will be represented by zli ; gue, 
at the end of a word, by gu e . 4 "When the u forms a 
diphthong with the t, both letters are sounded, and this 
exception will be distinguished by the diaeresis (gwi), 
the u being in italics, and, therefore, pronounced as is 
explained in note 5. Gn is pronounced like ny, and 
will be so represented. 

18. H, when it is said to be aspirated, will be repre- 
sented by h in italics, although it is not pronounced 
at all. Its real effect is to prevent the elision 10 of a pre- 

8. JW and n at the end of words or syllables lose their value as conso- 
nants, and form with the preceding vowel a nasal sound. 

9. We place the n above the level of the vowel to show that the n is 
nasal, the sound of which is very weak, almost imperceptible, though 
giving a nasal sound to the preceding vowel. The symbol o n represents 
the sound of o in the English word on, nasalized ; a° that of a in an, nasal- 
ized : <5 n that of ow in own, nasalized ; and e n that of e in fern, nasalized. 

10. In the words de. le. la. me. ne. que, se, te. the vowels are subject to elision, 
before words beginning with another vowel or silent h, being in such a case 
always replaced by an apostrophe, thus : d\ V, etc. 



10 CORTINA METHOD. 

ceding vowel or the liaison, 11 as it is called in French, of 
a preceding consonant. 

19. J. The sound of this letter will be represented 
like that of g before e, i and y, i. e., by zh. (See Mo. 17.) 
J has this sound before all vowels. 

20. L final, preceded by ei, has what is called a liquid 
sound, represented by y e or ly , both of which pronuncia- 
tions are correct: thus soleil is pronounced either as 
solay'-y e or solay'-ly e . LI also has usually this liquid 
sound. 

21. Qua, que and qui, although generally pronounced 
as ka, ke, kee, sometimes assume the sounds of kwa, 
kw 5 e, kw 5 ee. Que, at the end of a word, will be repre- 
sented by k e . 4 

22. S between two vowels is pronounced like z, and 
will be so represented ; otherwise it has the proper hard 
sound of s. C with a cedilla (§) and sc are also pro- 
nounced like s. 

23. T has sometimes the sound of s and sometimes 
that of t, as in English. 

24. X has four sounds : cs, gz, s and z, and will be 
represented accordingly. 

25. The signs used in the figured pronunciation are 
the following: ' (acute accent), which represents the 
tonic accent of the word ; v (grave accent), which makes 
the vowel short and open; A (circumflex accent), which 
causes the vowel to be prolonged j italics, marking a spe- 
cial sound of a letter ; small letter, raised above the rest, 
denoting a weak sound. 

11. Final consonants (except c, /, I, r) are generally silent before words 
beginning with a consonant or h aspirate, but are pronounced before 
a vowel or before silent h. This joining of a final consonant with the 
initial vowel of the next word is called the liaison (lie-z6 n ')> a word mean* 
ing binding. 



DIRECTIONS. 11 

The following is a table of the combinations of letters 
and special signs made use of in the course of this 
Method, to represent the French sounds — a table to be 
consulted by the student whenever a doubt occurs. 

Table of Sounds. 

Combination of Letters and Signs. French Sounds Represented. 

SIMPLE VOWELS. 

Three sounds of a. 

Four sounds of e. 

At the end of a word when 

it is not completely mute. 
Two sounds of i. 
Two sounds of o. 
Sound of French w. 
Sounds of y. 

VOWELS. 

Special sounds of ay and oy. 
1 Sound? of the combinations 
/ ai, ay; aie, ei. 

Sound of eu and am. 

Sound of au and eau. 

Sound of oi. 

Sound of ou. 



Nasal sound of the combina- 
tions am, an, em, en. 

Nasal sound of aim, ain, 
eim, ein, im, in, ym, yn. 

14. 6°. Nasal sound of om and on. 

15. e 11 (the e in italics). Nasal sound of eum, um, un. 

CONSONANTS. 
2 6 / s. Sound of c and c. 

' "I sh. Sound of ch. 

12. For the explanation of these letters and signs, see the same numbers 
in the preceding pages. 



I. 12 a, a, a. 






f e, in italics, ay. 


,6,e. 


2. 


■j e , very weak sound of e mute 




y. so called. 




3. 


i, ee. 




4. 


o, 6. 




5. 


u, in italics. 




6. 


I, 66. 


COMPOUND 


6. 


ay-ee, wa-ee. 




7. 


fay, e. 




8. 


e, in italics. 




9. 


6. 




10. 


wa. 




11. 


00. 


NASAL S( 


12. 


o». 




13. 


a B . 





12 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Combination of Letters and Signs. 



zh. 



17 gUe * 

I giii (u in italics). 

^ny. 

18. h (italics). 

19. zh. 13 

20. y e or ly e . 

{ka, ke, kee. 
kwa, kwe, kite©. 
k e . 



*{: 



23. 
24. 



25 -! 



s and t. 
cs, gz, s, z. 
• / , acute accent. 
\ grave accent. 
*, circumflex accent. 
Letter in italics. 
Small letter raised above 
the level of the rest. 



French Sounds Represented. 
Sound of g before e, i, y. 
gue at the end of a word. 
gui when the u forms a diph- 
Sound of gn. [thong with i. 
Sign of so-called aspirate. 
Sound of j. 
Liquid sound of I or 11. 

- Sounds of qua, que, qui. 

Sound of que at end of word. 
Sound of 8 between two vow- 
Sound of s, c, c, se. [els. 
Sounds of t. 
Sounds of x. 
Tonic accent. 

Short and open pronuncia- 
Ditto, long, [tion of a vowel. 
Special sound of the letter. 

Weak sound of the letter. 



13. See No. 17, page 9. 



LIVRE PREMIER. 1 

PEEMIEBE PAETIE. 2 

ALPHABET FKANQAIS. 3 
The following are the letters, capital and small, of the 
French alphabet, with their French names and their 
pronunciation in English symbols, according to the 
"Table of Sounds:" 



Lellres.* 
Majuscules et ^ . 
Minuscules.* Moms* 


Pronon- 
ciaWon.* 


Lettres.* 
Majuscules et „ m 
Minuscules.* JVomsfi 


Pronvn- 
ciationJ 


A, 


a, 


a, 


ah. 


N, 


n, 


en, 


en. 


B, 


b, 


be\ 


bay. 


o, 


o, 


o, 


6. 


c, 


c, 


c6, 


say. 


P, 


P, 


p6, 


pay. 


D, 


d, 


d6, 


day. 


o, 


q> 


cu, 


cw. 210 


E, 


e, 


6, 


ay. 


R, 


r, 


er, 


air. 


F, 


f, 


ef, 


ef. 


s, 


s, 


esse. 


es. 


G, 


g> 


fifc 


zhay. 8 


T, 


t, 


t6, 


tay. 


H, 


fc, 


ache, 


ash. 


XT, 


u> 


u, 


w. 2W 


I, 


h 


i, 


ee. 


v, 


v, 


v6, 


vay. 


J, 


h 


ji, 


zhee. 8 


w, 


w, 


double ve^doobr 3911 


K, 


k, 


ka, 


ka. 9 


X, 


x, 


ixe, 


ics. [vay 


L, 


1, 


el, 


el. 


Y, 


y> 


ygrek, 


eegrec. 


M, 


m, 


em, 


em. 


z, 


z> 


zede, 


zed e . 



1. Lee'-vr 6 pre-miay', book first. 

2. Premier' partee', /irs£ part. Roman characters being employed for the 
figured pronunciation, the sounds which do not exist in the English lan- 
guage will be represented by letters in italics, the difference in type being 
intended to strike the attention of the student, who in case of doubt will 
have recourse to page 11. 3. Alfabay' fro n say', French alphabet. 

4. Lay'-tr«, letters. 5. Ma-zhwscwl' ay mee-nttscwl', capitals and smalls. 

6. N6 n , names. 7. Prono n siasio n ', pronunciation. 

8. See page 9, No. 17. 9. iTand w are used in foreign words only. 

10. See page 8, note 5. 11. See page 7, note 4. 



14 CORTINA METHOD. 

Eemark. — The letters in French are of the masculine 
gender. 

Eule. — The tonic accent of the word is always on the 
last sounded vowel, thus : 

Amer (amer'), bitter (masc). Amere (amer'), bitter (fern.). 



SONS DES VOYELLES. 1 

A, a (ah) 

Has three sounds in French, namely : 
First — Short, as in the English word fat (a). 
Second— Intermediate, as in the English word fast (a). 
Third — Long, as in the English word father (a). 

First Sound— A has the short sound (a) before double 
consonants, as in : 

Enflammer (o n flamay / ), to inflame. Canne (can), stick. 
Erappant (frappo n/ ), striking. Malle (mal), trunk. 
Balle (bal), ball. Classe (clas), class. 

Second Sound — A has the intermediate sound, between 
that of a short and that of a long (a) : 

1. When it is the last letter of a word : 

La (la), the j her or it. La 2 (la), there. A 2 (a), to or at. 

A (a), has. Parla (parla'), spoke. 

2. When it is the last letter sounded in a word and is 
followed by a silent consonant, e. g. : 

Drap (dra), cloth. Rat (ra), rat. Pas (pa), not. 

Pas (pa), step. Cas (ca), case. 

1. S6 n day vwa-y61', sounds of the vowels. 

2. The grave accent over a (a) has no other object than to distinguish the 
words of different meanings but spelled and pronounced alike. This is 
illustrated by the examples of the text. 



SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. . 15 

Third Sound — A has the long sound (a) : 

1. When it has the circumflex accent : 

Mat 3 (ma), mast. Male 3 (mal), male. 

Pate (patay'), pastry. Chateau 4 (shatd'), castle. 

2. Before the soft sound of s, when a is the last 
vowel sounded in the word : 

Phrase (fraz), phrase. Base (baz), base. 

B, e (ay) 

Has, when not mute, four sounds, viz. : 

First — As we have shown on page 7, No. 2, when ex- 
plaining our use of the e in italics. 

Second — As ay in the English word may. In this case 
it generally has the acute accent; it is called "e closed." 

Third — With the grave accent (e) it is called "e open," 5 
and is pronounced by opening the mouth more than in 
the preceding case. It is a lengthened sound of the e in 
the English word set. 

Fourth — With the circumflex (e) To pronounce this, 
it is necessary to open the mouth completely and emit a 
prolonged and broad sound. 5 

3. The circumflex accent over a vowel gives to it the longest and broadest 
sound, as it denotes the omission of some letter (usually s) which existed 
in the ancient form of the word. Mdt and mdle, for example, were formerly 
written mast and masle respectively. 

4. Eau is pronounced 6 in French. See Voyelles Composes (vwa-yel' co n - 
pozay'), compound vowels, at the end of the simple vowels. 

5. The reason for calling this letter e open in contradistinction with the 
e called closed, is because they are pronounced respectively by opening or 
closing the mouth. In order to pronounce an e with the acute accent (6), it 
is necessary to bring the two jaws very near each other. To pronounce an e 
with the grave accent (e), the jaws must be separated and the mouth opened 
to a considerable extent. If the e has the circumflex accent, the mouth 
should be opened wide. Make an ascending scale, opening the mouth 
gradually wider and wider as you pronounce e, 6, e and <?, and repeat these 
different sounds until the ear is accustomed to them. 



16 CORTINA METHOD. 

It is mute: 

1. At the end of words, unless it is the only vowel : 

Table (tabl e ), table. Farce (fars) ,/arce. 

But le (le 6 ), the; me (me*), me. 

2. When it precedes the termination which is added 
to a word in order to form a derivative. Example : 

Reverie (revree 7 ), reverie; from reve (rev), dream. 

Note. — When in the case to which the preceding rule 
refers, a sound unpleasing to the ear would result if the e 
were left completely mute, it takes the sound we referred 
to by e in italics. This occurs, for example, in : 

Chargerai (sharzheray'), (I) shall load y 

because the consonant g (zhay) cannot be pronounced 
without taking something of the sound of e. 

3. When s is added in order to form the plural of 
words which end in e, and to form the second person 
singular of verbs, the termination es is mute, eg. : 

Salles (sal e ) , halls. Tu paries (tu 6 parl e ) , thou speakest 

Fables (fabl e ) , fables. Tu regardes {tu 6 regard e/ ) , thou lookest. 

4. Also, in the third person plural of verbs, the termi- 
nation ent is silent •♦ 

lis parlent (il pari) , they speak. lis flattent (il flat) , they flatter. 

5. The same thing happens when an e is put after g, 
in order that this letter may take, before a, o, u, the 
sound which it has before e, i, viz., that which we repre- 
sent by zh, as in : 

II mangea (mo n zha / ), he ate. Changeons (sho n zh6 n/ ) , let us change. 

6. We cannot repeat too often that the letters printed in italics must be 
pronounced as explained In the "Pronunciation " and corresponding notes, 
pages 7 to 12, for the important reason that we make use of these different 
characters because the English language has no sounds to express them. 



SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 17 

First Sound — e in italics, like e in her : 

1. When it is found in the case which is explained in 
"Note," page 16, corresponding to case second of the 
e mute. 

2. If it is not accented and is the last letter of a syl- 
lable in the middle of a word ; e. g. : 

Lecon (le-so n/ ), lesson. Recu (re-sw /6 ), received. 

3. In monosyllables (compare e mute, 1), such as : 

Me (me), me. Te (te), thee. Le (le), the. De (de), of. 

Second Sound — As ay in day : 

1. When it has the acute accent ; e. g. : 

Defile (dayfilay / ), defile. 32te (aytay / ), summer. 

2. Whenever it is followed by a mute final consonant : 
1st. When the final mute consonant is r, e. g. : 

Parler (parlay 7 ), to speak. Chanter (scho n tay / ), to sing. 

2d. When it is z, 7 e. g. : 

Allez 7 (alay 7 ),^. Chanterez 7 (sho n teray / ), {you) will 

Assez 7 (asay'), enough. Nez 7 (nay), nose. [sing. 

3d. When it is d 8 in words which end in led and ieds: 

Pied 8 (piayO, foot. Pieds (piay'^/ee?!. 

Third Sound — As we have explained, page 15, note 5, 
e with the grave accent (e) is pronounced : 

1. When it has the grave accent : 

Pres (pre), near. Proces (pro-se), lawsuit. 

Probleme (problem), pro&tera. Zele (zel), zeal. 

2. When, without being accented, it precedes final 
mute t or ct ; e. g. : 

Effet (efrV), effect. Respect (r^spe 7 ), respect. 

7. Zis mute at the end of words, except when the liaison takes place. 

8. Like z, and with the same exception, d is mute at the end of a word. 



18 CORTINA METHOD. 

3. Before a final r which is not mute ; e. g. : 

Mer (mer), sea. Fer (fer), iron. 

4. In monosyllables, when it is followed by s, as : 
Mes 9 (me), my. Des 9 (de), o/^Ae (plural). Ces 9 (ce), tfAese, 

Fourth Sound — When it has the circumflex accent : 10 
Meme (m6m), same. Tete (t6t), head. 

I, i (ee) 

Has two sounds : long and short. 

First Sound — "When it has the circumflex accent, and 
in the terminations ir and ire ; e. g. : 
Abime (abeem'), abyss. Finir (fineer'), to finish. 

Second Sound — In all other cases, as in : 
II (il), he. Quitte (kit), even. 11 

O, O (6) 

Has also, like i, two sounds, one long and open, the 
other closed and short. 

First Sound — 1. When it has the circumflex accent : 
Trone (trdn e ), throne. Hdtel (6tel'), hotel. 

2. At the end of a word or before one or more final 
consonants ; e. g. : 

Bravo (bravS'), bravo. Numero (nw-may-rd'), number. 

3. In the last sounded syllable of a word ending in 
e mute, unless it is followed by doubled consonants ; e.g.: 

Rose (roz), rose. Pose (pdz), position. 

9. Many Frenchmen give the e in these words the closed sound, but the 
preponderance of authorities is for the open sound. 

10. The circumflex accent indicates that the pronunciation of the vowel 
must be long. 

11. As In notu sommes quitte (noo som kit), we are even. 



SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 19 

Second Sound — 1. Generally before doubled consonants 
and in all cases not mentioned in the preceding rules: 
(bos), lump. Botte (bot), boot. 



U, U (u). 

The two sounds of this letter are almost identical and 
are as explained on page 8, note 5 : 12 

Lune (km), moon. Tribu (tribw'), tribe. 

Bu (bu), drunk. Tu (tu), thou. Du (dw), of the. 

When the u has the circumflex accent it is pronounced 
long, e. g. : 
Mur (mwr), ripe. Brule (brtflay'), burnt. 

Eemaek. — U is generally mute if it is preceded by g 
or q; e.g.: 
Guide (gueed), guide ISquerre (aykayr / ), square. 

Y, y (eegrek') 
Has generally the same sound as i (page 18), e. g.: 
Type (teep), type. Y (ee), there. 

Between two vowels it is pronounced as if there were 
two successive i's, the first of them being combined with 
the vowel immediately preceding and the corresponding 
sound being given to the combination. Fays and nettoyer, 
for example, are pronounced as if written : 
Pai 13 -is (pay-ee') country, net-toi 13 -ier (nettwa-yay') to clean. 

12. Practice the pronunciation of this letter, which will be represented by 
u in italics, the sound of which ought not to be confounded with the Eng- 
lish u, nor with the sound which we represent by oo in English which is ou 
in French. We have already said how this sound is produced. The lips 
must be pursed as if to pronounce oo, and without moving them from this 
position, the sound of ee should be uttered. The result ought to be a single 
vowel sound which differs from e, as i differs from u. 

13. The sounds of certain combinations, as ai, oi, etc., will be explained 
in the following chapter. 



20 CORTINA METHOD. 

YOYELLES COMPOSES. 14 
Eu and ceu are pronounced like e in her (e in italics): 

Neuf (lief), new. (Euf (ef), egg. Deux (de), two. 

Peu (pe), little. Feu (fe),fire. Voeu (ve), vow. 

1. Ai is pronounced ay at the end of words j 15 e. g. : 

Ai (ay), (I) have. Mai (may), May. 

Quai (kay), quay. Aurai 15 (6ray / ), (I) shall have. 

Irai 15 (eeray / ), (J) shall go. Portai 15 (portay 7 ), (I) carried. 

2. Ai has the sound of ^ in all the other cases, espe- 
cially before a consonant in a final syllable : 

Semaine (se-men'), week. Aide (ed e ), Ae£p. 

Baise (be-zay'), kissed. Baisse (bes-say'), lowered. 

The combination ay follows the same rules, except 
when y precedes another vowel, in which case the y 
divides itself into two #s, the first combining with the 
preceding vowel and the second with that which follows : 

Essayer (ay-say-yay'), to try. Payer (pay-yay'), to pay. 

3. Aie and ei are pronounced as 3: 
Seine (s6n), Seine. Craie (cr§), chalk. 

Au, aud, 16 aut, 16 ault, aux, 16 eau, eaux, 16 eo, are 
prononounced as 6 ; e. g. : 

Au (6), to the. Haut (^6), high. 

Eau (6), water. Manteau (moHS'), cloak. 

Assault (as<y), assault Autorite (otoritay'), authority. 

Chaud (sh6), heat. Mauve (mov), mauve. 

14. Voyelles Composees (vwa-ySF co n posay'), compound vowels. None of 
the rules which will be given for the pronunciation of the compound vow- 
els must be followed if there is over one of them a diaeresis or acute accent, 
as in naif, naive, simple ; geomltre, geometrician, for example, which are 
pronounced naif and zhay-dme'tre, instead of nayf and zhome'tr*. 

15. The first person singular of the future of all verbs and that of the past 
tense of the conjugation in er, for example. 16. See page 10, note 11. 



SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 21 

Oi is pronounced wa ; e. g. : 
Noir (nwar'), black. Gloire (glwar'), glory. 

When the combination oi is not followed by r, the 
pronunciation is short, as in : 
Moi (mwa), me. Toi (twa), thee. Loi (lwfi), law. 

Ou has the sound of oo in English : 
Gout (goo), taste. Ou (oo), or. Ou (oo), where. 

SONS NASAUX. 17 

These sounds belong to certain vowels when they are 
united to m and n 18 and form syllables with them. Al- 
though called nasal, good speakers emit them as little as 
possible from the nose. 

Nasal. Not Nasal. 

Un (e n ), a or an (masc). Une (wn e ), a or an (fern.). 

Nom (n6 n ), name. No mi nal (nominal'), nominal. 

Am, an, em, en (o nl9 ). 

This sound is represented by : 

Am in ambition (o n bisio n/ ), ambition; lampe (lo n p), lamp. 
An in manteau (mo n t6 / ), cloak; chandelle (sho n del / ), candle. 
Em in embarras (o n bara / ), obstacle ; embraser (o n brazay / ), to kin- 
En in sentir (so n tir / ) , to perceive ; entre (o^r 5 ) , between. [die. 

Im, in, ym, yn (a 1119 ). 
Im in imbecile (aMjayseel 7 ), silly. 
In in fin (fa n ), end; vin (va n ), wine. 
Aim in faim (fa n ), hunger ; essaim (essa n/ ), swarm. 
Ain in main (ma n ), hand ; saint (sa n ), holy. 

17. S6 n nazo, nasal sounds. 

18. The nasal m has always the same sound as n, for which reason we rep- 
resent it by the same letter. 

19. Bear in mind that this sound of n ( n ) is almost imperceptible, but it is 
necessary to give a nasal sound to the vowel which precedes it. 



22 CORTINA METHOD. 

Ein in rein (ra n ), kidney ; ceinture (ssPtui'), girdle. 
Ym and yn in nymphe (na n f ), nymph; syntaxe (sa n tax / ), syntax. 
Ien final in bien (bia n/ ), well; rien (via?'), nothing; mien (mia n/ ), 
mine. 

Om or on (6 nl9 ). 

Om in ombre (6 n br e ), shade. 
I On in mon (mo"), my; son (s6 n ), his. 

TJm or un (e 1119 ). 

Urn in parfum (parfe n/ ), perfume. 
Un in brun (bre n ), brown. TJn (e a ), one. 

Eun in jeun (zhe n 20 ), fasting. 

SONS DES CONSONNES. 1 

B, b (bay) 

Has the same sound as in English, e. g. : 
Balle (bal), ball. Boulet (boolay'), cannon ball* 

Bemakk.— B is mute at the end of words : 2 
Plomb (pl6 n ), lead. 

C, c (say). 

This letter has the same sound as in English ; that is, 
it has the sound of ~k before a, o, u and consonants, and 
the sound of s before e, % and y; it has the sound of s 
before a, o and u also when it has the cedilla; ex- 
amples : 

Ceci (sesee'), this. Facade (fa,shd'),fagade. 

Garcon (gars6 n/ ), boy. Recu (resu), receipt. 

20. Compare, by referring to the "Table of Sounds," this pronunciation 
with that of une jeune femme (un« zheun fam), a young woman, where the 
sound of n is not nasal. 

1. S6 n de c6 n son', sounds of the consonants. 

2. The only consonants which are usually sounded at the end of word? 
are c,/, I and r (see page 10, note 11). 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 23 

It is sounded at the end of words, except when it fol- 
lows a consonant immediately, in which case it is mute : 

Lac (lak), lake. Sec (sek), dry. Avec (avek 7 ), with. 

Banc (bo n ), bank. Blanc (blo n ), white. Pore (por), pork. 

Ch. (say ash) is pronounced before a vowel with the 
sound which is represented by sh in the figured pronun- 
ciation, e. g. : 
Charite (sharitay 7 ), charity. Chercher (shayr-shay'), to seek. 

It is sounded like k in the syllables chre, chri, chro, and 
in words which come directly from the ancient lan- 
guages, as: 

Christ (krist), Christ. Ghronologie (kronolozhee'), chronology. 
Echo (ee6 / ), echo. Chaos (kao'), chaos. Chceur (ker), choir. 

Exceptions : 

Architecture (arshitectwr'), architecture. 
Archeveque (arsheveV), archbishop. Achille (ashil'), Achilles. 
Monarchie (mo-nar-shee / ), monarchy } 

and in all words ending in chie. 

D, d 2 (day). 
The sound of this letter, when it is not mute, is the 
same as in English. It is mute at the end of words, ex- 
cept in : 

Sud (sud), south. 

When in this position, it has to be joined with the 
initial vowel of the next word, it is sounded like a soft t: 

Grand homme (gro n -tom / ), great man. 

F,f(ef)° 

Is generally pronounced as in English. It is sounded 

like v when joined with the initial vowel of the following 

word, as : 

Neuf ans (ne-vo n/ ), nine years. 



24 CORTINA METHOD. 

F final is mute in the following cases : 

Clef (clay), key. (Euf 3 frais (e-fray'), fresh egg. 

Nerf de boeuf (ner de bef), sinew of an ox. 
Chef 3 -d'oeuvre (shay devr e ), masterpiece. 

Such is the case also in the termination of the plural of 
some nouns, as : 

Des nerfs (day nayr), nerves. Des boeufs (day be), oxen. 
Des ceufs (day-ze), eggs. 

Ph is sounded like/. See the letter P. 

G, g (zhay). 

Before a, o, u, ne, ui, or a consonant, it is sounded 

hard, that is : ga, go, gw, gay, gee, 4 etc. 

In the syllable gue, at the end of a word, the e is 

mute: 

Longue (16 n -gu e ), long. 

Followed by e, % y it is pronounced soft, as in the 
alphabet; 5 e. g.: 

Genie (zhay-nee 7 ) , genius. Gymnase (zhim-naz') , gymnasium. 

In the syllable gui it happens sometimes that the u 
forms a diphthong with the i, in which case the u is 
sounded ; e. g. : 
Aiguille (aygw-eey e/6 ), ne.edle. Linguiste (la n gw-eest/), linguist. 

Remarks. — 1. G is mute at the end of a word or 
before another mute consonant, as in : 
Rang (ro B ), rank. Doigt (dwk), finger. 

3. F is pronounced in the simple words ceuf (ef) and chef (shayf). 

4. In the figured pronunciation the letter g always represents the hard 
sound, like that of g in the English word gel. 

5. See page 9, No. 17, for the sound of zh as the figured pronunciation of 
softg. 

6. See page 10, No. 20. 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 25 

2. When it is followed by a noun beginning with a 
vowel or h mute, it is pronounced like a softened &, as : 

De rang en rang (de ro n -ko n ro u/ ),/?*om rank to rank. 

In order that g before the vowels a, o, u may have the 
soft sound which it has before e, i, y, it is necessary to 
insert an e mute between the g and the said vowels a, o, u : 

Mangea (nic^-zha 7 ), (he) ate. Georges (zhorzh e ), George. 
Mangeons (mo n zh6 n/ ) , let us eat. Gageur (ga-zher 7 ), better. 

When two #'s come before <?, the first is pronounced 
hard and the second soft ; for example : 

Suggere (swg-zhay-ray'), suggested. 

Gn is pronounced like ny except at the beginning of a 
word, and in terms recently introduced from the Greek 
and Latin ; e. g. : 

Campagne (co n pa / -ny e ), country. Mignonne (meenyon e/ ), j pre^^/. 
Diagnostic (deeag-nostic'), diagnostic. 

H, h (ash). 

Is always followed by a vowel and is mute ; e. g. : 
L'homme (loin), the man. TJne heure (u-ner'), an hour. 

In some cases it is called aspirate, and it then serves 
to prevent the elision of a preceding vowel or the liaison 
of a preceding consonant ; 7 e. g. : 
Le heros (le Aayro'), the hero. TJn hussard (e n Aws-sar'), a hussar. 

This happens in the words of the following list : 

Ha! (M), ah ! Hanche (7*o n sh), hip. 

Hache (7*ash), ax. Harangue (/*aro n gu e ), harangue. 

Haine (7*en), hatred. Hardi (Pardee 7 ), bold. 

Hai'r (ftaeer'), to hate. Hareng (7?aro n/ ), herring. 

Haleter (/*al e tayO, to pant. Haricot (AaricO'), bean. 

7. See page 10, note 11. 



26 CORTINA METHOD. 

Harnais (7*arne')> harness. Hideux (Mde')> hideous. 

Harpe (Aarp), harp. Hochet (Ao-shay 7 ), trinket. 

Harpie (Aarpee'), harpy. Hola ! (hdW), hello ! 

Hasard (Tiazar'), hazard. Hollande (A61o n d e/ ), Holland, 

Hausse (Ads), me (in prices). Hongrie (7i6 n gree / ), Hungary. 

Haut (^6), A^A. Honte (hd n t), shame. 

Have (My) j pale. Hoquet (Aokay'), hiccough. 

Hennir (Mneer'), fo neigh. Houppe (/*oop e ), tuft. 

Herisser (/iayris-say') , tobristle. Hussard (/ms-sar 7 ), hussar. 
Herisson(^ayriss6 n/ ), hedgehog. Huee (/may'), hue and cry, 

Hernie (^ayrnee 7 ), rupture. Huguenot (hug^o'), Huguenot 

Heros 8 (Tiayro'), hero. Huit 9 (hueeV), eight. 

Hibou (Mboo 7 ), owl. Hurler (/mrlay'), to howl. 

In the combinations rh and th it is mute ; e. g. : 
Rhetorique (ray-toreek e/ ), rhetoric. 
Theologie (tay-Olozhee'), theology. 

J, j (zhay). 
Has always the same sound as that which g has before 
€, i or y; as: 
Jeudi (zhe-dee'), Thursday. Joli (zho-lee'), pretty. 

K, k (ka). 
Found only in words foreign to the language, and pro- 
nounced as in English. 

L,>1 (el). 

Generally has the same sound as in English. 

II, at the end of a word, forms what is called in French 
liquid I, and is sounded y e , as in : 
Soleil 10 (sole'-iy 6 ), sun. Orgueil 10 (orge y -iy e ), pride. 

8. It is mute in heroine (ay-ro-een'), hero'ique (ayro-eek 6 '), heroiquement 
(ayro-eekemo a '), and hero'isme (ayrd-eesnV). 

9. But the liaison takes place in dix-huit (dee-zweet'), eighteen; vingt-huit 
(vaM/iteet'), twenty-eight, etc. 

10. The vowel which precedes il (and likewise ill) is long, but the i is very 
short. The combination ue after the g in orgueil, for example, is pro- 
nounced as if the order of the letters were inverted, that is, like eu, the 
sound of which is figured by e in italics. 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 27 

Gentilhomme, gentleman, is also pronounced "zho n « 
teeyom'." 

The following are exceptions to this rule : 
Civil (civeeK), civil. Fil (feel), thread. Profil (profeel'), profile, 
H (eel), he. Vil (veel), vile. Exil (eg-zeel'), exile. 

in which the I is pronounced in the usual way. 
In the following words the 1 is mute : 

Baril (baree'), barrel. Fusil (fwzee'), musket. 

Gentil (zho^ee 7 ), pretty. Gril (gree), grating. 

Persil (payr-seeO, parsley. Sourcil (soor-see'), eyebrow. 

LI after any vowel except i, is usually pronounced as 
a single I; e. g.: 
Aller (alay 7 ), to go. Cruelle (crwel'), cruel. 

Preceded by an initial t, the two 11' s are sounded sep- 
arately, as in : 
Illusion (iHwsi6 n/ ), illusion. Hlimite (il-limitay 7 ) , unlimited; 

but they have the so-called liquid pronunciation which 
we represent by y el1 if the i which precedes the two Ws is 
in the middle of the word : 
Castille 11 (castee'y 6 ), Castille. Guillaume(gueey6m / ), William. 

When the syllable U is preceded by any vowel, the 

latter does not form the regular combination with the i, 

but both keep their usual sound ; that of the i is very 

short; as: 

Travail (trava'iy 6 ), work, 

11. As we have already said, there are two correct ways of pronouncing 
the liquid I or Ws, but the one we have given in the text is according to the 
Parisian pronunciation. The other sound is like that of 11 in billiard, and 
might be represented by ly*. When a mute e follows immediately after ill, 
it must of necessity be pronounced, for in no other way could the com- 
bination ill be given its proper pronunciation. The sound of the e mute 
should be in this case exactly the same as that which we explained on 
page 7, note 4 (eey). If the e precedes the combination ill, it takes the same 
sound as the e with a circumflex accent (e); this occurs in the word vieiUe 
(vie'-iye), old (fern.). 



28 CORTINA METHOD. 

instead of travay'-ye, which it would be if ai had its 
usual sound, ay. 

The following words in which 11 is pronounced as a 
single I are exceptions : 

Achille (asheel'), Achilles. Distiller (deesteelay'), to distil. 

Mille (meel), thousand. Tranquille (tro n keel'), quiet. 

Ville (veel), city. 

M, m (em). 

At the beginning of a syllable is pronounced as in 
English. 

Preceded by a vowel in the same syllable and followed 
by another consonant, it takes a nasal sound, similar to 
the one explained on pages 11 and 12, and which we 
represented by n ; e. g. : 

Jambe (zho n b e ), leg. Ombre (6 n br e ), shadow. 

It is mute in the words damner (danay'), to damn, and 
in all its derivatives, as well as in automne (6ton') 7 
autumn, 12 but it is pronounced in automnal (otom-nal'), 
autumnal. The terminations amme and emme are pro- 
nounced as "am;" e. g. : 

Flamme (flam),j?ame. Femme (fam), woman. 

Lemme and dilemme are both exceptions to this 
rule, being pronounced "lem" and "deelem." 

N, n (en). 

Generally has the same sound as in English. In the 
combinations an, en, in, on and un the sound of the n 

12. Although mute in the words above mentioned, the m has the effect of 
emphasizing the sound of the wtoa certain extent, making it somewhat 
more like the sound of nn. In similar words in English the effect of this 
combination is the reverse of the French, the sound of the m being more 
marked and the n mute. 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 29 

is slightly weakened and nasalized, when followed by a 
consonant or when it is the last letter of the word, as in : 

Grandeur (gro n der / ), greatness. Cinq (sa n k),^v6. 

Bon (b6 n ), good, Aucun (oke n/ ), none. TJn (e n ), one; 

but if the n be followed by another vowel or another n 
it keeps its characteristic sound in the former case, and 
in the latter is not pronounced at all, e. g. : 

Fortune (fortwn'), fortune. Raisonnable 13 (rezona'br 2 ), reasonable. 

The following are exceptions to the preceding rule : 

Ennoblir (o n nobleer / ), to ennoble; ennui (o n nwee'), ennui, etc. 

JV is mute in : 

Monsieur (mesie'), sir. 

For the pronunciation of gn see the letter G. 

P, P (pay). 

The pronunciation of this letter (apart from its name 
in the alphabet) is the same as in English. 

It is mute when preceded by an m and followed by t, or 
when it is the penultimate consonant at the end of a 
syllable ; e. g. : 

Temps (to n ), time. Compter (k6 n tay'), to count. Sept (set), seven. 

In the word corps (kor), body, it is also mute. 
Ph u is used frequently to modify the sound of the p, 
and is pronounced as/: 

Philosophic (feelozofee'), philosophy. 
Philarmonie (feelarmonee'), philharmony. 

13. In all words derived from substantives ending in on the n is doubled ; 
e. g.: raisonnable (re-zona'-bl e ), from raison; pardonnable (pardona'-bl e ), from. 
pardon. 

14. This combination usually occurs in words derived from the Latin or 
Greek, and in them only. 



30 CORTINA METHOD. 

Q, q (cw). 15 

This letter, unless it is the final one in a word, is 
always followed by u, the latter not being invariably 
mute, and its sound is equivalent to that of h or of the 
hard e in English, when preceding the vowels a, o or u: 16 

Qui (kee), who. Que (ke), that. Quoi (kwa), what, 

Qualite (kaleetay / ), quality. Quotidien (koteedia n/ ), daily. 

The diphthongs ue, 16 ui, 16 are pronounced in some 
words of Latin derivation, as in : 

JSquestre (ay-kwfes'-tr 6 ), equestrian. 
lSquiangle (ay-kweeo n/ -gl e ), equiangle. 

The combination ua is pronounced as a diphthong in 
the following words : 16 

Aquarelle (akwarel / ),wa^ercoZor.Aquatique (sikuhteek'), aquatic. 

JSquateur (aykz^ater 7 ), equator. Equation (ay \s.uh,sid u/ ), equation. 

Quadrupede (kwadrwped 7 ), quadruped. 

The letter q occurs as a final letter, without being fol- 
lowed by u, only in the two words : 

Cinq 17 (sa n k),^?ve. Coq (kok), rooster. 

R, r (er). 18 

Many French people, especially the Parisians, pro- 
nounce this letter in a peculiar manner, somewhat simi- 
lar to the guttural r of the better class of Germans ; its 
sound is produced by the vibration of the posterior part 
of the palate and tongue against one another. In the 

15. See note 12, page 19. 

16. Observe that the pronunciation of qua, que, qui, quo, as kwa, kwe, kwi, 
kwo, which is the rule in English, is the exception in French. 

17. Observe that although the q is mute when cinq is followed by a word 
beginning with a consonant, it is always sounded when followed by an 
initial vowel or silent h. See note 11, page 10. 

18. See note 2, page 22. 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 31 

southern districts of France, however, the roll of the r is 
much more marked. 19 Of the two pronunciations the 
former is the more correct, and it is the one we would 
advise pupils to cultivate. 

Preceded by e, a final r is mute j e. g. : 

Parler (parlay'), to talk. Dernier (derniay'), last. 

Monosyllables are an exception to this rule, such as : 

Mer (mer), sea. Fer (fer), iron, etc., 

and also the following words : 

Amer (amer'), bitter. Cancer (ko n ser / ), cancer, 

Cuiller (kwee-yer'), spoon. Enfer (c^fer'), hell. 

Hiver (ee-ver 7 ), winter. Lucifer (lwseefer'), Lucifer, 

It is also mute in the words : 

Monsieur (me-sie 7 ), sir. Messieurs (may-sie 7 ), gentlemen. 

The pronunciation of the double r (rr) does not differ 
materially from that of the single letter, except perhaps 
in the case of words beginning in arr, err, irr, orr, 
and in the future of verbs where the r is doubled in the 
final syllable, when the rolling sound is slightly empha- 
sized : e. g. : 



Irregulier (eer-ray-g«-liay 7 ), irregular, 
Je verrai (zhe vayr-ray 7 ), I will see. 
II courra (eel coor-ra/), he will run, 

S, S (es). 

1. Is pronounced the same as in English when it is the 
initial letter of a word, when it is preceded or followed 

19. The letter r as pronounced by Southerners in France is very similar 
to the hard roll of the Spanish r, hut this pronunciation should be avoided. 
The double r (rr) should be rolled a little longer and more strongly than 
the single letter, but this should be done moderately, avoiding any undue 
emphasis on the letter. 



32 CORTINA METHOD. 

by a consonant, and when it is doubled, as, for ex* 
ample : 

Seul (sel), alone. Scolaire (skoler'), scholastic, 

Penser (po^ay'), to think. Presque (presk e ), almost. 

Baisser 20 (bes-say'), to lower. Poisson 21 (pwas-s6 n/ ),^sA. 

In the prefix trans, followed by a vowel, it forms 
exception to this rule, as in : 

Transiger (tro n zee-zhay / ), to transact. 
Transaction (tro n zak-si6 n/ ), transaction; 

it then takes the sound which we explained on page 10, 
No. 22, and which we represented by a z. 

Single it also takes the sound of z when situated be- 
tween two vowels, 20 21 22 or when it is the final letter of a 
word which immediately precedes one beginning with a 
vowel. In the latter case it forms what is called a liaison 
(see page 10, note 11), e. g. : 

Oser (6-zay'), to dare. Vision (vee-zi6 n/ ), vision. 

Us ont des amis (eel-z6 n/ day-zamee'), they have friends: 

Final s is silent except in the following words, in which 
it is pronounced as in English : 

As (as), ace. Atlas (atlas 7 ), atlas. 

Bis (bees), bis. 23 Cens (so n s), census. 

Chorus (korws'), chorus. Fils (fees), son. 

Gratis (gra-tees'), gratis. Helas ! (^ay-las'), alas! 

Iris (ee-rees r ), iris. Jadis (zha-dees'), formerly. 

20. Note the difference between the sound of the ss in this word, and that 
of s in baiser (be-zay'), to kiss. 

21. Note the difference between the sound of 55 in this word and s in poison 
(pwa-z6 n, )> poison. 

22. Compound words such as entresol (o n tr e -sol / ), monosyllabe (m6n6see= 
labO, parasol (pa-ra-sol'), etc., are exceptions to the rule, the s being pro- 
nounced in the same manner as in the words they were derived from. 

23. Numero dis bis (nwmayro dees bees), number 10 bis. Bis ! Bis ! (bees, 
bees), encore ! encore ! 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 33 

Lis 2 * (lees), lily. Mai's (ma-ees'), maize. 25 

Mars (mars), March. Mceurs (mers), customs. 

Ours (oors), bear. [noceros. Rebus (ray-fcms 7 ), conundrum. 
Rhinoceros (reenosayros'), rhi~ Tous' 26 (toos), all. 
Vis (vees), screw. 

Note. — In the word Christ both the s and the t are 
pronounced, but neither of them is sounded in the com- 
pound word Jesus-Christ (zhay-zw-kree'), Jesus Christ. 

The combination sc, followed by either e or i, is pro- 
nounced as s ; e. g. : 
Scene (sen), scene. Science (sio n s / ), science. 

T, t (tay). 

Is generally pronounced as in English. 

At the end of a word, however, it is silent and modi- 
fies the sound of the vowel which precedes it, making it 
more open. 

The following words are exceptions to this rule : 

Abrupt (abrupt 7 ), abrupt. Christ (kreest), Christ. 

Chut (stmt), silence! Deficit (day-fee-seet / ), deficit. 

Dot (dot), dowry. Est (est), East. 

Gratuit (gra-tw-eet') , gratis. Granit (gra-neet'), ^mm'fe. 

Lest (lest), ballast. Heurt (Aert), shock. 

Net (net),ne^. Indult (& Q duW), privilege. 

Rapt (rapt), theft. Mat (mat), unpolished. 

Transit (tro n zeet / ), transit. Ouest (ooest / ), west. 

Brut (brwt), raw [material). Tost (tost), toast. 

WV But (but), object {purpose). Subit (swbeet / ), sudden. vV& 

As well as almost all words ending in ct : 
Tact (takt), tact. Correct (kor-rekt 7 ), correct. 

24. The s is mute in the compound word fleur de lis (fle r de lee'). 

25. See note 14, page 20. 

26. When not in connection with a noun, as in : Je les ai tous (zhe l&-z§ 
toos), I have them all, but not in fai tous les livres (zh6 too le lee'-vr e ), I have 
all the books. 



34: CORTINA METHOD. 

In the word sept (set), seven, and huit (/meet'), eight, 
the t is silent before a noun or adjective beginning with 
a consonant, as in : 27 
Dans huit (sept) jours (do n huee' (se) zhoor), in eight (seven) days. 

In the word vingt (va n ) it is always mute, except in 
the cardinal numbers from 21 to 29 inclusive, and before 
a noun or adjective beginning with a vowel or silent h, 
vingt hommes (va n -toni'), twenty men, for instance. 

It has the sound of s in the terminations tion, tial, 
tiel and tieux (of which the English equivalents are 
tion, tial and tious), as well as in some words ending 
in tie, 38 e. g. : 

Situation (see-twasio n/ ), situation, 
Factieux (fak-sie / ) ? factious. 
Essentiel (ay-so n siel'), essential. 
Prophetie (pro-fay-see 7 ), prophecy, 
Democratie (day-mo-kra-see'), democracy, 

and in verbs ending in tier ; e. g. : 

Balbutier (bal-bw-siay'), to stammer, 
Initier (ee-nee-siay'), to initiate. 

V, V (vay). 

This letter is pronounced exactly as in English. Some- 
times it gives its sound to /(see page 23). 

X, x (eeks). 

1. Generally has the same sound as in English : 
Sexe (seks), sex. Axe (aks), axis. 

When it is the final letter of a word it is silent. This 
rule does not apply, however, to words derived from 

27. See page 10, note 11. 

28. The English termination corresponding to the French tie is cy as in 
the examples of the text, prophecy, democracy. 



SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 35 

the Latin and Greek which are used in their original 
form: 

Index (a n dfeks / ), index. Phenix (fay-neeks 7 ) , phoenix. 

Prefix (pray-feeks'), prefix. Onyx (6-neeks'), onyx. 

2. Being the initial letter of a word it is pronounced 
like a z. The same remark applies to it in the syllable 
ex, followed by an h; e. g. : 

Xavier (za-viay'), Xavier. Exemple (eg-zo n/ pl e ) , example. 

Examen (eg-za-ma n/ ) , examination. 
Exhorter (eg-zor-tay'), to exhort. 

Note. — Initial ex, followed by a c, takes the sound 
of a hard c; e. g.: 
Exces (fek-se'), excess. Exciter (fek-seetay 7 ), to excite. 

3. It has the sound of ss in the names of several cities 
and countries, such as Bruxelles (br«-sel e ')> Brussels, 
Cadix (ka-dees'), Cadiz, and in the words soixante 
(swa-so n/ t e ), sixty, with its derivatives, as well as in six 29 
(sees), six, and dix 29 (dees), ten. 

4. It takes the sound of the French z in words derived 
from deux (de), hco, from dix and from six ; e. g. : 
Deuxieme (de-ziem/), second. Sixieme (see-ziem'), sixth, 

and whenever it is the final letter of one word preceding 
another which begins with a vowel or so-called silent h : 

Deux enfants (de-zo n fo n/ ), two children. 
Dix hommes (dee-zom/), ten men. 

Z, z (zed). 30 

Whenever final this letter is mute, unless it be fol- 
lowed by a word beginning with a vowel or a silent h, 

29. The letter x becomes mute in these words when they are followed by 
another beginning with a consonant, six {dix) livres (see (dee) lee'-vr* 5 ), for in- 
stance. 30. See page 17, note 7. 



36 CORTINA METHOD. 

in which case, as in most others, it has the same sound as 
in English. Examples : 

Assez 31 (asay'), enough. Nez 31 (nay), nose. 

Chez 32 un ami (shay-zeMia-mee'), at a friend) s house. 

Exception. — In proper nouns ending in z it has the 
sound of es-y e. g.: 

Gonzalez (go n za-les / ), Gonzalez. 
Jimenez (zhee-may-nes'), Jimenez. 



ACCENTS ET SIGNES ORTHOGBAPHiaUES. 1 

The accents in French are : the acute accent (V } accent 
aigu 2 ) ('), the grave accent (V accent grave*) ( y ) and the 
circumflex accent (V accent circonflexe*) ( A ). 

The orthographical signs are : The apostrophe (V apos- 
trophe*) ( ' ), the cedilla (la cedille 6 ) (g), the diaeresis (le 
trema 1 ) ( * * ) and the hyphen, which is used to unite words 
as in English (le trait W union 8 ) (-). 

ACCENTS. 

The accent, properly so called, or tonic accent, given 
to any one syllable in a word, must not be mistaken for 
the orthographical accents which are used in French to 
distinguish the various intonations given to vowels. 

These accents are also used sometimes to distinguish 
words which have different meanings, although they may 
be spelled in the same manner. The tonic accent proper 

31. Note that the z is mute and the sound of the e closed. 

32. Note that the z is not mute in this case on account of its forming a 
liaison with the following vowel. 

1. Ak-son-zay seeny e -zortografee'k«, accents and orthographical signs. 

2. Lakso n/ -taygM', the acute accent. 3. Lakso ' gra'v e , the grave accent. 

4. Lakso n/ seerco n flex', the circumflex accent. 

5. Lapostrof , the apostrophe. 6. La saydee'ly 6 , the cedilla. 
7. Le trayma', the diarresis. 8. Le tre dunid n ', the hyphen. 



ACCENTS AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 37 

does not exist in French, nor, as a matter of fact, is it 
found necessary. There is admittedly no variation in the 
quantity of the syllables and the tonic accent, if allowed 
at all, is generally on the last vowel of the word, pro- 
vided it be not an e mute, in which case the accent is 
on the penultimate vowel. 

V Accent Aigu. 2 

Is used only on the e, and gives it a short, acute sound, 
as indicated by its name. The use of this accent cannot 
be defined by any particular rule except in a few excep- 
tional cases. 

1. It is used generally as a substitute for the s of obso- 
lete words. 

JSpee (aypay'), sword, instead of espee, obsolete. 
Nicole (ay col 7 ), school, instead of escole, obsolete. 

2. It is also used on the penultimate e of words ending 
in ee whenever the last or second e is mute, as in : 

Annee (anay / ),2/ea/'. Journee (zhoornay'), day. 

3. "Words ending in te generally have this accent on 
the final e; these are usually words corresponding in the 
French to those of the English language ending in ty: 

Fidelite (feedaylitay^yzeMz^. Charite (shareetay 7 ), charity. 

4. It is used in all words where e immediately precedes 
a syllable beginning with either of the vowels a, i, o or u: 

Ocean (6sayo n/ ), ocean. Theorie (tayoree 7 ), theory. 

5. Also in the final syllable of the first person singu- 
lar, indicative present of verbs of the first conjugation in 
the interrogative form : 

Parle-je ? (parl^-zh 6 ), do I speak? 
Mange-je ? (mo a zhe / -zh e ), do I eat? 



38 CORTINA METHOD. 

6. As well as in the past participle of verbs of the 
same conjugation : 

Danse (dc^say'), danced. Blesse (blays-say'), wounded. 

7. As a general rule this accent is always found on the 
initial e of words which correspond in the French to 
Anglicized words of Latin derivation beginning with est, 
st or equf e. g. : 

JStat (ayta'), state. l3tabli (aytablee'), established. 

Egalite (aygaleetay'), equality. 
Equivalent (ay-kee-va-lo n/ ), equivalent. 

L' Accent Grave. 3 

Is applied to the vowels a, e and u to give them a 
prolonged open sound. 

1. It is used on the a and u in order to make the dis- 
tinction between words which are spelled in the same way 
though having widely different meanings, as for instance : 

A (a), {he) has; a (a), to or at. Qa (sa), that; ca (sa), here. 
La (la), the (fern.); la (la), there. Ou (oo), or; ou (oo), where. 

1. Also in the following : 

Qaetla(saayla), here and there. Deca (desa'), this side of. 

Deja (dayzha'), a^eac^. Hola! (h6W),hello! Voila(vwala'),^ere/ 

3. It is used on the e of a penultimate syllable, when- 
ever immediately followed by a final combination of let- 
ters the first of which is a consonant and the second a 
silent e, as in : 

Pere (per), father. Frere (frer), brother. 

Arbalete (arbale't e ), crossbow. 

9. English words of Latin derivation beginning with est, st and equ, or 
ending in ty,&re generally to be found in French with corresponding forms 
beginning in &t, e~qu or ending in U; this, however, cannot be considered as 
a well established rule ; it can only be said to be of habitual occurrence. 



ACCENTS AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 39 

4. Also in adverbs and substantives the singular of 
which ends in es; e. g.: 
Progres (progre'), progress. Apres (apre'), after. 

L' Accent Circonflexe. 4 
This accent is always applied whenever a prolonged opeD 
and marked sound is to be given to a vowel. It is used : 

1. As a substitute for a letter which may have been 
eliminated from a form of the word now obsolete, as in : 

Vepres (v£pr e ), vespers, instead of vespres, obsolete. 
Tete (t£t e ), head, instead of teste, obsolete. 
Pate (patay'), pasty, instead of paste, obsolete. 

2. Also to determine the difference of meaning be- 
tween two words spelled in the same way : 

Du {du), of the (masc); du (dit), owed. 
Mur (mwr), wall; mur (mwr), ripe. 
Sur (swr), upon; sur (swr), sure. 

3. And lastly, in the first and second persons plural 
of the preterit of all verbs and in the third person singu- 
lar of the imperfect tense in the subjunctive mood : 

Nous finimes (noo feeneem'), we finished. 
Vous finites (voo feeneet'), you finished. 
Qu'il parlat (keel parW), that he should speak. 

SIGNES OETHOGEAPHIQUES. 
De L' Apostrophe. 5 
This accent is used as a substitute for either of the 
vowels a, e or i, and to prevent their union when any 
one of them is followed by the other. 

A, for instance, is subject to elision in the article la 
preceding a vowel or silent h: w 

L'ame (lam e ), the soul, and not la ame. 
I/histoire (leestwar / ), history, and not la histoire. 

10. See page 9, note 10. 



40 CORTINA METHOD. 

E is subject to the same rule : 

1. When preceding a vowel or silent h in the words 
le, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne and que, provided, how- 
ever, that in the case of je, ce, le, la, these words do not 
occur immediately after a verb; e. g.: 

C'est (se), it is, and not ce est. 

J'aime (zhem e ), Hove, and not je aime. 

I/homme (lorn), man, and not le homme. 

Est-ce encore vous P (es o n kor' voo), is that you again ? 

2. Whenever the words lorsque (lorsk e ), when, puis- 
que (pwees'k 6 ), since, or quoique (kwak e ), although, 
are immediately followed by il, elle, on, un, une ; e. g. : 

Lorsqu'il parle (lors-keel' parl e ), when he speaks. 
Quoiqu'on dise (kwa-k6 n/ deez'), although it may be said. 

3. Also in the words entre (o n tr e ), between, and 
presque (presk 6 ), almost, whenever they enter into the 
formation of a compound word ; e. g. : 

Entr'acte (o n -trak't e ), between acts. 
Presqu'ile (pres-keel') , peninsula. 

4. In the word quelque when used in connection with 
un, une or autre : 

Quelqu'un Qz&ylke*'), somebody. 
Q,uelqu'autre (kayl-kd'tr 3 ), some other person. 

5. Also in the word grande when combined with 
various feminine words in their compounds ; e. g. : 

Grand'mere (gro n -mer / ), grandmother. 
Grand'peur (grouper 7 ), great fear. 
Grand'faim (gro n -fa n/ ), great appetite. 

I is suppressed in the conjunction si followed by the 
pronouns il and ils, an apostrophe being substituted : 

S'il vient (seel via n/ ), if he comes. 
S'ils partent (seel part e ), if they go. 



ACCENTS AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 41 

La Cedille (^). 6 

Is always used under the letter c when required to 
give it the sound of s before the vowels a, o and u : n 

Facade (fasad 7 ), face (of a building). Legon (leso n/ ), lesson. 

Le Trema. 7 

Is used, as in English, to give a distinct sound to a 
letter which would not have it according to ordinary 
rules ; e. g. : 

Naif (naeef), innocent, instead of naif (nayf). 
Saiil (said 7 ), Saul, instead of Saul (s61). 
Hair (Meer'), to hate. 

Le Trait d> Union. 8 

1. Is placed between the verb and the pronoun when 
used in the interrogative form : 

Parlerons-nous ? (parlero n/ -noo), shall we speak f 
Donnez-moi (donay-mwa'), give me. 
Apportez-lui (aportay-lwee'), bring to him. 

Note. — If there are two pronouns after the verb, a 
hyphen is used between each of them, as in : 

Laissez-le-moi (lessay-le-mwa/), leave it to me. 
Donnez-les-leur (donay-le-ler'), give them to them. 
Passez-la-lui (pasayMa-lwee'), pass it (fern.) to him. 

2. It is used in collective compound words ; e. g. : 

C'est-a-dire (say-ta-deer'), that is to say. 
Tete-a-tete (te-ta-tet') 7 tSte-d-tete. 
Sur-le-champ (s?;r-le-sho n/ ), on the instant. 

11. The use of the cedilla under the c is not established by a standing- 
rule; it is generally indicated by the spelling of the original Latin word 
from which the French one is derived. X, c soft and ct in the Latin word 
often indicate the use of the cedilla in the French derivative. 



42 CORTINA METHOD. 

3. Also before and after a euphonic t; e. g.: 
Parle-t-il? (parl-teel e/ ), does he speak f 
Va-t-elle ? (va-tel'), does she go f 

5. It is always used before the word meme (m£m e ), 
self, preceded by a personal pronoun, as in : 
Moi-meme (mwa-mSm'), myself. Lui-meme (hzee-mSm'), himself* 

6. With the words ci (see), here, and la (la), there, 
wlienever they are placed after a noun or a pronoun or 

before a participle ; e. g. : 

Celui-ci (selwee-soe'), this one. Celui-la (selwee-la'), that one. 
Ci-joint (see-zhwa n/ ), herewith. Ci-inclus (see-aPklu') , inclosed. 

7. And lastly with the cardinal numbers in their com- 
pound forms : 

Dix-sept (dees-set'), 17. Trente-cinq (tro n t-sa n k / ), 35. 

CONSONNES DOUBLES. 12 

The following are the consonants which are usually 
doubled in French and pronounced as if they were 
single : b, c, d, f, g, 1, m, n, p, s, t ; the double c (cc) 
and double g (gg) form' exceptions to this rule when 
followed by e ori; also the double 1 (11) when preceded 
by i, and the r and s ; e. g.*: 

Accent (ak-so n/ ), accent. . Famille (famee'ly^/owni^. 

Agglomerer (ag-glomayray 7 ) , to agglomerate. 
Nous verrons (noo vayro n/ ), we will see. 

DIPHTONGTJES. 13 

When two vowels together form part of, or in them- 
selves constitute a syllable, they are given the name of 
diphthong; these diphthongs, like the vowels, are di- 
vided into the simple, the compound and the nasal. 

12. K6 n son' doo'bl e , double consonants. 13. Deefto n 'gu e , diphthongs* 



DIPHTHONGS. 43 

The simple diphthongs are: ia, ie, io, oe, ua, ue, 
Ui; e. g.: 

ia in diable (deea'bP), devil. 

ie in piece (peees 7 ) , pfeee. 

10 in violer (violay'), to violate. 

oe in moelle (moel e/ ), marrow. 

ua in suave (swa'v 6 ), suave. 

ue in continue (co n teenw / ), {he) continues. 

ui in cuivre (ki<ee / vr e ) , copper. 

DlPHTONGUES COMPOSEES. 

Are those in which a simple vowel is pronounced in 
connection with a compound one which follows it imme- 
diately/* as in: 

iai (i-e) in niais (nie 7 ), silly. 

iau (i-6) in miauler (meeOlay 7 ), to miowl. 

oue (oo-e) in fouet (fwe'), a whip. 

oui (oo-ee) in Louis (looee 7 ), Louis. 

ieu (i-e) en monsieur (mesie'), sir. 

DlPHTONGrUES EASALES. 15 

Are those formed by the simple or the compound 
diphthongs followed by m or n : 

ien in orient (orio n/ ), orient. 
ion in lion (lio 117 ), lion. 
oin in loin (lwa n/ ),/ar. 
ouen in Rouen (rwo n/ ), Rouen. 

LIAISON DES MOTS. 16 

Final mute consonants, when followed by a word be- 
ginning with a vowel or silent h, are carried forward and 
pronounced at the beginning of this word when its mean- 

14. See page 20 with reference to compound vowels. There are no triph- 
thongs' in French, because whenever three vowels occur together two of 
them always indicate a definite and separate sound which is pronounced 
by itself. Note the examples in the text. 

15. See "Nasal Sounds," page 21. 16. Leeezo 1 *' d£ m6, binding of words. 



44 CORTINA METHOD. 

ing is intimately connected with that of the preceding 
one in the sentence. This is known as the liaison in 
French. When carried forward according to this rule 
the s and x are pronounced as z, d changes into t, / into 
v and c and g into k ; exs. : 

Mes amis (mfe-zamee'), my friends. 
Aux armes ! (6-zarm'), to arms ! 
Grand homme (gro^tom 7 ), great man 
Avec elle (avay-k&F), with her. 
Rang eleve (ro n -kaylevay / ), high rank, 

DIVISION DES SYLLABES. 17 

Words are divided into syllables according to the fol- 
lowing rules : 

Eule 1. Syllables should, as much as possible, begin 
with a consonant, as in : 

Mo-ra-li-te. A-ma-bi-li-te. 

2. If there are two consonants together they should be 
divided between the syllables, as in : 

Hom-me (om e ). Vil-le (veel). En-ten-du (o n -to n -dw / ). 

3. When 1 or r are the second of two consonants com- 
bined, or if the combination be gn, both are carried for- 
ward to the beginning of the next syllable : 

12-gli-se (aygleez'). No-tre (n6 r tr e ) Vi-gne (vee / ny e ).- 

4. H preceded by another consonant is always pro- 
nounced in connection with the vowel immediately fol* 
lowing it. This occurs in : 

De-shon-neur (day-zo-ner'). I-nhu-main (eenwma n/ ). 

5. The consonant x is always pronounced in connect 
tion with the vowel which precedes it, as in : 

Ex-il (feg-zeel'), exile. 
17. Dee-vee-zi6 n ' dS sil-l&'b e , division of syllables. 



PUNCTUATION. 45 

PONCTT7ATION. 18 

The signs used for punctuation are the same in French 
as those used in English, as follows : 

La virgule (la veergwl e/ ) (,), the comma. 

Le point-virgule (le pwa n/ -veergtd e/ ) (;), the semicolon. 

Les deux points (lay de pwa n/ ) ( : ), the colon. 

Le point (le pwa n/ ) (. ), the period. 

Les points de suspension (de swspo n sio n/ ) ( ), suspensive 

points. 
Le point d'interrogation (da D tayrogasi6 n/ ) (?),the interrogation 

point. 
Le point declamation (dayxclamasi6 n/ ) (!), the exclamation 

point. 
Les guillemets (lay geey^may') (" "), quotation marks. 
La parenthese (la paro n tez e/ ) ( ( ) ), parenthesis. 
Le tiret 19 (teere') (— ), the dash. 

18. P6 n ktuasi6 n/ , punctuation. 

19. It is used in the dialogue to point out the change of speaker, thus re- 
placing the expressions : saps-he, he answers, etc.; also used by the mod- 
ern writers instead of the parenthesis, sometimes even in place of the 
comma. 



46 



CORTINA METHOD. 



PEEMI&RE LEgOK 1 

Vocabulaire pour cette Legon. 2 



Je desire (zhe dayzeer'), . 
Le francais 3 (le fro n se / ), . 
PourquoiP (poorkwa'), • 
Magasins (magaza n/ ), . 
Desirez-vousP 4 (dayzeeray'-voo), . 
Pour (poor); voyager (vwa-ya-zhay'), . 
Parlez-vous ? 4 (parlay '-voo), . 
Non (n6 n ); ne (ne) (verb) pas 5 (pa), 
Voulez-vous?* (voolay'-voo), . 
Etudier (aytadiay') ; partout (partoo'), . 
Oui (wee); vraiment 6 (vremo n/ ), 
Car (kar); est 7 (e), . 



I wish. 

French (language). 

why f 



do you wish f [el. 
to, in order to; to trav- 
do you speak f 
no; not to (verb). 
do you wish f 
to study ; everywhere, 
yes; really, 
because, for ; is. 



Apprendre(apro n/ dr e ) ; lalanguetlakm'g 6 ),^ learn; language. 



Tres bien (tre bia n/ ); aussi (osee'), . 
Mais (me); a present (a prayzo n/ ), . 
Surtout (swrtoo'); raison (rez6 n/ ), . 
Entier (o n tiay / ) ; avec nous (avek' noo) 
Merci (mersee / ); quand (ko n ), . 
Par (par); vapeur (vaper'), 
Alors (alor'); au revoir 8 (6 revwHr'), 



very well; also, 
but; noiv, at present, 
especially ; reason, 
entire ; with us. 
thanks; when, 
by; steamer, 
well then; good-by. 



1. Premier' leso n ', first lesson. Follow the "Directions," and see page 13, 
note 2. 2. Vdkabwler' poor set leso n ', vocabulary for this lesson. 

o. Names of languages may or not be preceded by the definite article. 

4. Vous, you, is the pronoun of the second person plural ; it is used only 
to address people in terms of formality. The second person singular, tu 
(thou), is used between people who are on intimate terms. In French the 
interrogative form of the verb is obtained by placing the pronoun imme- 
diately after the verb and connecting the two with a hyphen (see page. 41, 
No. 1). Ez is the characteristic termination of the second person plural. 

5. Non is a simple adverb of negation, always used by itself, whereas 
ne pas is a compound of adverbs, the former of which always precedes the 
verb and announces the negation, while the second follows immediately 
after it and completes the negation announced by ne. 

6. The French termination ment corresponds to the English ly : vrai (vre), 
true ; vraiment (vremo n '), truly. 

7. Third person singular of the indicative present in the verb Ure (etr*), to be. 

8. The prefix re in revoir indicates reiteration, as in retire (releer'), to read 
again ; refaire (refer'), to do again, derived from lire, to read, and /aire, to do. 



FIRST LESSON. 47 

La Famille. 9 

L'homme 10 (lorn), the man. La 10 femme (fam), the woman. 

Le 10 pere (le per), the father. La 10 mere (la mer), £Ae mother. 

Les 10 parents (paro n/ ), £/ie ^a- Les 10 parents (le paro m/ ), £A€ 

rents. relations. 

Le fils (le fees), the son. Lafille (la fee / j e ) 1 the daughter. 

Le frere (le frer), £Ae brother. La soeur (la ser), ^e sister. 

Un 11 enfant (e n -no n fo Q/ ), a cMd Une 11 enfant («-no n fo n/ ), a 

(masc). cMd (fern.), [y*), a girl. 

Un garcon (e n ga r so n/ ), a boy. Une jeune fille (un e zhe / n e fee'- 

Le mari (maree 7 ), the husband. La femme (la fam), the wife. 

L'epoux 10 (laypoo 7 ), the spouse L'epouse 10 (laypoc/z e ), the 

(masc). spouse (fern.). 

Nationalites. 12 
L' Anglais 13 u (IVgle'), .... the Englishman. 
L'Americaindusud(lamayreeka n/ dwswd), the South American. 

Les Americains u du nord ( du nor), the North Americans. 

Une Allemande (i<-nalemo n/ d e ), . . a German woman. 
L'Autrichien 15 (16treeshia n/ ), . . . the Austrian. 
Un Francais 13 (e n fro n say / ), . . .a Frenchman. 
L'Espagnol (lespanyoF), .... the Spaniard. 
Une Portugaise 13 (im e porh^gueV) , . a Portuguese woman. 

L'ltalien (leetalia n/ ), the Palian. 

Le Russe 16 (le rws), the Pussian. 

9. L& famee'ye, the family. Pronounce all titles of chapters in French. 

10. Le (le), the, masculine sing, definite article. La (la), the. feminine 
sing, definite article. Les (le), the, plural masculine and feminine of the 
same. When le or la are followed immediately by a word beginning with 
a vowel or silent h, an apostrophe is substituted to the vowels e and a. 

11. Z~n (e n ), a, the masculine singular of the indefinite article. Une (im e ), a, 
the fern. sing, of the indefinite article. 12. Xasionaleetay', nationalities. 

13. Substantives which do not end in e mute are generally masculine, 
and form their feminine by taking an e mute ; e. g.: Anglaise (o n glez e ), En- 
glish woman ; Americaine (amayreeken e ), American woman. 

14. The plural of nouns is generally formed by adding an s to the singu- 
lar; but substantives ending in s, x or z remain invariable; e. g.: les An- 
glais (le-.so I 'gle'\ the English. 

15. Substantives and adjectives ending in ien form their feminine by 
doubling the final consonant and adding e mute; e. g.: Autrichienne (otree- 
shie / n e ), Austrian woman ; Ltalienne (eetalie'n e ), Italian woman. 

16. Masculine nouns ending in e are invariable in the feminine ; e. g.: un 
Russe (e n rus), a Russian man ; xine Russe (un e rus), a Russian woman. 



4:8 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRAN£AIS.i9i7 

1. Je 18 desire 19 apprendre 20 le fra^ais.* 

2. Pourquoi desirez-vous 4 apprendre 20 le frangais ? 

3. Je desire apprendre le fran^ais pour voyager. 19 

4. Parlez-vous 4 franyais, monsieur? 21 * 

5. Non, 5 madame, je ne 5 le 22 parle pas. 5 * 

6 . Voulez 23 - vous P'etudier ? * 

7. Oui, car le francais est 7 la langue universelle. 2 * * 

8. Vraiment! 6 

9. Oui, monsieur. 21 On 25 parle frangais partout: 

dans la bonne 26 societe, dans les bons 14 h6- 
tels, u et dans les principaux 27 magasins. 

♦LITERAL TRANSLATION. 

1. I wish to learn the French (language). 

4. Speak-you French, sir? 

5. No, madam, I not it speak not. 

6. Wish-you it to study ? 

7. Yes, for the French (language) is the tongue universal. 

17. Fro n s6 / . Pr6no n siasi6 n '. Tradwksi6 n '. 

18. The personal pronouns je (zhe), I ; tu (tu), thou ; il (eel), he ; nous (noo), 
we ; vous (voo), you ; ils (eel), they, always precede the verb in the affirma- 
tive and negative forms. In the interrogative form they are placed after it 
and connected with it by a hyphen. 

19. Disire, 1st and 3d pers. sing, indicative present of the verb desirer 
(dayzeeray'), to wish. This verb, as well as voyager (vwayazhay'), to travel ; 
parler (parlay'), to speak ; Uudier (aytwdiay'), to study, belongs to the first 
conjugation, the infinitive of which ends in er. The final r in the termina- 
tion er is mute, see page 17, No. 2, 2d sound. Note that in order to form 
the three first persons singular of the present tense, the r of the termination 
is dropped in the 1st and 3d persons and s substituted to it in the 2d per- 
son. The e's being mute, the pronunciation of all three persons is the 
same ; je desire (zhe dayzeer 7 ), tu desires {tu dayzeer'), il desire (eel dayzeer'). 

20. Apprendre, like the verb prendre (pro n di* e ), to take, from which it is 
derived, belongs to the fourth conjugation, the verbs of which all havo their 



FIRST LESSON. 



49 



PRONONCIATION.i 9 » 

1. Zhe dayzeer' apro n/ dr e le 

fro n say / . 

2. Poorkwadayzeeray'-voo-za- 

pro n/ dr e 

3 poor vwa-yazhay'. 

4. Parlay'-voo fro n say / mesie'. 

5. N6 n , mada'nr 3 , zhe ne le 

par'l e pa. 

6. Voolay'-voo laytwdiay'. 

7. Wee, kar le fro n say / e la 

lo n/ g e tmeevayrse'l 6 . 

8. Vraymo n/ . 

9. Wee mesie / , do n la bo'n e 

sdsiaytay', do n lay bo n - 
zotel, ay do n le pra n seepo / 
magaza n/ . 



TRADUCTION.! *" 

1. I wish to learn the French 

language. 

2. Why do you wish to learn 

the French language f 

3. I wish to learn French in 

order to travel. 

4. Do you speak French, sir f 

5. No, madam, I do not speak 

it. 

6. Do you wish to study itf 

7. Yes, for French is the uni- 

versal language. 

8. Really! 

9. Yes, sir. They speak French 

everywhere : in good soci- 
ety, in the good hotels and 
in the principal stores. 



infinitive ending in re: j'apprends (zhapro n '), tu apprends (tu apro n/ ), il or 
elle apprend (eel, el apro n/ ). Note that the verb loses the termination re, to 
which is substituted an s for the 1st and 2d persons sing. This s, as well as 
the d of the 3d person, is mute, so that the sound of the verb, apro n V is the 
same in all three persons. 

21. Monsieur is composed of mon (m6 n ), my, and sieur (sier), sir. 

22. Le, in the above sentence, is not an article but a pronoun, equivalent 
to it. These pronouns : le (le), him or it; la (la), her, and les (le), them, are 
always placed immediately before the verb. Should the verb begin with a 
vowel, le and la take an apostrophe instead of their respective vowels. 

23. Voulez is the 2d pers. plural of the ind. pres. of the irregular verb vou~ 
loir (voolwarO, to wish. 

24. Fern, of universel (wneeversel'), universal. Adjectives ending in el cor- 
respond to those of same derivation in English ending in al; e.g.: nalurel 
(natwrel'), natural ; mortel (mortel'), mortal. Their fern, is formed by doub- 
ling the last consonant and adding an e mute : nalurelle, mortelle, etc. 

25. On, preceded or followed by a verb, is the French equivalent of the 
words one, they, people, when, used in English as indefinite pronouns. 

26. Adjectives ending in on, like bon (bo n ), good, form their feminine like 
those in el, note 24. 

27. Plural of principal (pra n seepalO, principal. A number of adjectives 
ending in al in French, are identical with those of similar derivation in 
English, as : general, frugal, principal, initial. Their plural is formed by 
changing al into aux for the masculine and into ales for the feminine. 



50 CORTINA METHOD. 

10. Madame votre 28 mere et mademoiselle votre 

sceur parlent 29 -elles 4 f rangais ? * 

11. Oui, madame ; elles le 22 parlent tres bien. 

12. Mon 28 pere aussi le parle parfaitement. 6 

13. Nous desirons 29 voyager en Europe, surtout en 

France. 

14. Ne desirez-vous pas voir l'ltalie 30 et l'Espagne ? 30 

15. Oui, mais surtout nous desirons 29 aller 31 a Paris. 

16. Vous avez 32 raison ; Paris est 7 la capitale du 33 

monde entier.* 

17. Voulez-vous voyager avec nous? 

18. Merci, vous 6tes bien 34 aimable; quand 35 par- 

tez 36 -vous ? 

19. La semaine prochaine, par le vapeur fran§ais. 

20. Alors, bon voyage ! Aurevoir! 8 * 



10. Madam your mother and miss your sister, speak-they French? 
16. You have reason ; Paris is the capital of the world entire. 
20. Then, good voyage ! To-the again-see ! 

28. The possessive adjectives in French are: masc. sing., mon (m6 n ), my; 
ton (to n ), thy; son (so n ), his; notre (notr e ), our; votre (v6tre), your; leur (ler), 
their. Fern, sing.: ma (ma), ta (ta.), sa (sa). Plural, masc. and fem.: mes 
(me), tes (te), ses (se), nos (no), vos (v6), leurs (ler). The final consonants of 
these pronouns, though mute when the pronoun stands alone or before a 
word beginning with a consonant, are pronounced when immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel or silent h: vos amis (vo-zamee'), your friends. 

29. Third person plural ind. pres. of parler. To form this plural add to 
the root of the verb, pari, the syllables ons, ez, ent; e. g.: parlons (parlo n '), 
parlez (parlay'), parlent (pari). See page 16, Note, No. 4. Ind. pres. inter- 
rogative form : parU-je f (when the 1st pers. sing, ends in e mute, the latter 
takes the acute accent for the sake of euphony) (parle'zh e ), parles-tu f (pari- 



FIRST LESSON. 



51 



10. Mada'm vo'tr 6 mer ay ma- 
d'mwazel' vo'tr* 5 ser, parl- 
tel' fro n say / . 

11. Wee mada'm* ; el le par'P 
tre bia n/ . 

12. M6 n per 6see / le par'l e par- 
fetmo n/ . 

13. Noodayzeer6 n vwayazhay / 
o n -nerop / , swrtoo / -to u frons. 

14. Ne dayzeeray / -voo pa vwar 
leetalee' ay lespa / ny e . 

15. Wee, me swr-too' noo day- 
zeero n/ -zalay / -ra paree'. 

16. Voo-zavay / rezo n/ ; paree'e 
la kapeetal' du mo n -do n - 
tiay'. 

17. Voolay'-voo vwaya^hay'- 
ravek/ noo. 

18. Mersee / ,voo-ze / t e bia n/ -nay- 
ma'br 3 ; ko n partay'-voo? 

19. La seme 7 !! 6 pr6she'n e , par 
le vaper' fro n say / . 

20. Alor / , b6 n vwayazh e . O re- 
vwar 7 . 



10. Your mother and your 
sister, do they speak 
French 9 

11. Yes, madam; they speak 
it very well. 

12. My father also speaks it 
perfectly. 

13. We wish to travel in Eu- 
rope, especially in France. 

14. Do you not wish to see Italy 
and Spain f 

15. Yes, but we particularly 
wish to go to Paris. 

16. You are right; Paris is 
the capital of the whole 
world. 

17. Do you wish to travel with 
usf 

18. Thanks; you are very kind. 
When do you start ? 

19. Next week, by the French 
steamer. 

20. Well, a pleasant journey to 
you ! Au revoir ! 



W), parle-l-il f (the t inserted between the verb and pronoun is euphonic 
and intended to do away with an unpleasant hiatus) (parl-teel'), par Ions- 
nousf (parlo n '-noo), parlez-vous f (parlay'-voo), parlenl-ilsf (parl-teel'). 

30. Proper names of countries take the definite article. 

31. See page 27 for the pronunciation of 11. Aller is an irregular verb. 

■ 32. Second pers. pi. ind. pres. of the verb avoir, to have: fai (zhe), tu as (tu a), 
<il a (eel a), nous avons (noo-zavo n '), vous avez (voo-zavay'), Us ont (eel-zo n ). 

33. The def. article is declined as follows : masc. sing.: le (le), the ; du (du), 
of the ; au (6), to the. Fern, sing.: la, de la, d la. The vowels in these articles 
are subject to elision before wprds beginning with a vowel or h mute. 

34. The adverb Men (bia n/ ) is often used as a substitute for tres (tre), very, 
in order to qualify adjectives. 

35. See page 30, letter Q. 

36. Partez is the 2d pers. plural ind. pres. of the irregular verb partir (par- 
teer'), to leave, to start. Je pars, tu pars, il part, nous partons, vous partez, 
its parlent (par, par, par, parto n ', partay', par't 6 . 



52 CORTINA METHOD. 

DETJXlfcME LEgON. 1 

JSFouveau Vocabulaire 2 pour cette Legon. 

lie jour (le zhoor) ; comment (komo n/ ), the day; how. 

Le matin (mata n/ ); demain (dema n/ ), the morning; to-morrow. 

Apres (apre'); Suisse (sweeps), . . after; Switzerland. 

Y 3 (ee); en* (o n ); mois (mwa 7 ), . . there,therein; in; month. 

Plaisir (plezeer'); ainsi (a n see'), • pleasure; so, so then. 

L'apres-midi (lapre / -meedee / ), . . the afternoon. 

Charmant (sharmo n/ ), .... charming, delightful. 

C'est 5 entendu 6 (se-to n to n dw / ), . . it is understood, agreed. 

Voila 7 (vwala'); plutot 8 (pltttC 7 ), . there is; rather. 

Maintenant (ma n t'no n/ ); sans (so n ), . now ; without. 

A present (a prayso n/ ), . . . at present, now. 

Done 9 (d6 n ); comment done! (komo n/ ), then, therefore ; certain- 
Delicieux 10 (dayleesie / ) ; bassin(basa n/ ), cteZzciows/ basin. \ly. 

Si (see); si tot (to); theatre (taya / tr e ), if; so soon; theater. 

1. DeziS'm e les6 n ', second lesson. 2. Noov6' vdkabwler, new vocabulary. 

3. Y, when used as an adverb or a pronoun, precedes the verb. It is placed 
immediately after it when the verb is in the imperative mood. In the for- 
mer case it is equivalent to the English here, there, therein, and always 
refers to some place or position previously mentioned ; e. g.: fy vais dans 
une minute (zhee ve doa-zn'ne minu't e ), I'll be there in a minute; allez-y 
(alay'-zee'), go there. When used as a pronoun it is generally the object of 
the sentence, as in : fypense (zhee po n s), I am thinking of it. 

4. En is governed by the same rules as y with reference to its position in 
the sentence, whether it be used as at pronoun or as an adverb. It is equiv- 
alent to the English thereof, therefrom; e. g.: achetez~en (ash'tay'-zo n '), buy 
some of it ; fen viens (zhon-via 11 ')-. I come from there. 5. See page 40, No. 1. 

6. Past part, of entendre (o n to n 'dr«), to hear, a verb which, like all others 
ending in re, belongs to the 4th conjugation, of which the past part, ends in u. 

7. Contraction of vois (vwa) see, Id (la) there. 

8. Contraction of plus (plw), more, and tdt (td), soon. Observe that these 
words have two widely different meanings according to the way in which 
they are used : pluldt written as a single word implying a preference, while 
plus tdt, in two separate words, expresses merely precedence of time : plut6t 
la mort (plwt6' la mor), rather death ; Paul est arrive plus tdt (pol e>tarreevay' 
plw t60, Paul arrived sooner. 

9. Done is very much used in French, especially after an exclamatory 
adverb or a verb in the imperative mood, in order to emphasize their 
meaning. 

10. The termination eux (e) corresponds in French to the English ous. 



SECOND LESSON. 



53 



La Table et les Bepas. 11 
Manger, boire (iuo n zhay / , bwar'), . to eat, to drink. 



Le menu (le menu 7 ), . 

Le dejeuner, 12 dejeuner (dayzhenay') 

Le diner, 12 diner (deenay'), 

Le souper, 12 souper (soopay'), . 



the bill of fare, 
breakfast, to breakfast, 
the dinner, to dine, 
the supper, to sup. 



TJnplat,uneassiette 13 (e I1 pia,w-nasie / t e ), a dish, a plate. 



TJn convert (e n koovayr'), . 

La nappe, 14 (na'p e ), .... 

La serviette (sayrvie / t e ), 

TJne cuiller, 15 (kweeyer'), . 

Le couteau (kooto 7 ), .... 

Lafourchette 13 (foorshe't e ), 

TJne bouteille (boote'y 6 ), 

Le verre, un petit verre (p'tee / vayr), 



a cover. 

the tablecloth, 

the napkin. 

a spoon. 

the knife. 

the fork. 

a bottle. 

the glass, a small glass. 



TJne tasse de cafe, the (tas de kafay / ,tay) , a cup of coffee, tea. 
Le lait, 14 vin (le, va n ), . . . . the milk, wine. 
L'eau glacee, frappee 16 (16 frapay 7 )? . the iced water. 
La soupe, le potage (soop, poWzlr 3 ) , the soup. 
La viande (vio n/ d e ), .... the meat. 
Lemouton (moot6 n/ ), .... the mutton. 
Les legumes (le laygw / m e ), . . . the vegetables. 
TJne cotelette 13 de veau (kot'le't e de v6), a veal chop. 



La salade (sala'd 6 ), . 
Dujambon (du zho n b6 n/ ), . 
TJne omelette (om'le 7 ^), 
(Eufs a la coque (e a la ko'k e ), . 
Les fruits (frwee 7 ), .... 
TJne peche, 14 le raisin 14 (pG'sh 6 , reza n/ ), 
TJn petit gateau (p'tee' gat6 / ), . 
La glace, une 14 glace (glas e ), 



the salad. 

some ham. 

an omelet. 

boiled eggs. > 

the fruits. 

a peach, the grapes. 

a small cake, a tart. 

the ice, an ice cream. 



11. La ta'bl e ay le repa', the table and the meals. 

12. Observe that names of meals are masculine. 

13. The suffix ette is often used to form diminutives, as in f our che, four- 
chetle (hay fork, little fork), lance, lancette (lance, lancet), and corresponds 
to the English diminutive suffix et or let. 

14. Note the gender. 15. See page 26, 11. 

16. Frappee (cooled with ice) is the feminine of frappe, according to the 
general rule for the formation of the feminine by adding an e mute to the 
masculine singular. 



54 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. Bonjour, ma chere, 17 comment allez-vous? 18 

2. Tres bien, merci, et vous ? Comment vous por- 

tez-vous 18 done 9 ce matin ? 

3. Pas trop bien. Je partirai 19 , demain pour la 

Suisse, et j'y 3 resterai 19 un mois.f 

4. Que diriez 20 -vous si je vous gardais 21 a dejeuner? 

5. J' 22 accepterais 20 avec plaisir, si vous vouliez 21 pas- 

ser l'apres-midi avec moi demain. 

6. Vous &tes 23 charmante. 24 Eh bien, e'est 5 entendu. , 

7. Ainsi nous causerons 19 un peu, et nous nous 

amuserons. 25 

8. Desireriez 20 -vous du 26 potage, une cotelette avec 

de la salade, ou bien des ceuf s & la coque ? * 

♦LITERAL TRANSLATION. 

3. Not too well for the Switzerland, and I there will stay 

8 a chop with of the salad, or well some eggs to the shell? 

17. ChZre is the feminine of cher, dear. See note 16. 

18. Comment allez-vous f {alter, to go, irreg. verb), literally, how go you f 
and comment vous portez^vous f lit., how yourself carry you f are the two most 
ordinary forms of greeting in French. 

19. The terminations ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont (&, a', a', 6 n ', ay', 6 n '), added to the 
infinitive, form the future of all regular verbs. 

20. The terminations ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient (e 7 , e', 6', io n ', iay', e 7 ), added 
to the infinitive, form the conditional present. 

21. Ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient, when added to the root of the present part., 
form the indie, imperf. of all the regular conjugations. These terminations 
are the same as those of the conditional present in the preceding note ; e. g.: 
gardais, gardais, gardait, gardions, gardiez, gardaient, and garder-ais, gar- 
der-ais, garder-ail, garder-ions, garder-iez, garder-aient. 

22. See page 40, No. 1. 



SECOND LESSON. 



55 



PRONONCIATION. 

1. B6 n zhoor / ma sher e , komo n/ - 

talay / -voo ? 

2. Tre bia n/ , mersee'; ay voo? 

Komo n/ voo portay'-voo 
do n se mata n/ ? 

3. Patr6bia n/ . Zhe parteeray' 

dema n/ poor la swee's, ay 
zhee restore' e u mwa'. 

4. Ke deeriay'-voo see zhe voo 

garde/-za dayzhenay'? 

5. Zhakseptere'-zavek' ple- 

zeer' .... vooleeay' pas- 
say 7 lapremeedee' 

6. Voo-ze 7 ^ sharmo n/ t e . Ay 

bia n/ se-to n to n dw / . 

7. A^ee', noo kdz e ro n/ -ze n pe 

ay noo noo-zamwz e r6 n/ . 

8. Dayzeereriay'-voo du po- 

ta / zh e , de la salad 7 , 

oo bia n/ dfe-ze a la ko'k e ? 



TRADUCTION. 



dear; 



1. Good morning, my 

how are you f 

2. Very well, thank you; and 

you, how do you do this 
morning f 

3. None too well. I shall leave 

for Sivitzerland to-mor- 
row and will stay there 
for a month. 

4. What would you say if I 

kept you.for luncheon ? 

5. I would accept with pleas- 

ure, if you are willing to 
spend the afternoon with 
me to-morrow. 

6. You are charming. Well, 

then, it is understood. 

7. And so we will have a little 

chat and amuse our- 



8. 



Would you like some soup, 
a chop with some salad, 
or some boiled eggs? 



23. Etes, 2d pers. pi. pres. ind. of the verb etre, to be : je suis {zhe suee'), tu es 
{tu S), il est (ee-le'), nous sommes (noo som), voics e~les (voo-zef), Us sont (eel so n ). 

24. Feminine of tbe adjective charmant (sharmo n '). See note 16. 

25. Nous nous amuserons (we will amuse ourselves) is the 1st per. pi. ind. 
future of the reflexive verb s'amuser (samwzay'), to amuse oneself. Pro- 
nouns generally precede the verb; in the imperative and interrogative 
forms they follow it. Nous is a pronoun both reflexive and personal. 

26. Du (contraction of de le), de la, des, of the (sing, and pi.), is actually 
the genitive of the definite article, see page 51, note 33, but is known in 
French as the partitive article. It is always used in connection with sub- 
stantives representing any object or entity which is susceptible of being 
divided into separate parts without the subdivision in any way altering 
the name and essence of the whole. Some is the English equivalent of this 
article ; e. g.: donnez-tnoi du pain, de la viande, de Veau (donay'-mwa' du pa n , 
de la vio n 'd e , de 16). give me some bread, some meat, some water. The par- 
titive art. de is used for the sing, or pi. masc. or fem. before substantives 
preceded by an adjective, after a negative verb or after an adverb express- 
ing quantity: fai de beaux, je rial pas de,fai assez de diamante. 

5 



56 CORTINA METHOD. 

9. Voila de beaux 27 fruits; je choisirai 19 une peche 

et du raisin.* 

10. Vous offrirai 19 -je du bordeaux ou prefereriez 20 - 

vous de Feau glacee?* 

11. Merci, j'accepterai 19 plutot une glace et quel- 

ques petit s gateaux. 28 

12. Ne me donneriez 20 -vous pas un petit verre de 

chartreuse? j 

13. Nous passerons 19 maintenant a la salle de 

billard, avec ces messieurs. 

14. Avec plaisir ! Nous y 3 prendrons 19 le cafe.* 

15. Ce cafe est 23 vraiment delicieux ; 10 j'en 4 desire- 

rais 20 encore une petite tasse. 

16. Si vous voulez, nous irons au 29 jardin et je vous 

montrerai 19 le nouveau 30 bassin. 
IT. Mesdames et messieurs, avec votre permission. 

18. Comment, deja! Yous n^aus quittez si tot! 31 

19. Oui ; ma m&re m'attend & diner. 

20. Ehbien! Acesoir! 32 



9. See-there of beautiful fruits ; and of trie grape. 

10. To you shall offer I of the Bordeaux, of the water iced? 

14. With pleasure ! We there will take the coffee. 

27. Beaux is the masc. pi. of beau (b6), beautiful, the fern. sing, being belle 
(bel), pi., belles (bel). Note the use of the partitive article de, instead of dies. 

28. Gdteauz, pi. of gdteau. Substantives and adjectives ending in au, eau, 
eu, form their plural by adding x instead of s to the singular. 

29. Au is a contracted form of d le, to the, just as du is of de le. This^con- 
traction is used before words beginning with a consonant ; before words 



SECOND LESSON. 



57 



9. Vwala 7 de bd frwee 7 ; zhe 

shwazeere 7 wn e p§sh ay 
dzf reza n/ . 

10. Voo-zoffreere 7 -zh e du bor- 

do 7 oo prayfereriay 7 -voo 
delo glasay 7 ? 

11. Mersee 7 , zhakseptere 7 -plu- 

fcd'-twn e glas ay kel 7 k e pe- 
tee 7 gat6 7 . 

12. Ne me doneriay 7 =voo pa- 

ze n petee 7 vayr de shar- 
tre 7 z e ? 

13. Xoo pas^o 117 ma n t'no n/ a. la 

sal de beeyar 7 avek 7 se 
maysie 7 . 

14. Avek 7 playzeer 7 ! Noo-zee 

13ro n dro n/ le kafay 7 . 

15. Se kafay 7 § vremo 117 day- 

leesie 7 ; zho n dayzeerayre 7 - 
zo n kor 7 tm e peteet 7 tas. 

16. Seevoovoolay 7 noo-zeer6 n/ - 

z5 zharda 117 ay zhe voo 
mo n trere 7 le uoov6 7 basa n/ . 

17. Maydam 7 -zemaysie 7 ,avek 7 

vo'tr* payrmeesi6 n/ . 

18. Komo n7 dayzha 7 ! Voo noo 

keetay 7 see to ! 

19. Wee, ma mer m'atto 117 - 

t& deenay 7 . 

20. Ay bia n/ ! X se swar 7 . 



9. There is some fine fruit; 

I will select a peach and 
some grapes. 

10. Shall I offer you some Bor- 

deaux, or would you pre- 
fer iced water 1 ? 
Thanks; I would rathe?' 
accept an ice cream and 
some small cakes. 
Will you not give me a 
small glass of Char- 
treuse f 
We will now go to the bill- 
iard room with these gen- 
tlemen. 

With pleasure! We will 
take the coffee there. 

15. This coffee is really deli- 

cious; I would like an- 
other small cup of it. 

16. If you like we ivill go to 

the garden and I ivill 

show you the new basin.* 
Ladies and gentlemen, 

with your permission. 
What! Are you leaving 

us so soon f 

19. Yes; my mother is expect- 

ing me to dinner. 

20. Well, we will see you to- 

night. 



11. 



12. 



13. 



14. 



17. 



18. 



beginning with a vowel or h mute, the ordinary form of the article is used, 
and an apostrophe substituted to the vowels e and a : & Uhomme, a rami, etc. 

30. The fem. of nouveau is nouvelle (noovel'), the respective plurals being 
nouveaux (note 28) and nouvelles (noovel'). Xouveau becomes nouvel when 
immediately preceding a masc. subst. which begins with a vowel or h mute ; 
e. g.: nouvel ami (noove'-lamee'), nouvel homme (noove'-lom'). The same 
remark applies to beau, belle, bel. 

31. The same remark applies to sitdt (so soon as) and si I6t (so soon) as was 
made in note 8 about plutot and plus tot. 

32. Or jusqu' a ce'soir (zhuska' se swarO, until to-night. 



58 CORTINA METHOD. 

TEOISI^ME LEgOK 1 

Nouveau Vocabulaire. 

Soir 2 (swar'); cherie 3 (shayree'), . evening; dear (fern.). 

Tout a l'heure 4 (too-ta ler'), . . presently, just now. 

N'est-ce pas ? 5 (nfes pa), . . .is it not so f 

Autrefois 6 (otr^wa 7 ) , pas trop (patro), before; not too much. 

Ii'annee derniere (lanay' dernier'), last year. 

Aux 7 33tats-Unis (O-zayta'-zwnee'), . in the United States. 

Couturieres (kootwrie'r 6 ), . . . dressmakers. 

Sans doute (so n doot); tiens! 8 (tia n/ ), no doubt; oh yes! just so! 

Essay er (eseyay 7 ); la ville (vee'I 2 ), to try ; the city. 

Assez (asay'); chere (she'r e ), . . enough ; dear (fern.). 

Finie(feenee / ); qu , importe!(ka n port / ), finished (f.); never mind. 

Nous tacherons (noo tash'r6 n/ ), . we will try. 

Quelque chose (kayl'k e scho'z 6 ), . something. 

Bon marche 9 (b6 n marshay 7 ), . . cheap. 

Leurs 10 (ler) ; ensuite (o n sweet'), . their ; afterward. 

Toujours 11 (toozhoor'), . . . always. 

Au comptant (6 ko n to n/ ), . . . for cash. 

Tailleur 12 (tayer'); credit (kraydee'), tailor ; credit. 

1. TrwasiS'm 8 leso n ', third lesson. 

2. Soir, evening. Bonsoir (bo n swa r/ ), good evening; bonne nuit (bo'n* 
n«ee'),good night. 

3. Cherie is the fern, of cheri (sh^yree'), past part. masc. sing, of the verb 
cherir (shayreer'), to cherish. 

4. Tout a I'heure, lit., all at the hour, is an idiomatic expression, used 
to denote a period of time which has just elapsed or is just about to do so. 

5. Literally, no is it not f 6. Literally, other time. 

7. The plural of the definite article is declined as follows : les (lay), the ; 
des (day), of the, contraction of de les, page 55, note 26; aux (6), to the, con- 
traction of a les, page 56, note 29. 

8. Tiens ! an exclamaticm of surprise very much in use. It is the 2d person 
sing, of the imperative mood of tenir, to hold ; equivalent to hello! just so; 
exactly so. 9. Literally, good market, good bargain. 

10. Leurs, is the plural of a possessive pronoun denoting a plurality of 
objects belonging to a plurality of possessors ; when used in the sing, it 
denotes a single object belonging to a plurality of possessors. Preceded by 
the article it is used as a substantive: le (la) leur (le.(la) ler), their; les leurs 
(lay ler), theirs. 11. Compound of tous (toos), all, and jours (zhoor), days. 

12. Derived from tattler (tayay'), to cut. The final syllable eur corresponds 



THIRD LESSON. 



59 



Vetements et CJiaussures. 13 



Le pantalon (le po n talo n/ ), 

Le veston, le gilet (vesto n/ , zheele'), 

Lajaquette u (zhakfe 7 t e ), . 

Le corsage (korsa/zk e ) , 

Un pardessus 15 (e n pardesw'), . 

TJn chapeau 16 (shapo / ), ... 

Un mouchoir (mooshwar'), foulard, 17 

La cravate, le col (krava't e , kol), 

Les manchettes 14 18 (mo n shay / t e ), 

TJne paire de gants (un e p&r de go n ), 

Les bottes, souliers (bo 7 ^, sooliay'), 

Jies pantoufles (lay po n too / fl e ), 

Les bottines a boutons (booto n/ ), 

XTne poche (po'sh e ) , . 

Les boutonnieres 19 (bootonieV), 

Du linge propre (du la n/ zh e pro'pr 6 ), 

La chemise (shemeeY), . 

Lachemise(robe)denuit(robdenwee / ), 

Le calecon (le kal'so n/ ), . 

Les bas, chaussettes 20 (ba, shose't 6 ), 

Le linge de dessous (de d'soo'), 

Le jupon, la jupe (zhup6 n/ , zhu'-p e ), 

La camisole (kameezo^), 

Le corset (korse / ), .... 



the trousers. 

the coat, the waistcoat. 

the jacket. 

the ivaist (of a dress). 

an overcoat. 

a hat. 

handkerchief, neckerchief. 

the necktie, the collar. 

the cuffs. 

a pair of gloves. 

the boots, shoes. 

the slippers. 

the buttoned boots. 

a pocket. 

the buttonholes. 

clean linen. * 

the shirt (chemise). 

the night shirt (dress). 

the drawers. 

the stockings, socks. 

the underclothing. 

the petticoat, the skirt. 

the corset cover. 

the corsets. 



to the English terminations our, or; it is frequently made use of to form a 
derived substantive which denotes the agent or maker of the original. 

13. Vetmo n '-zay shosw'r 6 , clothing and footwear. 

14. See page 53, note 13. 15. Literally, on top. 

16. Chapeau haut de forme (ho de fo r 'm e ), literally, a hat high of form, a 
silk hat; un chapeau rond, lit., a round hat, a derby, a bowler. 

17. Name of the material of which neckerchiefs are made, given by exten- 
sion to the neckerchief itself. 18. Dim. oimanche (mo n 'sh e ), sleeve. 

19. The termination ier, added to any substantive, forms a derivative 
denoting a receptacle for the original ; e. g.: encre, ink, encrier (o n kriay'), 
inkstand; mere, sugar, sucrier (swkriay'), sugar bowl; bouton, button, bou- 
tonniere (bootoniay're), buttonhole. The latter example illustrates the fem- 
inine form of the masculine termination ier. 

20. Derived from chausses (sch6's e ), an obsolete noun corresponding to the 
English breeches. Chaussettes is a diminutive of chausses, which originally 
covered the whole lesr and foot. 



60 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANCAIS. 

1. Bonsoir, 2 cherie ! 3 De quoi parliez 21 -vous done 22 

tout a l'heure?* 

2. Je demandais 21 a madame 23 comment on 24 pro- 

nonce ce mot.* 

3. Madame 23 paiie tres 25 bien frangais ; n'est-ce 

pas? 26 * 

4. Oh ! pas du tout, 26 madame, je parlais 21 assez 

bien autrefois, mais plus a present.* 

5. Vous etudiez tres 25 serieusement, il parait.* 

6. J'etudiais 21 beaucoup Pannee 27 derniere, mais je 

trouvais 21 beaucoup 28 de difficulte a perfec- 
tionner mon 29 accent.* 



♦LITERAL TRANSLATION. 

1. Good evening, cherished, of what spoke you then, just now 

(all at the hour)? 

2. I asked to madam how they pronounce this word. 

3. Madam speaks very well French ; no is it not? 

4. Oh ! not of the all, madam, I spoke enough well other time, 

but more at present. 

5. You study very seriously, it appears. 

6. I studied much the year last, but I found much of difficulty 

at to perfect my accent. 

21. Parliez (see page 54, note 21) is the 2d per. pi. ind. imperf. of parler, to 
speak. This tense denotes that the action referred to in the past was taking 
place at the same time as another action which is thereby also referred to. 
It is the French equivalent of the English imperfect in its progressive form ; 
e. g.: he was talking. The preterit or past tense proper, refers to an action 
in the past which is actually completed. 22. See page 52, note 9. 

23. Madame is a compound derived from ma (my) and dame (lady). Mes- 
dames (my ladies) is the plural. The possessive adjective mon, my (masc), 
which is inseparable from the word monsieur (page 49, note 21) and messieurs, 
is sometimes liable to suppression in the words madame and mesdames; 
e. g.: un monsieur, a gentleman, des messieurs, some gentlemen; but, tine 
dame, a lady, deux dames, two ladies. 






THIRD LESSON. 



61 



PRONONCIATION. 

1. B6 n sw^r / shayree / ! Dekwa 

do n too-ta lev'? 

2. Zhe denK^de'-za madam 7 

komo n/ -td n pron6 n/ s se 
m6. 
3 ries-pa? 



4 pa du too, parle'- 

zasay' d'tr* 8 fwa, me 

plw-za prayzo n/ . 

5. Voo-zaytwdiay' sayriez- 5. 

mo n/ -teel pare 7 . 

6 lanay' dernier 7 me zhe 

troove' bocoo' de deefee- 
cultay' a perfeksionay' 
mo n -nakso n/ . 



TRADUCTION. 

1. Good evening, dear / What 

were you talking about 
just now f 

2. I was asking this lady 

how this word is pro- 
nounced. 

3. Madam speaks French very 

well, does she not ? 

4. Oh ! not at all, madam. I 
used to speak pretty well 
before, but not now. 

You are studying quite se- 
riously, I hear. 
6. I studied a good deal last 
year, bid found great 
difficulty in perfecting 
my accent. 



24. See page 49, note 25. 

25. We have seen, page 51, note 34, that the adverb bien is sometimes used 
as a synonym for tres. The same may be said of fort (for), strongly, in fort 
bien, very good (well), for instance. 

26. Pas is never used unless preceded by ne or non actually expressed or 
understood, except in adverbial expressions such as : pas du tout, not a j 
all ; pas d present, not now ; pas encore, not yet, etc. 

27. Annie is derived from an (o°), year, and both words, though meaning 
the same thing, cannot be used indiscriminately. Annie is always used 
in connection with an adjective qualifying it, e. g.: Vannie derniere (lanay' 
dernie'r*), last year; laseptieme annSe,ihe seventh year. An is generally 
used when no particular reference is made to lapse of time, as in the case of 
historical dates, for instance ; e. g.: Van VII {sept) de la Republique, the year 
Beven of the Republic ; le jour de Van, New Year's day. The same differ- 
ence as that described above may be said to exist between jour and journee 
(zhoornayO, day ; matin and matinee (mateenay'), morning ; soir and soiree 
(swaray'), evening. The former of these substantives denote the year, the 
day, the morning and the evening in their totalities as units, while the 
latter refer more particularly to the duration or lapse of time contained in 
each of them. 

28. Beaucoup can either be used as a substantive or as an adverb, like its 
equivalent in English, much. In the latter case it is always followed by de, 
the partitive article, connecting it with a complement, and becomes equiv- 
alent to an adjective. The same remark applies to pen, few ; assez (asay'), 
enough, and other adverbs of quantity. 29. See page 50, note 28. 



62 CORTINA METHOD. 

7. Le frangais est une langue tres repandue. 30 * 

8. Sans doute ; et particulierement dans les grandes 

villes, au 31 Canada et aux 31 Etats-Unis.* 

9. Ici, a New York, toutes les couturieres sont 

frangaises. 32 * 

10. Tiens ! 8 a propos de couturieres : je desirerais 

passer chez Mme. 33 Joly demain dans l'apres- 
midi.* 

11. Si vous le voulez, 34 je vous 35 accompagnerai. 36 * 

12. Mais comment done! Je serais 37 enchantee. 

J'essayerai 38 ma robe de soie.* 

13. Nous pourrons 39 admirer cette 40 jolie robe de 

soie, alors ? * 



7. The French is a language very spread. 

8. Without doubt, and particularly in the large cities at the 

Canada and at the United States. 

9. Here, at New York, all the dressmakers are French. 

10. Hold! at subject of dressmakers: I should desire to pass 

house Madam Joly to-morrow in the afternoon. 

11. If you it wish, I you will accompany. 

12. But how then ! I would be delighted. I will try my dress 

of silk. 

13. We will be able to admire that pretty dress of silk, then? 



30. Repandue, fern, of repandu, past part, of repandre (raypo n 'dr<0, to dis- 
seminate, a verb of the 4th conjugation in which the past part, ends in u. 

31. Observe that instead of the preposition en (o°), in, the dative of the 
definite article au (6), to the, is used in this case. This ahvays occurs when 
the names of the countries spoken of are either masc. or in the plural ; ex- 
amples : en France (o n fro n 's<>), en Espagne (oa-nespa'nye), etc., but: auxEtats* 
Unis, au Portugal, aux Antilles (6-zo I >tee / y«), in the West Indies. 

32. See page 47, notes 13 and 14. 

83. Abbreviated form of madame. 34. See page 49, note 23. 



THIRD LESSON. 



63 



?. .... 6-tw 7 n e lo n g? tre ray- 7. French is a very popular 



po n dw 7 . 

8. So n doot ; ay partiki/lier- 

mo n/ do n le gro n/ d e veel, 6 
Canada 7 ay 6-zayta 7 -zw- 
nee 7 . 

9. Eesee 7 kootwrie 7 r e so n 

fro n se 7 z e . 



language. 

8. Undoubtedly; andparticw 

larly in the large cities, 
in Canada and in the 
United States. 

9. Here, in New York, all the 

dressmakers are French, 



10. Tia n/ ! a prop6 7 passay 7 

shay madam 7 zholee 7 de- 
ma 117 do n lapre 7 -meedee 7 . 

11. See voo le voolay 7 

ak6 n panyere 7 . 

12. Mekomo n7 do n ! Zhesere 7 - 

zo n sho n tay 7 . Zheseyere 7 
ma rob de swa 7 . 

13 poor6 n7 -zadmeeray 7 set 

zholee 7 alor 7 ? 



10. Well, speaking of dress- 

makers, I should like to 
call at Mme. Joly's to- 
morrow afternoon. 

11. If you wish it, I will ac- 

company you. 

12. Why certainly! I should 

be delighted ; I will try 
on my silk dress. 

13. We will be able to admire 

that beautiful silk dress, 
then f 



35. Vous, one of the four personal pronouns, elle, nous, votes, elles, with 
only one nominative case. It is always used whether the pronoun im- 
mediately precedes the verb, as in the example of the text, or be in any 
other position in the sentence. In this case it is equivalent to you, in the 
objective case in English. The four pronouns with a double nominative 
arej'e, tu, il, Us, of which the other forms are moi (mwa'), toi (twa'), lui (luee'), 
eux (e). The first form is used when the verb follows immediately after it ; 
e. g.: je parle, I speak ; the second form, when the verb is separated from it, 
as in : toi qui parle (twa' kee pari), thou who speakest. Both are sometimes 
used together in the same sentence to give extra emphasis ; e. g.: lui, il 
parle (luee', eel pari), he, he speaks, but this constitutes a redundancy or 
pleonasm. 36. See page 54, note 19. 

37. Je serais, tu serais, il serait, etc. (see page 54, note 20), conditional of the 
irregular verb etre, to be. 

38. Essay erai, 1st per. sing, future of essay er (ayseyay'). Verbs of the 1st 
conj. with infinitives ending in ayer and eyer form their future as we have 
said, page 54, note 19. 

39. The 1st per. pi. of the ind. future of the irregular verb pouvoir, to be 
able; the irregularity consists in the suppression of the syllable vox in pou- 
voirons, and the duplication of the last consonant of the root, r. 

40. Adjectives ending in et, like cet, that, double the last consonant and 
take a final e mute to form their feminine. 



G4: CORTINA METHOD. 

14. Mais oui; seulement Mme. 33 Joly me disait 21 

hier que la jupe n'etait 41 pas finie. 42 * 

15. Qu'importe ! nous tacherons 36 de juger de l'effet 

du corsage seul.* 

16. Ensuite, nous passerons 36 chez le tailleur 12 ou 

j'acheterai quelque chose pour mon mari. 

17. On y 43 coupe tres bien les vetements, n'est-ce 

pas, et a 44 bon marche ? * 

18. Pas trop. 26 Les prix sont eleves, mais leurs 10 

etoffes sont toujours belles et d'excellentes 
qualites. 

19. Comment votre mari achete-t-il 45 ses vete- 

ments, a credit ou au 46 comptant ? 

20. II paye toujours comptant ; les tailleurs et les 

couturieres n'aiment 47 pas a faire de credit. 

14. But yes ; only Mme. Joly me was telling yesterday that the 

skirt no was not finished. 

15. What matters ! we will try of to judge of the effect of the 

waist alone. 
17. They there cut very well the clothes, no is it not, and at 
good market? 



THIRD LESSON. 



65 



14 wee' ; selmo n/ 

deeze' .... zhwp e nayte' 
pa feenee'. 

15. Ka n port / ! .... tash'r6 n/ 

de zhwzhay' de layfay ' du 
korsa / zh e sel. 

16. O n swee / t e — pas'rd n/ shay 

le tayer' oo zhashet're' 
— maree'. 

17. O-nee koo'p e ve , tmo n/ 

nes pa 7 , ay a bo n mar- 
shay '? 

18. Pa tr6; lay pri soM&yl'- 

vay' ler-zaytof so u 

toozhoor bel e eksay- 

lo n/ t e .... 

19. .... ashet'-teel' — akray- 

dee'-too6k6 n to D/ ? 

20. Eel pey« . . . . le tayer'-zay 

le kootwrie'r 8 ne'm pa-za 
fer d<s kraydee'. 



14. Certainly; only Mine. Joly 

told me yesterday that 
the skirt wasn't finished. 

15. Never mind, we will try 

and judge of the effect of 
the waist by itself. 

16. Afterward, we will call at 

the tailor's, where I will 
buy something for my hus- 
band. 

17. They cut clothes very well 

there, donH they, and 
pretty cheap f 

18. Fairly so ; the prices arc 

high, but their goods are 
always beautiful and of 
excellent quality, 

19. How does your husband 

buy his clothes : on credit, 
or for cash? 

20. He always pays cash; tai- 

lors and dressmakers 
donH like to give credit. 



41. Third person singular imperfect tense of etre, to be. Note 21. 

42. Fern, of fini (feeneeO, finished; infinitive, finir, a verb of the 2d conj., 
of which the past part, ends in i; see notes 3 and 30. 

43. See page 52, note 3. 

44. Note that t in et is never carried forward, page 43, " Liaison des Mots." 

45. See page 50, note 29. 

46. See page 51, note 33. 47. See page 16, No. 4. 



66 CORTINA METHOD. 

\f\Tv L 
QUATRI^ME LEgON. 1 

Nouveau Vocabulaire. 

Quelques 2 (kayl'k e ); combien (ko n bia n/ ), some; how much. 

Emplettes 3 (o^le't 6 ), achats 3 (asha 7 ), . purchases. [tion, 

Quelle 4 heure (ke-le r/ ); la gare (gar), . what time; the sta- 

Aller et retour (alay' ay retoor'), . . go and return. 
Excellent 3 (eksaylo n/ ); modiste (modees' t e ), excellent; milliner. 

Prix fixe (pree feeks), . . . . fixed price. 

Echantillons (aysho n teeyo n/ ), . . . samples. 

Etoffes 6 (aytof 7 ) ; drap(dra); robes (ro'b e ), stuffs; cloth; dresses, 

Mieux 7 (mie'); ceci 8 (sesee'); cela 8 (sela'), best; this; that. 

Marche (marshay'); allons (alo n/ ), • • market; let us go. 

Gigot (zheego'), leg of mutton. 

Morceaux (morso'); veau (v6), . . pieces; veal. 

Bifteck 9 (beeftek / ); ce que 10 (se ke), . beefsteak; that which. 

Pas du tout (pa du too), .... not at all. 

1. Katrie'm e les6 n , fourth lesson. 

2. An indefinite adjective corresponding to the English some, any, a few. 
Coupled with the words un, une, autre, as in quelqu'un (kaylke n ')» somebody, 
quelqy} 'autre (kaylko'tr 6 ), somebody else, it becomes an indefinite pronoun 
and the final e mute disappears to be replaced by an apostrophe. 

3. Derived from acheter (ash'tay'), to buy, like its English equivalent, 
purchase, from to purchase. 

4. Fem. of quel (kel), which, what. See page 49, note 24. 

5. "Words ending in enl generally have an equivalent in English which 
is spelled in identically the same way and derived from the same source ? 
the Latin; e.g.: prudent (prwdo n '), prudent; accent (akso n '), accent ; diligent 
(deeleezho n/ ), diligent. 6. From the low Latin estoffa; see page 38, note 9. 

7. Irregular comparative of the abverb Men, well. 

8. Ceci, cela, both demonstrative pronouns composed of ce, this, and ci s 
here, Id, there. Ci and Id are both adverbs, often used in connection with 
pronouns or adjectives ; the former denotes that which is nearer to us, the 
latter that which is far. With the pronoun ce they are always connected 
directly, as in the text ; with celui, celles, ceux, celles they are connected 
by a hyphen ; e. g.: celui-ci, this one (masc); celle-ld, that one (fem). When 
used in connection with the adjectives ce, cet, cette, they are connected by 
a hyphen with the substantive which follows the adjective. 

9. Bifteck is a gallic corruption of beefsteak. 

10. Ce que is a demonstrative pronoun composed of ce (se), that, and que 
(ke), which. The word ce is an adjective when preceding a subst. and a 
pronoun when used in connection with a verb or another pronoun. 



FOURTH LESSON. 67 

Le Chemin de Fer et les Magasins. 11 

Le bureau (bwr6 r ); un billet (beeye'), the office; a ticket. 

Le guichet 12 (le gueeshay / ), . . the wicket, ticket office. 

Un billet de l re , 2 me , 3 me classe, 13 . a 1st, 2d, 3d class ticket 

TJn wagon (e n vagd n/ ), . . . . a railway carriage. 

L'indicateur de chemin de fer, 14 . the time table. 

Le magasin de nouveautes, 15 . . dry goods store. 

Le cordonnier 16 (le kordoniay'), . . the shoemaker. 

Le chapelier 16 (shapeliay 7 ), . . the hatter. 

La chapellerie 17 (shapayl'ree'), . . the hat store. 

Le gantier 16 (go n tiay'), . . . the glove maker. 

Le magasin de soieries (swaree'), . the silk store. 

Le boucher 16 (le booshay / ), . . . the butcher. 

Laboucherie 17 (la boosh'ree'), . . the butcher 1 s shop. 

Le boulanger 16 (boolo n zhay') ? . . the baker. 

Laboulangerie 17 (boolo n zh , ree / ), . the bakery. 

Les Jours de la Semaine. 18 
Lundi, 19 mardi 19 (le n dee / , mardee'), . Monday, Tuesday. 
Mercredi, 19 jeudi 19 (mayrkredee / ,zhedee / ), Wednesday, Thursday. 
Vendredi, 19 samedi (vo n dredee,sam , dee / ), Friday, Saturday. 
Dimanche 20 (deemo n sh / ), . . . Sunday. 

11. Le shema n ' de fayr ay lay magaza n ', the railroad and the stores. 

12. Guichet, a small opening or window ; wicket where tickets are sold. 

13. E a beeye' de premier 8 , dezie'm e , trwazie'm e clas. Compound substan- 
tives are rarely used in French ; instead of a silk store, a straw hat, etc., they 
say : a store of silks, a hat of straw, etc. 

14. La n deekater / de sheraa"' de fayr ; literally, the indicator of railroad. 

15. Le magasa n ' de noovotg, literally, the store of novelties. 

16. See note 19, lesson third. In this instance the termination ier makes 
of the original substantive the name of its manufacturer. In chapelier, 
from chateau, the I, which is substituted to au, represents a reversion to an 
obsolete form of the original subst. in order to avoid an otherwise objec- 
tionable accumulation of vowels : eauier. 

17. The termination rie corresponds to the English one, ry, in rookery, 
commander y. Added to certain substantives it forms derivates denoting 
the place where the business, action or state indicated by the original is 
carried on or existent. 18. Le zhoor de la semfi'ne, the days of the week. 

19. The termination di is similar to the English one, day, from the Latin 
dies, day. Hence the meaning of these names : lundi, the day of the Moon ; 
mardi, the day of Mars ; and the others, of Mercury, of Jove and of Venus. 
Samedi is derived from the Hebrew schabat, meaning the Jewish day of rest. 

20. From the Latin dies dominica, day of the Lord. 



68 CORTINA METHOD 

FRANCAIS. 

1 . Tiens ! 21 Alors, vous partez lundi 22 pour Kou*?n ? a 

2. Non; mais je pense partir pour Paris jeudi, 22 

pour faire quelques 2 emplettes. 3 

3. Moi 24 j 'irai mardi ; voulez-vous m'accompagner ?* 

4. Avec plaisir ; a quelle 4 heure votre train 25 part-il ?* 

5. N'avez-vous pas un indicateur 26 de chemin de 

f er ? Mais, nous 27 voici 28 a la gare. * 

6. Combien paye-t-on 25 29 un billet pour Paris?* 

7. Que voulez-vous, mesdames : 30 des 31 billets de 

premiere ou de deuxieme? 

8. Donnez-nous deux billets de premiere, aller et 

retour.* 

9. Entrons ici, c'est un magasin de confiance. 



♦LITERAL TRANSLATION. 

3. Me I will go Tuesday ; will you me to accompany? 

4. With pleasure ; at what hour your train leaves he? 

5. Not have you not an indicator of road of iron ? But us see- 

here at the station. 

6. How much pay-they a. ticket for Paris? 

8. Give us two tickets of first, to go and to return. 

21. See page 58, note 8. 

22. Week days indicating a past or future date are used without preposi- 
tion or article in French. To indicate a recurring date the definite article 
is employed. 23. Capital of Normandy, France. 

24. See page 63, note 35. Moi, toi, etc., are placed either before or after the 
verb of any sentence to give additional emphasis to the personal pronouns 
■ je,tu, etc.: moi firai or f irai moi. The repetition of the auxiliary is aboutthe 
nearest approach to this form of locution in English ; e. g.: I will go, I will, 

25. The subject of an interrogative sentence, when not a pronoun, is gen- 
erally placed before the verb. 

26. The termination eur generally corresponds to that of or in English 



FOURTH LESSON. 



69 



PRONONCIATION. 

1. Tia n/ ! le n dee' poor 

rwo n/ ? 

2. N6 n ; me zhe po n/ s pa- 

ree' zhedee' fer kel 7 - 

ke-zo n plfe / t e . 

3. Mwa zheere' mardee' 

mak6 n panyay / . 

4. Avek' playzeer'; a keler' 

vo'tr* tra n par-teel'? 

5 pa-ze n -na n deekater / de 

shema n/ de fer ? Me, noo 
vwasee 7 a la gar. 

6. K6 n bia n/ pe'y^to 11 ' e n beeye' 

poor paree'? 

7. Ke voolay'-voo, medam': 

de beeye' de premier' 

seg6 n/ d? 

8. Donay'-noo de alay' ay 

retoor'. 



TRADUCTION. 

1. Well! So you start on Mor^ 

day for Rouen t 

2. No, but I expect to leave 

for Paris on Thursday, to 
make a few purchases. 

3. I am going on Tuesday ; 

will you accompany me ? 

4. With pleasure; at what time 

does your train leave ? 

5. HavenH you a time table f 

But here we are at the 
station. 

6. How much is a ticket to 

Paris f 

7. What do you want, la* 

dies : first or second class 
tickets t 

8. Give us two first class excur- 

sion tickets. 



9. O n tro n/ -zeesee / , se-te n maga- 

79.1/ 



9. Let us go in here; it is a 
reliable store. 



words of Latin derivation, and to the terminations ness, th, or er in words 
of Saxon origin; e. g.: acteur, actor; grandeur, greatness; largeur, width. 
In abstract nouns it denotes the state or quality denned by the radical. 

27. See page 63, note 35. 

28. Contraction of vois (vwa), see, 2d per. sing, imperative mood of voir, 
to see, and of ci (see), here. Preceded by nous, a personal pronoun, as in 
the case of the text, it is equivalent to the English locution here we are. 
Me void (me vwasee'), here I am. Void {voild) le livre, here (there) is the 
book. Void and voild, when used in connection with adverbs of time or 
compound locutions denoting time, are equivalent to the English adverbs 
since, ago, etc. Voild longtemps, it is a long time ago. Void trois ans, it is 
three years since. 

29. See page 49, note 25. In interrogative sentences, personal pronouns or 
the indefinite pronoun on are always placed after the verb, and connected 
with it by a hyphen. We have already seen that the letter t between the 
pronoun and a 3d per. sing, ending with a vowel, is merely euphonic. 

30. See page 60, note 23. 

31. See page 55, note 26. The partitive article de, du, de la, des, is the 
equivalen of the English some or any. It must always be used, even in 
cases, where it would not be required in English. 



70 CORTINA METHOD. 

10. Je pref&re toujours faire mes achats 3 dans les 

magasins ou 32 tout se vend a prix fixe.* 

11. Montrez-moi des echantillons d'etoffes pour 

robes ; ce que 10 vous avez de 31 mieux. 33 * 

12. Quel est le prix de ce drap-ci? 8 

13. Cela 8 me parait bien cher. 

14. Pas du tout, 34 madame, c'est tres bon marche s 

c'est une etoffe de premiere qualite.* 

15. Passons au rayon de soierie. 

16. Ou 32 achetez-vous vos chapeaux? 35 Est-elle 

bonne modiste? 

17. Voulez-vous venir acheter du 31 poisson? 

18. Non, nous achetons le poisson le 22 vendredi ; 19 

allons chez 36 le boucher maintenant. 37 * 

19. Combien ce gigot? C'est tres cher.* 

20. Voulez-vous du 31 veau alors, ou preferez-vous 

cet 8 excellent 5 morceau de bifteck? 9 



10. I prefer always to make my purchases in the stores where 

all sells itself at price fixed. 

11. Show-me of the samples of stuffs for gowns; that which 

you have of better. 
14. Not of the all (not at all) madam, that is very good bargain . . . 
13. No, we buy the fish the Friday; let us go house the 

butcher just now. 

32. See page 38, No. 1. Is the equivalent of the English adverbs of place 
where, to, from. Preceded by the prepositions de and par it corresponds to 
the English from which, through which, when referring to a previously men- 
tioned locality: ou va-t-ilf (oo va-teel), where is he going? la place ou il vo 



FOURTH LESSON. 



71 



10 toozhoor' f e'r' me-za- 

sha' do n le magaza n/ oo too 
se vo u -ta pree fee / ks. 

11. Mo n tray / -mwa / de-zaysho n - 

teeyo n/ daytof 7 poor rob ; 
se ke de mie'. 

12. Ke-le' le pree de se dra- 

see'? 

13. Sela / me pare 7 bia n/ shayr. 

14. Pa dw too, tre bo n mar- 

shay 7 , w-naytof 7 de 

premier 7 kaleetay'. 

15. Pas6 n/ -zo rey6 n/ de swa- 

ree'. 

16 vo shapo'. fi-tel'boir 3 

modee'stf? 

17 veneer 7 ash'tay' dw 

pwas6 n/ ? 

18. N6 n , noo-zash't6 n/ le pwa- 

sd n/ le ; al6 n/ shay 

le booshay / ma n t'no n/ . 

19. K6 n bia n/ se zheegd' 

tre ... . 

20 dw v6 alor' se- 

teksaylo n/ morsO' de beef- 
tayk'? 



10. I always prefer to buy in 

stores where everything is 
sold at a fixed price. 

11. Show me some samples of 

dress goods; the best you 
have. 

12. What is the price of this 

cloth ? 

13. That seems very dear, 

14. Not at all, madam; it is 

very cheap; it is first 
class stuff. 

15. Let us go on to the silk de- 

partment. 

16. Where do you buy your 

hats ? Is she a good mil* 
liner ? 

17. Will you come to buy some 

fish? 

18. No, we buy fish on Fri- 

days; let us go to the 
butcher's now. 

19. How much is this leg of 

mutton f It is very dear. 

20. Have some veal, then; or 

do you prefer this excel- 
lent piece of beefsteak f 



(la plas oo eel va), the place he is going to; la place d'oU (par ou) il vient, 
the place from which (through which) he is coming. 

33. The comparative of adjectives and adverbs preceded by the preposi- 
tion de or by the article, forms the superlative. In this instance, as in manr 
others, mieuz (better), comparative of Men (well), is used as an adjective. 

34. See page 61, note 26. 35. See page 56, note 28. 

36. Chez is a preposition which means at or in the house of, as the case 
may be ; e. g.: il va chez lui, he is going to his own house (home); chez son 
pere, to his father's house. It is also used in the sense of among, amongst, 
in, as for instance : Vhabitude chez les Anglais, the custom amongst the E»c- 
lish, or in England. 

37. Maintenant, pres. part, of maintenir (ma n t'neer / ), to maintain, is used 
as an adverb equivalent to d present, at present, though it is more em- 
phatic than the latter. 

8 



72 CORTINA METHOD. 



SEOONDE PAETIE. 1 

I/ARTICLE. 2 

There are three kinds of articles in French; the 
definite, the indefinite, and the partitive* They always 
agree with the substantive in number and in gender. 
The definite article is: le (le), the; la (la), the (fern.), and 
les (le), the (plur. masc. and fern.). The indefinite article 
is: Tin (e n ), a or an (masc); une (wn e ), a or an (fern.); 
des (de), some or any (plur. masc. and fern.). The par- 
titive article is: de (de), du (du), some (masc. sing.); de 
la (de la), some (fern. sing.), des (de), some (plur. masc. 
and fern.). 

Before a noun beginning with a vowel or silent h, le 
and la become P, du and de la change into de P, and 
de into d\ 4 

The different cases of the article in both languages are 
given below for the sake of comparison. 5 

L' Article Defest. 6 

Masculin Feminin Masc. et Fern. 

SingiilierJ Singulierfi Pluriel? 

ISTominatif, 10 le, 1', the. la, 1', the. les, the. 

Genitif, 11 du, de P, of the. de la, de P, of the. des, of the. 

Datif, 12 au, a P, of the. a la, a P, to the. aux, to the. 

Accusatif, 13 le, P, the. la, P, the. les, the. 

I. Seg6 n 'd° partee', second part. 2. Lartee'kl*, the article. 

3. There is no neuter gender in French ; inanimate objects are indiffer- 
ently masc. or fern, according to their derivation or to custom. 

4. See page 47, note 10. 5. There are no declensions in French. 

6. Lartee'kle dayfeenee', the definite article. 

7. Mask?da«' sa^gwliay', masculine singular. 8. Faymeena n ',/emmine. 
9. PI wrier, plural. 10. Nomeenateef , nominative. 

II. Zhayneeteef , genitive. 12. Dateef , dative. 13. Akwzateef , accusative. 



THE ARTICLE. 73 

L' Article Indeflnt. 14 

Masculin FZminin Masc. et Fim. 

SingulierJ Singulier.% Pluriel? 

Nominatif, 10 un, a or an. une, a or an. des, some. 

Genitif, 11 d'un, of a or an. d'une, of a or an. des, of some, 

Datif, 12 a un, to a or an. a une, to a or an. a des, to some. 

Accusatif, 13 un, a or an. une, a or an. des, some. 

U Article Partitif. 15 
Is not declined, and, as a matter of fact, is not admitted 
by French grammatical authorities as a distinct part 
of speech. It is practically the genitive of the definite 
article, du, de la, des, but is nevertheless governed by 
a number of well defined rules, page 55, note 26. 

It must always be expressed in French and not omitted, 
as is sometimes the case in English : e. g. : 

Je donne DES lemons, I give lessons. 

Instead of the article, the preposition de is always 
used in the following cases : 

1. After a negation, e. g. : 

Je n'ai pas DE 16 diamants, I have no diamonds. 1 * 

2. After an adverb of quantity : 

J'ai assez DE 16 diamants, I have enough diamonds. 16 

3. And when the noun is preceded and qualified by 
an adjective : 

J'ai DE 16 magnifiques diamants, I have magnificent diamonds. 16 

Should the adjective qualifying the substantive be 
placed after it, however, the ordinary form of the indefi- 
nite article is used : 
J'ai DES diamants magnifiques, I have magnificent diamonds. 

14. Lartee'kl 6 a n dayfeenee', the indefinite article. 

15. Larte^kl 6 parteeteef , the partitive article. 

16. Note how the substantive diamonds requires no article in English but 
requires it in French. See page 69, note 31. 



74 CORTINA METHOD. 

LE GENRE. 17 

Le masculin (maskula"), the masculine, applies to 
all masculine nouns and to all animals of the male sex ; 
le feniinin (faymeena n/ ), the feminine, to all female ani- 
mals and to feminine nouns. 

LE PLTJRIEL. 9 

Setting aside some exceptions which will make the 
subject of a later chapter, the plural of nouns is formed 
in six different ways : 

1. By adding s to the singular, which is the general 
rule: 

L'homme (lorn), man. Les hommes (le-zom), men. 

2. Substantives ending in s, x or z do not vary in the 
plural : 

Le fils (le fees), the son. Les fils (le fees), the sons. 

Le prix (le pree), the price. Les prix (le pree), the prices. 
Le nez (le nay), the nose. Les nez (le nay), the noses. 

3. Those ending in al change al into aux : 

Cheval (sheval'), horse. Chevaux (shev6 / ), horses. 

General (zhaynayral'^eraeraZ. Generaux (zhaynayr6') ^generals 

4. Those ending in au or eu take x in the plural : 

Un bateau (e n batd'), a boat. Des bateaux (debatd'), some boats, 
Neveu (neve'), nephew. Neveux (neve'), nephews. 

5. Seven substantives ending in ou make exception to 
the general rule and form their plural like those of No. 4, 
by taking an x ; viz. : 

Bijou (beezhoo') , jewel ; bijoux (beezhoo') , jewels. 

Oaillou (ka-yoo / ), stone; cailloux (ka-yoo'), stones. 

Chou (shoo), cabbage; choux (shoo), cabbages. 

Genou (zhenoo'), knee; genoux (zhenoo'), knees. 

— — — i_ 

17. Le zho n r«, gender. See note 3. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 75 

Hibou (Aeeboo'), owl; hiboux (AeebooO, owls. 

Joujou (zhoozhoo / ), toy ; joujoux (zhoozhoo'), toys. 

Pou (poo), louse ; poux (poo), lice. 

6. Seven other substantives ending in ail also form 
exception to the general rule, and change ail into aux 
in the plural j viz. : 

Bail (ba'eey 6 ), lease; plural, baux (bo). 

Corail (kora'eey 6 ), corral; " coraux (kor6 / ). 

32mail (ayma'eey 6 ), enamel; " emaux (aymO 7 ). 

Soupirail (soopira'eey 6 ), manhole; " soupiraux (soopeero'). 

Travail (trava'eey e ), work; " travaux (travo')- 

Vantail(vo n ta / eey*),/o^m5' ctoor. " vantaux (vo n t©'). 

Vitrail (veetra'eey^^cme/ " vitraux (veetrft 7 ). 

FORME FRANQAISE DTJ CAS POSSESSIF ANGLAIS. 18 

There are two ways of expressing the relation of pos- 
session or possessive case in French. 

The preposition a is used when the object possessed is 
the subject of the sentence ; e. g. : 

Ce cheval est A Paul, 19 this horse is PauVs. 

The preposition de is used when the object possessed 
is the object of the sentence, as in : 

C'est le cheval DE Paul, it is PauVs horse. 

PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 1 

The Personal Pronouns are divided into conjonctifs 
(c6 n zh6 D cteef), conjunctive, i. e., those which are imme- 
diately connected with the verb, and disjonctifs (dis- 
zho n cteef ), disjunctive, or those which may be separated 
from the verb. 

18. For'm e froas^z* du ca posayseef oaglS', French form of the English pos- 
sessive case. 

19. Se sheval' ay-ta Pol. 1. Pron6 D/ personal', personal pronouns. 



76 



CORTINA METHOD. 



lere Personnel 
Je 6 (zhe), I. 

Me (me), me. 
Me (rue) , me. 



Nous 6 (noo), we. 

Nous, to us. 
Nous, us. 



Pronoms Conjonctifs. 
singulier. 2 

Seme 5 Personne. 
XI, 6 elle (eel, el), Ae, sAe. 
En 7 (o n ), thereof, of him, of her. 
Iiui, 8 y 9 (lwee / ,ee), to him,her,it. 
Le, la (le, la), Aim, her, it. 



geme* Personne, 
Ta 6 {tu),thou. 

Te (te), thee. 
Te (te), thee. 



PLURIEL. 
Vous 6 (voo), you. 

Vous, to you. 
Vous, you. 



Ils, 6 elles (eel, el), they. 
En 7 (o Q ), of them. 
Leur (ler), to them. 
Les (le), them. 



Pronoms Disjonctifs. 



Moi 6 (mwa),me. 
De moi, of me. 
A moi, to me. 
Moi, me. 



Nous, we. 
De nous, of us. 
A nous, to us. 
Nous, us. 



SINGULIER. 

Toi 6 (twa), thou. 
De toi, of thee. 
A toi, to thee. 
Toi, ^ee. 

PLURIEL. 

Vous, you. 
De vous, of you. 
A vous, fo 2/ow. 
Vous, you: 



Lui, 6 elle (lwee / , el), he, she. 
Delui, d'elle, of him {her). 
A lui, a elle, to him {her). 
Lui, elle, him,, her. 



Eux, 6 elles (e, el), they. 
D'eux, d'elles, of them. 
A eux, a elles, to them. 



Eux, elles, them. 



VERBES REGULIERS. 1 

French verbs are generally divided into four conju- 
gations. 

A verb is said to be of the first conjugation when its 
infinitive ends in er, like parler (parlay'), to speak; 

2. Sa n gtdiay', singular. 3. Premier 6 perso'n 6 , first person. 

4. DeziS'me, second. 5. Trwazi^m 8 , third. 

6. See page 63, note 35, and page 68, note 24. 7. See page 52, note 4. 

8. Lui, to him or to her, is used for both genders. 9. See page 52, note 3. 
10. PlwrieT, plural. 1. Vayr'b 6 raygwliay', regular verbs. 



REGULAR VERBS. 77 

danser (donsay), to dance; of the second conjugation 
when the infinitive is in ir ; e. g. : cherir (shayreer'), to 
cherish; finir (feeneer'), to finish; of the third, when it 
ends in oir, like recevoir (resevwar'), to receive; de- 
voir (devwar'), to owe; and of the fourth when the infin- 
itive ends in re, e. g. : rendre (ro n 'dr e ), to return; per- 
dre (payr'dr 6 ), to lose. 

The stem or root of the verb is that part of it which 
remains after suppressing the terminations of the infini- 
tive er, ir, oir, re. 

A verb is said to be regular when it takes the termi- 
nations set forth in the four model verbs, throughout all 
its moods, tenses and persons. 

FOBMATION DES TEMPS. 2 

Every verb has five primitive tenses, viz. : the Infinitive 
Present, the Present Participle, the Past Participle, the 
Present Indicative and the Past Definite. 

All the other tenses are derived from these, and for 
that reason are known as derived tenses. 

The derived tenses may be simple or compound. 

The simple derived tenses are formed by changing the 
terminations according to rules which will be given fur- 
ther on. 

The compound derived tenses are composed of the past 
participle preceded by an auxiliary. 

For the present we will confine ourselves to the five 
primitive tenses and their simple derivates, leaving the 
compound tenses to form the subject of a special study, 
in connection with the auxiliary verbs, in the Second 
Part of Book II. 

2. Formasi6 n ' d6 to n , formation of tenses. This chapter is only intended to 
give a few hints to make the study of the verbs easier. 



78 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Eegles sur la Formation des Temps.* 

1. The Infinitive Present forms two tenses : the Fu- 
ture Indicative and the Present Conditional, by the addi- 
tion of the terminations : ai (&), as (a), a (a), ons (6 n ), 
ez (ay), ont (6 n ), 4 and ais (e), ais, (e) ait (e), ions (io n ), 
iez (iay'), aient (e); 5 e. g.: 





JFkUurs. 




fai. 


Parler- 


as. 


Mnir- 


a. 


Recev(oi)r- 


ons. 


JRendr{e)- 


ez. 




1 ont. 4 



Conditionnels. 

ais. 

ais. 

ait. 

ions. 



Parler- 
Pinir- 

Pecev(oi)r- 
Rendr{e)- 

t aient. 5 

The Present Participle forms three tenses. 

2. The plural of the Indicative Present, by changing the 
termination ant into ons (6 n ), ez (ay), ent (e), 6 for the 
first, second and third persons respectively : 

Part-ant , ons. Jfeoewmt { ons ' 

Pimss-ant -j ez. I ez. 

Pend*-ant lent. Pepoiv- ent. 

3. The Imperfect Indicative and the Present Subjunctive 
by changing ant into ais (e), ais (e), ait (e), ions 
(io n '), iez (iayO, aient (e), 7 and e (e), es (e), e (e), 
ions, iez, ent, 8 respectively ; e. g. : 

Presents du Subjonctif. 

Pecev-smt ( e * 
Part-ant 
Pimss-ant 
Pend-ant 



Imparfaits. 




fais. 7 


Part-ant 


ais. 


PJmss-ant , 


ait. 


Pecev-ant 


ions. 


Pena*-ant 


iez. 




- aient. 7 



< es. 
i-e. 



ions/ 

iez. 

ent. 8 



Begoiv 

Pecev- < ] 
Pegoiv- 



10ns. 

iez. 

ent. 9 



3. RS'gl* swr la formasid n ' d& to n , rules on the formation of the tenses. 

4. See page 54, note 19. 5. See page 54, note 20. 6. See page 50, note 29. 
7. See page 54, note 21. 8. See page 16, Nos. 3 and 4. 

9. Reswa'v*, reswa'v 8 , reswa'v», r«sevi6»', reseviay', reswa'v*. 



REGULAR VERBS. 



79 



The Past Participle, coupled with various auxi- 
liaries, forms the compound tenses, as will be seen fur- 
ther on. 

The Indicative Present forms the Imperative by 
the simple suppression of the pronoun in the only 
three persons which constitute this tense in French. 
Examples : 



Ind. Pr£s. 


Impgratif. 


Ind. Pi-6s. 


ImpSratif. 


Tu paries? 


parle. 


Tu finis,™ 


finis. 


Nous parlons, 


parlons. 


Nous finissons, 


finissons. 


Vousparlez, 


parlez. 


Vousfinissez, 


finissez. 


Tu recois, 10 


recois. 


Tu rends, 10 


rends. 


Nous recevons, 11 


recevons. 


Nous rendons, 


rendons. 


Vous recevez, 11 


recevez. 


Vous rendez, 


rendez. 



The Past Definite forms one tense, the Imperfect Sub- 
junctive, by adding se to its second person singular to 
form the first person, and then the characteristic finals of 
imperfects s, t, ions, iez, ent to form the other per- 
sons : 



Tu p arias. 12 
Parlas-se. 13 

" ses. 
Parld(s)-t. 
Parlas-sions. 

11 siez. 

" sent. 15 



Tu finis. 12 
Mnis-se. u 

11 ses. 
Fini{s)-t. 
Mnis-sions. 

" siez. 

" sent. 14 



Tu regus. 12 
Regus-se. lb 

" ses. 
Recu(s)-t. 
JRegus-sions. 

11 siez. 

11 sent. 15 



Tu rendis. 12 
Hendis-se. 16 

11 ses. 
Hendi(s)-t. 
Hendis-sions. 

" siez. 

" sent. 1 ' 



10. We have already said, on page 48, notes 19 and 20, that the three 
persons singular of the indicative present have identical sounds each in 
their own conjugation respectively, viz.: je, tu, il par'l 6 , je, tu, il feenee', 
je, tu, il reswa', je, tu, il ro n . 

11. Resevo n ', resevay'. 

12. Tw parla', feenee', resw', ro n dee / . 

13. Parla'ss, parla'ss, parla', parlassid 11 ', parlassiay', parla'ss. 

14. Feenee'ss, feenee'ss, feenee', feeneessi6 n ', feeneessiay'. feenee'ss. 

15. Resw'ss, rcsw'ss, rest*', resussio 11 ', reswssiay', restt'ss. 

16. Ro°dee'ss, ro n dee / ss, ro n dee / , ro n deessi6 n/ , ro n deessiay', ro n dee / ss. 



80 



CORTINA METHOD. 



MODULES DES YERBES R^GULIEES." 



Premiere Conjugaison. 18 Deuxieme Conjugaison. 19 
MODES INFINITIFS. 20 

PRESENTS 21 (PRESENTS). 

Parl-er, to speak. Mn-ir, to finish. 

PARTICIPES 22 (PARTICIPLES). 

Present. Parl-ant, speaking. Present, i^m-issant, finishing. 
Passe. Parl-e, spoken. Passe. Fin-i, finished. 

MODES INDICATIFS. 2023 





PRESENTS 21 (PRESENTS). 




Je parl-e,™ 


I speak, 


Je fin-is,™ 


I finish, 


tu parl-es, 


etc. 


tu Jin-is, 


etc. 


il, elle parl-e. 




il, elle fin-it. 




Nous parl-ons, 


We speak, 


Nousfiniss-ons, 


We finish, 


vous parl-ez, 


etc. 


vous finiss-ez, 


etc. 



Us, elles parl-er&. u 



Us, elles finiss-ent. 25 



IMP ARF AITS 26 (IMPERFECTS). 

Je parl-eds, 21 I spoke, Je finiss-ais,™ I finished, 

tuparl-ais, was speaking, or tu finiss-ais, was finishing, or 
il, elle parl-Siit. used to speak, il, ellefiniss-ait. used to finish, 
Nous par Mons, etc., Nous finiss-ions, etc., 



vous parl-iez, etc. 

Us, elles paW-aient. 27 



vous finiss-iez, etc. 

Us, elles finiss-aient. 2 * 



17. Model' de vayr'b e raygwliay', models of the regular verbs. 

18. Premi&'r 6 c6 n zhwg£z6 n ', first conjugation. 

19. Dezie'm 6 , second. 

20. Mod-za n feeneeteef , infinitive moods. The termination if in French 
corresponds to the English ive, and there are in both languages a number of 
adjectives whose only distinction lies in that difference ; e. g.: actif, passif. 

21. Prayzo u ', presents. 

22. Parteesee'p 6 , participles. 

23. Mod-za n deekateef , indicative moods. 

24. Para, pari, par'l, parlo 11 ', parlay', par'l. 

25. Feenee', feenee', feenee', feeneess6 n ', feeneessay', feenee'ss. 

26. A°parfe'. 

27. Paris', parle', parle', parlio"', parliay', parle'. 

28. Feeneesse 7 , feeneesse', feeneesse', feeneessio n ', feeneessiay', feeneesse 7 . 



REGULAR VERBS. 81 

PASSES DEFINIS 29 (PAST DEFINTTES). 

Je parl-a.i, 30 I spoke, Je fin-is? 1 I finished, 

tuparl-as, etc. tu fin-is, etc. 

il, elle parl-B,. il, elle fin-it. 

Nous par Barnes, We spoke, Noasfin-im.es, We finished, 

vous parl-Sties, etc. vous fin-ites, etc. 

Us, elles parl-erent. 30 Us, elles fin-irent. n 

FUTUPvS 32 (FUTUFvES). 

Je parler-ai, 33 I will or shall Jefinir-ai,^ I will or shall 
tu parler-a,s, speak, tufinir-B.s, finish, 

il, elle parler-a. etc. il, elleftnir-a,. etc. 

Nous pctrler-ons, We will Nous finir-ons, We will 
vous parler-ez, or shall speak, vous finir-ez, or shall finish, 
Us, elles parler-ont. etc. Us, elles finir-ont. etc. 

MODES CONDITIONNELS. 35 

PRESENTS (PRESENTS). 

Je parler-ais, m I would speak, Je finir-ais, zl I would finish, 
tu parler-a&s, etc. tufinir-ais, etc. 

il, ellesparler-B.it. il, elle finir-a.it. 

Nous parler-ions, We would Nous finir-ions, We would 
vous parler-iez, speak, vous finir-iez, finish, 

Us, elles parler-aient. etc. Us, elles finir-aient. etc. 

MODES SUBJONCTIFS. 2038 

PRESENTS (PRESENTS). 

Que je parl-e, That I may Quejefiniss-e, u That I may 
que tuparl-es, speak, que tufiniss-es, finish, 

qu' il, elle parl-e. etc. quHl, elle finiss-e. etc. 

Que nous parl-ions, That we Que nous finiss-ions, That we 
que vous par l-iez, may speak, que vous finiss-iez, may finish, 
quHls, elles parl-enb, etc. quHls, elles finiss-ent. u etc. 

29. Passay' dayfeenee\ 

30. Parle', parla', paria', parla'm e , parla't 6 , parler 7 . 

31. Feenee', feenee', feenee', feenee'm e , feenee't 6 , feenee'r 6 . 

32. Futur'. 

33. Parlere', parlera', etc. 34. Feeneere', feeneera', etc. 

35, Mod co n deesionel', conditional moods. 

36. Parlere', parlere', parlere', etc. 37. Feeneere 7 , feeneere', feeneere 7 , etc 
38. Mod subzh6 n cteef , subjunctive moods. 



82 



CORTINA METHOD. 



IMP ARF AITS 26 (IMPERFECTS). 

Que je parlasse, Vi That I might Que je Jinisse, That I might 
que tu parlasses, speak, que tu jinisses, finish, 

quHl, elle parld(s)-t. etc., quHl, elle fini(s)-t. etc., 

Que nous par lassions, etc. Que nous jinissions, etc. 

que vous parlassiez, que vous finissiez, 

quHls, elles par las-sent. quHls, elles finis-sent. 

MODES IMP^RATIFS. 3920 

PRESENTS. 

Paris, speak thou. Fin-is, finish thou. 

Parl-ons, let us speak. Mniss-ons, let us finish. 

Parlsz, speak ye or you. Finisssz, finish ye or you. 



Troisieme 40 Conjugaison. 41 Quatrieme 42 Conjtjgaison. 
MODES INFINITIES. 20 

PRESENTS. 

Becev-oir,* 1 a to receive. Rend-re," to return. 

PARTICIPES. 23 

Present. iZec-evant, receiving. Pres. Rendsnt, returning. 
Passe, ifec-u, 45 received. Passe. Rendru, 4 * returned. 

MODES INDICATIFS. 23 



etc. 



Je recois,* 1 

tu recoirs, 

il } elle regoi-t. 

Nous recev-ons, We receive, 

vous recevsz. etc. 



PRESENTS. 

I receive; Je rends, I return, 

tu rends, etc. 
il, elle rend. 10 

Nousrend-ons, We return, 

vous rend-ez, etc. 



Us, elles regoivsnt." 



ils } elles rendsnt. 



39. Mod-za n payrateef , imperative moods. 

40. Trwazie'm«>, third. 

41. Verbs whose infinitive ends in evoir are the only ones belonging to 
this conjugation. Those in oir, without the syllable ev, are irregular. 

42. Katrie'ms fourth. 43. Resevwaf. 44. Ro^dr*. 
45. Rcssti'. 46. Ro»du'. 

47. Rcswa', reswa', reswa', ressevd ', ressevay', reswa'v*. 



REGULAR VERBS. 83 

IMP ARF AITS. 26 

Je rccev-ais, I received, Je rend-ais, I returned, 
tu recev-ais, was receiving, or tu rend-ais, was returning, or 
U, elle recev-a.it. used to receive, U, elle rend-a.it. used to return, 
Nous recev-ions, etc., Nous rend-ions, etc., 

vous recev-iez, etc. vous rend-iez, etc. 

ils, elles recev-aiemt. Us, elles rend-&ient. 

PASSES DEFINIS. 

Je rec-us, 48 I received, Je rend-ia, I returned, 

tu reg-ua, etc. tu rend-is, etc. 

41, elle rec-ut. il, elle rend-it. 

Nous rec-umes, We received, Nous rend-im.es, We returned, 

vous rec-utes, etc. vous rend-itea, etc. 

Us, elles rec-urent. 48 its, elles rewd-irent. 

FUTURS. 32 

Je recevr-aif 9 I will or shall Je rendr-ai, i9 I will or shall 
tu recevr-a.a, receive, tu rendr-as, return, 

41, elle reeevr-Si. etc. il, elle rendr-SL. etc. 

Nous recevr-ona, We will or shall Notts rendr-ons, We will or shall 
vows recevr-ez, receive, vous rendr-ez, return, 

Us, elles recevr-ont. etc. ils, elles rendr-ont. etc. 

MODES CONDITIONNELS. 35 

PRESENTS. 

Je recevr-a,is, I would receive, Je rendr-a.ia, I would return, 
tu recevr-aia, etc. tu rendr-aAs, etc. 

41, elle recevr-a.it. il, elle rendr-a.it. 

Nous recevr-ions, We would Nous rendr-iona, We would 
vous recevr-iez, receive, vous rendr-iez, return, 

ils, elles recevr-aient. etc. ils, elles rendr-aient. etc. 

MODES SUBJONCTIFS. 38 

PRESENTS. 

Quejerecoiv-e, 50 That I may Quejerend-e, b0 That I may 
que tu regoiv-ea, receive, que tu rend-es, return, 

quHl, elle regoiv-e. etc. quHl, elle rend-e. etc. 

48. Ressu', ressu', ressu', resstf'm 6 , ress#'t», resswr'. 

49. RessevrS', ressevra', etc. Rcdre^, ro n dr&', etc. 

50. Ke zhe resw&'v e , reswa'v«, etc. Ke zhe ro n 'd e , rc'd 4 , etc. 



84 CORTINA METHOD. 

Que nous recev-ions, That we Que nous rend-ions, That we 
que vous recev-iez, may receive, que vous rend-iez, may return, 
quHls, elles regoiv~ent. b0 etc. quHls, elles rend-eni.™ etc. 

IMPARFAITS. 

Queje rec-usse, 15 That I might Queje rend-isse, 16 That I might 
que tu re^-usses, receive, que tu rend-isses, return, 
quHl, elle regret. etc., quHl, elle r end-it. etc., 

Que nous rec-ussions, etc. Que nous rend-issions y etc. 

que vous rec-ussiez, que vous rend-issiez, 

quHls, elles rec-ussent. 15 qu'ils, elles rend-issent. 16 

MODES IMP^RATIFS. 

PRESENTS. 

i?ec-ois, receive thou. Rends, return thou. 

i?ec-evons, let us receive. Itend-ons, let us return. 

jRec-evez, receive ye or you. Bend-ez, return ye or you. 

MODIFICATIONS DU RADICAL DANS LES 
VERBES REGULIERS. 1 

Some of the verbs are subject to peculiar orthograph- 
ical irregularities which will be described in this chapter. 

Premiere Conjugaison. 2 
1. In verbs ending in cer like menacer 3 (rnenasay'), 
to threaten, the c, which is -the last letter of the stem or 
root, takes a cedilla (g) whenever it precedes a termina- 
tion beginning with a or o, so that it may keep the soft 
sound of s which it has in the infinitive ; e. g. : 

Participe Pres. Menag-ant.* 

Ind. Present. Menac-e, -es, -e, raewac-ons, 5 menac-ez, -ent. 

Imperatif. Menag-ons. 

1. ModeefeekasiS 11 ' dw radeekal' do n lay vayr'b* raygwliay', modifications of 
the stem in the regular verbs. 2. Premier 6 k6 n zhwgez6 n ', first conjugation. 

3. All the verbs subject to the irregularities mentioned in the following 
rules, will be given in the " list of the most important regular verbs;" at 
the end of this book. 

4. Menaso n ', threatening. 5. Menaso 11 ', we threaten. 



REGULAR VERBS. 85 

Imparfait. il/enag-ais,-ais,-ait, raenac-ions,-iez,menac-aient. 6 

Passe" D6fini. Menag-aA, -as, -a, -ames, -ates, raenac-erent. 7 
Imp. du Subj. ilfe?iac-asse, -asses, -at, -assions, -assiez, -assent. 8 

2. For the same reason verbs ending in ger like man- 
ger 3 (mo D zhay'), to eat, whose radical ends in g, take an e 
mute after the g, in order to preserve the soft sound of 
that letter before terminations beginning with an a or o ; 
see page 17, No. 5 ; examples : 

Part. Pr£s. J/cm#e-ant. 9 

Ind. Pr6s. Nous mange-ons. 10 

Imp6ratif. Mange-ons. 10 

Imparfait. JV/an#e-ais,-ais, -ait, mcm^r-ions, -iez, mcm^e-aient. 11 

Passe" D6rlni. Mange-sci, -as, -a, -ames, -ates, raom^-erent. 

Imp. duSubj. ili/cm^e-asse, -asses, -at, -assions, -assiez, -assent. 12 

3. Verbs which have an e mute in the penultimate 

syllable of the infinitive, like mener 3 (menay'), to lead, 

change it into e open before the twenty-one terminations 

beginning in e mute ; those having a closed e (e) in the pe- 

ultimate, like regner 3 (rayniay'), to reign, take the open 

e only before the three terminations e, es and ent ; in 

other words, they keep the e closed in the future and 

conditional ; e. g. : 

Ind Pr6s I Men-e, -es, -e, men-ons, -ez, men-ent. 13 

I Regn-e, -es, -e, r&gn-ons, -ez, regn-ent. 13 

Futurs. < en ~ \ ersi. -eras, -era, -erons, -erez, -eront. 14 

Conditionnels. l M * n - lerais, -erais, -erait, -erions, -eriez, 

' \jRegn-J -eraient. 
Subi Pres I ^® n " e > " es > " e > wien-ions, -iez, men-ent. 13 

I J2egn-e, -es, -e, 7'egn-ions, -iez, re^w-ent. 13 
Imp6ratifs. J/en-e, reg?i-e. 

6. Menase', -se', -s^, -si6 n ', -siay', -se', I threatened, etc. 

7. Menase', -sa', sa', -sa'm e , -sa't e , s6're, I threatened, etc. 

8. Menasa's e , -a's e , -sa', -asio n ', -asiay', -a's e , that I might threaten, etc. 

9. Mo n zho n ', eating. 10. Mo n zho n ', we eat. 
11. Mo n zhe', etc. 12. Mo n zha's e , etc. 

13. Me'n e , etc. Re'nye, etc. 14. Menere', etc. Raynyere 7 , etc. 



86 CORTINA METHOD. 

Exception. — Verbs in eger and eer, like abreger* 
(abrayzhay'), to abreviate; creer 315 (cray-ay'), to create, form 
exceptions to the above rule, and keep the acute accent 
throughout all the tenses. 

Note. — Verbs in echer, 3 eler, 3 ener, 3 eter, 3 and etrer, 3 
like pecker (p£shay'), to fish; meter (melay'), to mix; 
gener (zhdnay'), to hamper; preter (pretay'), to lend; em- 
petrer (o n p6tray'), to entangle, keep the circumflex accent 
in all their tenses. 

4. Verbs ending eler and eter, like appeler 3 (ape- 
lay')? to call; jeter 3 (zhetay'), to throw, etc., in which the 
radical ends with a single 1 or t preceded by an e mute,, 
duplicate the 1 or t before the twenty-one terminations 
mentioned in case 3, instead of changing the e mute into 
open e. 16 Their present indicative is therefore as follows : 

AppeR-e, -es, -e, appel-ons, -ez, appetl-ent. 11 
Jett-e, -es, -e, jet-ons, ez, jett-ent™ 

and likewise in the other tenses. 

Exception. — According to the French Academy the 
following twenty verbs 19 do not follow this rule : 

Acheter (a9h , tay / ),^o6w2/.[wen^.Becqueter (bek'tay'), to peck. 
Bourreler (boorr'lay'), to tor-Celer (selay / ), to seal. 
Colleter(koFtay / ), to collar. Crocheter (crosh'tay'), to pick. 
Deceler (days' lay'), to detect. Decolleter, to dress low necked. 
Degeler (dayzh'lay'), to thaw. IScarteler (aykartelay), to quar- 
lStiqueter (ayteek'tay'), to label. Geler (zhelay 7 ), to freeze. Iter. 

15. This verb, as well as all others in which the last letter of the stem is 
an[e closed (6), like agrier (agrayay), to admit ; recrter (raykrayayO, to enter- 
tain ; suppUer (swplayayO, to supply, etc., preserve the 6 in all the tenses 
where the termination begins with the same vowel. The feminine form of 
the past participle of these verbs is spelled with three consecutive e's (66e), 
like in crSSe, created ; agriSe, admitted ; recriie, recreated, etc. 

16. Verbs in eler and eter must not be mistaken for those in iter and iter, 
like inquiUer (a n kiaytayO, to worry, and r&vHer (rayvaylayO, to reveal, which 
belong to case No. 3. 17. Ape^, etc. 18. Zhe'ts etc. 

19. This exception to the rule is much criticized by some grammarians. 



REGULAR VERBS. 87 

Haleter (Aal'tay'), to pant. Harceler (^arselay / ), to harass. 

Marteler (mart' lay / ),?!o7iammer. Modeler (mod'lay'), to model. 
Museler (mwz'lay'), to muzzle. Peler (pelay'), to peal. \et. 

Racheter(rash'tay / )^o buy 6ac&.Trompeter (tro n petay),fo trump- 

These verbs do not duplicate the 1 or the t before ter- 
minations in e mute, but it becomes necessary to open 
the sound of the e with a grave accent when it precedes 
certain consonants, as indicated in the general rule, 
No. 3j e.g.: 

J'achete (zhashef), I buy ; tu bourreles (tu boorrel'), thou tor- 
mentest; il gele (eel zhe'i 3 ), it freezes; Us haletent (eel 
halh'tf), they pant; pele (pe'r 2 ), peal; il trompeterei (trp u - 
pet'ra'), he will trumpet; je raodeterais (zhe modelere'), 
I would model ; quHls gtiquetent (aytiquef), let them label. 

Observation. — Verbs ending in eller,* etter* and 
erm*, 3 keep the double consonant throughout the whole 
conjugation. 

5. Verbs ending in oyer 20 and uyer 20 like nettoyer 3 
(naytwayay'), to clean; ennuyer 3 (o n nweeyay')> to bore, 
change the y or last letter of the radical into i before 
all the terminations beginning with an e mute. 21 

Pr6s de Find I Nettoi-e, -es, -e, nettoy-ons, -ez, nettoi-ent. 22 
\ Ennui-e, -es, -e, ennuy-ons, -ez, ennui-ent. 22 

Pres du Subi i ^ eito ^~ e ^ " es ? "^ nettoy-ions, -iez, neftoi-ent. 22 
1 Ennui-e, -es, -e, ennuy-ions, -iez, ennui-ent. 22 

Futurs. \ _ e °*~ \ erai, -eras, -era, -erons, -erez, -eront. 23 

I Ennui- i 

Conditionnels. / ^6«oi- 1 erais, -erais, -erait, -erions, -eriez, 
I Ennui- ) eraient. 24 

20. See page 19, Y. 

21. This rule is applicable to nearly all verbs,whetker regular or irregular, 
except those ending in ayei; which take a y in some of their primitive 
tenses ; e. g,: fuyant (fueeyo n '), flying ; Us fuient (eel fwee'), they fly, etc. 
Croyarvt (krwayo n/ ), believing; ils croient (eel krwa'), they believe, etc. 

22. Naytwa', etc.; naytway6 n ', naytwayay', naytwa'. O n nuee', etc.; o*- 
nweey6 n ', o n nueeyay', o n nwee / . 

23. Naytware^, etc. Omweere 7 , etc, 24. Naytware 7 , etc. 

7 



88 CORTINA METHOD. 

Observations. — 1. Verbs ending in ayer 3 and eyer 3 
like payer (peyay'), to pay; grasseyer (graseyay'), 
to stutter j are orthographically regnlar through their 
whole conjugations, i. e., they keep the y of the radical 
even before the terminations ions, iez of the imperfect 
indicative and of the present subjunctive. 25 

2. Verbs ending in ier, like prier 3 (priay'), to pray, 
keep the i of the radical even before the terminations 
ions and iez of the imperfect indicative and of the 
present subj uncti ve. They are therefore perfectly regular. 

6. Verbs ending in uer and ouer like saluer 3 (sahtay'), 
to salute, and louer 3 (looay'), to rent, are quite regular, 
but take a diaeresis on the i (i) 26 of the terminations ions, 
iez, so as to prevent the formation of a diphthong 
between the u and i ; e.g.: nous salmons (noo saXuyo n/ ), 
we saluted; vous saluiez (voo salwyay'), you saluted, 
instead of nous saluions, vous saluiez (salweeo n/ , salw- 
eeay') ? as it would be pronounced without the diaeresis. 

7. Verbs in guer 3 and quer, 3 like pratiquer (pratee- 
kay'), to practice, and fatiguer (fateegay'), to tire, are 
conj ugated like those in uer, case 6 ; the u of the stem 
forms an integral part of the g and a and never disap- 
pears, having no phonetic value of its own except in 
connection with them. It is kept, for instance, before 
the vowels a and o when it is really not necessary, as in 
fatiguons , "fatigues ,fatigua,,fatigua,m.e s ,fatigua,tes , 28 and 
fatigu&sse, fatigu&sses™ etc. ; pratiquons™ pratiques,* 1 
etc., and pratiqu&s&e,* 2 etc. 

25. The above remark is made on account of the persistency with which 
some authorities insist on classifying these verbs with those of No. 5, which 
is incorrect. 

26. See page 41, "Le Tr6ma," and page 20, note 14. 

27. Fateego 11 '. 28. Fateega', fateega'm", fateega't". 
29. Fateegasss etc. 30. Prateek6°'. 

31. Prateeka, etc. 32. Prateeka'ss 6 , etc. 



REGULAR VERBS. 89 

Observation. — In arguer (argway'), to argue, the u 
has a phonetic value of its own, which does not occur in 
fatiguer (fateegay'), conjuguer (ko D zhwgay'), etc. ; it there- 
fore becomes necessary, in order to preserve the sound of 
the radical as it is in the infinitive, to place a diuresis 
upon the e (e) and i (i) of the terminations which begin 
with those letters, 33 viz. : 

Ind. Pr£s. Argu-e, -es, -e, -ons, -ez, -ent. 34 

Futur. A/'gu-enxi, -eras, -era, -erons, -erez, -eront. 35 

Conditionnel. Argu-erais, -erais, -erait, -erions, -eriez, -eraient. 36 
Subj. Pr6s. Argu-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 37 

DEUXIE3IE CONJUGAISON. 33 

Observations. — 1st. Benir (bayneer'), to Ness, has 
two past participles : beni (baynee'), blessed, and benit 
(baynee 7 ). consecrated. The first is regular and most 
generally used; the second is used as an adjective in the 
sense of consecrated: 

Du pain benit, consecrated bread. De l'eau benite, holy water. 

2d. Hair (ftaeer 7 ), to hate, loses the diuresis in the first 
and second persons sing, of the indicative present, as well 
as in the second person singular of the imperative ; e. g. : 

Ind. Pres. Je Tiais, tu hais, il hait. 39 Irnperatif. Hcds.™ 

3d. Fleurir (flereer 7 ), to flourish, to bloom, has an irreg- 
ular present participle which is used in the figurative 
sense of the verb meaning to prosper, to flourish: florissant 
(floreeso 11 '), instead of fleurissant (flereeso 11 '), flourishing. 
The imperfect indicative may be fleurissais or floris- 
sais, indifferently. 

33. See page 20, note 14. 

34. Argu', etc.; arguo n ', arguay', argw'. 35. Argure', etc. 
36. Argure', etc. 37. Argu', etc.; arguyo n ', arguyay', argu'. 
38. Dezie'me k6 n zhugezo n/ , second conjugation. 39. Zhe he, tu 7i6, etc* 



90 CORTINA METHOD. 

Kote. — The verbs sentir (so n teer / ), to fed; dormir 
(dormeer'), to sleep; mentir (mo n teer'), to Me; partir 
(parteer'), to go; sortir (sorteer'), to go out; servir 
(say r veer'), to serve; se repentir (&e repo n teer'), to repent, 
and their compounds, are considered as regular by some 
grammarians, and classified under the head of a second 
model of the second conjugation, which is sentir. We 
will classify them as irregular, to make their study easier. 

Troisieme 40 Conjtjgaison. 

All the verbs of this conjugation which do not end in 
evoir 3 (evwar') are irregular; and being seven in num- 
ber only, they are classified as irregular by some author- 
ities who admit the existence of but three model conju- 
gations, viz : er, ir and re. 

The verb devoir (devwar'); to owe, and its derivative, 
redevoir (redevwar 7 ), to be indebted, take a circumflex 
accent on the u of the past participle and preterit : e.g.: 
du (&u), owed; redu, indebted. This accent is due to the 
derivation of the tense from its own obsolete form, which 
was originally spelled deubt, then deu, and finally dft ; 
so that it is in fact but an indication of the successive 
forms through which the word has passed. 41 

Quatrieme 43 Conjugaison. 

The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three 
classes, which are conjugated on the three following model 
verbs: rendre 3 (ro n/ dr e ), to return; craindre 3 (cra^dr*), 
to fear, and conduire 3 (c6 n dwee'r e ), to lead. 

First Glass — conjugated like rendre: 

1. Includes all verbs ending in endre (except prendre, 
to take, and its compounds), ondref* erdre and ordre.* 

40. Trwazie'm«. 41. See page 39, No. 1. 42. Katrie'm*. 

43. Verbs ending in soudre, like absoudre (absoo'dr*), to absolve, changf 



REGULAR VERBS. 91 

2. And verbs ending in ompre, like rompre (ro n/ pr e ), 
to break, and its compounds corrompre (corro n 'pr e ), to 
corrupt, and interrompre (a n terro n 'pr e ), to interrupt, 
which take a t after the final consonant of the root in 
the third person sing, of the indicative present; e. g. : 
il rompt (eel rd 11 ), he breaks, etc. 

3. Also verbs in aincre, like vaincre (va n/ kr e ), to 
vanquish, and convaincre (c6 n va n 'kr e ), to convince, which 
do not change the final consonant of the root in the third 
person singular of the indicative present ; e. g. : il vainc 
(eel va n ), he vanquishes; il con vainc (eel co n va n/ ), he 
convinces. Before terminations beginning with any of the 
vowels a, e, i, or o, the c changes into qu ;** e. g. : 

Ind. Pres. Vainc-s, -s,-", vamqu-ons, -ez, -ent.* 5 

Imparfait. Famqu-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient.* 8 

Passe\ Vainquris, -is, -it, -tmes, -Ites, -irent. 47 

Subj. Pres. Vainq\x-e } -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent.* 8 

Imp6ratif. Famos, vamqu-ons, -ez. 49 

4. The last subdivision of the first class includes verbs 
in attre, 5 like battre (ba'tr e ), to beat. They drop the 
second t of the stem in the singular of the indicative 
present ; e. g. : je bats, tu bats, U bat. 

Second Class — Verbs of this class end in aindre, 3 ein- 
dre 3 and oindre, 3 like craindre (cra n 'dr e ), to fear; 
peindre (pa n 'dr e ), to paint; joindre (zhwa n 'dr e ), to join, 
and are conjugated like the first one named, whose irregu- 
larity consists in taking a euphonic g before the n of the 
stem and dropping the d in the past participle, in the 

preterit and in all the tenses derived from them. The 

- — . , — 

the d of the stem into t, in the 3d person sing, of the ind. pres.: il absout (eel 
absooO. 44. This case is exactly the reverse of that in cer, page 84. 

45. Va B , etc.; va n k6 n/ , va n kay', va^k 8 . 

46. Vanke 7 , etc.; vankid^, va n kiay / , va n ke / . 

47. Va n kee / , etc.; va»kee'm«, va n kee't e , va»kee'r«. 

48. Va^k*, etc.; va»kio*', va»kiay' f va^k*. 49. Va», va a kd»' f va n kay / . 



92 CORTINA METHOD. 

past participle of these verbs also takes a final t instead 

ofau. Examples : 

Part. Pres. Craign-ant. 50 

Part. Passe\ CraintJ® 

Ind. Present. Crain-s, -s, -t, craign-ons, -ez, -ent. 51 

Imparfait. Craign-siis, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 52 

Passe" Defini. Craign-is, -is, -it, -imes, -ites, -irent. 53 

Imperatif. Crain-s, craign-ons, -ez. 54 

Subj. Pr6s. Craign-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 55 

Subj. Imp. Craign-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 56 

Third Glass — Is composed of verbs ending in mre, 3 like 
instruire (a n staee'r e ), to instruct; traduire (tradwee'r 6 ), 
to translate, for which conduire (ko n d%ee'r e ), to conduct, 
stands as a model. The irregularity of these verbs con- 
sists in the addition of a euphonic s in the present 
participle, in the indicative present and in all the tenses 
derived from them. In the past participle they take a 
final t like those of the second class. Examples : 

Part. Pres. Conduis-ant. 51 

Part. Passe\ Condui-t, b7 

Ind. Pr6s. Condui-s, -s, -t, conduis-ons, -ez, -ent. 58 

Imparfait. Conduis-a\s, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 59 

Passe" D6fini. Conduis-is, -is, -it, -imes, -ites, -irent. 60 

Impgratif. Condui-s, conduis-ons, -ez. 61 

Subj. Pr6s. Conduis-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 62 

Imparfait. Conduis-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 63 

50. Kre-nyo n '. Kra n '. 51. Kra n , etc.; kre-nyo 11 ', kre-nyay', kre'-ny*. 

52. KrS-nye, etc.; kre-ny6 n ', kre-nyay', krg-nye\ 

53. Kre-nyee', etc.; krevnyee'm«, krS-nyee't 6 , krS-nyee'r 6 . 

54. Kra n , kre-nyo n ', krS-nyay'. 

55. Kre'-ny<=, etc.; krS-nyi6°', kre-nyiay', kre'-nye. 

56. Kre-nyee'ss, krS-nyee'ss, kre-nyee', kre-nyeesi6 n ', kre-nyeesiay', kr&> 
nyee'ss. 57. K6 n dweezo n '. K6 n dwee\ 

58. K6 n dwee', etc.; k6 n d«eezo n ', k6 n dweezay', ko n drtee'z e . 

59. K6 n dweeze', etc.; k6 n dweezi6 n ', k6 n dweeziay', ko n d«eez6'. 

60. K6 n dMeezee', etc.; k6 n dweezee'm e , k6 n dweezee't e , ko n dweezee'r». 

61. K6 n dwee', ko n dweezo n ', ko n dMeezay\ 

62. K6 n dwee'z e , etc.; ko n dueezio n ', ko n dweeziay', ko n ditee'z e . 

63. K6 n dweezee's<>, etc, k6 n dweezeessio n ', k6 n dueezeessiay', ko n dt*eezee's«. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 93 

MODES ET TEMPS DU VERBE. 1 
DES MODES. 

The moods consist of the different forms taken by verbs 
in order to express any action or state. 

There are five moods in French, viz : the indicative, 
the imperative, the conditional, the subjunctive and the 
infinitive. 

Le Mode Indicatif. 2 

The indicative mood is that form of the verb which is 
used to define a state or action in a positive or in a 
negative way ; e. g. : 

Vous parlerez bienldt. 3 You will speak soon. 

Je ne le crois pas. 4 I do not believe it. 

due savez-vous f* What do you know? 

Ne parlez-vous pas P Do you not speak ? 

TEMPS DUVEKBE. 6 

The tenses of a verb are distinguished by means of their 
terminations, which denote whether the action or state 
referred to, takes place in the present, in the future or in 
the past. 

The tenses are divided into the simple and the compound 
tensest 

LE PRESENT. 

1. It is the form of the verb by means of which the 
existence of a fact, an action or a state are expressed as 
taking place either at the actual time of speech, as a cus- 
tomary occurrence, or in a general way j e. g. : 

1. Mod-zay to° du vayr'b e , moods and tenses of the verb. 

2. Mod a n deekateef , indicative mood. 3. Voo parleray' bia n t6\ 
4. Zbe ne le crwa' pa. 5. Ke savay'-voo. 6. To n dw vayr'b^ 
7. See page 77, " Formation des Temps." 



94 CORTINA METHOD. 

Midi sonne. 8 Twelve o'clock is striking, 

Je me leve de bonne heure. 9 [mes. n I get up early. 

Le malheur™ eprouve les horn- Misfortune tries men. 

2. Sometimes it is used instead of the past tense, 
especially in narratives, to give a fact more prominence 
and emphasis ; e. g. : 

A peine le clairon sowie-t-il Scarcely had the trumpet 
que la cavalerie s'avance et sounded, when the cavalry 
deroute Pennemi. 12 advanced, and routed the 

enemy. 

l'imparfait. 
This tense expresses that an action or event takes place 
or occurs simultaneously with another action which is 
thereby also referred to ; examples : 

Quand f etais a Paris, /allais When I was in Paris I went 

souvent a V opera.™ to the opera often. [tered. 

H\is&itlorsqueferA,raL u He was reading when I en- 

2. It also denotes custom or habit in the past ; e. g. : 
Elle chantait tous les jours. She sang every day. 

3. This tense is sometimes called descriptive tense, in 
that it is often used to describe the quality of persons 
or things, and the state, place or disposition in which they 
were in the past ; e. g. : - 

II etait tresjeune. 15 He was very young. 

La table etait au milieu.™ The table was in the middle. 

8. Meedee' so'n e , twelve o'clock is striking, at the time of speaking. 

9. Zhe me le'v de bon-ner, I get up early, denoting habit. 

10. See page 68, note 26. Substantives ending in heur are masculine, like 
le bonheur, happiness. 

11. Le maler' ayproo'v 6 16-zom (generality). 

12. A p&'n e le klayro n ' son-teel', ke la kaval'ree' savo n 's« ay dayroot' len'- 
mee / (narrative.) 

13. Ko n zhayte-za' paree', shale soovoo'-ta lopayra'. 

14. Eel leezS' lors'k° zho»tre\ 15. Eel ayte' tre zhe'n*. 
16. La ta'blayte'-td meelie'. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 95 

EE PASSE DEFINI. 

1. Is that form of the verb which expresses existence, 
action or state as having occurred in a time which is past, 
anterior to the actual time of speaking, whether it be an 
hour, a week, a month, a year or ages before. Examples : 

U lui donna dix francs.™ He gave him ten francs. 

Je recus plusieurs lettres. I received several letters. 

Colomb decouvrit V Amerique. 1 * Columbus discovered America. 

2. It is also used in historical narratives and for that 
reason is sometimes known as the " historical tense" j e. g. : 

Napoleon, alors, ne perdit pas Napoleon, then, did not lose 

soixante hommes. 19 sixty men. 

Le general attaqua Vennemi, The general attacked the en- 

le mit en deroute et fit beau- emy, routed them, and made 

coup de prisonniers. 20 many prisoners. 

LE FUTUE. 

1. This tense denotes an action which is about to occur : 

Je lui ecrirai demain. I will write to him to-morrow. 

Nous partirons samedi. We shall depart on Saturday. 

2. In subordinate sentences describing a state or action, 
which depend on a principal verb denoting futurity, the 
French use the future instead of the present tense, as in 
English ; e. g. : 

II promet ceei d celui qui fera He promises this to the man 

cela. 21 [voudrez. 22 who does that. [like. 

Vous apporterez ce que vous You will bring whatever you 

Le Mode Conditionnel. 
This mood denotes that an action may take place pro- 
vided certain conditions are fulfilled ; e. g. : 

17. Eel lwee' dona' dee fro n (two dollars). 

18. C616 n ' daykoovree' lamayree'k e . 

19. Nap61ayo n ', alor', ne payrdee' pa swasoa-tom'. 

20. Le zhaynayral' attaka' len'mee', le mee-to n dayroo'-tay fee bokpo' d« 
preezdniay'. 21. Eel prome 7 sesee a seluee' kee fera' sela'. 

22. Voo-zaporteray' se ke voo voodray\ 



96 CORTINA METHOD. 

Je commencerais si tout etait 23 I would begin if everything 

pret. 2 * \beauf 2b were ready. [er were fair? 

Sortiriez - vous sHl faisait 23 Would you go out if the weath- 

2. It is also used to express desire or to soften the ex- 
pression of a request which might appear too harsh : 

Je voudrais alter en Europe. 2 * I would like to go to Europe. 
Voudriez-vows avoir la bonte f 21 Would you be kind enough ? 

Le Mode Imperatif. 

Is used to command. Generally employed in the present, 

because the locution by means of which an order or a 

command is conveyed is always in that tense, even though 

the order may have to be carried out at a future time ; e. g. : 

Venez me voir demain. Come and see me to-morrow. 

Venez maintenant. Come now. 

Observation. — The French imperative has, properly 
speaking, only three persons, the second person singu- 
lar and the first and second persons plural. 

The first person plural is used instead of the first per- 
son singular, though one person only be speaking : 
Allons (alo n/ ), come. Voyons (vwayo n/ ), let me see. 

The corresponding persons of the subjunctive present 
are generally used as substitutes for the third persons 
sing, and plural of this mood. Some verb expressing will, 
desire or preference is always understood in this case and 
so calls for the use of the conjunction que, that, as an 
equivalent to the English auxiliary let. 

Qrfil chante. 28 Let him sing. 

GLuHls n'ecrivent plus. 29 Let them not write any more. 

23. Note that the verb expressing the condition on which the main action 
depends, is in the subjunctive in English, but in the indicative in French. 

24. Zhe komons're' see too-tayte' pre. 25. Sorteeriay'-voo seel feze 7 b6. 
26. Zhe voodre'-zalay'-roa-nero'pe. 27. Voodriay'-voo-zavwar' la bd n tay'. 

28. Keel sho n 't e . Je veux,je desire or je prefere is understood. 

29. Keel naykree'v e plu. Je veux, etc., qu'ils n'ecrivent plus. 



REGULAR VERBS. 97 

VERBES R^GULIERS LES PLUS IMPORTANTS. 1 

Premiere Conjugaison. 



Abandonner, abandon, \cate. 
Abdiquer (abdeekay 7 ) abdi- 
Abimer (abeemay 7 ) spoil. 
Abonder (ab6 n day 7 ) abound. 
Abonner (abonay 7 ) subscribe. 
Aborder (aborday 7 ) approach. 
Aboyer (abwayay 7 ) bark. 
Abreger 2 (abrayzkay 7 ) shorten. 
Absorber (absorbay 7 ) absorb. 
Abuser (abwzay 7 ) abuse. 
Accabler (acablay 7 ) overwhelm. 
Accaparer, monopolize. 
Accelerer, 3 accelerate, [tuate. 
Accentuer (akso u tway 7 ) accen- 
Accepter (aksayptay 7 ) accept. 
Acclamer (akclamay 7 ) shout. 
Accompagner, escort, {custom. 
Accoutumer (akootwmay 7 ) ac- 
Accrocher, hang upon. 
Accuser (akwzay 7 ) accuse. 
Accumuler, accumulate. 
Acheter 34 (ash'tay 7 ) buy. 
Achever 3 (ash 1 vslj / ) finish. 



Acquitter (akeetay 7 ) acquit. 
Additionner, add. 
Adherer 3 (ad/myray 7 ) adhere, 
Administrer, administer. 
Admirer (admeeray 7 ) admire. 
Adopter (adoptay 7 ) adopt. 
Adorer (adoray 7 ) adore. 
Adresser 5 (adraysay 7 ) address. 
Aerer 3 (a-ayray 7 ) ventilate. 
Affecter (affectay 7 ) affect. 
Af firmer (afeermay 7 ) affirm. 
Affiiger 6 (affleezhay 7 ) afflict. 
Affronter (afro n tay 7 ) affront, 
Agacer 7 (agasay 7 ) nag. 
Agrafer (agrafay 7 ) fasten. 
Agreer 2 (agray-ay 7 ) agree. 
Aider (eday 7 ) help. 
Aimer (emay 7 ) love. 
Ajouter (azhootay 7 ) add. 
Alarmer (alarmay 7 ) alarm. 
Aliener 3 (aliaynay 7 ) cdienate. 
Alimenter (aleemo n tay 7 ) feed. 
Alleguer 3 8 (allaygay 7 ) allege. 



1. Vayr'b 6 rayguliay' le plw-za n porto n ', most important regular verbs. This 
table, which contains a list of the most important verbs of the French lan- 
guage, is made out with a view to a thoroughly practical end. The teacher 
should insist on his pupils learning ten or twenty new verbs out of it for 
each lesson. He should make use of them in his conversation, introduc- 
ing each one of their various tenses and moods little by little, in a progres- 
sive way. The pupil should not only know all the verbs and their tenses 
by heart, he should also be made to use each mood, tense and person with 
rapidity, precision and good judgment. This kind of exercise is of para- 
mount importance as it lays the only true and solid foundation for a thor- 
ough knowledge of the language. 2. See page 86, " Exception." 

3. See page 85, No. 3. 4. See bottom of page 86, " Exception." 

5. To address anybody by word of mouth is rendered in French by 
s'adresser d or addresser la parole d ; to do so in writing is translated by 
icHre d or s'adresserpar e~crit. 6. See page 85, No. 2. 7. See page 84, No. 1. 

8. See page 88, No. 7. 



98 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Allier 9 (alliay 7 ) join. 
Allonger 6 (all6 n zhay / ) extend. 
Alterer 3 (altayray 7 ) alter. 
Allumer (allwmay 7 ) light. 
Amener 10 (am' nay 7 ) bring. 
Ampliner(o n pleefiay 7 )arapfo^. 
Amuser(s') (samwzay 7 ) amuse. 
Analyser, analyze. 
Animer (aneemay 7 ) animate. 
Annoncer(an6 n say / )annowwce. 
Anticiper, anticipate. 
Apitoyer 11 (apeetwayay 7 ) pity. 
Appeler 12 (ap'lay 7 ) call. 
Appliquer (apleekay 7 ) apply, 
Apporter 10 (aportay 7 ) bring. 
Apprecier, 9 appreciate. 
Appreter 13 (aprGtay 7 ) prepare. 
Approcher, approach. 
Approprier, 9 appropriate. 
Approuver, approve. 
Appuyer 11 (appwee-yay 7 ) help, 
Arborer (arboray 7 ) hoist. 
Arguer 14 (argway 7 ) argue. 
Arracher (arrashay 7 ) pull out. 
Arranger (arro n zhay 7 ) arrange. 
Arreter 3 (arr^tay 7 ) stop. 
Arriver (arreevay 7 ) arrive. 
Arroser (arrozay 7 ) water. - 
Assieger 2 (assiay zhay 7 ) besiege. 
Assister (asseestay 7 ) assist. 



Associer 9 (assosiay 7 ) associate* 
Assurer (assuray 7 ) assure. 
Attacher (atashay 7 ) attach. 
Attaquer 8 (atta'kay 7 ) attack, 
Atteler 12 (att'lay 7 ) harness. 
Atterrer 15 (attayrray 7 ) terrify, 
Attester (attestay 7 ) attest. 
Attirer (atteeray 7 ) attract. 
Attiser, to poke {the fire). 
Attraper (attrapay 7 ) catch. 
Augmenter, augment. \ize* 
Autoriser (6t6reezay 7 ) author- 
Avaler (avalay 7 ) swallow. 
Avancer 7 (avo n say 7 ) advance, 
Aveugler (aveglay 7 ) blind. 
Avantager, 6 give advantage, 
Avouer 16 (avooay 7 ) avow. 
Babiller (babeeyay 7 ) babble. 
Badiner (badeenay 7 ) jest, 
Baigner (beniay 7 ) bathe. 
Bailler (ba-yay 7 ) gage, 
Baiser (bGzay 7 ) kiss. 
Baisser (bessay 7 ) lower. 
Balancer 7 (balo n say 7 ) swing, 
Balayer 17 (baleyay 7 ) sweep. 
Balbutier 9 (balbwsiay 7 ) stutter, 
Baptiser (bateezay 7 ) baptize. 
Barrer (barray 7 ) bar. 
Bavarder (bavarday 7 ) chatter, 
Baver (bavay 7 ) drivel. 



9. See page 88, No. 2. 

10. To bring, meaning to fetch, is translated in French by amener; e. g.: 
amener une personne, un cheval, une voiture (vwatw'r*), etc., is to bring (to 
fetch) a person, a horse, a carriage. When bring is used in the sense of 
carrying it is translated by apporter, as in : apporter un livre, une lettre, une 
chaise (sh6'z e ), to bring (to carry) a book, a letter, a chair, etc. The same 
difference exists between mener and porter, meaning respectively to lead or 
to carry without specifying the point where the thing is brought or carried. 

11. See page 87, No. 5. 12. See page 86, No. 4. 13. See page 86, i4 Note." 
14. See page 89, " Observation." 15. See page 87, " Observation." 
10. See page 88, No. 6. 17. See page 88, " Observations.— 1st." 



REGULAR VERBS. 



99 



Becqueter* (bek'tay') peck. 
BScher 13 (bfishay') dig. 
Bercer 7 (bayrsay') rock. 
Blamer (blamay') blame. 
Blasphemer, 3 blaspheme. 
Blesser (blaysay') wound. 
Bloquer 8 (blokay / ) blockade. 
Boucher (booskay') cork. 
Bouger 6 (boozhay') budge. 
Bouleverser, overthrow. 
Bousculer (booskwlay') hustle. 
Boutonner (bootonay') button. 
Braver (bravay / ) brave. 
Briller (breeyay / ) shine. 
Brouiller (brooyay') mix, 
Bruler (braday') burn. 
Cacher (kashay / ) hide. 
Cacheter 12 (kash'tay') seal. 
Calculer (kalkwlay') calculate. 
Calomnier, 9 calumniate, [late. 
Capituler (kapeetwlay') capitu- 
Captiver, captivate. 
Caracteriser, characterize. 
Caresser (karaysay') caress. 
Casser (kassay / ) break. 
Causer (k6zay') chat. 
Ceder 3 (sayday / ) cede, [brate. 
Celebrer 3 (saylaybray') cele- 
Certifier 9 (serteefiay') certify. 
Cesser (sayssay') cease. 
Changer 6 (sho n zhay / ) change. 
Chanter (sho n tay / ) sing. 
Charger 6 (sharzhay') charge. 
Charmer (sharmay / ) charm. 



Chasser (shassay') hunt. 
Chatouiller(shatooiyay / ) tickle 
Chauffer (sh6fay / ) warm.[feet. 
Chausser (sh6say / ) dress the 
Chercher (shayrshay') seek. 
Cimenter (seemo n tay / ) cement 
Cirer (seeray') shine. 
Citer (seetay') cite. 
Claquer 8 (klakay') crack, 
Clarifier (klareefiay / ) clarify. 
Clouer 16 (klooay') nail. 
Coiffer 18 (kwafay / ) dress the 
Coller (kolay') stick. [hair, 
Colleter* (koFtayO collar. 
Colorier 9 (koloriay / ) color. 
Combiner (k6 n beenay / ) cow- 
Commander, command, [bine, 
Commencer, commence. 
Communiquer, 8 communicate. 
Comparer (k6 n paray / ) compare 
Completer, complete. 
Complimenter, compliment. 
Compliquer, 8 complicate. 
Composer(k6 n pozay / ) compose. 
Compter 19 (k6 n tay / ) count. 
Concentrer, concentrate. 
Confederer, 3 confederate. 
Confesser (ko n fayssay / ) confess. 
Conner (ko n fiay / ) confide. 
Congedier 9 (ko n zhaydiay / ) dis- 
Conjuguer, 8 conjugate, [miss. 
Consacrer, consecrate. 
Conseiller (k6 n say-yay r ) conn- 
Considerer, 3 consider. [sel. 



18. This verb also has a figurative meaning which has no reference to 
combing the hair ; e. g.: qui esi-ce qui vous coiffe f (kee 6s kee voo kwaf), who 
dresses your hair ? And in a figurative sense : ce chapeau vous coiffe Men (se 
shapd' voo kwaf bia n ')» that hat suits you well, literally, caps you well. 

19. Compter, figuratively, can be used to express anticipation : je compte 
partir demain (zhe k6 n 't« parteer* dema n ')> I expect to leave to-morrow. 



100 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Consoler (ko n solay 7 ) console. 
Conspirer, conspire. 
Consulter (ko n sultay 7 ) consult. 
Contempler, contemplate. 
Contenter (ko n to n tay 7 ) content. 
Conter (ko n tay 7 ) tell. [tinue. 
Continuer (k6 n teemjay 7 ) con- 
Contracter (ko n tractay / ) con- 
Contrarier, 9 contradict, [tract. 
Cooperer (co-opayray 7 ) cooper- 
Copier 9 (kopiay 7 ) copy. [ate. 
Corriger 6 (korreezhay 7 ) correct. 
Courtiser (koorteezay 7 ) court. 
Coueher 20 '(kooshay 7 ) lie down. 
Couper (koopay 7 ) cut. 
Couter (kootay 7 ) cost. 
Crayonner (krSyonay 7 ) sketch. 
Creer 2 (krayay 7 ) create. 
Crever 3 (krevay 7 ) burst, [cize. 
Critiquer (kreeteekay 7 ) criti- 
Crier 9 (kreeay 7 ) shout. 
Cruciner 9 (krwseefiay 7 ) crucify. 
Cultiver (kidteevay 7 ) cultivate. 
Damner (danay 7 ) damn. 
Danser (do n say 7 ) dance. 
Dater (datay 7 ) date, [embark. 
Debarquer 8 (daybarkay 7 ) dis- 
Decacheter, 12 unseal. 
Decharger, unload. [pher. 
Dechiffrer (daysheefray 7 ) deci- 
Dechirer (daysheeray 7 ) tear. 
Decider (dayseeday 7 ) decide. 
Declarer (dayklaray 7 ) declare. 
Decreter 3 (daykray tay 7 ) decree. 
Decourager, 6 discourage, [hook 
Decrocher (daykroshay 7 ) un- 



Dedier 9 (daydiay 7 ) dedicate. 
Deferer 3 (dayfayray 7 ) defer. 
Defier 9 (dayfiay 7 ) defy. [ure. 
Defigurer (day feegztray 7 ) disfig- 
Degager, 6 disengage. [fast. 
Dejeuner (dayzhenay 7 ) break- 
Deinenager, 6 move. 
Demeurer (demeray 7 ) reside. 
Demontrer, demonstrate. 
Denoncer, 7 denounce. 
Depecher 13 (dayp6skay 7 ) A wrr?/. 
Depenser (daypo n say 7 ) spend. 
Deplorer (dayploray 7 ) deplore. 
Deranger (dayro n z]iay 7 ) de- 
Deshabiller, undress, [range. 
Deshabituer, break a custom. 
Deshonorer, dishonor. 
Desirer (dayzeeray 7 ) desire. 
Dessiner (dayseenay 7 ) draw. 
Detacher (daytashay 7 ) detach. 
Detailler (dayta-yay 7 ) detail. 
Developper, develop. 
Devier (dayviay 7 ) deviate. 
Dieter (deektay 7 ) dictate. 
Digerer 3 (deezhayray 7 ) digest. 
Diner (deenay 7 ) dine. 
Diriger 6 (deereezhay 7 ) direct. 
Disputer (deespwtay 7 ) dispute. 
Dissimuler, dissimulate. 
Dissiper (deeseepay 7 ) dissipate. 
Divulguer 8 (deevwlgay 7 ) di- 
Donner (donay 7 ) give, [vulge. 
Doubler (dooblay 7 ) double. 
Douter (dootay 7 ) doubt. 
Droguer 8 (drogay 7 ) drug. 
Durer (d^ray 7 ) last. 



20. To sleep, when expressing the act of taking a night's rest, is translated 
toy coucher, to lie down ; e. g.: je couche a la campagne (zhe koosh a la ko 11 - 
pa'ny e ), I sleep in the country ; je couche seule (zhe koosh se'l 6 ), I sleep alone. 



REGULAR VERBS. 



101 



Echapper (ayshapay') escape. 
Eclairer (aykleray') light. 
Eclater (ayklatay') explode. 
Economiser, economize. 
Ecouter (aykootay / ) listen. 
Ecraser (aykrazay') crush. 
Edifier 9 (aydeefiay / ) edify. 
Effacer 7 (ayfasay / ) erase. 
Effrayer 17 (ay fre-yay f )frighten. 
Egaliser (aygaleezay / ) equalize 
Egarer (aygaray') mislay. 
Egratigner, scratch. [trify. 
Electriser (aylektreezay') elec- 
Elever (aylevay / ) elevate. 
Emanciper, emancipate. 
Embarasser, embarrass.[bark. 
Embarquer (o n barkay / ) em- 
Embrasser, kiss. [vent. 

Empecher 13 (o n p6shay / ) pre- 
Employer 11 (o n plwa-yay / ) em- 
Empoisonner, poison, [ploy. 
Emporter, 21 take away. 
Emprunter (o n pre n tay / ) borrow 
Encadrer (o n kadray / ) frame. 
Enchanter, enchant. 
Endosser 22 (o n dossay / ) indorse. 
Enfermer (o n fermay / ) shut up. 
Engager (c^gazhay') engage. 
Engraisser (o n gr^say / ) fatten. 
Enlacer 7 (c^lasay') enlace. 
Enlever (o n levay / ) lift up. 
Ennuyer 11 (o n nweeyay / ) bore. 



Enrager (o^razhay') enrage. 
Enrhumer (s'), take cold. 
Enseigner (o n sayniay / ) teach. 
Enterrer 15 (o n tayrray / ) bury. 
Entourer (oHooray') surround. 
Entrer ((^tray') enter, [merate. 
Enumerer 3 (aynwmayray / ) enu- 
Envelopper (o n v'lopay / ) wrap 
Envier 9 (o n viay / ) envy. [up. 
Envisager, 6 look at. 
Epargner (ayparniay 7 ) save. 
Eparpiller (ayparpeeyay') dis- 
Epeler 12 (aypelay / )spe^. [perse. 
Epingler (aypa n glay / ) pin. 
Eponger 6 (ayp6 n zhay / ) sponge. 
Epouser 23 (aypoozay / ) marry. 
Escompter, discount. 
Escorter (ayskortay') escort. 
Espacer 7 (ayspasay / ) space. 
Esperer 3 (ayspayray / ) hope. 
Espionner (ayspionay') spy, 
Essayer 17 (aysseyay') try. 
Essuyer 11 (aysst^eeyay 7 ) wipe. 
Estimer(aysteemay / ) estimate. 
Estropier 9 (aystropiay / ) cripple 
Etonner (aytonay') astonish. 
Etouffer (aytoofay') suffocate. 
Etudier 9 (aytwdiay') study. 
Eveiller (ay veyay 7 ) wake. 
Eviter (ayveetay') avoid. 
Exasperer, exasperate. 
Excuser (exewzay') excuse. 



21. See page 10. Emporter is equivalent to the English to take away, -while 
porter means to carry ; e. g.: emportez ca (o n portay r sa), take that away. 

22. Dos (do) means the back; endosser, to place on the back. Endosser un 
habit (o n dossay' e n Tiabee'), to don a coat, to place it on one's back. 

23. Epouser is used in the active sense of to marry : fepouserai une Anglaise, 
I will marry an English woman. Elle Zpousera Jean, she will marry John. 
Marier, to marry, is only used in the reflexive form se marier, to get mar- 
ried : je me marie Vannee prochaine, I will get married next year. 



102 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Excepter (exseptay') except. 
Exercer^egzayrsay'Xprac&ce. 
Exiger 6 (egzeezhay / ) exact. 
Expedier (expaydiay / ) ship. 
Expier 9 (expiay / ) expiate. 
Expirer (expeeray / ) expire. 
Expliquer, 8 explain. 
Explorer (exploray') explore. 
Exposer (expozay') expose. 
Exprimer (expreemay ') express 
Extenuer, 16 extenuate. [tate. 
Faeiliter (faseeleetay / ) facili- 
Falsifier 9 (falseefiay / ) falsify. 
Faner (fanay') fade. 
Fasciner (fasseenay ^fascinate. 
Eatiguer 8 (fateegay 7 ) fatigue. 
Eavoriser (favoreezay') favor. 
Feler 13 (May') crack. 
Feliciter, congratulate, [ment. 
Fermenter (fermo n tay / ') fer- 
Eermer (fermay') close. 
Eeuilleter (feyetay') turn over. 
Eiceler 12 (fees'lay') cord. 
Eier (se) a (fiay') trust. 
Fixer (feexay') fix. 
Flatter (flatay') flatter. 
Flotter (flotay') float. 
Forcer 7 (forsay') force. 
Forger (forzhay') forge. 
Former (formay / ) form. 
Fortifier 9 (forteefiay') fortify. 
Fouetter 15 (fooaytay / ) whip. 
Frapper (frapay') strike. 
Frissonner (freessonay / )s/iwer. 
Froncer 7 (fro n say / ) frown. 
Frotter (frotay') rub. 
Fumer (fwmay') smoke. 



Gager 6 (gazhay') bet. 
Gagner (ganiay') win. 
Garder (garday') keep, 
Gater (gatay') spoil. 
Geler 3 * (zhelay 7 ) freeze. 
Gener 13 (zh^nay 7 ) hamper. 
Glacer 7 (glasay') freeze. 
Gouter (gootay 7 ) taste, [thick. 
Grasseyer 17 (grass6yay x ) speak 
Gratifier 9 (grateefiay') gratify. 
Gratter (grattay') scratch. 
Griffoner (greefonay') scribble. 
Grimacer (greemasay') grin. 
Griser (greezay') intoxicate. 
Gronder (gro n day / ) scold. 
Guetter 15 (gaytay') watch. 
Habiller (Aabeeyay') dress. 
Habituer, accustom. 
Honorer (Aonoray') honor. 
Humilier 9 (Awmeeliay') humil- 
Huer 16 (/may') hoot. \iate. 
Ignorer, be ignorant of. 
Illustrer (eellwstray') illus- 
Imaginer, imagine. [trate. 
Imiter (eemeetay / ) imitate. 
Implorer (a n ploray / ) implore. 
Importer (a n portay') import. 
Imprimer (a n preemay / ) print. 
Indigner (s'), be indignant. 
Indiquer 8 (a n deekay / ) indicate. 
Infecter (a^ectay 7 ) infect. 
Informer (a n formay / ) inform. 
Initier 9 (eeneesiay') initiate. 
Injurier 9 (a n zhwriay / ) abuse. 
Inspirer (a n speeray / ) inspire. 
Insinuer, 16 insinuate. [tute. 
Instituer 16 (a n steetway / ) insti' 



24. To practice, in the sense of studying, is rendered in French by s'ezer* 
cer, to exercise oneself: je m'ezerce au piano, I am practicing the piano. 



REGULAR VERBS. 



103 



Installer (a n stalay 7 ) install. 
Insult er (a n swltay / ) insult 
Interpreter, 3 interpret, [rogate. 
Interroger (a n terrozhay / ) inter- 
Inquieter 3 (a n kiaytay / ) disturb. 
Inventer (a n vo n tay / ) invent. 
Irriter (eerreetay 7 ) irritate. 
Isoler (eezolay') isolate. 
Jeter 12 (zketay') throw. 
Jeuner (zhenay') fast. 
Jouer 16 (zkooay') play. 
Juger 6 (zhwzhay') judge. 
Justifier 9 (zhusteefi&y') justify. 
Labourer (labooray') plow. 
Lacer 7 (lassay') lace. 
Lacher (lashay') let go. 
Laisser (lfissay') leave. 
Laver (lavay') wash. 
Lecher 3 (lashay') lick. 
Lever 3 (levay') raise. 
Limiter (leemeetay / ) limit. 
Livrer (leevray') deliver. 
Loger 6 (lozhay / ) lodge. 
Lorgner, 6 look {through glass- 
Louer 1625 (looay / ) rent. [es). 
Macher (mashay') masticate. 
Maltraiter, maltreat. 
Manier (maniay') handle. 
Manger 6 (mo n zhay / ) eat. 
Manquer 8 (mo n kay / ) miss. 
Marier 923 (mariay') marry. 
Marcher (marshay') walk. 
Marquer 8 (markay') mark. 
Masquer 8 (maskay') mask. 
Mecontenter, displease. 
Menacer 7 (menasay') threaten. 
Mendier 9 (mo n diay / ) beg. 



Mener (menay / ) lead. 
Melanger 6 (melo n zhay / ) mix. 
Menager 6 (maynazhay 7 ) save. 
Mepriser, despise. 
Meriter (mayreetay') deserve. 
Meubler (meblay 7 ) furnish. 
Moderer, 3 moderate. 
Modifier 9 (modeefiay') modify. 
Monter (mo n tay / ) go up. 
Montrer (mo n tray / ) show. 
Mortifier 9 (morteefiay / )mo?*^/2/ 
Moucher (se), blow the nose. 
Mouiller (mooyay 7 ) wet. 
Multiplier, 9 multiply. [mar. 
Murmurer (murmuT&y') mur- 
Nager (nazhay') swim, [gleet. 
Negliger 6 (naygleezhay') ne- 
Negocier, 9 negotiate. 
Nettoyer 11 (nettwayay') clean. 
Nier 9 (neeay') deny. 
Nommer (nommay') name. 
Notifier 9 (noteefiay') notify. 
Noyer 11 (nwa-yay') drown. 
Nouer 16 (nooay') tie. 
Obliger 6 (obleezhay 7 ) oblige. 
Observer (obsayrvay') observe. 
Occuper (ocewpay') occupy. 
Offenser (6fo D say / ) offend. 
Ordonner (ordonnay') order. 
Oser (ozay') dare. 
Oter (otay') withdraw. 
Oublier 9 (oobliay') forget. 
Outrager 6 (ootrazhay') abuse. 
Pacifier 9 (paseefiay') pacify. 
Pardonner(pardonay / )pardow 
Parier 9 (pariay') bet. 
Partager 6 (partazhay') divide. 



25. It is used in the sense of to rent or to let: je loue une maison (m6z6 n 0, 
I rent a house ; je loue ma maison d quelqu'un, I let my house to somebody. 

8 



104 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Passer (passay') pass. 
Patiner (pateenay') skate. 
Payer (p£yay') pay. 
Pecher 13 (p^shay 7 ) sin. 
Peler 3 * (pelay') peel. 
Pencher (po n shay / ) lean. 
Penser 26 (po n say / ) think. 
Perpetuer, 16 perpetuate. 
Persister (perseestay') persist. 
Peser 3 (pezay / ) weigh. 
Pincer (pa n say / ) pinch. 
Placer 7 (plasay 7 ) place. 
Pleurer (pleray 7 ) weep 
Plier 9 (pleeay')/o&Z. 
Plonger 6 (pl6 n zhay / ) dive. 
Porter 10 (portay 7 ) carry. 
Poser (pozay'), place, pose. 
Posseder 3 (possayday / ) j poss6SS. 
Pousser (poossay') push. [tice. 
Pratiquer 8 24 (prateekay') prac- 
Precher 13 (pr^shay') preach. 
Preferer 3 (prayfayray 7 ) prefer. 
Preparer (prayparay 7 ) prepare 
Presenter(prayzo n tay / )presen^ 
Preserver, preserve. 
Presser (prayssay 7 ) hurry, 
Preter 13 (prepay 7 ) lend. 
Prier 9 (priay 7 ) pray. 
Priver (preevay') deprive. 
Privilegier, 9 privilege. 
Prodiguer 8 (prodeegay 7 ) waste. 
Prolonger 6 (prol6 n zhay / ) pro- 
Promener, promenade, [long. 
Prononcer, 7 pronounce. 
Proposer (propozay 7 ) propose. 
Proteger 2 (protayzhay / )p?-o^ec^ 



Protester (protestay') protest, 
Prouver (proovay') prove. 
Provoquer, 8 provoke. 
Publier 9 (pwbleeay') publish. 
Purifier 9 (pwreefiay 7 ) purify. 
Qualifier 9 (kaleefiay') qualify, 
Quereller, 15 quarrel. 
Questionner (kestionay') ques- 
Quitter 13 (keetay') quit, \tion, 
Raccomoder, mend. 
Raconter (rako n tay / ) relate. 
Raisonner (rgzonay') reason. 
Ramener (ramenay') bring 
Ramer (ramay') row. [back. 
Rappeler (rappelay') recall. 
Rapport er (rapportay') bring 
Raser (razay') shave, [back. 
Reciter (rayseetay') recite. 
Recommander, recommend. 
Recompenser, recompense. 
Reconcilier, 9 reconcile. 
Recreer 2 (raykreay') recreate. 
Redoubler, redouble. 
Refuser (refwzay 7 ) refuse. 
Regaler (raygalay') regale. 
Regarder (regarday') look at. 
Regner (rayniay') rule. 
Regretter 15 (regray tay') regret. 
Relier (reliay / ) bind. [mark. 
Remarquer (remarkay') re~ 
Ramasser (ramassay'^'cA; up. 
Remercier, 9 decline. 
Remorquer 8 (remorkay') row. 
Remplacer(ro n plasay / ) replace 
Remuer 16 (remu&y') move. 
Rencontrer (ro n k6 u tray / ) meet. 



26. Penser a is equivalent to the English to bear in mind, while penser de 
implies an opinion. Pensez a moi, bear me in mind ; que pensez-vous de moif 
what do you think of me? 



REGULAR VERBS. 



105 



Renoncer 7 (reno n say 7 ) renounce 
Renouveler, 12 renew 
Repeter 3 (raypaytay 7 ) repeat. 
Repliquer 8 (raypleekay / ) reply. 
Respecter (respektay 7 ) respect. 
Respirer (respeeray / ) breathe. 
Rester (restay 7 ) stay. 
Retrousser(retroosay 7 ) tuck up 
Reveler 3 (rayvaylay 7 ) reveal. 
Rever (r£vay 7 ) dream. 
Revoquer 8 (ray vokay 7 ) revocar. 
Ronger 6 (ro n zhay 7 ) gnaw. 
Rouiller (rooyay / ) rust. 
Ruiner (rweenay 7 ) ruin. 
Ruisseler, 12 stream. 
Sacrifier 9 (sacreefiay 7 ) sacrifice. 
Saler (salay 7 ) salt. 
Saluer 16 (sak^ay 7 ) salute. 
Sauter (sotay 7 ) jump. 
Sauver (sovay 7 ) save. 
Sceiler 15 (selay 7 ) seal. 
Scier 9 (seeay 7 ) saw. 
Secher 3 (sashay 7 ) dry. 
Semer 3 (semay 7 ) sow. 
Serrer (sayrray 7 ) squeeze. 
Signer (seeniay 7 ) sign. 
Siffler (seeflay 7 ) whistle. 
Situer 16 (seetimy 7 ) situate. 
Soigner (swaniay 7 ) nurse. 
Soxmer (sonay 7 ) ring. 
Souffleter 12 (soofletay 7 ) buffet 
Sounaiter (soo/i§tay 7 ) desire. 
Soulager 6 (soolazhay 7 ) relieve. 
Souler (soolay 7 ) make drunk. 
Soupconner (soopsonay 7 ) sus- 
Souper (soopay 7 ) sup. [pect. 
Soupirer (soopiray 7 ) sigh. 
Specifier 9 (spayseefiay 7 ) specify 
Substituer, 16 substitute. 



Sucrer (swcray 7 ) sweeten. 
Suer (si«ay 7 ) perspire. 
Suffoquer 8 (swfokay 7 ) suffocate. 
Suggerer, 3 suggest. 
Suppleer 2 (si^playay 7 ) supply. 
Supposer (swppozay 7 ) suppose. 
Tacher (tashay 7 ) stain. 
Tailler (tayay 7 ) cut. 
Tarder (tarday 7 ) delay. 
Tenter (to n tay 7 ) tempt. 
Terminer (termeenay 7 ) termi- 
Tirer (teeray 7 ) throw. [nate. 
Tolerer 3 (tolayray 7 ) tolerate. 
Tomber (to n bay 7 ) fall. 
Toucher (tooshay 7 ) touch. 
Tourner (toornay 7 ) turn. 
Tousser (toosay 7 ) cough. 
Tracer 7 (trasay 7 ) trace. 
Transporter, trans}Dort. 
Travailler (travayay 7 ) work. 
Traverser (traversay 7 ) traverse 
Tromper (tr6 n pay 7 ) deceive. 
Trotter 4 (trotay 7 ) trot. 
Trouer 16 (trooay 7 ) perforate. 
Trouver (troovay 7 ) find. 
Tuer 16 (tway 7 ) kill. 
Tutoyer 11 (twtwayay 7 ) say thee 
User (wzay 7 ) use. land thou. 
Vanter (vo n tay 7 ) brag. 
Varier 9 (variay 7 ) vary. 
Vegeter 3 (vayzhaytay 7 ) vege- 
Veiller (veyay 7 ) ivatch. [tate. 
Venger 6 (vo n zhay 7 ) avenge. 
Verser (versay 7 ) pour out. 
Vider (veeday 7 ) empty. 
Visiter (veezeetay 7 ) visit. 
Voler (volay 7 ) fly. 
Voyager (vwayazhay 7 ) travel, 
Vulgariser, vulgarize. 



106 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Deuxieme Conjugaison. 



Abolir (aboleer / ) abolish. 
Accomplir, accomplish. 
Affaiblir (afaybleer 7 ) enfeeble. 
Affermir, strengthen. 
Affranchir (afro n sheer / ) pre- 
Agir (azheer 7 ) act. [pay. 

Agrandir (agro n deer / ) enlarge. 
Aigrir (aygreer 7 ) embitter. 
Amollir (amoleer 7 ) mollify. 
Applaudir (aplodeer 7 ) applaud 
Aprofondir (aprof6 n deer 7 ) sift. 
Assortir (assorteer 7 ) sort. 
Avertir (avayrteer / ) warn. 
Bannir (baneer / ) banish. 
Batir (bateer 7 ) build. 
Benir 27 (bayneer 7 ) bless. 
Blanchir (blo n sheer / ) bleach. 
Cherir (sbayreer 7 ) cherish. 
Choisir (shwazeer 7 ) choose. 
Convertir, convert. 
Definir (dayfeeneer 7 ) define. 
Demolir (daymoleer 7 ) demolish 
Desobeir, disobey. 
Desunir (dayzwneer 7 ) disjoin. 
Divertir (deeverteer 7 ) divert. „ 
ISclaircir (ayklayrseer 7 ) clear. 
iSlargir (aylarzheer 7 ) widen. 
Embellir (o n bayleer / ) beautify. 



Engloutir, swallow up. 
Ennoblir (anobleer 7 ) ennoble. 
Enrichir (o n reesheer 7 ) enrich. 
iStablir (aytableer / ) establish. 
JStourdir (aytoordeer / ) stun. 
Faiblir (febleer 7 ) weaken. 
Farcir (farseer 7 ) stuff. 
Finir (feeneer 7 ) finish. 
Fleurir 28 (flereer 7 ) bloom. 
Fournir (foorneer 7 ) furnish. 
Garantir, guarantee. 
Garnir (garneer 7 ) garnish. 
Gemir (zhaymeer 7 ) groan. 
Gesir, 29 lie {ill or dead). 
Grandir(gro n deer')#row taller, 
Guerir (gayreer 7 ) cure. 
Hair 30 (Aaeer 7 ) hate. 
Honnir 31 (Aoneer 7 ) accurse. 
Jouir (zhooeer 7 ) enjoy. 
Maigrir (maygreer 7 ) grow thin. 
Meurtrir (mertreer 7 ), bruise. 
Moisir (mwazeer 7 ), mildew. 
Murir (mwreer 7 ) ripen. 
Noircir (nwarseer 7 ) blacken. 
Nourrir (noorreer 7 ) nourish. 
Obeir (obayeer 7 ) obey. 
Ouir 32 (ooeer 7 ) hear. 
Palir (paleer 7 ) grow pale. 



27. See page 89, " Observation 1st." 28. See page 89, " 3d." 

29. Defective verb, of which two tenses only are in use : the present parti- 
ciple, gisant (zheezo n/ ), lying, and the 3d per. sing, of the indicative present, 
il git (eel zhee), he lies; e. g.: un corps gisant a terre, a corpse lying on the 
ground ; ci-gil Pierre Vavare (see zhee piayr' lavar'), here lies Peter the miser. 

30. See page 89, " 2d." 

31. Obsolete, and only used in the past part., honni, as in honni soit qui 
mal y pense, evil be to him who evil thinks. 

32. The compound tenses of this verb are the only ones now in use ; e. g.: 
fai out, tu as oui, etc., and always in connection with dire or parler, as in: 
jai oui parler de cet homme, I have heard speak of this man ; avez-vous out 
dire que le roi est mort f have you heard it said that the king is dead? 



REGULAR VERBS. 



107 



Perir (payreer / ) perish. 
Polir (pOleer 7 ) polish. 
Pourrir (poorreer / ) rot. 
Punir (pwneer / ) punish, [ate. 
Rajeunir (razheneer') rejuven- 
Ravir (raveer') ravish, [fleet. 
Reflechir (rayflaysheer') re- 
Refroidir (refrwadeer') cool. 
Rejouir (rayzhooeer') rejoice. 
Remplir (ro^leer 7 ) Jill. 
Retablir, reestablish. 



Retrecir (raytrayseer') shrink. 
Reunir (raywneer 7 ) unite. 
Reussir (rayz^seer') succeed. 
Rotir (roteer') roast. 
Rougir (roozheer') blush. 
Saisir (sayzeer 7 ) seize. 
Trahir (trhheer') betray. 
Travestir (travaysteer') dis- 
XJnir (imeer') unite. [guise. 
Vernir (vayrneer 7 ) vaymish. 
Vieillir (viayeer') grow old. 



TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. 



Apercevoir, 33 perceive, [ceive. 
Concevoir 33 (ko n sevwar / ) con- 
Decevoir, 33 deceive. 



Devoir 33 (devwar') owe. [ceive. 
Percevoir 33 (persevwar') per- 
Recevoir 33 (resevwar') receive. 



QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. 3 * 



Absoudre 35 (absoo / dr e ) absolve. 
Apprendre (appro n/ dr e ) learn. 
Attendre 36 (att^'dr*) wait. 
Battre 37 (ba'tr*) beat. 
Combattre 37 (co n ba / tr e ) combat. 
Comprendre, 36 comprehend. 
Conduire 38 (co n dt/ee / r e ) conduce 
Confondre, 36 confound, [struct. 
Construire 38 (c6 n strweer / ) con- 



Convaincre, 39 convince. 
Correspondre, 36 correspond. 
Corrompre, 40 corrupt. 
Craindre 41 (cra n/ dr e ) fear. 
Cuire 3842 (kwee'r*) cook. 
Debattre 37 (dayba'ti*) struggle. 
Deduire 38 (daydwee'r e ) deduct. 
Defendre 36 (dayfo n/ dr e ) defend. 
Dependre, 36 depend. 



33. See page 90, "Troisieme Conjugaison." 

34. Observe that the future and conditional of all verbs in re are formed 
by eliminating the final e and adding to the stem the terminations charac- 
teristic of the tenses. 

35. See page 90, note 43. This verb has not past def., and as a matter of 
course no imperf. subj. The past participle is absou (absoc/), absolved. 

36. See page 90, No. 1, and page 82. 37. See page 91, No. 4. 
38. See page 92, " Third Class." 39. See page 91, No. 3. 

40. See page 91, No. 2. 

41. See page 91, "Second Class." 

42. Cuire is most frequently used in the infinitive with the verb /aire 
(fayr), to make ; e. g.: je/ais cuire (zhe fe kuee / r e ), I make cook, je/erai cuire, 
I will make cook, etc. 



108 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Descendre, 36 descend. [off. 
Deteindre 41 (dayta n/ dr e ) wash 
Detruire 38 (daytrwee / r e ) destroy 
Dissoudre, 35 dissolve. 
Econduire (ayco n dwee / r e ) emit. 
Enduire 38 (o n dt^ee / r e ) anoint. 
Enjoindre, 41 enjoin. [guish. 
Eteindre 41 (ayta n/ dr e ) extin- 
Etendre 36 (ayto n/ dr e ) extend. 
Eendre 36 (fo n/ dr e ) split. 
Feindre 41 (f a n/ dr e ) feign. 
Fondre 36 (f6 n/ dr e ) melt. 
Induire 38 (a n dwee / r e ) induce. 
Instruire 38 (a n strwee / r 6 ) instruct 
Introduire, 38 introduce. 
Interrompre, 40 interrupt. 
Joindre 41 (zhwo n/ dr e ) join. 
Mordre 36 (mor / dr e ) bite. 
Peindre 41 (pa n/ dr e ) paint. 
Pendre 36 (po n/ dr e ) hang. 
Perdre (payi v dr e ) lose. 
Plaindre 41 (pla n/ dr e ) complain. 
Pondre 36 (p6 n/ dr e ) lay eggs. 
Pretendre, 36 pretend. 



Produire, 38 produce. 
Rabattre 37 (raba'tr e ) reduce, 
Rebattre 37 (reba'ti*) rebate. 
Reconduire, 38 escort. 
Reconstruire, 38 reconstruct. 
Reduire 38 (raydwee / r e ) reduce. 
Refondre 36 (refo n/ dr e ) remelt. 
Rejoindre, 41 rejoin. 
Rendre 36 (ro n/ dr e ) render. 
Repandre 36 (raypo n/ dr e ) scatter, 
Repondre, 36 respond. 
Reproduire, 38 reproduce. 
Resoudre, 35 43 resolve. 
Restreindre, restrain. 
Revendre 36 (revo n/ dr e ) resell. 
Rompre 40 (ro n/ pr e ) break. 
Seduire 38 (saydwee'r 6 ) seduce. 
Suivre (si«ee / vr e ) follow. 
Surprendre, 36 surprise, [pend. 
Suspendre 36 (swspo n/ dr e ) sus- 
Tendre 36 (to n/ dr e ) extend, [late. 
Traduire 38 (tradz<ee'r e ) trans- 
Vendre 36 (vo n/ dr e ) sell. 
Vaincre 39 (va n/ cr e ) vanquish. 



43. Resoudre has two past participles : resolu (rayzokt'). of which the fern, 
form is rgsolue, and resous (rayzoo'), see note 35. The former is used in the 
sense of taking a decision, and the latter in the sense of changing, resolving 
into; e. g.; le brouillard s'est resous en pluie (le brooyar' s6 rayzoo' o n plwee'), 
the fog resolved itself (changed) into rain. 



END OF BOOK I. 



DETTXIEME LIVRE. 

PKEMIEKE PAETIE. 

CINQUIEME LEgCXN". 

Aujourd'hui^ozhoorduee'); hier (eeayr'), to-day ; yesterday, 
Courrier(coorriay / ); j'aiafaire(zheafe r ),mcn7/ I have to do. 
Correspondance 2 (corrayspo n do n/ s e ), . correspondence. 
JScrit 3 (aycree / ); occupe 3 (okwpay'), . written; busy. 
Commis (comee / ); affaires 4 (afer'), . clerk; business. 
Traite(tre't e ); effet 5 (ayfe'); ^(aytayO, draft; note; been. 
Je vais (ve); escompter (esc6 n tay / ), . I go ; to discount. 
Especes 6 (espes / ); besoin (bezooa n/ ), . cash; need. 
Monnaie (morie 7 ); de suite (de swee^), change ; at once. 
Trois heures 7 (trooa-zer'), . . . three o'clock. 
Depechons-nous 8 (dayp^sh6 n/ -noo), . let us hurry. 
A compte (a c6 n/ t e ); touclier 9 (tooshay'), on account; to collect, 
Faire savoir (fe r savwa r/ ), . . .to let know. 
Facteur (fakter / ); depart (daypar'), . postman; departure. 
Paquebots-poste (pak'bo / -pos / t e ), . mail steamers. 

1. Literally, to the day of this day ; hui, old French, means this day. 

2. The termination ance is the same, or nearly the same, in both lan- 
guages ; it converts the verb into a substantive : alliance, from allier, to 
ally ; espirance, from esperer, to hope ; assurance, from assurer, to assure. 

3. Past participles of e~crire, to write, occuper, to occupy, and itre, to be. 

4. Words ending in aire are masculine ; but affaire, circulaire, grammaire, 
paire, are feminine. 

5. Effet, in commercial language, means a note, a bill, a deed. 

6. Especes is equivalent to cash. 

7. Heures, hours, which is always expressed after a numeral to denote 
the time, is equivalent to o'clock. 

8. Imperative of the reflexive verb se dfpecher, to hurry. Pronouns in 
interrogative and imperative sentences are placed after the verb. See 
page 48, note 18. 

9. Toucher, to touch, is equivalent to to collect, used as a commercial term. 



110 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Nombres CardiTUtux, 10 



0. Zero (zayro'). 19. 

1. Un 11 (e n ), une 11 (wn e ). 20. 

2. Deux (de). 21. 

3. Trois (trwa'). 22. 

4. Quatre (ka'tr 9 ). 23. 

5. Cinq 12 (sa n k'). 24. 

6. Six 12 (sees). 25. 

7. Sept 12 (set). 26. 

8. Huit 12 (/meet'). 27. 

9. Neuf 12 (nef). 28. 

10. Dix 12 (dees). 29. 

11. Onze 13 (6 n/ z e ). 30. 

12. Douze (doo'z e ). 31, 

13. Treize (tre'z e ). 

14. Quatorze (kator'z e ). 40. 

15. duinze (ka n/ z e ). 41, 

16. Seize (se'z e ). 50. 

17. Dix-sept 12 (dee-set'). 60. 

18. Dix-huit 12 (dee-zwee't). 70. 



Dix-neuf (dees-nef). 
Vingt 14 (va n ). 
Vingt et un 15 (va n -tay e a ). 
Vingt-deux 15 (va n t-de'). 
Vingt-trois (va n t-tr wa') . 
Vingt-quatre (va n t-ka / tr e ). 
Vingt-cinq (va n t-sa n k / ). 
Vingt-six (va n t-sees / ). 
Vingt-sept (va n t-sef). 
Vingt-huit (va n -twee't). 
Vingt-neuf (va n t-nef). 
Trente (tro n/ t e ). 
etc. Trente et un, 15 etc. 
(tro n/ -tay e n , etsetayra'). 
Quarante (karo n/ t e ). 
etc. Quarante et un, 15 etc. 16 
Cinquante (sa n ko n/ t e ). 
Soixante (swaso n/ t e ) . [dees) . 
Soixante-dix 17 (swaso n/ t e - 



10. No n 'br« cardeeno', cardinal numbers. 

11. Un, une, numeral adjectives, agree in gender with their nouns ; e. g.: 
un homme, une femme. The adjective un is more positive in its meaning 
than the article un, which is indefinite ; the adjective has relation only to 
the number ; it means only one. 

12. Cinq (page 30, note 17), six, sept, huit (page 34, Letter T), neuf, dix, make 
the liaison wi + h the following word when it begins with a vowel or an h not 
aspirated. The x of six and dix sounds like an s (see page 35, Nos. 3 and 4) 
when the word stands alone, but before a word beginning with a vowel or 
an h not aspirated, it sounds like a soft z ; e. g.: dix (six) hommes (dee-z6m\ 
see-zom'). When the word begins with a consonant the x is silent. The 
p in sept is also silent (page 29, Letter P). 

13. Before the word onze there is no elision, e. g.: le onze instead of Vonze ; 
la onzieme lecon, the eleventh lesson. 

14. In vingt the t is mute, when the word is used alone or before a conso- 
nant, but in counting from 21 to 29 inclusively, the t is pronounced softly 
(page 34, Letter T). 

15. The conjunction et is only used in the first number of the decimals, as 
in 21, 31, 41, 51 and 61 ; in other cases a hyphen is placed between, but above 
one hundred the hyphen is omitted. 

16. fitsetayra'. 

17. Literally, sixty (and) ten, sixty (and) eleven, sixty (and) twelve, etc. 



FIFTH LESSON. 



Ill 



71. Soixanteetonze 17 (swaso n/ - 

tay 6 n/ z e ). [doo'z e ). 

72. Soixante-douze 17 (swaso n/ t e - 

73. Soixante-treize (swaso n/ - 

fcrfe'z 8 ). 

74. Soixante-quatorze. 

75. Soixante-quinze. 

76. Soixante-seize. 

77. Soixante-dix-sept. 

78. Soixante-dix-huit. 

79. Soixante-dix-neuf. [va n/ ). 

80. Quatre-vingts 18 (ka'ti*- 

81. Quatre- vingt-un (ka'tr*- 

vay e n ). 

82. Gluatre-vingt-deux. 

83. Quatre-vingt-trois. 

84. Quatre-vingt-quatre. 

85. Quatre-vingt-cinq. 

90. Quatre-vingt-dix (ka / tr e - 

va n -dees') . [va n/ -6 n/ z e ) . 

91. Quatre-vingt-onze (ka / tr e - 

92. etc. Quatre-vingt-douze, 

etc. (ka / tr e -va n -doo / z e ). 

100. Cent 1819 (so n ). 

101. Cent 15 un (so n e n ). 
150. Cent cinquante. 



175. Cent soixante-quinze. 

200. Deux cents. 18 

222. Deux cent vingt-deux. 

300. Trois cents. 

360. Trois cent soixante. 

400. Quatre cents. 

444. Quatre cent quarante- 

500. Cinq cents. [quatre. 

600. Six cents. 

777. Sept cent soixante-dix- 

800. Huit cents. [sept. 

900. Neuf cents (nef so n ). 

1,000. MiUe 20 (mee^). 

2,000. Deuxmille. 

5,000. Cinqmille. 

5,673. Cinq mille six cent 

soixante-treize. 
10,000. Dix mille. [lyo n/ ). 
1,000,000. Un million (e n mee- 
1,000,000,000. Un billion 21 (e Q 

beelyo n/ ). 

1894. Mil huit cent quatre- 
ving^-quatorze. 

1895. Mil huit cent quatre- 
vingt-quinze. 

1900. Mil neuf cents. 



18. Vingt and cent, when multiplied and not immediately followed by 
another number, take the plural ending ; as, quatre-vingts piastres ; but they 
are invariable when another number follows : e. g. : quatre-vingt-trois. 
Vingt and cent do not take the plural ending when they are used for 
vingtieme and centieme, as in ran huit cent, for instance. 

19. Cent, as well as the numbers 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 100, form collect- 
ive numbers by adding aine; e. g.: huitaine, dizaine, douzaine, quinzaine, 
vingtaine, trentaine, quarantaine, cinquantaine, soixantaine, centaine ; e. g.: 
une centaine de dictionnaires, one hundred dictionaries. 

20. Mille is written mil in the ordinary computation of years ; as, mil huit 
cent. Mille, meaning thousands, is invariable'; mille, meaning mile, meas- 
ure of distance, takes s in the plural. Mille and cent are sometimes used as 
nouns, in which case they may be limited by a numeral adjective ; as in 
un cent d'huitres, one hundred oysters ; un mille de briques, one thousand 
bricks. 

21. Un billion is also called un milliard, or one thousand millions. 



112 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. Qu' 22 avez-vous 23 fait 24 aujourd'hui? 1 

2. J'ai 23 ete 325 tres occupe ; 3 j'ai fait 24 mon courrier. 

3. Avez- vous ecrit 3 votre correspondance 2 anglaise ? 

4. Non, j'ai 23 fait 24 le courrier espagnol ; un commis 

a fait l'anglais.* 

5. Est-ce que 26 vous avez des relations de com- 

merce avec les pays anglais? 27 

6 . Nous avons 23 fait des affaires 4 avec les Etat s-ITnis. * 

7. Hier nous avons negocie une traite sur Chicago. 

8. Je vais 28 escompter cet 29 effet 5 et le convertir en 

especes 6 ; j'ai besoin de monnaie 30 francaise.* 

9. Mais il nous faut 31 aller de suite a la banque, car 

elle ferme a trois heures. 7 

♦TRADUCTION LITTfiRALE. 

4 the mail Spanish ; a clerk has done the English. 

6. We have done of the business with the United States. 
8. I go to discount this note and it to convert in cash ; I have 
need of coin French. 

22. The interrogative and relative pronouns are quet (k.e), who? whom? 
for persons, as subject or object; que? (ke), what? for things, as direct 
object; quoi? (kwa'), what? for things after prepositions, as in de quoi par- 
lez-vousf lequelf laquellef (l£keT, lahk6'l e ), which? which one? lesqnclsf 
lesquellesf which? which ones? Lequel is used to represent persons and 
things, and agrees, in gender and number, with the noun. The pronouns 
que and quoi, require de before the adjective to which they refer; e. g.r 
qu^ est-ce quHl y a (quoi) de bon f what is there good ? 

23. In interrogative sentences formed with the compound tenses, the pro- 
nouns are placed between the auxiliary and the pai'ticiple. Avez is the 2d 
per. plural indie, mode, present, of the verb avoir (avwar'), to have : fax, 
tu as, il a, elle a, nous avons, vous avez, Us, elles ont. 

24. Past participle of the irregular verb /aire, (fer). Avoir is used as **i 
auxiliary with the active and neuter verbs. 



FIFTH LESSON. 



113 



PRONONCIATION. 

1. Kavay'-vooffe-tozhoord^ee? 

2. Zhh ay tay' trfe-zokwpay' 

fh mo u kooriay'. 

3. Avay / -voo-zaykree / v6 / tr e 

c^glkV? 

4 fespanyol'; e n komee / a 

fh lo n glfe'. 

5 day relasio n/ de ko- 

mayr's e avfek' lb payee'- 

zo n glh /e > 
Q. Noo-zavo n/ fh dfe-zaf&'r 

av&k' lfe-zayta / -zwnee / . 
7 naygosiay' im e tr^'fr 

sur sheecago'. 
3. Zhevfe-zfesco n tay / se-tayffay / 

ay le ko n verteer / o n -nfes- 

p&'s 6 ; zhe bezwo n/ de 

9. Mfe-zeel noo f6-talay' de 

sueeH? .... ka-rfc'l e fayr- 

ma trwa'-ze'r. 



TRADUCTION. 

1. What have you done to-day? 

2. I have been very busy ; I 

attended to my mail. 

3. Have you written your Eng- 

lish letters f 

4. No; I wrote the Spanish 

letters; a clerk did the 
English. 

5. Have you any commercial 

relations with English 
countries f 

6. We have done some business 

with the United States. 

7. Yesterday we put through a 

draft on Chicago. 

8. I am going to discount this 

bill and cash it; I need 
some French money. 

9. But we must go to the bank 

at once, as it closes at 
three o ) clock. 



25. Avoir is always the auxiliary of etre and of itself; e. g.: fai its, fai eu. 

26. A verb is conjugated interrogatively either by placing the subject pro- 
noun with a hyphen after the verb, as ai-je (ezh e ), see page 50, note 29, or by 
using est-ce que (es ke) before the subject. The verbs of the first conjugation 
take an acute accent on the final e of the 1st per. sing, when the subject pro- 
noun is after the verb ; as parle-je 9 speak I ? When the first person ends in 
ge, as je mange (ma n 'zh e ), the interrogative form est-ce que is always used: 
est-ce-qxie je mange f do I eat? not mang£-je? this is for the sake of euphony. 

27. See page 74, No. 2. 

28. Pres. indie, of the verb aller (alay') : je vais, iu vas, il va, nous allons, 
vous allez, Us vont (vo n ). 29. See page 66, note 8. 

30. Monnaie, coin, in this case means money. It is the term used for des- 
ignating national currency represented either by silver, gold, or bank notes, 
and also the small change. 

31. llfaut (eel fo), is the pres. indie, of the irregular verb falloir, (fai war'), 
to be necessary; il fallait (fale'), it was necessary; il fallut (falw), it was 
necessary; il a falhi, it has been necessary; il faudra (fodra'), it will be 
necessary ; il faudrait (fo-dre'), it would be necessary. Instead of the infin- 
itive aller the subjunctive can be used preceded by que; e.g.: il faut que 
»ous allions, lit., it is necessary that we should go. 



114 CORTINA METHOD. 

10. Eh bien, venez 32 -donc, et depechons-nous. 8 * 

11. Combien voulez-vous toucher 9 en a compte? 

12. Donnez-moi 8 deux mille cinq cents piastres. 

13. Comment ? Vous m'avez dit 33 que vous aviez 

des billets americains. * 

14. C'est vrai ; donnez-moi deux mille francs : trois 

cents en or et le reste en menue 34 monnaie.* 

15. J'ai a 35 faire enormement ; il me faut 31 partir.* 

16. Nevousf aut-il 36 pasecrirea votre representantP 37 * 

IT. Je mi 38 ai ecrit 3 et telegraphie hier, mais a 
present j'ai a 35 lui 38 faire 39 savoir mon de- 
part. 

18. Le facteur 40 a-t-il delivre mon courrier? 

19. Le courrier pour Paris 40 quel 41 jour part-il?* 

20. Demain. Les paquebots-poste partent tous les 

trois jours. * 

10. Eh ! well, come-then, and hurry-ourselves. 

13. How ? You me have told that you had of the bills Americans. 

14. That-is true ; give me and the rest in small coin. 

15. I have to do enormously ; it me must leave. 

16. Not you must-it not write to your representative ? 
19. The mail for Paris, which day start-he ? 

20 The mail-boats start all the three days. 

32. Imperative of the irregular verb venir : viens (vio n ')» venous, venez. 

33. Past participle of dire (deer), to say, to tell. 

34. Menue, fern, of menu, small. 35. First per. sing. pres. indie, of avoir d. 
36. Interrogative negative form of il faut, note 31. It could also be said, 

note 26, est-ce quHl ne vous faut pas f 



FIFTH LESSON. 



115 



10 venay' d6 n -kay day- 

p6sho n/ -noo. 
11 voolay'-voo tooshay'- 

ro n -na ko n/ t e ? 
12 de mee^ sa n so n peeas'- 

tr e . 
13 Voo mavay' dee ke 

voo-zaveeay / de beeye-za- 

mayreeka n/ . 
14. Se vre', . . . . de mee'P fro n ; 

o n -nor / ay le res't 6 o n 

menu 7 mone'. 
15 aynormaymo n/ ; 

— parteer'. 
16 fo-teel' pa-zaycreer' a 

vo'tr 6 rayprayso n to n/ ? 

17. Zhe lwee' e taylaygra- 

fiay' — savwar' mo n 
daypar'. 

18. Le fakter' — dayleevray' 

19 kel zhoor par-teel'? 

20 Le pakebo'-pos'tf 

par't 6 too le trwa' — 



10. Well, then, come along, 

and let us hurry. 

11. How much do you wish to 

draw on account ? 

12. Give me two thousand five 

hundred dollars. 

13. Well, but you told me you 

had American bills. 

14. True; give me 2,000 francs: 

300 in gold and the rest 
in small change. 

15. I am extremely busy ; I 

must leave. 

16. Do you not need to write 

to your representative f 

17. I wrote and telegraphed 

him yesterday, but I have 
now to let him know of 
my departure. 

18. Has the postman delivered 

my mail ? 

19. What day does the mail 

leave for Paris f 

20. To-morrow ; the mail boats 

sail every three days. 



37. Representant is derived from reprtsenter (repraysoM;ay'), to represent. 
The termination ant, which characterizes the present participles, is also 
used to form many adjectives derived from the corresponding verb. 

38. See page 76, note 8. Lui has reference to representant ; it is the indirect 
object of the verb, and when placed before the verb is translated by to him. 

39. Faire followed by an infinitive is considered as being one verb; in 
this case no object must be placed between the two verbs ; if it is a per- 
sonal pronoun it must precede faire, as in the text, and if it is a noun it goes 
after the verb; e. g.: je fais faire un pardessus (zhe fe fer e n pardesi<), I am 
having an overcoat made. 

40. Facteur is the subject and, therefore, precedes the verb, page 68, note 25. 

41. Qn el is an indefinite adjective; quelle is the feminine; the plural is 
formed by adding an s: quels, quelles. Quel is always followed by a noun, 
while lequel is used interrogatively without it; e. g.: quel livre (lequel) 
voulez-vous 9 what book (which one) do you want ? See note 22. 



116 CORTINA METHOD. 

SIXIEME LEgOK 

Nouveau Vocabulaire. 

Voir (vwar 7 ); malade (mala'd e ), . . to see; ill. 

Longtemps 1 (16 n to n/ ); depuis' 2 (depwee'), a long time; from, 

Dernier (derniay'); violent (veeolo n/ ), . last; violent [since. 

Mai de tete 3 (mal de te^t 6 ), . . . headache. 

Et puis 4 (pwee'); froid (frwa'), . . besides; cold. 

Appetit (apaytee'); faim (fa u ), . . appetite; hunger. 

Soif (swa'f); sommeil (somay'eey 6 ), . thirst; sleepy. 

Du tout 5 (du too); non plus 6 (no n plw), . at all ; either. 

Maladie 7 ' (maladee 7 ); peur (per), . . illness; fear. 

Dangereuse 8 (do n zhere / z e ) ; car (car), . dangerous ; because. 

Age 9 (azhay / ); de plus (deplw), . . aged; more. 

Ayez la bonte (eyay' la bdHay')? . . have the kindness. 

Pres d'ici (pre deesee / ); demi (demee'), near by ; half. 

Je le regrette (zhe le regret), . . I regret it. 

Division 10 du Temps 11 — Mois de VAnnee. 12 
Janvier (zho n veeay / ) ; fevrier(fayvriay / ), January ; February. 
Mars (mars) ; avril (avreel') ; mai(may), March; April; May. 
Juin(zhwa n/ ); juillet(zht<eeye / ); aout(oo), June; July; August. 
Septembre(septo n/ br e ); octobre^kto'br 6 ), Sep tember; October. 
Novembre (novo n/ br e ), .... November. 
Decembre (dayso n/ br e ), . . * . . December. 

1. Adverb composed of long,.long, and temps, time. 

2. Depuis is the preposition which is generally used as the equivalent of 
since or from in speaking of time or place; e. g.: depuis la semaine dernitre, 
since last week ; depuis Paris jusqu'd Bordeaux (bordo'), from Paris to Bor- 
deaux. 

3. Note the difference between mal de tile, headache, and mal d la ttte, 
pain in any part of the head ; mal de dents, toothache, and mat aux dents, 
pain in the teeth. 4. Puis, adverb, then ; et puis, moreover, besides. 

5. Du tout corresponds to at all, as in rien du tout, nothing at all. 

6. Non plus, literally, no more, is equivalent to either if expressed with a 
negative, and neither if without it; e. g.: ni moi non plus, nor I either; lui 
non plus, he neither. 

7. Maladie, malady, sickness. English words ending in y (excepting 
those in ty) generally change their termination into ie in French ; e. g.: 
acadimie, Sconomie, harmonie, etc. 



SIXTH LESSON. 117 

Un siecle (sie'kl e ); un mois (mwa'), . a century ; a month. 

Un an 12 (e n -no n/ ) ; une annee (w-nanay'), a year. 

Une semaine (seme'n 6 ) ; une heure (er), a week; an hour. 

Un jour 12 (zhoor); une journee, 12 . a day. 

Une minute; 13 une seconde 13 (sego n/ d e ), a minute; a second. 

Aujourd'hui 14 (ozhoordwee') J nier > • to-day; yesterday. 

Avant-hier 15 (avo n/ -teeayr / ), . . day before yesterday. 

Demain (dema n/ ), .... to-morrow. 

Apres-demain 16 (apre / -dema n/ ), . . day after to-morrow, 

Dans trois jours (do n trwa/ zhoor), . within three days. 

II y a 17 trois jours (ee-leea'), . . three days ago. 

Tous les deux jours 18 (too le de zhoor), every other day. 

L'annee prochaine (proshe'n 6 ), . . next year. 

Le mois prochain (prosha n/ ), . . next month. 

La semaine derniere 19 (dernie'r 6 ), . last week. 

Le commencement (k6mo n s / mo n/ ), . the beginning. 

Le milieu (meelie'); la 13 fin (fa n ), . the middle; the end. 

Vers 20 (vayr) le commencement, le ^ about the beginning, the 
milieu, la fin de l'annee, 12 du mois, I middle, the end of the 
etc., j year, of the month, etc. 

8. Feminine of dangereux, dangerous. See page 52, note 10. Adjectives 
in eux change into euse in the feminine. 

9. Age is an adjective, and signifies old, aged; plus dge, older. 

10. Substantives ending in ion are nearly all alike in both languages: 
addition, division, profession, etc. 

11. Deeveesi6 n ' du to n , division of time. 

12. See page 61, note 27. Mwa' de lanay', months of the year. 

13. Take note of the gender. 14. See page 109, note 1. 
15. Literally, before yesterday. 16. Literally, after to-morrow. 

17. 11 y a is the indicative present of the impersonal verb y avoir, there to 
be, which, like all other impersonal verbs, is conjugated only in the 3d per. 
sing. The y is inserted between the pronoun and the verb, see page 52, 
note 3 ; e. g.: il y a, there is or are ; il y avait (eeleeave 7 ), there was or were ; 
il y a eu (ee-lee a u), there has or have been; il y aura (ee-lee ora'), there 
will be. In interrogative sentences the pronoun is placed after the verb : 
y a-t-ilf is there? or are there? y avail-ilf was there? or were there? etc. 
Y avoir is also used in speaking of the passage of time, in which case it is 
equivalent to ago: il y a dix jours, ten days ago. 

18. Lit., all the two days. Every other day, every thirty years, every three 
hours, etc., are translated by, all the two days, all the thirty years, all the 
three hours, etc.; each day, etc., by chaque jour, etc.; every day, etc., by tous 
les jours, etc. 19. Lit., the week last. 

20. Toward or about : vers les quatre heures, about four o'clock. 



118 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRAN£AIS. 

1. Comment! 21 N'avez-vous pas l'intention 22 de 

sortir aujourd'hui? * 

2. Pas ce matin f 3 je n'ai pas le temps. 

3. Qu'avez-vous a 24 faire? 

4t. II me faut aller 25 voir mon frere qui est tres 
malade.* 

5. Est-il malade depuis longtemps ? 26 * 

6. II y a 17 un mois et demi f depuis 2 le commence- 

ment 21 du mois dernier.* 

7. Mais qu'a-t-il done? 

8. Je ne sais pas ; il a un violent mal de t6te, 3 et 

puis 4 il a toujours froid. 28 * 

9. Ne se trouve-t-il pas mieux? 29 A-t-il perdu Tap- 

petit? 30 * 



♦TRADUCTION LITTFjRALE. 

1. How ! Not have-you not the intention of to go out to-day? 

4. He me must go to see my brother who is very ill. 

5. Is he ill since long-time? 

6. There are (he there have) a month and half ; since the begin- 

ning of the month last. 

8. I not know not ; he has a violent pain of head, and besides 

he has always cold. 

9. Not himself finds-he not better? Has-he lost the appetite? 

21. We have mentioned (page 42) the consonants which are doubled in 
French. The consonants h, j, k, q, v, y, z, are never doubled ; the others 
are under the same rule as in Latin : m, for example, in the combinations 
com, im, som, at the beginning of words, e. g.: comment, immortelle, sommeil. 

22. See page 117, note 10. The greater number of words in ion are formed 
from verbs by changing the termination, as : invention, from inventer ; divi- 
sion, from diviser ; intention, from intenler, etc. 23. See page 60, note 26. 

24. See pages 114 and 112, notes 35 and 23. 



SIXTH LESSON. 



119 



PRONONCIATION. 

1 la n to n sio n/ ozhoor/- 

dwee'? 

2 mata n/ to n . 



3. Kavay'-voo-za-fe'? 

4. Eel me fo-talay 7 vwar' m6 n/ 

frer .... mala'd e . 



TRADUCTION. 

1. Well! Do you not intend 

to go out to-day ? 

2. Not this morning ; I have 

no time. 

3. What have you to do f 

4. I must go and see my broth- 

er, who is very ill. 



5. SteeP depwee' 16 n to n/ ? 5. Has he been ill a long while f 

6. It is one month and a half; 
since the beginning of last 
month. 

7. But what is the matter with 
him, then ? 

8. I do not know ; he has a 



6. Ee-li a e n mua / ay deml 

komo n s'mo n/ der- 

niay'. 

7 

8. Zhe ne sfe veeolo n/ 

pwee'. . . . toozhoor' frwa'. 



9 troov-teel' mie'? . 

payrdit' lapaytee 7 . 



sides he is always cold. 
9. Does he not feel better ■? 
Has he lost his appetite f 



25. See page 113, note 31. It is also proper to say in this case, il faut que 
faille, lit., it is necessary that I may go ; Z is doubled at the beginning of 
words in the combinations col, il, and often in words beginning with al; 
e. g.: collegue, illustre, alter, allumer (to light), etc. 

26. In this sentence the verb y avoir (note 17) may be used : y a-iAl long- 
temps quHl est malade f 

27. Demi, half, is invariable when it precedes the noun, and it is united 
to it by a hyphen : une demi-heure, a half hour, instead of une demie heure ; 
but, une heure et demie, one hour and a half. 

28. Lit., he has always cold. Avoir /aim, avoir froid, avoir soif, avoir sommeil, 
avoir raison, avoir de Vdge, etc., mean, to be hungry, cold, thirsty, sleepy, 
right, old, etc. 

29. We have said, page 66, note 7, that mieux is the irregular comparative 
of the adverb Men ; meilleur is that of the adjective 6o?i. Those adverbs 
which are compared irregularly, that is to say, without the adverb plus, 
more, are bien, well ; mieux, better ; le mieux, the best. Mai, bad ; pis, worse ; 
le pis, the worst. Beaucoup, much ; plus, more ; le plus, the most. Peu, 
little ; moins, less ; le moins, the least. 

30. P is doubled in the combinations ap, op and sup at the beginning of 
a word ; e. g.: approcher, to approach ; opposer, to oppose ; supporter, to 
support. 



120 CORTINA METHOD. 

10. II n'a 28 jamais 31 faim, mais il a 28 toujours soif.* 

11. A-t-il sommeil ? 21 28 Ne dort-il 32 pas bien ? * 

12. II n'a pas dormi du tout 5 la nuit derniere, ni 

moi non plus. 6 

13. J'espere que la maladie 7 n'est pas dangereuse. 8 

14c. Oh ! je n'ai pas peur de cela ; 33 car 34 il est encore 
jeune et fort.* 

15. Quel 35 age a-t-il? 28 * 

16. II a eu seulement trente-neuf 36 ans le mois 

dernier.* 

17. Alors il est plus age 9 que vous. 

18. II a trois ans de plus f j'aurai trente-six ans le 

six mars. 38 * 

19. Allons, 25 ayez 39 la bonte 40 de m'accompagner 41 

tout pres d'ici. 42 

20. Je le regrette ; je vous accompagnerai 41 demain. 

10. He not has never hunger, but he has always thirst. 

11. Has he sleep? Not sleeps-lie not well? 

14. Oh ! J not have not fear of that ; as he is yet 

15. What age has-he? 

16. He has had only thirty-nine years the month last. 

18. He has three years of more ; I shall have thirty-six 

31. Pas is always omitted when the sentence contains a word expressing 
negation, as jamais, never; rien, nothing ; personne, nobody ; aucun, no one. 

32. Interrogative form of the indie, pres. of dormir: je dors, tu dors,il, elle 
dort, nous dormons, vous dormez,ils, elles dorment. 

33. See page 66, note 8. In familiar language cela may be abbreviated 
to ca. It would therefore be proper to say : je n'ai pas peur de ca. 

31. Car, conjunction, is synonymous with parce que, because. 

35. See page 115, note 41. Age is a masculine noun, the plural of which 
is used as a synonym for epoch; e. g.: les ages de Vhistoire, the epochs of 
history. 






SIXTH LESSON. 



121 



10. 



zhame' fa n , me-zee-la 10. He is never hungry, but he 



toozhoor / swa'f. 
11 somay'eey 6 dor- 

teeV . . . .? 
12 dormi du too la nwi 

dernier', ni niwa/ no n plw. 

13. Zhesper' ke la maladi' ne 

pa do n zhere / z e . 
14 per de sela 7 ; ca-ree-le- 

to n -cor / zhen ay for. 



15. Ke-la'zh e . . . .? 

16. Ee-la w sel'mo n/ tro n t-ne- 

vo n/ 

17. Xlor'-zee-le' plw-zazhay'. . . 

18 trw&/-zo n/ de plus ; 

zhCre' tro n t-see-zo n/ 



19. A16 n/ , eyay' la bo n tay / de 

mac6 n panyay / too pre 
deesee'. 

20. Zhe le regret; de- 

ma n/ . 



is always thirsty. 

11. Is he sleepy 7 Does he not 

sleep well f 

12. He did not sleep at all last 

night ; nor did I. 

13. I hope that the illness is 

not dangerous. 

14. Oh! I am not afraid of 

that, fo* he is still young 
and strong. 

15. How old is he? 

16. He was only thirty-nine 

years old last month. 

17. Then he is older than you f 

18. He is three years older ; I 

will be thirty-six years old 
on the sixth of March.™ 

19. Come on. Have the kind- 

ness to accompany me 
near by. 

20. I am sorry ; I will accom- 

pany you to-morrow. 



36. See page 23, Letter F. 

37. Plus, signifying excess or surplus, that is to say, when used as an ad- 
verb of quantity preceding or followed by a noun, takes the preposition de. 

38. Before dates the preposition de is omitted. No capital letter is used in 
French for the names of the months and of the days of the week. 

39. Imperative of avoir: aie, ayoyis, ayez, have thou, let us have, have you. 

40. Words in ty generally change in French into te: liberte, necessity, 
societe. They are nearly all feminine (see note 7). 

41. Cis doubled in the combinations ae, oc and sue at the beginning of 
words ; e. g.: accent, accent ; Occident, Occident'; occulte, occult ; succeder, to 
succeed (to be the successor). 

42. Tout pres dHci, very near here, or near by. The adjective tout is some- 
times used as an adverb, when it signifies quite. In this case it agrees with 
the adjective or participle which follows it if it is feminine and begins with 
a consonant, but it remains invariable when these two conditions do not 
exist: elles Uaient toutes fatiguees, they were quite tired; elle etait tout eton- 
nee, she was quite astonished. 



122 



CORTINA METHOD. 



SEPTlfcME LEgON. 



A la bonne heure (bdMier'), 
Retard (retar 7 ); avance (avo n/ s e ), 
Montre (mo^tr 6 ); pendule (po n dw'l e ), 
Quel dommage! (doma'zh 6 ); rue (rw), 
Volontiers (volo n tiay / ) ; coin (cwa n/ ), 
Veuillez 1 (veiyay'); arretee (arretay'), 
Francs 2 (fro n ); remontee 3 (remdHay'), 
Pardon (pardo n/ ); une demi-heure, . 
Prete (pre't e ); adieu (adie), 



well and good. 
delay ; advance, 
watch; clock, 
what a pity ! street, 
willingly ; corner, 
please; stopped, 
francs; wound, 
pardon; half an hour, 
ready; farewell. 



Nombres Ordinaux.* 

l a , 1". Premier 5 (premiay'), premiere* (premie'r*), . first. 

2 me , 7 2 d . Deuxieme (dezie'm 6 ), second 8 (seg6 n/ ), . . second. 

3 me . Troisieme 9 (trwazie / m e ), third. 

4 me . Quatrieme 10 (katrie'm e ), fourth. 

5 me . Cinquieme 11 (sa n kie / m e ) l fifth. 

6 me . Sixieme (seezie / m e ), sixth. 

7 me . Septieme (setie'm e ), . * . . . . seventh. 

8 me . Huitieme (Amtie / m e ), eighth. 

1. Imperative of the irregular verb vouloir (voolwarO, to will in the sense 
of to wish, to want, to request ; veux (vc), wish thou ; voulons, let us wish ; 
voulez, wish. Veuillez is another form of this last person, equivalent to 
please or have the kindness. 

2. The franc is the unit of French money, worth twenty cents. 

3. See page 46, note 8. Monter, to go up, to put up, remonter, to go up 
again, to put up again, means also to wind. 

4. No^bro-sordino', ordinal numbers; so called because they express order, 
rank. However, the cardinal numerals are used in French instead of the 
ordinal ones to designate the order of succession of the sovereigns of a 
dynasty, the dates of the month and the chapters or the pages of a book ; 
e.g.: Jacques deux, James the Second; Charles trois, Charles the Third; 
Pie neuf, Pius the Ninth ; le deux avril, April 2d ; le h juillet, July 4th ; cha- 
pitre cinq, chapter fifth, etc. The only exception to that rule is first, which 
is always rendered by premier, as : Francois (fro n swa') premier, Francis the 
First; le premier aout, August 1st; chapitre premier, chapter first, etc. 
Charles the Fifth is rendered by Charles-Quint, and not by Charles cinq. 

5. The first ordinal numeral should be unieme, but premier is used in- 
stead ; although unieme is used in forming the compound ordinal numer- 
als: vingt et unieme, twenty-first; trente et unieme, thirty-first, etc. 

6. The ordinal numerals take the gender and the number of the nouns 






SEVENTH LESSON. 



123 



9="*. Neuvieme 12 (nevie'm e ), 

10 me . Dixieme (deezifc'm 6 ) 

ll me . Onzieme 10 (6 n zife / m e ), 

12 me . Douzieme 10 (doozifc'm*), 

13 n 

14" 

15 D 

16 n 

17 n 

18 D 



Treizieme 10 (trfezi&'m'), . 
Quatorzieme 10 (katorzi&'m e ), 
Q,uinzieme 10 (ka n zife / m e ), 
Seizieme 10 (sfezie'm 6 ), 
Dix-septieme (dee-setie'm*), 
Dix-huitieme (dee-zidtie'm*), 

19 me . Dix-neuvieme (dees-nevie'm*), 

20 me . Vingtieme (va n tie'm e ), . 

21 me . Vingt et unieme 5 (va n -te umh'm*), 

30 me . Trentieme 10 (tro n tife / m e ), 

40 me . Quarantieme 10 (karo n tie'm e ), 

50 me . Cinquantieme 10 (sa n ko n tife / m e ), 

60 me . Soixantieme (swaso n tife / m e ), 

70™*. Soixante-dixieme, . 

80 me . Quatre-vingtieme, . 

90 me . Q,uatre-vingt-dixieme, . 

100 me . Centieme (so n ti^ / m e ), . 

200 me . Deux centieme, . 

l,000 me . Millieme (milium 6 ), . 

10,000 me . Dix millieme, . 

l,000,000 me . Millionieme (meeyonie'me), 

Dernier (derniay'), derniere (demfe'i"), 



ninth. 

tenth. 

eleventh. 

twelfth. 

thirteenth. 

fourteenth. 

fifteenth. 

sixteenth. 

seventeenth. 

eighteenth. 

nineteenth. 

twentieth. 

twenty-first. 

thirtieth. 

fortieth. 

fiftieth. 

sixtieth. 

seventieth. 

eightieth. 

ninetieth. 

one hundredth. 

two hundredth. 

one thousandth. 

ten thousandth. 

one millionth. 

last. 



they determine, e. g.: les premieres maisons, the first houses ; la seconde ville, 
the second city ; les centtem.es representations, hundredth performances. 

7. To abbreviate the ordinal numerals the ending ieme, corresponding to 
the English final th, is written at the right and a little above the figure, as : 
^w", but often me or simply e is used, as : 2 me or 2«. 

8. The feminine of second is seconde, and the abbreviation is 2* or 2 e . 
As we see, there are two expressions to translate second: deuxieme and 
second (seg6 n '). Strictly le second is the second of only two ; le deuxieme is 
the second of more. For illustration, the second part of a book will be 
called la seconde parlie if there are only two parts, and la deuxieme partie if 
there are three parts or more. 

9. The ordinal numerals are derived from the cardinal by adding the 
suffix ieme, except premier and seconde. 

10. If the cardinal numeral ends in e mute this c is dropped to form the 
ordinal corresponding. 11. Cinq takes a u before the suffix ieme. 

12. F, of neuf, changes into v for the sake of euphony. See page 23, letter F. 



124 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. A la bonne heure ! 13 Vous voila ! 14 Yous arrivez 

vingt minutes en retard.* 

2. C'est 15 possible ! 16 Je me croyais en avance. 

Quelle 17 heure est-il ? Ma 18 montre est tom- 
bee 19 hier et elle ne marche plus.* 

3. Quel dommage ! Venez avec moi chez 20 un hor- 

loger 21 qui 22 demeure dans cette 23 rue.* 

4. Volontiers. Ou 24 est son magasin ? * 



♦TRADUCTION LITTfiRALE. 

1 . At the good hour ! You see-there ! You arrive twenty min- 

utes in delay. 

2. That is possible ! I myself thought in advance. What hour 

is-it? My watch is fallen yesterday and she not walk 
more. 

3. What damage ! Come with me house a watchmaker who 

lives in this street. 

4. Willingly. Where is his store ? 

13. A la bonne heure means at the right time, but is used in the text as an 
exclamation expressing satisfaction, like good! or well done! De bonne 
heure is an adverbial expression meaning at an early hour or simply early. 

14. See page 69, note 28. 

15. C'esl is used a great deal more than il est ; ce is a neutral invariable 
pronoun of the 3d per., the exact equivalent of it ; est is the 3d per. sing. ind. 
pres., see page 55, note 23. When an adjective follows immediately the 
verb est, as in the text, ce is used because the verb with the adjective forms 
a kind of verbal expression, e. g.: ce sera tres juste, it will be very just; but 
if the expression is followed by another verb, il is used, as : il est difficile 
d'apprendre une langue, it is difficult to learn a language ; il sera facile de 
lefaire, it will be easy to do it. 

16. The consonant s is doubled between two vowels when the sound must 
be hard, as in pression, pression ; assurer, to assure, to confirm or to insure, 
etc. One s between two vowels has always the soft, sound, z. 

17. See page 115, note 41. 18. See page 50, note 28. 

19. Est tombee, has fallen ; tomber, neuter verb, takes etre as an auxiliary. 
We have said in note 24, page 112, that the neuter or intransitive verbs use 
avoir as an auxiliary ; in fact there are in French 600 intransitive verbs, of 



SEVENTH LESSON. 125 

PRONONCIATION. TRADUCTION. 

1. X la bdMier'! Voo vw^l^! 1. Good/ There you are! 

. ...va n meenw / t e o n retar / . You are twenty minutes 

late. 

2. Sfe posi / bl e ! krwayfe'- 2. Is it possible ! I thought I 

zo n -nava n/ s e . Kfe-le-rfe- was ahead of time. What 

teel'? Ma m6 n/ tr e h to n - time is it f My watch fell 

bay 7 ikr' mar'sh 6 plw. yesterday and is not run- 
ning. 

3. KM doma / zh e ! shay- 3. What a pity ! Come with 

ze n -norlozhay / kee demer' me to a watchmaker's in 

do n sfet e xu. this street. 

4. Vol6 n tiay / s6 n maga- 4. Willingly ! Where is the 

za n/ ? store f 



Which 550 form their compound tenses with avoir. The others are conju- 
gated sometimes with Ure and sometimes with avoir, according to the rules 
we give in the second part of this book. Ten neuter verbs always take 
Sire; they are, in the form of their past participle: alle (alay'), gone; sorti 
(sorted), gone out; parti (partee 7 ), departed; venu {venu'), come, and its de- 
rived forms revenu, come back or returned ; devenu, become, etc.; arrive, 
arrived; entrS, entered; rests, remained; tombs, fallen ; mort, dead, and n£, 
born. Remark, that the past participle of all verbs conjugated with Ure, 
With the exception of the pronominal verbs, agree in gender and number 
with the subject. On the contrary, the pronominal verbs, as well as those 
conjugated with avoir, do not agree with the subject but with the direct 
object, provided the latter precedes the verb ; e. g.: les leltres que je vous ai 
Sorites, the letters that I have written to you. 20. See page 71, note 36. 

21. Derived from horloge, the generic term for all kinds of timepieces. 
Note that the terminations er or ier added to names of things, give gener- 
ally the calling or trade of the maker of that thing, and the termination 
erie gives the name of the trade itself; e. g.: horloge, horloger, horlogerie; 
charpente, charpentier (carpenter), charpenterie. See also page 58, notes 12, 19. 

22. Qui, pronoun, is generally the subject of the sentence, and is translated 
by who or which, according to whether it refers to persons or things, as 
un horloger qui demeure, a watchmaker who lives; une montre qui marque 
Vheure juste, a watch which keeps the right time. Que is the object and is 
rendered by whom, which, what or that according to the case : by whom 
when the antecedent is a person: Vhorloger que je connais, the watch- 
maker whom I know; by which when the antecedent is an inanimate 
being : la montre que je vous donne, the watch which I give you ; by what 
when the sentence is interrogative : que dites-vous f what do you say ? by 
that when the verb is in the subjunctive mood : la meilleure methode que j* 
connaisse, the best method that I know of, etc. 

23. See page 66, note 8. 24. See page 38. 



126 CORTINA METHOD. 

5. Ici tout pres f 5 au coin de la rue du Quatre-Sep- 

tembre et de P avenue de 1' Opera.* 

6. Alors, allons-y tout de suite, car je suis presse. 26 * 

7. M.Martin, y^est-il?* 

8. Me voici ! 14 Que desirez-vous, messieurs ? * 

9. Veuillez 1 examiner ma montre, elle est arr^tee. 26 28 * 

10. Avec plaisir. Messieurs, donnez-vous la peine 

de passer 16 par ici.* 

11. Merci. Le grand ressort 16 est-il casse ? 16 * 

12. Non, mais la montre a besoin d'etre nettoyee. 26 

L'avez-vous remontee ? 3 29 * 

13. Non, car c'etait 15 inutile. Dites-moi quand 

sera-t-elle arrangee 26 et qu'allez-vous me 
compter? 30 * 

14. Elle sera prete 25 dans trois jours et vous coutera 

quinze francs. 2 * 



5. Here all near ; at the corner of the street of the Four-Sep- 

tember and of the avenue of the Opera. 

6. Then, let us go-there all at once, for I am hastened. 

7. M. Martin, there is-he? 

8. Me see-here! What desire-you, gentlemen? 

9. Please examine my watch, she is stopped. 

10 Gentlemen, give you the trouble of to pass by here. 

11. Thanks. The large spring is-it broken? 

12 has need of to be cleaned. It have you wound ? 

13 will be-she arranged and what go-you to me count? 

14. She will be ready in three days and you will cost 15 francs. 

25. See page 121, note 42. Pr£s, near, preposition, must not be confounded 
With prit, fern, prite, ready, adjective. Prgs is followed by the preposition 



SEVENTH LESSON. 



127 



5 o kwa n/ du ka'tr 6 

sfepto n/ br e .... la^rm' de 
lopera'. 

6 al6 n/ -zee too de swee't e 

.... prfesay'. 

7. Mesie' marta n/ , ee feteel'? 

8. Me vwasee' 

9. Veiyay' feksameenay' 

fe-lfe-tarrfetay'. 

10. Xvay'k e plfeztr' do- 

nay'-voo la pfe 7 n e de pas- 
say 7 pa-reesee'. 

11 mayrsee' resor' 

kasay'? 

12 bezwa n/ naytwa- 

yay' rem6 n tay / ? 

13. No n , kar s&tk'-teenwteel'. 
Dee'tf-mwa' .... kd n tay'? 



14. fil sera' prfc't 9 .... koot e ra / 
ka n z e fro n/ . 



5. Near by, at the corner of 

the Fourth of September 
street and Opera avenue. 

6. Then let us go there at once, 

as I am in a hurry. 

7. Is Mr. Martin in f 

8. Here I am. What do you 

wish, gentlemen t 

9. Please examine my watch ; 

it has stopped. 

10. With pleasure. Let me 

trouble you to pass this 
way. 

11. Thank you. Is the main 

spring broken f 

12. No, but the watch needs 

cleaning. Did you wind 
it up ? 

13. No, for it was useless. Tell 

me, when will it be in 
order, and what will you 
charge me f 

14. It will be ready in three 

days, and will cost you 
fifteen francs. 



de ; prU by d : je suis pres de partir, I am about (near) to start ; je suis pret d 
partir, I am ready to start. 

26. Note that the past participles belong rather to the adjectives than to 
the verbs. Pressi, pressee, means in haste, in a hurry, but has also the 
other meaning, pressed. 

27. On page 52, note 3, we explain the use of y as a pronoun or an adverb, 
and we say that it precedes the verb in the positive sentences ; but in the 
interrogative as in the text, y begins the sentence. With the negation, y 
comes after ne, and is immediately followed by the verb ; e. g.: M. Martin 
n'y est pas, Mr. Martin is not in. In the interrogative-negative sentences 
y comes still after the negation ne, but they both lead the verbal expres- 
sion ; e. g.: M. Martin n'y est-il pas f is Mr. Martin not in ? 

28. Feminine of arrete, stopped, means also arrested. 

29. See the last part of note 19. RemonUe agrees with the pronoun V rep- 
resenting montre, which is feminine. 

30. Compter means generally to count, but is also translated by to charge. 



128 CORTINA METHOD. 

15. Tr&s bien. Oh! est-ce qu'il est deja quatre 

heures 31 et demie? 32 * 

16. Non, pardon, cette pendule-la 23 avance de 33 quel- 

ques 34 minutes ; il est quatre heures et quart.* 
IT. Est-il 15 possible? Y a-t-il 35 une demi-heure 36 32 
que nous sommes ici ? * 

18. Oui, messieurs, vous 6tes venus 19 a quatre heures 

moins un quart.* 

19. Comme le temps passe vite! Partons, alors. 

Je reviendrai 37 mardi 38 soir. Au plaisir de 
vous re voir ! 39 * 

20. Adieu, messieurs.* 

15. Very well. Oh ! is-that that it is already four hours and half? 

16. No, pardon, this clock-there advances of few minutes ; it is 

four hours and quarter. 

17. Is-it possible? There has-it an half-hour that we are here? 

18. Yes, gentlemen, you are come at four hours less a quarter. 

19. How the time passes quick ! Start-we, then. I shall come 

back Tuesday evening. To the pleasure of you to see 
again. 

20. Adieu, gentlemen. 

31. See page 109, note 7. The hours are told as follows : il est une heure, 
deux, trois, quatre, etc., heures, it Is one o'clock, two, three, four, etc., o'clock ; 
cinq heures sonl sonnies, five o'clock has struck ; il est six heures precises, it 
is six o'clock, sharp ; il est midi, minuit, it is noon, midnight. To avoid 
confusion between douze heures and deux heures, the first expression is 
Bcarcely used in French for midi or minuit. 



SEVENTH LESSON. 129 

15 fes kee-lfe dayzha' ka'- 15. Very well. But, is it al- 

trer'-zfe demee'? ready half past four f 

16. Xo n , pa r do n/ , sh't* po n dw'l e - 16. No, this clock is a few min- 

la avo n/ s e de ay ka r . utes fast; it is a quarter 

past four. 

17 Ee ateel 7 noo- 17. Is it possible f Have we 

so / m e -zeesee / ? been here half an hour? 

18 voo-z<yt e venw' .... 18. Yes, you came at a quarter 

mwa n/ -ze n .... to four. 

19 to n pa's e vee / t e ! .... re- 19. How quickly time passes/ 

vio n drfe / .... O pl&zir' Let us go, then. I will 

return Tuesday evening. 

Good-by ! 
20. Adie' 20. Good afternoon, gentle- 

men. 

32. Demi, adjective, placed after the noun, agrees with it in gender but 
not in number. 

33. De must be used here because avancer is, in this case, a neuter verb 
and consequently cannot admit a direct object. It is more often used as 
an active verb, and then no preposition needs to be used with the comple- 
ment ; e. g.: favance line chaise a cette dame, I pass a chair to this lady. 

34. Page 66, note 2. 

35. Page 117, note 17. 

36. The article precedes demi in French: la demi-heure, the half hour; une 
demi-heure, half an hour. 

37. See page 46, note 8. Future of revenir, to come back, to return ; verb 
derived from venir, to come. 

38. The clays of the week are not written with a capital letter in French, 
except they begin the sentence. 

39. The sentence is generally shortened: au revoir or au plaisir is used 
alone, see page 50, sentence 20. 



130 CORTINA METHOD. 

HUITliME LEgON. 

Nouveau Vocabulaire. 

Enchante (o n sho n tay / ) ; fort 1 bien (for), delighted; very well. 

A ravir 2 (ravir'), admirably, splendidly. 

Tout au plus 3 (too-to pl#), . . .at the most, at the long- 
Tandis que (to n dee / ) ; voyons 4 (vway6 n/ ), while; let us see. [est. 
Gens de province 5 (prova n/ s e ), . . country people, [tracts. 
Provinciaux 5 (prova n sio / ) ; attire 6 (at Ir'), provincial people; at* 
Amoureux (amoore') ; soiree 7 (swaray'), lover; evening party. 
Strangers (aytro n zhay / ), . . . foreigners. 
Londres (16 n/ dr e ); Berlin (bayrla n/ ), . London; Berlin. 
Sejour (sayzhoor') ; sans faute (sa n f6't e ), stay ; without fail, 
Faubourgs (foboor') ; gentil 8 (zhoHee'), suburbs; nice, gentle. 
Promenades (promena'd 6 ), . . . promenades. 
Parfait (parfay'), . .... perfect, all right. 
Je plaisantais 9 (pleso n te'), . . . I joked, I was joking. 
Qu'offre 10 (ko'fr e ); quartier (kartiay'), which offers; ward. 
Constater^ko^tatay'), . . . to ascertain. 
Demeurez-vous P (demeray'), . . do you dwell f 
Champs- JSlysees (sha n -seleesay / ), . Elysian Fields. 

1. See page 61, note 25. 

2. Ravir, active verb, to ravish, to take away, to steal ; in the figurative 
sense to enrapture, to charm, to transport. Itlre ravi, to be transported ; 
Ure ravi dejoie, to be overjoyed. » 9. See page 121, note 42. 

4. Imperative of the irregular verb voir, to see : vois, see thou ; voyons, let 
us see ; voyez, see (you). Voyons ! is often used as an exclamation. 

5. All France outside of Paris is called la province, the country ; and the 
residents of it provinciaux, provincial people. La province must not be mis- 
taken for la campagne, the country, in opposition to the town. The people 
living in la campagne are called campagnards, country people. 

6. The consonant t is doubled in words beginning with the prefix at, 
e. g.: attacker, to tie ; attirer, to attract, etc. Note that this doubling which 
we are explaining (see Index), takes place only before a vowel or a liquid 
consonant, but when I or r follows it does not occur. 

7. Soiree, evening, evening party, soiree. 

8. Gentil, gentle, genteel, nice. 9. Imperf. of plaisanter, to joke. 

10. The letter/ is doubled at the beginning of words with the prefixes af t 
ef, dif, of, sou/, and suf, as affaire, effort, difference, souffrir, suffrage, etc. 

11. Co, con and cons, in French as in English, denote association or agree- 
ment : constater, to ascertain, to prove, to verify ; tdter, to feel, to try, to 



EIGHTH LESSON. 131 

Division du Temps (suite 13 ). 

L'aurore 13 (loro'i*); Faube (liVb e ), . the dawn ; the daybreak 

Le lever du soleil (levay' du solay'iy e ), the sunrise. 

Le matin (mata n/ ), la matinee, 14 . the morning. 

Le midi ; 15 l'apres-midi, 16 . . . noon; afternoon. 

Le soir, 17 la soiree, 17 la nuit, 17 . . the evening ; the night. 

Minuit; 15 lecrepuscule(craypwskw / l e ),mic?m^A^/ the twilight. 

Le coucher du soleil (kooshay'), . the sunset. 

Saisons et Fetes de V Annie. 1 * 

Le printemps (pra n to n/ ) ; l'ete, . the spring ; the summer. 

L'automne (lotom') ; Pniver (leever'), autumn or fall; winter. 

Le Nouvel 19 An (nuve'-lo 11 '), . . New Year 1 s Day. 

Paques (pak); Noel 20 (noel'), . . Easter; Christmas. 

LaVeille de Noel (ve'iy 6 ), . . Christmas Eve. 

Le jour de fete, de travail, . . the holiday; the week day. 

Le Careme, le Carnaval, . . . Lent; Carnival. 

Le jour de jeune (zhe'n 6 ), . . . fast day. 

Le Dimanche des Rameaux (ram6 / ), Palm Sunday. 

Mardi Gras 21 (mardee' gra), . . Shrove Tuesday. 

La Semaine Sainte (sa n 't e ), . . the Holy Week. 

Vendredi Saint (sa n ), . . . Good Friday. 

La Toussaint 22 (toosa n/ ), . . . All Saints 1 Day. [Day. 

Le Jour des Morts 23 (dfe mo r ), . . All Souls 1 Day, Decoration 

search by the touch. Many of the words commencing with co and con differ 
little in their orthography in the two languages ; viz : coadjuteur, coadjutor ; 
coefficient, coefficient, coexister, to coexist ; conceder, to concede, etc. These 
prefixes are changed to col, com and cor when the first letter of the radical 
is I, m, or r, as : collegue, commission, comparer, correct, etc. 

12. Suite (swi't 8 ), fern., from suivre, to follow. Instead of suite, continuee, 
continued, is sometimes used. 

13. Aurora, the goddess of the dawn. 

14. See page 61, note 27. 15. See page 128, note 31. 

16. In familiar style apres-diner or apres-dine, after dinner, are used for 
apres-midi, afternoon. 

17. See pages 58 and 61, notes 2, 27. The French expressions of greeting 
are : bonjour, good day ; bonsoir, good evening ; bonne nuit, good night ; bon 
matin and bonne apres-midi are not used as such. 

18. Sayso n ' ay fe't 8 de lanay', seasons and holidays of the year, 

19. See page 57, note 30. 20. From the Latin natalis. 
21. From mardi, Tuesday, and gras, grease, fat. 

02. La (fete de) tous {les) saints. 23. Literally, the day of the dead. 



132 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANQAIS. 

1. Comment vous portez-vous ? 24 Je suis enchants 

de vous voir.* 

2. Fort bien, 1 merci, et vous? * 

3. Oh ! 25 moi, 26 je me 26 porte 24 toujours a ravir. 2 25 * 

4. Je suis heureux 27 de le constater. 11 Et, vous 

voila 25 a Paris pour longtemps, j'espere?* 

5. Deux mois tout au plus. 3 * 

6. C'est assez 28 pour oublier la province. 5 * 

7. Mais trop court pour les plaisirs qu'offre 10 Paris.* 

8. Voila ! 25 Vous autres, 29 provinciaux, 5 vous £tes 

encore plus amoureux de la capitale que les 
et rangers.* 

9. Certainement ! Les etrangers ont leurs propres 

capitales : Londres, New York, Berlin, etc., 
qui 30 rivalisent avec Paris. 

10. Oh ! 25 de loin, mon cher, 2531 de loin.* 



♦TRADUCTION LITTfiRALE. 

1. How you carry-you? I am enchanted of you to see. 

2. Strong well, thanks, and you ? 

3. Oh ! me, I me carry always to ravish. 

4. I am happy to it verify. And, you see-here at Paris, for long- 

time, I hope ? 

5. Two months all at the most. 

6. It is enough to forget the province. 

7. But too short for the pleasures that offers Paris. 

8. See-there ! you others, provincials, you are still more 

10. Oh ! from far, my dear, from far. 

24. Page 54, n. 18. Se porter, to carry oneself, etc., reflexive verb : je me 
porte, tu te portes, il se porte, nous nous portons, vous vous portez, Us se portent. 



EIGHTH LESSON. 



133 



PRONUNCIATION. 

1 portay / swee'-zo 11 - 

sho n tay / 

2. For beea n/ , mayrsee' .... 

3 por't 6 toozhoor'-za ra- 

veer'. 
4. Zhe swee'-zere' k6 n s- 

tatay' 16 n ta n/ 

5 too-to plw. 

6. Sfc-tasay' poo-roobliay / la 

prova n/ s e . 
7 tro koor plfczfr' 

ko'fr 6 paree'. 
8 Voo-z6 / tr e ,prova D seeo / , 

voo-zfc't 6 o n kor / plwza- 

moore' .... ke lay-zay- 

trCzhayr'. 
9 6 n ler 16 n/ dr e 

bayrla n/ , ets&tfra', kee 

reevaleeV 

10 lwa n/ , m6 n shayr 



TRADUCTION. 

1. How do you do ? I am de» 

lighted to see you. 

2. Very well, thank you, and you? 

3. Indeed, I am always feeling 

splendid. 

4. lam happy to see it. And 

so you are here in Paris 
for a long time, I hope? 

5. Two months, at the longest. 

6. That is long enough to forget 

the country. 

7. But too short for the pleasure 

that Paris offers. 

8. There you are ! You country 

people are even more in 
love with the capital than 
the foreigners. 

9. Certainly ! Foreigners have 

their own capitals: Lon~ 
don, New York, Berlin^ 
etc., which rival Paris. 

10. Far from it, my friend, far 

from it. 



25. The French use a great many more exclamations than the English 
speaking people. This lesson may be considered as a typical conversation 
between two friends meeting in the streets of Paris. 

26. See page 68, note 24. 27. Fern., heureuse, see page 117, note 8. 

28. See page 124, note 16. The doubling of the s is done in all words com- 
mencing with as or es : asseoir, to sit ; essuyer, to clean, etc. 

29. Vous autres, nous auires : idiomatic expressions in which autres is used 
to express emphatically the opposition between the party who speaks, and 
the other party who is addressed. Autres is then pleonastic and can be 
left out altogether, but it is often rendered in English by folks or people, as 
in : vous autres, qui Ues de la campagne, you folks, who are from the coun- 
try. Nous autres, nous maintenons nos droits? we people, we stand for our 
rights. 30. See page 125, note 22. 

31. Mon cher, literally my dear; is used between acquaintances in such 
cases as my friend, or my dear fellow, is used in English. 



134 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. Tandis que nous, gens de province, 32 nous 

n'avons que 33 Paris qui nous attire. 6 * 

12. C'est vrai! 25 Et comment comptez-vous re- 

gler votre sejour ici? * 

13. Le matin aux affaires, 10 Papres-midi pour les 

promenades dans les faubourgs, et le soir au 
theatre ou en soiree. 34 

14. Parfait ! 25 Mais trouverez-vous encore le temps 

de f aire visite & vos 35 amis ? * 

15. Ce n'est pas gentil 8 ce que vous dites 36 -la.* 

16. Allons ! 2537 je plaisantais. 9 * 

IT. Jamais 3338 je n'oublie mes amis. 39 * 

18. Voyons! 425 Ne vous fachez pas et venez chez 

moi 40 demain.* 

19. Demeurez-vous toujours dans le quartier des 

Champs-Elysees ? 

20. Oui, nous habitons rue St. Honore No. 197. 

A demain, n'est-ce pas, sans f aute ? 

11. While that we, people of province, we not have but Paris 

which to us attract. 

12. It is true ! And how count-you to regulate your stay here? 

14. Perfect ! But will find-you still the time to make visit to 

your friends? 

15. It is not nice that what you say-there. 

16. Let us go ! I joked. 

17. Never I not forget my friends. 

18. Let us see ! Not you be angry not and come house me 

32. Nous autres, gens de province, could be used, see note 29. 

33. Ne always precedes the verb and the second part of the negation pas, 
point, jamais, que, generally follows it. Ne que is rendered by but in the 
sense of only. 



EIGHTH LESSON. 



135 



11. To n dee / zho n noo 

zattr'. 

12 ko n tay / -voo rayglay' 

vo / tr e sayzhoo'-reesee' ? 

13 6-zafayr', prom e - 

na'd e do n lay foboor' 

taya y tr e oo o n swaray'. 

14. Parf h' .... troov^ay^voo- 
zo n cor / 

15 zho n tee / se dee't e - 

la. 
16. A16 n/ ! zhe ptezo n fe'. 

17 ooblee' may-zamee'. 

18. Vway6 n/ ! fashay'pa- 

zay shay mwa'. 

19. Demerfe' kartiay'day 

shc^-sayleezfe'? 

20 noo-zabeet6 n/ — sa n - 

tonoray' nwmayro' 

so n f6't e ? 



11. While we country people 

have only Paris to at* 
tract us. 

12. That is true! And what 

plans have you made for 
your stay here f 

13. Business in the morning ; 

promenades in the suburbs 
in the afternoon; theater or 
reception in the evening. 

14. Exactly ! But will you still 

have time to pay visits to 
your friends? 

15. What you say is not compli- 

mentally. 

16. Oh! I was joking. 

17. I never forget my friends. 

18. Why! Do not be angry, 

and call at my home to- 
morrow. 

19. Do you still reside in the 

Champs-filysees wardf 

20. Yes, we live at No. 197 St. 

Honors street. Then I 
shall see you to-morrow, 
without fail? 



34. See note 7. 35. See page 50, note 28. 

36. Ind. pres. of the irregular verb dire, to say : je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous 
disons, vous dites, ils disent. 

37. Imperative of the irregular verb aller, to go : va, go thou ; allons, let us 
go ; allez, go (you). Allons ! like voyons ! note 4, is an exclamation. It may 
be translated by oh ! or why ! but here means more exactly do not mind ! 

38. See page 120, note 31. Jamais, adverb of negation, can be used preceded 
or followed by ne ; if not used in connection with that negation it means 
forever : oitblier pour jamais, to forget forever. 

39. The direct object is always used without any preposition : jamais je 
n'oublie mes amis, instead of a mes amis. In sentence 14, /aire visite d vos 
amis, the complement or regimen, vos amis, is indirect, 

40. See page 71, note 36. 

10 



136 CORTINA METHOD* 



SEOONDE PAETIE. 

L'ADJECTIF. 1 

Adjectives are added to nouns to qualify or deter- 
mine them, hence two classes of adjectives : the qualifying 
and the determining. 

Adjectifs Qualificatifs. 2 
• They express the quality, the form and the color of 
the nouns : 

Jolie femme, 3 v pretty woman. Table ronde, 4 round table. 
Drap noir, 5 black cloth. 

Adjectives vary their terminations according to the 
gender and number of the noun to which they relate. 
Although adjectives have neither gender nor number — 
these belonging only to words which represent beings 
and objects — they are said* in French to be masculine or 
feminine, singular or plural, according as they relate to 
masculine or feminine, singular or plural nouns. 

Formation du Feminin. 6 
General Eule. — The feminine is obtained by adding 
e mute to the«masculine: 

Joli (zholee'), pretty. Jolie (zholee'^i^e^ (fern.). 

Petit (petee'), little. Petite (petee't 6 ), little (fern.). 

1. Ladzhektif , the adjective. 

2. Kalifikatif . 

3. Zholee' fa'm<>. 4. Ta'bl« r6»'ck 5. Dra nwar'. 
6. Formasio ' du faymina 11 '. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 137 

Remark. — Adjectives ending for the masculine in e } 
have but one form for both genders : 

TJn honnete homme, 7 an honest man. 
Une honnete feinme, 8 an honest woman. 

Exceptions : — 1st. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et, 
on, s, double their final consonant before taking the mute e : 

Cruel (krwel'), cruel; fern., cruelle. 9 
Pareil (paray'iy 6 ), alike; fern., pareille. 
Ancien (o n seea n/ ), ancient; fern., ancienne. 
Muet (mway'^rawfe; fern., muette. 
Bon (bo n ), good; fern., bonne. 
Gras (grh),fat; fern., grasse. 

2d. The following, of various endings, also double the 
consonant : 

Nul, no, none, void; fern., nulle. 9 Gentil, nice; fern., gentille. 10 
Sot (so), fool, silly ; fem.,sotte. Vieillot,oZcfo'sA/fem.,vieillotte. n 
Paysan (payeeso n/ ), rustic; fern., paysanne, etc. 

Observation. — Six adjectives ending in et take a 
grave accent on the first e instead of doubling the conso- 
nant; they are: 

Complet (co^le 7 ), complete; fern., complete. 9 
ConcrSt (co n cre / ), concrete; fern., concrete. 
Discret (diskre / ), discreet; fern., discrete. 
Inquiet (a n kie / ), uneasy ; fern., inquiete. 
Replet (reple / ), corpulent; fern., replete. 
Secret (secre 7 ), secret; fern., secrete. 

3d. Adjectives in eur have three forms for the femi- 
nine : 

7. iiXnone't 6 o'm e . 

8. C-none'te fa'me. 

9. The only difference in the pronunciation of the masculine and. the fem- 
inine forms is that the last consonant is sounded in the latter, and to mark 
this difference seems to be the only role of the silent e: krue'ls paray'iy«, 
o n seea'ne, m«e't e , bo'n e , gra's«. 

10. Zho n tee', zho n tee / y e . 11. Viay-yo', viay-yo't*. 



138 CORTINA METHOD. 

1. Those derived from a present participle, by change 
ing ant into eur, make euse in the feminine : 

Menteur (mo n ter / ), liar; fern., menteuse. 
Trompeur (tr^per 7 ), deceiver; fem.,trompeuse. 

2. Those in teur, not deriving from a present participle, 
have the feminine form in trice: 

Protecteur (protekter'), protector; fern., protectrice. 
Accusateur (akwzater'), accuser; fern., accusatrice. 

3. Those ending in erieur take an e mute : 

Superieur (swpayrier'), superior; fern., superieure. 
Inf erieur (a n fayrier / ), inferior; fern., inferieure; 

to which must be added the three following : 

Majeur, of age ; fern. , majeure. Mineur, minor ; fern. , mineure. 
Meilleur (may-yer'), better; fern., meilleure. 

4th. Adjectives in/ change that letter into ve: 
Neuf (nef ) , new ; fern. , neuve. Vif (veef ) , lively ; fern. , vive. 

5th. Those in x change it into se: 
J aXouKj j ealous ; femjalouse. ULevLrevx, happy ; fem.,heureuse. 

Eemabk. — The following exceptions must be noted : 

Doux(doo), sweet; fern., douce. Faux (fo), false; fern., fausse. 
Roux [too), reddish; f.,rousse. Vieux 12 (vi£), old; fern., vieille. 

6th. Of seven adjectives ending in c three make their 
feminine in che : 
Blanc, white; blanche. Franc, truthful; franche. Sec, dry; seche. 

Three change c into que ; 

Turc, Turk; fem., turque. 13 Caduc, decrepit; fem.,caduque. 13 
Public (pwbleek 7 ), public ; fem., publique. 13 

12. Vieux, beau, nouveau, fou and mou have an ancient form for the mas- 
euline which is still used, for the sake of euphony, before a vowel or a 
silent h; viz.: vieil, bel, nouvel,fol and mol. 

13. The pronunciation of both of these forms is the same because final c 
sounds like final que. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 139 

One, grec, Greek, keeps the c and adds que: grecque.™ 
7 th. A few adjectives make their feminine in an en- 
tirely irregular way ; they are : 

Beau 12 (bd),fine; belle. Benin, benign; benigne. 

Frais (fre), fresh; fraiche. Long (16 n ), long; longue. 

Malin, malicious; maligne. Mou 12 (moo), soft; molle. 

Pecheur, sinner ; pecheresse. Tiers, third {part) ; tierce, etc. 

Formation du Pluriel. 14 
General Eule. — Adjectives form their plural by the 
addition of an s : 

Bon, good; pi., bons. 15 Bonne (b6'n e ), good; bonnes. 15 

Exceptions : — 1st. Adjectives ending in s or x do not 
change : 

Gris (gree), gray; pi., gris. Heureux, happy ; pl,,heureux, 

2d. Those in au make their plural by adding an x: 
BeavL, u fine; pi., beaux. 15 Nouveau, 12 netz;/ pl.,nouveaux. 15 

3d. Of the adjectives ending in al 16 the larger number 
form their plural in aux: 

^gal, equal; egaux (ayg6 / ). Principal, principal; principaux; 

the others follow the general rule : 

Final, final; pi., finals. 15 Fatal, fatal; pi., fatals. 15 

Adjectifs Determinatifs. 17 
The determining adjectives are joined to nouns to add 
an idea of indication, possession, number or order, and 
generality. Hence there are four kinds of determin- 
ing adjectives: demonstrative, possessive, numeral and 
indefinite. 

14. Formasi6 n ' du pltiri&l'. 

15. The pronunciation of the plural form is like that of the singular. 

16. See page 49, note 27. 17. Daytayrminatif . 



140 CORTINA METHOD. 

Adjectifs Demonstrates. 18 
They indicate persons or things ; they are : 
Ce, cet, 19 this or that; fern., cette; 19 pi., ces, these or those, 

Ce is used before a consonant, cet before a vowel or 
silent h: 

Ce livre, this book. Ce faros, that hero. 

Cet enfant, this child. Cet homme, that man. 

Ces is the plural for both genders : 
Ces hommes, these men. Ces femmes, those women. 

Eemaek. — To make the distinction which is made in 
English by this and that, these and those, the French use 
ci 20 (here), la (there), words which are joined with a 
hyphen to the noun : 

Ce garcon-ci et cette fille-la, this boy and that girl. 

Sometimes ci and la — more often the latter — are used 
only by way of emphasis, when the distinction of prox- 
imity is not at all in the mind. For example : 

Ce livre-la m'interesse, this book interests me. 

C'est qu'il est beau ce gamin-la ! how handsome this boy is! 

Adjectifs Possessifs. 21 
These determine the nouns by adding to them the idea 
of possession. They are, when the object is possessed 
only by one person : 

Singulier. Pluriel. 

Masc. Fern. Pour les Deux Genres.® 

Mon, ma, mes, my. 

Ton, ta, tes, thy. 

Son, sa, ses, his, her, its. 

18. Daymo n stratif . 19. See page 66, note 8. 

20. From id. 21. Posesif . 

22. Poor 16 de zho n 'r, for both genders. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 141 

When the object is possessed by two or more persons: 



Singulier. 
les Deux Genres. 


Pluriel. 
Pour les Deux Genres. 




Notre, 


nos, 


our. 


Votre, 


vos, 


your. 


Leur, 


leurs, 


their. 



Eemarks : — 1st. Mon, ton, son are used instead of ma, 
ta, sa, before a word beginning with a vowel or a silent k 
to avoid the meeting of two vowels : 

Mon histoire, my history; ton epee, thy spade; son ame, his souL 

2d. It is very important to note that in French the 
possessive adjective agrees in gender and number with 
the possessed person or object, and not with the posses- 
sor, as in English. Speaking of John's sister we say in 
English, his sister; in French we say, sa sceur; e. g.: 

Jean vit avec sa sceur. John lives with his sister. 

Les enfants ont leur 23 maison. The children have their housed 

Les enfants ont leurs 23 maisons. The children have their houses. 2 * 

Adjectifs Indefinis. 26 

They determine nouns by adding an idea of generality : 

Aucun 27 (6ke n/ ), any, none. Autre 28 (6'tr*), other, else. 
Certain^serta^c^'^n, some. Chaque 30 (sha'k 6 ), each. 
Meme 31 (me^nr 9 ), same, even. Nul, 27 pas un, 27 none, not one. 

23. See page 58, note 10. 24. A house belonging to all of them. 

25. Each child having at least one house belonging to him. 

26. A n dayfeenee / , indefinite. 

27. Aucun, nul (mtl), pas un (pa-ze n '), none, not any ; fern., aucune (6kw'n«), 
pas une; e. g.: il n'y a aucune (pas une) table dans celte chambre, there is- 
no (not any) table in this room. 

28. Autre is preceded by the indefinite article when used in the singular, 
and by the preposition de when in the plural ; e. g.: fai une autre maison et 
d'auires meubles, I have another house and other furniture. 

29. Certain is also preceded by the indefinite article in the singular: dans 
une certaine occasion, on a certain occasion. Followed by a proper name 
it is translated by some: un certain Paul, some Paul. 

30. Chaque chaise, each chair ; chaque tableau, each picture. 

31. Les mimes personnes, the same persons. 



142 CORTINA METHOD. 

Plusieurs 32 (plwzier'), several. Quelconque, 33 whatever. 

Quelque 34 (kel'k 6 ), some. Tel 35 (tel), such. 

Tout 36 (too), all, every. Quel 37 (kel), which, what. 

Adjectifs Ntjmeraux. 38 
They determine the persons or objects expressed by 
nouns while adding to them an idea of number or of 
order. 39 

LES PRONOMS. 1 

The pronoun is used in the place of a noun to prevent 
repetition ; there are five sorts of pronouns: personal, 
demonstrative, possessive, relative and indefinite. 

Pronoms Personnels. 

Besides the personal pronouns given on page 76 there 
are some compound personal pronouns which are formed 
by adding the pronoun mSme, self, to each one of the 
disjunctive pronouns f viz. : 

Moi-meme, myself; toi-meme, thyself; lui-meme, himself etc. 
Pronoms Demonstrates. 

They recall the idea of the noun by adding thereto an 
idea of indication. They are : 
Ce 3 (se), that, it. Celui (selwee'), that, the one. 

32. Is always plural and for both genders. 

33. It follows the noun : un mot quelconque ; des choses quelconques. 

34. Quelques, a few: quelque chose, something; quelques piastres, a few 
dollars. See page 66, note 2. 

35. The numeral adjective un precedes tel: un tel homme, such a man; 
except in some proverbs : tel pere, tel fits, to such a father, such a son. 

36. Pern., toute ; pi., tons, ioutes. Tous les jours, every day; tous les Aleves, 
all the scholars. 37. See page 115, note 4L 38. N?/mayr6', numerals. 

39. They have been given extensively on pages 110, 111, 122 and 123. 

1. LS prono n ', pronouns. 2. See page 76. 

3. The pronoun ce must not be confounded with the adjective ce, page 140, 
The former is always joined to the verb Ure: ce sont les hommes, they are 
the men; or followed by qui, que, quoi, dont: ce qui plait, that which 
pleases ; the latter is always followed by a noun with a qualificative or 
not : ce beau livre, this fine book. 



PRONOUNS. 143 

Ce is a neutral invariable pronoun ; e. g. : 

Faites ce que*Je vows dis, do what I tell you. 

Celui varies in gender and number ; viz. : 

Celui, 5 he, that, the one; fern., celle. 5 
Ceux, 5 they, those; fern., celles. 5 

By adding to the above pronouns 6 the adverbs 
d or la we form other compound demonstrative pro- 
nouns, which are used to make the distinction of this 
and that : 

Ceci (sesee 7 ), this; cela, 7 that. 

Celui-ci, this one; fern., celle-ci. Celui-la, that one; fern., celle-la. 
Ceux-ci, these ones; f., celles-ci. Ceux-la, those ones; f., celles-la. 

Pronoms Possessifs. 

The possessive pronouns recall persons, animals or 
things with an idea of possession. 8 They are, when there 
is only one possessor : 

Le mien, 9 la mienne, 9 sing.; les miens, 9 les miennes, 9 pi., mine. 
Le tien, 10 la tienne, 10 sing.; les tiens, 10 les tiennes, 10 pi., thine. 
Le sien, 11 la sienne, n sing. ; les siens, 11 les siennes, n pl., his, her, its. 

4. See page 66, note 10. 

5. Notice that they are the personal pronouns lui, elle, eux, elles, con- 
tracted with ce. 

6. When followed by the preposition de they are rendered simply by the 
English possessive case : celui de mon frere, my brother's ; celle de Jean, 
John's. 

7. See page 120, note 33. 

8. There is the same distinction between the possessive pronouns and 
adjectives as between the demonstrative pronouns and adjectives. Note 3. 
An adjective cannot be expressed without a noun ; pronouns express the 
possession of the noun recalled. In mon papier est meilleur que voire papier, 
my paper is better than your paper, for instance, mon and voire are adjec- 
tives ; in le mien est meilleur que le voire, mine is better than yours, le mien 
and le vdtre are pronouns, as they represent papier. 

9. Le mia n ', la mi&n«, le mia n ', 16 mie^n 6 . 

10. Le tia*', la tie'n*, 16 tia*', 16 ti6'n«. 

11. Le sia n ', la si6'n«, 16 sia n ', 16 sie / n«. 



144 CORTINA METHOD. 

When there is more than one possessor : 

Le ndtre 12 (masc), la notre (fern.); les notres (pi.), ours. 
Le votre 12 (masc), la votre (fern.); les vdtres (pi.), yours. 
Le leur 13 (masc), la leur (fern.); les leurs 13 (pi.), theirs. 

Remarks: — 1. These pronouns are always preceded 
by the article in French, though never in English. There 
are two ways of translating it is mine, his, ours, etc.; 
firstly, with the possessive pronouns : c'est le mien, le sien, 
le ndtre, etc; secondly, with the preposition a, which 
marks possession, page 75, and the disjunctive pronouns : 
il, die est a moi, a lui, a nous, etc. 

2. A friend of mine, a "booh of his, etc., are translated 
by un des mes amis, un de ses livres, etc. 

Pronoms Relatifs. 
So called because of the relation they bear to a noun 
or another pronoun going immediately before. 
The invariable ones are : 

Qui, who, which; que, 1 * of whom, of which; quoi, what; 
dont, 15 whose, of whom, of which. 

The variable one is lequel, which changes according to 
gender and number ; e. g. : ' 

Lequel, fern., laquelle; pi/, lesquels, lesquelles, which, which 

one or ones. [of which one or ones. 

Duquel, 16 fern., de laquelle; pi., desquels, desquelles, of which, 

Auquel, 16 fern., a laquelle; pi., auxquels, auxquelles, to which, 

to which one or ones. 

12. Notre and votre, adjectives, page 141, do not take the circumflex ac- 
cent which the pronouns take. 

13. About these pronouns, see what is said of the possessive adjective leur, 
page 141, Remark 2d. 14. See page 125, note 22. 

15. This pronoun applies to both genders and numbers. It is equivalent 
to de qui, de quoi, duquel, and is generally used after the pronoun ce: ce dont 
je vous parle, instead of ce de quoije vous parle, that of which I speak to you. 

16. Notice that the only change is in the article which follows the case. 



PRONOUNS. 145 

Eelative pronouns, with the exception of dont, are used 
to make interrogations, and then they are called 

Pronoms Interrogates." 
Examples : 

Qui Stes-vous f Who are you ? 

Que demandez-wous f What do you ask? 

Pronoms Indefinis. 18 
They point out in a vague, undetermined manner the 
persons, animals or things of which they recall the idea. 
They are : 

Autre, 19 autrui, 19 other or else. Aucun, nul, pas un, 20 , lone. 

Chacun, 21 each one. L'un et l'autre, 22 both. 

On, 23 Ton, 2 * one, people, they. Personne, nobody, none. 

Plusieurs, 25 several. Quelqu'un^some&od,?/, someone 

17. See page 112, note 22. 

18. Compare with the indefinite adjective, pages 141, 142. 

19. Others, preceded by the preposition to, is translated by autrui : nefaites 

pas a autrui , do not do to others Someone else is often translated 

by the same word, as in la propriety oV autrui, someone else's property. 
Generally other is the equivalent of autre ; les autres, the others ; quelques 
autres, some others. D'autres is also translated by others : fen ai d'autres, 
I have others. 

20. Agreeing in gender and number. Je ri>en vois aucune, pas une, I do 
not see any, or I see none. 

21. Chacun d sa place, each one in its place. 

22. The one and the other. Both or both of them, means also tous les deuz; 
see page 117, note 18. One another or each other is translated by Vun V autre; 
Us s'aimaient Vun Vautre, they loved each other. 

23. On designates one or several persons, but in a vague, undetermined 
manner. It is equivalent in English to we, they, people, sometimes one; 
en France on parle fran$ais, in France they speak French ; on doit honorer 
ses parents, we must respect our parents. On must be repeated before each 
verb, which does not occur with the English equivalent. On dit et Von fait 
cela, one says and does that. 

24. If on is preceded by si, if; oH, where ; et, and ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; que, that, 
Von is used to avoid the hiatus : si Von disait tout, if everything were told. 

.This last example shows that on with an active verb is sometimes ren- 
dered by the passive form. 

25. Pronoun or adjective, is always invariable in gender and plural in 
number. 26. Fern., quelqu'une; plural, quelques uns, quelques unes. 



146 CORTINA METHOD. 

Rien (reea n/ ), nothing. Quiconque, 27 anybody, anyone. 

Tout 28 (too), all. Quelque chose, something, any" 

TJn tel, someone. [thing. 

Bemark. — Many of these pronouns are also indefinite 
adjectives (pages 141, 142), and are then followed by a 
noun. As pronouns, they are used alone, that is, before 
the verb : 

Aucun n'est irreprochable. iVb one is blameless. 

Plusieurs ontpleure'. Several have wept. 

Tout est perdu. All is lost. 

VEBBES AUXILIAXRES. 1 

There are two verbs which are called auxiliaries, be- 
cause they aid in the conjugation 2 of all, the others ; they 
are avoir, to have, and Stre, to be. 

CONJTJGAISON DTJ VEEBE AVOIE. 

Temps Simples. 8 

MODE INFINITIF. 

PRESENT. 

-4v-oir, to have. 

PARTICIPE PRESENT. . PARTICTPE PASS& 

Ay-ant, 4 having. Eu, 6 had. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

PRESENT. 
Singulier. Plvriel. 

t/'ai, 6 I have, JVbws av-ons,* We have, 

tu as, etc. vous av-ez, etc. 

il, elle a. Us, elles ont. 

27. Refers to person, and is singular. 

28. Page 66, note 2. Fem., tonte, pi., tous, loutes. 

1. Verb-zdgzilier', auxiliary verbs. 

2. We have already said that the compound tenses of the verbs are formed 
in French with avoir and Ure. 

3. To» sample, simple tenses. 4. Eyo*'. 5. Oi 
6. Zh6, a, a, Avo^, avay', 6». 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



147 



IMPARFAIT. 

J'av-Siis, I had Nous av-ions, We had 

tu av-ais, or was having, vous av-iez, or were having, 
ilj elle av-ait. etc. Us, elles av-aient. etc. 

PASSE DEFINI OU PARFAIT. 7 

I had, Nous eumes, 8 We had, 

etc. vous eutes, etc. 

Us, elles eurent. 

FUTUR ABSOLU. 9 

I shall or will Nous aurons, We shall or will 
have, vous aurez, have, 

etc. Us, elles auront. etc. 



t/'eus, 8 
tu eus, 
il, elle eut. 

./'aurai, 10 
tu auras, 



MODE CONDITIONNEL. 

PRESENT. 

J^aurais, 11 I should or Nous aurions, 11 

tu aurais, would have, vous auriez, 



We should or 
would have, 



il, elle aurait. etc. 



Us, elles auraient. etc. 



Aie, 12 have thou. 



MODE IMPiSKATIF. 

PRESENT. 

Ay-ons, 12 let us have. 
Ay-ez, have ye or you. 



MODE BUBJONCTIF. 

PRESENT. 

Quefsiie, 13 That I Que nous ay-ons, 13 That we 

que tu aies, may have, que vous ay-ez, may have, 
quHl, elle ait. etc. quHls, elles aient. etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Quefensse, u That I Que nous euss-ions, 14 That we 

que tu eusses, might have, que vous euss-iez, might have, 
quHl, elle eut. etc. quHls, elles euss-ent. etc. 

7. Some grammarians call this tense passe, and others par/ait. 

8. Zhw, u, u, um e , ut e , ut, 

9. AbsolM', absolute, also called simple, to distinguish it from the futur 
anUrleur, future anterior. 10. Zhore', etc.; noo-zoro n ', etc. 

11. Zhore', etc.; noo-zono*', etc. 12. E, eyo n ', eyay'. 

13. Ke zhe, 6, 6, 6yo n ', 6yay', e. 

14. Ke zhws, us, u, wsi6 n ', wsiay', us e . 



148 CORTINA METHOD. 

TEMPS COMPOSES. 15 

INFINITIF. 
PASSE. GERONDIF PASSE. 16 

Avoir eu, to have had. Ayant eu, having had. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

PASSE OU PAKFAIT 7 INDEFINI. 
Singulier. Pluriel. 

J"'ai eu, I have had, Nous avons eu, We have had, 

tu as eu, etc. vous avez eu, etc. 

it, elle a eu. Us, elles ont eu. 

PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 17 

./'avais eu, etc. Nous avions eu, etc. 

I had had, etc. We had had, etc. 

PASSE OU PARFAIT 7 ANTERIEUR. 

t/'eus eu, etc. Nous eumes eu, etc. 

I had had, etc. We had had, etc. 

FUTUR ANTERIEUR. 9 

J^aurai eu, etc. Nous aurons eu, etc. 

I shall or will have had, We shall or will have had, 

etc. etc. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL. 

PASSE OU PARFAIT,, 7 PREMIERE FORME. 

./'aurais eu, etc. Nous aurions eu, etc. 

I should or would have We should or would have 

had, etc. had, etc. 

PASSE OU PARFAIT, 7 SECONDE FORME. 18 

./'eusse 14 eu, etc. Nous eussions 14 eu, etc. 

I should or would have We should or would have 

had, etc. had, etc. 

15. To n co n pozay', compound lenses. They are formed, as in English, with 
the corresponding tense of the auxiliary followed by the past participle of 
the principal verb. 

16. Zhayro n dif pasay', past gerundive. 

17. Plw-ke-parfe' (more than perfect), pluperfect. 

18. It is not much used in familiar conversation. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 149 

MODE IMP^KATIF. 

PASSE. 

Ayons eu, that we have had. 

Aie eu, have had thou. Ayez eu, have had. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

PASSE OU PARFAIT. 7 

Quef&ie eu, etc. Que nous ayons eu, etc. 

That I may have had, etc. That we may have had, etc. 

PLUS-QUE-P AEF AIT. " 

Quefeusse u eu, etc. Que nous eussions 1 * eu, etc. 

That I might have had, That we might have had, 

etc. etc. 

Bemarques sur l'Emploi du Yerbe AVOIR. 19 
Avoir, to have, may be used alone as an active verb ; 
or, in connection with some other, as an auxiliary ; in 
this latter case it always precedes the past participle of 
the principal verb. Examples : 

t/'ai une plume. I have a pen. 

Aviez-vous du papier f Had you any paper? 

Nous avons parle francais. We have spoken French. 

lis auront ecrit la lettre. They will have written the letter. 

1. Avoir is used as a principal verb : 
1st. Instead of to be when expressing desire or sensation, 
age or dimensions: 

J'sii faim, soif, froid, chaud, \amhungry,thirsty,cold,warm, 
sommeil, honte, peur, 20 etc. sleepy, ashamed, afraid, etc. 

Qu'a.-iAl ? What is the matter with him ? 21 

Quel age avez-vows? How old are you? 

t/'ai trente-six ans. I am thirty-six years old. 

Cettechamb?*epeuta,-voirvingt- This room may be twenty-five 
cinq piedsde long sur quinze feet long by fifteen feet 
de large. 22 wide. 

19. Remark' s«r loaplwa' du vayr'b e &vw&r / , remarks on the use of the verb 
to have. 20. Fa n , swaf , frwa', sho, som&'iye, ho n 't e , per. 

21. Could also be translated by how is he feeling f 

22. Se^t* sno^br* pe-tavwar / va n tsaa piay' de 16 B sur ka n s« de lar'zh*. 



150 CORTINA METHOD. 

2d. Also in sentences like the following : 

Auvas-tu raison ? Wilt thou be right f 

II a tort. 23 He is wrong. 

3d. When immediately followed by the preposition a, 
it mnst govern an infinitive, and is then translated by 
to have to. Examples : 

«/'ai a 24 aller a mon bureau?* I have to go to my office. 
Nous aurions a parler le fran- We should (would) have to speak 
gais. French. 

2. Avoir is used as an auxiliary verb in the fol- 
lowing cases : 
1st. To conjugate itself and the verb etre : 2S 

lis ont eu 27 trds 28 froid. They have been very cold. 

Avez-vousete a 29 la campagne? Have you been to the country? 

Remark. — In interrogative sentences the auxiliary is 
placed first, followed immediately by the pronoun sub- 
ject and connected with it by a hyphen ; the past parti- 
ciple comes last. In interrogative-negative sentences the 

23. Ee-la tor. Avoir tori or n? avoir pas raison, to be wrong. 

24. See page 114, note 35. 

25. Although grammatical, this sentence should be avoided on account of 
the double hiatus ; it can be replaced by : je dois aller a mon bureau, I must 
go to my office. 26. See page 113, note 25. 

27. As a general rule the past participle in the compound tenses formed 
with avoir remains invariable' where there is no direct complement— no 
direct objective case— or when the direct complement follows the verb ; 
but the past participle agrees in gender and number with this complement 
when it precedes the verb : les chevauz quefai vus, the horses which I have 
seen ; les fleurs que vous avez couples, the flowers which you have cut. We 
shall explain this more fully in the second part of the Fourth Book. 

28. Tres modifies only an adjective or an adverb. Before a noun Men or 
extr&mement is used in the singular, and beaucoup de (see page 73) or bien 
des in the plural. Thus it is ungrammatical to say : fai tres or beaucoup 
faim, il a Ires or beaucoup raison ; we must say, fai bien /aim, il a bien 
raison, etc. J'ai tresfroid, ilfait tres chaud may be used, because froid and 
chaud are adjectives, although the nouns they qualify are understood ; the 
idea is : fai une sensation tres froide, ilfait un temps tres chaud. 

29. The preposition to, relating to a place or spot, is generally rendered 
by d. It is not so when relating to countries, see page 62, n. 31. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 151 

auxiliary and pronoun are placed between the two parts 
of the negation ; e. g. : 

N'avez-vous pas ete Id f Have you not been there ? 

2d. To conjugate all the active verbs : 30 

Qui est-ce qui a fait cela f Who has done that? 

Vous ne V&vezpas vu. You have not seen it. 

3d. To conjugate most of the neuter verbs : 31 

Le roi a regne. The king has reigned. 

Us ont paru. They have appeared. 

Eemark. — The neuter verbs which have a direct ob- 
jective case, that is, which are used in an active sense, 
are conjugated with avoir; e. g. : 

,7'ai monte le piano. I have taken the piano up stairs. 

II a descendu le diner. He has brought the dinner down. 

4th. To conjugate all the impersonal* 2 verbs : 

II aura neige. It will have snowed. 

II avait plu. It had rained. 

3. Avoir is also used as an impersonal verb with 
the adverb y, and corresponds to the English expression 
there to be. 

30. There are five classes of verbs : active, passive, neuter, pronominal 
and impersonal. In this book the first and third classes are treated, 
leaving the others for the Fourth Book. Active verbs are those which 
express an action passing directly from the subject to the object. To decide 
whether a verb is active place after it quelqu'un, someone, or quelque chose, 
something ; for example : aimer, to love ; /aire, to make or do ; dire, to say, 
are active verbs, because it is proper to s&y,faime quelqu'un, ilfait, il dit 
quelque chose. 

31. They are called neuter verbs because they express the action in a kind 
of general, neutral way, and without the use of the direct objective case. 
A verb is neuter when it is not proper to place after it quelqu'un or quelque 
chose, like: naitre, to be born; mourir, to die, because we cannot say, 
je meurs quelqu^un or quelque chose, for instance. 

32. Impersonal verbs are those which are conjugated only in the infinitive 
and in the 3d per. sing, of all tenses, e. g.: pleuvoir, to rain ; tonnar, to 
thunder, etc. 

11 



152 CORTINA METHOD. 

CONJUGAISON DU YEEBE Y AVOIR. 38 
MODE INFINITIF. 

Y avoir, there to be. Y ayant, there being. 

Y avoir eu, there to have been. Y ayant eu, there having been. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

II y a, there is or are. II y a- eu, there has or have been. 

II y avait, there was or were. II y avait eu, there had been. 
II y eut, there was or were. II y eut eu, there had been. 
II y aura, there shall or will be. II y aura eu, there shall or will 

[have been. 
MODE CONDITIONNEL. 

II y aurait, there should or II y aurait eu, there should or 
would be. [would have been. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

QuHl y ait, that there may QuHl y ait eu, that there may 

be. [be. have been. [have been. 

QuHl y eut, that there might QuHl y eut eu, that there might 

CONJUGAISON DU YEEBE ETRB. 

Temps Simples. 
MODE INFINITIF. 

PRESENT. 

j^-re, to be. 

PARTICIPE PRESENT. s PARTIOIPE PASSE. 

i#-ant, being. IZt-e, been. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

PRESENT. 
Singulier, Pluriel. 

Je suis, I am, Nous sommes, We are, 

tu es, etc. vous etes, etc. 

il, elle est. Us, elles sont. 

33. The conjugation given is in the affirmative form; the interrogative 
is obtained as for the other verbs, by placing the pronoun after y avoir; 
e. g.: y a-Hl? is there? y avait-il? was there? y avait-il eut had there 
been? etc. In the interrogative-negative ne, or better, n'— before y— is 
placed at the head of the sentence, and the second part of the negative, 
pas, after the pronoun ; e. g.: riy a-iAl past is there not? riy avail-Upas eut 
had there not been,? 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 153 

IMPARFAIT. 

J'et-ais, I was, Nous eMons, We were, 

tu &t-a.is, etc. vous et-iez, etc. 

il, elle et-ait. Us, elles <^-aient. 

PASSE DEFINI. 1 

Je fus, 2 I was, Nous fumes, 2 We were, 

tu fus, etc. vous futes, etc. 

il, elle fut. Us, -elles furent. 

FUTUR. 

Je ser-ai, 8 I shall Nous ser-ons, 3 We shall 

tu ser-as, or will be, vous ser-ez, or will be, 

il, elle ser-a. etc. Us, elles ser-ont. etc. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL. 

PRESENT. 

Je ser-ais, 4 I should Nous ser-ions, 4 We should 

tu ser-ais, or would be, vous ser-iez, or would be, 

il, elle ser-ait. etc. Us, elles ser-aient. etc. 

MODE IMP^RATIF. 

PRESENT. 

Soy-ons, 5 let us be. 



Sois, 5 be thou. Soy-ez, be ye or you. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

PRESENT. 

Queje sois, That I Que nous soyons, That we 

que tu sois, may be, que vous soyez, may be, 

quHl, elle soit. etc. quHls, elles soient. etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Que je fxisse, 6 That I Que nous fussions, 6 That we 

que tu fusses, might be, que vous fussiez, might be, 
quHl, elle fut. etc. quHls, elles fussent. etc. 

1. Or parfait, see page 147, note 7. 2. Fu, fu, fu, fa'm«, f u't«, fur. 

3. Sere 7 , sera', sera', ser6 n ', seray', ser6 n '. 

4. Sere 7 , sere', serS', serio a ', seri£', sere 7 . 5. Swa', swayo"', swaye\ 
6. Fw's*, fu's«, fu, fusi6 n ', fusiS', fit's*. 



154 CORTINA METHOD. 

Temps Composes. 7 
Are formed with the corresponding tenses of the aux- 
iliary avoir and the past participle Me,* in the same 
way as with the past participle eu of avoir, which we 
have seen, page 148. 

Eemaeques sue l'Emploi du Yeebe ETRE. 

1. Etre used as a principal verb expresses state, 
existence, like to be in English. Examples : 

Ma maison est grande. My house is large. 

M. 9 un tel 10 est banquier. Mr. So-and-So is a banker. 

II est Men. He is well. 

Ce pain est chaud. This bread is hot. 

2. Etre as an auxiliary is always followed by the 
past participle of the principal verb, and is used : 

1st. To form the passive voice, 11 in the same manner 
as in English : 

Je suis estime de mes amis. I am esteemed by my friends. 
Les enfants ont ete punis. 12 The children have been punished, 

2d. To conjugate all the pronominal verbs : 1S 

Je me suis leve de bonne heure. 14, I have risen early. 
Nous nous sommes couches 12 tard. We have retired late. 

3d. To conjugate the ten verbs mentioned on page 125, 
note 19, viz: aller, to go; arriver, to arrive; entrer, to 

7. See page 148, note 15. 

8. See page 150, 1st. 9. Abbreviation for monsieur. 

10. Un tel, sucb one, is equivalent to So-and-So; feminine, une telle; 
plural, tels, telles. 

11. The passive verb expresses action received or suffered by the subject. 
It will be given in the Fourth Book. 

12. See page 125, last part of note 19. The past participle agrees in gender 
and number with the accusative. 

13. The pronominal verbs are conjugated with two pronouns of the same 
person, like se lever, to rise; se coucher, to lie down, etc. They will be 
treated of in the second part of the Fourth Book. 14. P. 124, n. 13. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 155 

enter; mourir, to die; naitre, to be born; partir, to de- 
part ; sortir, to go out ; rester, to remain ; tomber, to fall, 
and venir, 15 to come, of which the past participles are 
respectively : alle, arrivS, entrt, mort, ne, parti, sorti, rest$, 
tombe and venu. Examples : 

II etait ne 16 dFLondres etil est He was born in London and 

mort & Bordeaux. x *[heures. 19 died in Bordeaux. 
Nous sommes venus 13 a trois We came at three o'clock. 

MODULE DE LA CONJUGAISON DES TEMPS 

COMPOSES AVEC LE YERBE ETRE. 

MODE INFINITLF. 

PASSE. GERONDIF. 

lStre alte, to have gone. IStant alle° } having gone. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

PASSE 1 INDEFINT. 
Singulier. Pluriel. 

Je suis alii, I have Nous sommes alleys , 12 We have 

tu es all£, gone, vous etes alles, gone, 

il, ette est alii, etc. ils, elles sont a£&8. etc. 

PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 

,7'etais allS, etc. ^ows etions allis, etc. 

I 7*acZ gone, etc. We had gone, etc. 

PASSE 1 ANTERIEUR. 

Je fus alii, etc. iVbws fumes a££es, etc. 

I had gone, etc. We had gone, etc. 

FUTUR ANTERIEUR. 

Je serai aZ££, etc. Nous serons allis, etc. 

I shall or will Zwzve #one, We shall or will Mve gone, 

etc. etc, 

15. And its compounds : devenir, to become ; parvenir, to reach ; revenir, 
to come back ; survenir, to arrive unexpectedly. 

16. Naltre, to born, or more correctly to be born, as it cannot be followed 
by a direct object in French. 17. See page 150, note 29. 

18. Ay il-£ mor a bordo'. 19. See page 109, note 7. 



156 CORTINA METHOD. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL. 

PASSE. 1 

Je serais 20 aM, etc. Nous serions altes, etc. 

I should or would have We should or would have 

gone, etc. gone, etc. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

PASSE. 1 

Queje sois alle, etc. Que nous soyons alles, etc. 

That I may have gone, etc. That we may have gone, etc. 

PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 

Queje fusse alls, etc. Que nous fussions alles, etc. 

That. I might have gone, That we might have gone, 

etc. etc. 

4th. It has been said 21 that the neuter verbs are conju- 
gated with avoir when they have a direct complement, 
that is to say, when they are used in a transitive sense, 
but when they have no direct objective case, that is, 
when they are intransitive, they are conjugated with 
4tre; viz.: monter, to go up or to ascend; descendre, to 
go down or to descend ; passer, to pass ; retourner, to go 
back or return, etc. Examples : 

Je suis monte et il est descendu. I went up and he went down. 
<7'ai monte Z'escalier. 21 % I have gone up stairs, [ready. 

Le facteur est dejcb passe. The postman has passed al- 

Le facteur a passe par ici.- The postman passed here. 

Eemaek. — The several tenses of a French verb have 
each but one form, whereas the corresponding English 
tenses have two or three forms ; e. g. : je parle is equiv- 
alent to I speak, I am speaking, I do speak; je parlais is 
equivalent to I spoke, I was speaking or I used to speak; 
je parlerai is equivalent to I shall or will speak, etc, for 
all tenses, compound as well as simple. 

20. The second form, je fusse alii, ilftit alii, etc., page 148, note 18, may be 
used ; instead of il serail alle vous voirsHl avail voulu we may say, il fut alii 
vous voir , he would have gone to see you 21. See page 151, Remark. 



USE OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 157 

EMPLOI DES TEMPS COMPOSES 

Mode Indicatif. 

passe indefini. 

1. This tense is used to express time past, whether 
recent or not ; examples : 

«7'ai recu une lettre cette an- I have received a letter this 

nee, ce mois, aujourd'hui. year, this month, to-day. 

«7'ai recu une lettre £'annee I received a letter last year, last 

derniere, le mois passe, hier. 1 month, yesterday. 

2. In French the compound tense is much more used 
than the simple, especially when the period of the time 
past is not determined ; example : 

Je suis alle le voir etje ne Ved I went to see him and I did not 
pas rencontre. meet him. 

Bemark. — To translate in French an English past 
tense the following rule may be observed : if the English 
tense may be changed into the form used to, as I used to 
speak, we used to write, or into the past progressive form, 
as I was speaking, we were writing, the French imperfect, je 
parlais, nous ecrivions, must be employed ; but if the change 
cannot take place the past indefinite, /ai parle, nous avons 
icrit, is used in ordinary conversation, and the past defi- 
nite, jeparlai, nous ecrivimes, in historical narration. 2 

PLUS-QUE-PAPvFAIT. 

So called because it expresses, in fact, a time twice 
passed ; that is, an action past before another also past : 

Je Z'avais lu quandje sortis. 3 I had read it when I went out. 

1. The past definite could also be used : je remits une lettre Vannee derniere, 
etc., as the time is completely past. 

2. See page 95, 2. 

3. The verb which follows a pluperfect is in the past definite, according to 
the definition of this tense given on page 95. 



158 CORTINA METHOD. 

PASSE ANTEEIEUR. 

It is used as the pluperfect, but always preceded by an 
adverb of time like quand, when ; a peine, scarcely j aussi- 
tot que, as soon as ; lorsque, when j des que, as soon as, etc. : 

Quand feus lu le livre, je sor- When I had read the book I 
tis. 3 went out. 

FUTUR ANTERIEUR. 

It expresses, like the same tense in English, an action 
which will be past at the same time or before another 
action takes place in the future : 

./'aurai lu le livre quand vous I shall have read the book when 
viendrez. you come. 

Mode Oonditionnel. 
passe. 
Like the simple tense, it is used as a sequel to a con- 
ditional sentence, with the difference that the condition 
is now expressed by a pluperfect. The conditionnel present 
presents the action as taking place at the actual time, the 
condition being fulfilled, while the conditionnel passS pre- 
sents it as having already taken place, if the condition 
has been fulfilled : 

Si vous ^aviez dexnande j'au- If you had asked it, I would 
rais ete vous voir. have gone to see you. 

Mode Impeeatie. 

PAKEAIT. 

It denotes that the order must be fulfilled within a 
determined time ; e. g. : 
Ayez fini dans une heure. Be done in an hour. 

END OF BOOK II. 



TROISIEME LIVRE. 

PEEMIEEE PARTIE. 

NEUVI^ME LEgOK 

La Table. 1 Les Aliments. 2 
Senourrir; 3 des biscuits (beeskwee'), to feed; biscuits. 
Un morceau de sucre (mors6), . a piece of sugar, 

Une tranche de jambon (tro n/ sh e ), . a slice of ham. 
Du poivre; du sel; de la farine, . some pepper ; salt; flour, 
L.e chocolat 4 (shokola') ; la creme, . the chocolate ; the cream. 
Moutarde; vinaigre; huile (iiee'V"), mustard; vinegar; oil. 
Huitres (ul'ti*); homard (/ioma r/ ), . oysters; lobster. 
Du beurre (ber) ; bouillon (booiyo u/ ), butter; broth. 
Viande grasse (gra's 6 ) ; maigre, . fat meat; lean. 
Pommes de terre 5 bouillies(booyee'), 1 potatoes : boiled, baked % 

au four 6 (foor), f rites (free't 6 ), 7 / fried. 
Pommes de terre douces, patates, . sweet potatoes. 
Tomates; oignons (onio n/ ), . . tomatoes; onions. 
Pois (pwa'); feves (fe'v 6 ), . . peas; beans. 
Haricots verts (Aareeko' vayr), . string beans. 
Flageolets 8 (flazkolay') ; laitue (letw'), kidney beans; lettuce* 
Chicoree (sheekoray'); olives, . . chicory ; olives. 
Fromage; biere; cidre (see'dr* 5 ), . cheese; beer; cider. 
XJn bouchon; 9 le tire-bouchon, 10 . a cork; the corkscrew. 

1. The table. 2. Le-zaleemo n ', the food. 

3. To feed oneself; a pronominal verb, page 154, note 13 : nourrir un enfant, 
to feed a child, nourrir un animal, to feed an animal. 

4. The suffix at corresponds to the English ate; it generally forms a noun 
derived from a verb : certiflcal, certificate, from certifier, to certify ; assassinat, 
assassinate, from assassiner, to assassinate, etc. Sometimes it is added to 
the names of titles and those indicating the office or dignity implied by such 
Mtles : as consul, consulat, consulate ; docleur, doclorat, doctorate, etc. 

5. Lit., apples of earth. 6. Lit., at the oven. 
7. Puree de pommes de terre, mashed potatoes. 

8- Also called French beans. 9. From boucher, to cork, to stop. 

10- From tirer to pull, and bouchon cork ; lit., cork puller. 



160 CORTINA METHOD. 

Prepositions. 11 
Les principales prepositions simples sont : 

A 1213 (a), at, to, in. Hors {hor), out. [as. 

Apres 14 (apre'), after. Jusque 23 (zhus / 'k e ), until, as far 

Avant 14 (avo n/ ), before. Malgre 24 (malgray / ), in spite of. 

Avec 15 (avek/), with. Moyennant, by means of. 

Chez 1516 (shay 7 ), by, with. Nonobstant, notwithstanding. 

Contre (k6 n/ tr e ), against. Outre 25 (oo'tr e ), further, besides. 

Dans 1217 (do n ),m, into. [than. Par 26 (par), by. 

De 13151819 (de), of, from, with, Parmi 21 (parmee 7 ), among. 

Depuis (depwee 7 ), des, since. Pendant (po n do n/ ), during. 

perriere 14 (derie 7 r e ) , behind. Pour (poor) , for. 

Devant 14 (devo n/ ), before. Sans 13 (so n ), without. 

Durant (dwro n/ ), during. Sauf 27 (sov), save, except. 

En 12 13 » 20 (o n ), in, to. Selon 28 (selo n/ ), according to. 

"EntrQ n {p n/ tr 6 ),between,among. Suivant 28 (sweevo n/ ), following. 

Envers 22 (o n ver / ), toward. Sur 29 (swr), on, upon. 

Environ (o n veero n/ ), about. Sous (soo), under. 

Excepte (exseptay'), except. Vers 22 (ver), toward. 

11. The prepositions are secondary parts of speech which indicate the 
relations between the more important parts. They are divided into prepo- 
sitions simples, formed of one word only, and locutions prtpositives, formed 
of two or more words. 

12. A, dans, en : d directs the mind to the locality ; dans points to the inside 
of it ; en, and the noun which it precedes, form a kind of adverbial phrase ; 
as, le cafe s'achete a I'Spicerie, the coffee is bought at the grocery ; le mar- 
chand,est-il dans le magasint is the merchant in the store? le cafe est en 
magasin; the coffee is stored. A, en: d, with the article, is used before the 
names of countries of the masculine gender; en is used before those of the 
feminine gender, viz.: au Mexique, en France (page 62, note 31). 

13. ^4, de, en, sans, are repeated before each word; as, d Paris, d Londres 
et d Berlin il y aun chemin defer mUropolitain, in Paris, London and Berlin 
there is a metropolitan railway ; il est sans argent, sans amis, sans recomman- 
dations, he is without money, friends or references. 

14. Apres and avant denote time or order, not position, like their English 
equivalents after, before. For position the French use derriere and devant. 

15. De, avec, chez, are all translated by with. De expresses a consequence ; 
avec signifies by means of; chez refei's to one's country, one's home : qxOavez- 
vous fait de mon caniff what have you done with my penknife? (where is 
it?) qu'avez vous fait avec mon caniff what use have you made of it? 
chez nous c'est la coutume, with us (among us) it is the custom. 

16. See page 71, note 36. 



NINTH LESSON. 



161 



Les principales locutions prepositives sont 



A cause de, on account of. 
A cote de, by the side of by. 
A l'egard de, with regard to. 
A travers de, through. 
Au devant de, toward. 
Au dessus de, above. 
Au dessous de, below. 
Au lieu de, instead of. 
Aupres de, near, close by. 
Autour de, around. 



Ci-joint (see-zhwa n/ ), herewith- 
Ci-inclus(see-a n klw / ) ^included. 
En depit de, in spite of. 
En face de, opposite. 
Faute de (fo^), for want of. 
Loin de (lwa n/ ), far from. 
Par-dessus (par-desw'), over. 
Pres de (pre), near by. 
Quant a (ko n -ta), as to. 
Vis-a-vis de, opposite to. 



17. Dans translates in, into : il a saute dans la riviere, he jumped into the 
river. Dans, is used in reference to position or to time. When referring to 
time it indicates the epoch at which something is to be or not to be done; 
as, je partirai dans deux heures, I will start in two hours. "When it is desired 
to indicate a period during which an act can or cannot be performed, en must 
be used ; as, je ne peux pas finir cette ouvrage en deux heures, I cannot 
finish that work in two hours. Pouvez-vous le finir endeans les trois heures ? 
can you terminate it within three hours ? 

18. De is generally translated by of, but often replaces the English posses- 
sive case, page 75: Le chapeau de mon pere, my father's hat. Often it is 
rendered by from: f arrive de Paris, I arrive from Paris. 

19. De is used instead of que in the meaning of than, after plus or moins 
followed by a numeral ; e. g.: plus (moins) de vingt, more (less) than twenty. 

20. En is the only French preposition which can be joined to the present 
participle ; e. g.: en passant, while or in passing. 

21. Entre, when not meaning between, is a synonym of parmi, among; but 
in the latter sense entre is used distributively and parmi collectively ; e. g.: 
entre nous, among us ; parmi lepeuple, among the people. Entre may often be 
employed instead of parmi, but the latter is not used for entre. 

22. Envers, vers, toward. Envers is used to express moral direction and 
vers physical direction : poli envers tout le monde, polite toward everybody ; 
vers le nord, toward the north. 

23. Jusqu'd is also used. Jusqu'a demain, until (till) to-morrow. 

24. Composed of the adverb mal, bad, and the noun gre, will. Mai, prefix, 
adds a sense of evil or negation to the simple word : malediction, maledic- 
tion; maladroit, unhandy ; malhonnUe, uncivil. M£s and me, corresponding 
to the English mis, have the same idea : mesintelligence, misunderstanding ; 
mSfait, misdeed, etc. 

25. Outre-mer, on the other side (of the sea). 

26. Par, sometimes is translated by through : fai passe par P,ruxelles, I 
have passed through Brussels. 27. Synonym of excepts. 

28. Selon and suivant are equivalents. 

29. Sur, preposition, must be distinguished from the adjective sur, sure, 
certain, and from sur, sour. 



162 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANQAIS. 

1. Dites 30 a Jean d'annoncer 31 le diner. 

2. " Madame est servie." 32 Veuillez prendre place 

ici, monsieur. 

3. Passez les hors-d'oeuvres et servez les huitres 33 

en m6me temps. 

4. Keprendrez-vous du potage, 34 monsieur?* 

5. Merci, ch&re madame. J'en ai suffisamment. 

6. Vous ne mangez pas de poisson? Ce turbot est 

excellent 35 et les truites sont delicieuses. 

7. Je n'aime que la sole 36 frite. 37 Mais, que 38 ce 

vol-au-vent est bien reussi ! 39 * 

8. Nous avons une seconde 40 entree : du poulet a, 

la Marengo. 41 Que 38 la sauce est epicee ! 

9. Ma foi, 42 non, pas pour mon gout. Ces champi- 

gnons donnent au plat une saveur exquise. 

10. Comme rdts, 43 nous avons du rosbif, 44 du cane- 

ton et de la dinde truffee. 



* TRADUCTION LITTfiRALE. 

4. Will again-take you of the soup, sir? 

7. I not love that the sole fried. But, what this meat-pie is 
well succeeded ! 

30. Imperative of the irregular verb dire, to say : dis, disons, dites. 

31. See page 135, note 39. When two verbs come together the second is put 
in the infinitive generally preceded by a preposition. In book IV we will 
give those verbs requiring de, and those governing d. 

32. Sentence used by the head waiter {maitre d'hoteJ) to tell the lady of the 
house and the guests that dinner is ready. 

33. Hullres en coquille (kokee'y e ), oysters on the half shell. 

34. A synonym of soupe, more proper than the latter. 



NINTH LESSON, 



163 



PRONONCIATION. 
1. Dee't e -za zho n 



2. 



9. 



Veyay' 



3. Pasay / le hor-de'YT* Ih- 

zwee / tr e -so n 



. . swfeesamo n/ . 

. .pwaso n/ ? twrbo' 

trait/ dayleesie'z 6 . 



TRADUCTION. 

1. Tell John to announce the 
dinner. 

2. "Dinner is ready." Please 
take a seat here, sir. 

3. Pass the side dishes and 
serve the oysters at the 

same time. 

4. Repro n dray / pot^'zh 6 4. Will you take some more 

? soup ? 

5. Thank you; I have had 
sufficient. 

6. Do you not eat fish? This 
turbot is excellent, and 
the trout is delicious. 

7. I like only fried sole. But, 
how nicely this meat pie 
is baked! 

We have another entree: 
chicken & la Marengo. 
How spicy the sauce is ! 

Indeed, not to my taste. 
These mushrooms give the 
dish an exquisite flavor. 
As roasts, we have roast 
beef, duck and truffled 
turkey. 



sd'l 6 free^ . . 
n/ . . . . raywsee / 



volo- 



. . s<?go n/ d e o n tray / : du 

poolfe' a \h mara n go / .... 

ay-taypeesay'. 

. . goo. Sfe sho n peenio a/ 

sh\ T e T/ ekskee'z*. 



S. 



9. 



10. Kora ro .... kanW 
da n/ d e trufay'. 



10. 



35. Many words with the prefixes ex or e have equivalents nearly similar 
in both languages : expidscr, to expel ; emaner, emanate, etc. 

36. La sole is not found in American waters ; the flounder resembles it. 

37. Fem. form of the past part, of the irr. verb frire, to fry. 

38. Que is here used for combien ; this substitution takes place when 
the latter is used exclamatively, especially before pronouns and particles. 

39. Past part, of rSussir, to succeed. 40. See page 123, note 8. 
41. A village in Italy celebrated on account of a battle won there by 

Napoleon. The emperor's cook, having nothing to make a meal of but 
chicken, tomatoes, oil, salt and pepper, he invented the famous Sauce 
Marengo. 42. Exclamation: my faith! 

43. Rot, roti, are synonyms ; but the latter is more preferable. 

44. A corruption of roast beef. 



161 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. Prendrez-vous du vin rouge avec le roti? 

12. Avec plaisir. Je sais que vous avez d'excel- 

lents bourgognes. 45 Faites-moi passer les 
legumes, je vous en prie. 46 * 

13. Que preferez-vous, des asperges, des pommes 

de terre ou des petits pois? 47 

14. II y a aussi des epinards. J 'en 48 mangerais 

volontiers. Oh ! ne vous derangez pas. * 

15. Jean, enlevez la salade et servez les fromages. 

Prenez un peu de roquefort. 45 * 
.6. Non, merci, n'insistez pas, je vous prie. 46 J'ai 
admirablement bien 49 dine.* 

17. Nous allons prendre le cafe au salon ; le fumoir 

est un peu plus loin.* 

18. Je regrette beaucoup de ne pouvoir rester plus 

longtemps, mais le train n'attend pas.* 

19. Pourquoi avez-vous pris un billet d'aller et 

retour ? Vous resteriez avec nous. 

20. Je vous suis bien oblige, madame. 

12 Make-me to pass the vegetables, I you of it beg. 

14 I of them would eat willingly. Oh ! no you disturb not. 

15. John, take-away the salad and serve the cheeses 

16. No, thanks, not insist no, I you beg 

17. We go to take the coffee to-the parlor a little more far. 

18. I regret much of not be-able to remain more long-time 

45. Du bourgogne, du roquefort, etc.; capitals are not used : these nouns not 
being considered as proper names. 

46. Je vous en prie is a gallicism, in which the pronoun en represents the 



NINTH LESSON. 



165 



11 roo'zh e . . . . ? 

12 &ksaylo n/ lay- 

gw'm 6 , zhe voozo Q pree. 



13 aspayr / zh e petee'- 

pwa 7 ? 

14 dfe-zaypeenar' 

volo n tiay / dayro 11 - 

zhay' 

15. Zho n , o n l e vay / .... fro- 
ma / zh e 

16 admeerabl e mo n/ 



17 le fwmwar' — 



18. .... nato n/ pa. 



19 pree-ze n beeyk' . . . 

rayst e reeay / -zavfek / noo. 

20 obleezhay' 



11. Will you take some claret 

with the roast ? 

12. With pleasure. I know 

you have excellent bur- 
gundy. May I trouble 
you for the vegetables'? 

13. Which do you prefer, as- 

paragus, potatoes or 
French peas? 

14. There is also some spin- 

ach. I would like some. 
Do not trouble yourself. 

15. John, remove the salad 

and serve the cheese. 
Take some roquefort. 

16. No, thanks, I beg you not 

to insist. I have had an 
excellent dinner. 

17. Let us take coffeeinthe par- 

lor ; the smoking room 
is a little further on. 

18. I regret very much that I 

cannot stay longer, but 
the train does not wait. 

19. Why did you take a round 

trip ticket? You could 
have remained with us. 

20. lam much obliged to you, 

madam. 



whole preceding sentence : de me passer les legumes. En may be suppressed, 
but when used it renders the sentence more emphatic and pressing. 

47. On bills of fare peas are termed petits pois, French peas or green peas, 
to distinguish them from the plant and the pois chiche (shee'sh 3 ), chick pea. 

48. In this case en is not idiomatic, as in note 46; it is only the partitive 
pronoun, some: I will willingly eat some (of the spinach). 

49. The place of the adverb is variable ; although usually placed after the 
verb in the simple tenses and between the auxiliary and the participle in the 
compound tenses, the rule is not absolute. "We may say as correctly : j'ai 
dinS admirablement Men. 



166 CORTINA METHOD. 

DIXI&ME LEgOK 

La Maison. 1 

Emmenager ; 2 demenager, 2 . . to move in ; to move out. 

Le vestibule ; 3 corridor, . . . the vestibule; hall, corridor* 

L'escalier (leskaliay') ; les marches, the stairs; the steps. 

L'entresol* (loHr^ol 7 ) ; plancher, 5 the entresol ; floor. 

Un etage; une chambre (sho u/ br e ), a story ; a room. 

Appartement 6 meuble (apa r t e mo n/ ), furnished apartment or flat. 

Le salon; la salle (sa'P), . . the parlor; the hall. 

La salle a 7 manger, de 7 billard, . the dining, billiard, room. 

Une chambre a 7 coucher ; lafenetre, a bedroom; the window. 

Les vitres (vee'tr 6 ) ; le cabinet, . the panes ; the water closet. 

Le rideau; le store (lestor'), . . the curtain; window blind. 

Volets ; jalousies (zhaloozee 7 ), . shutters ; Venetian blinds. 

La bibliotheque ; le fumoir, . . the library ; smoking room. 

La salle de 7 bain (ba n ), . . . the bath room. 

Le jardin (zharda n/ ) ; la cour, . the garden ; the yard. 

La cave; le grenier (greniay'), . the cellar ; the attic, garret. 

Laporte; la serrure 8 (serrw'r 8 ), . the door ; the lock. 

La clef (klay) ; leverrou (vayrroo'), the key ; the bolt. 

La cuisine 9 (kwizee'n 6 ) ; glaciere, . the kitchen ; refrigerator. 

1. La m6so n ', the house. 

2. Emmenager, demenager, are formed by the addition of the prefixes em 
and de to menage (mayna'zh 6 ), household. The prefixes en, em, are common 
to both languages : enrichir, to enrich ; embarquer, to embark. The pre- 
prefixes de or d§s before a vowel or mute h, are rendered by dis : debarquer, 
to disembark ; dishonorer, to dishonor, etc. 

3. The French ending ule corresponds to same in English ; but when pre- 
ceded by c it becomes cle for the masculine and cule for the feminine: 
article, parlicule, molecule, etc. 

4. Entresol, mezzanine floor; a low story placed between the ground floor 
and the first floor. Entre, prefix, derived from the Latin inter, corresponds to 
enter in English : entreprise, enterprise ; entrelacer, to interlace. Inter is a 
prefix common to both languages: interception, interception; interceder, to 
intercede; interjection, interjection, etc. 

5. From planche (plo n 'she), board; plafond, ceiling. 

6. Nouns ending in ent are the same in both languages : accent, parent, 
sentiment. Most of the adjectives in ent and ant are also common to both 
languages : eloquent, different, ignorant. 

7. See page 160, note 12. Notice that a precedes verbs and de nouns. 



TENTH LESSON. 167 

Noiribres Fractionnaires. 10 

La moitie (mwatiay'), . . the half. 

Une moitie, 11 une demie 11 (demee / ), one-half. 

Un tiers 12 (tiayr / ) ; deux tiers, . one-third; two-thirds. 

Un quart 12 (kar) ; trois quarts, . one-quarter; three-fourths. 

Un cinquieme, 12 sixieme, etc., . one-fifth, one-sixth, etc. 

Tin dixieme, vingtieme, etc., . one-tenth, one-twentieth, etc. 

Un soixante-dixieme, . . one-seventieth. 

Un quatre-vingtieme, . . one-eightieth. 

Un centieme, millieme, etc., . one-hundredth,thousandth,etc< 

Nombres Collectifs. 13 

Une paire; u une couple 15 (koo'pl 6 ), a pair ; a couple. 

Un couple ; 16 une huitaine, 17 . a couple ; a number of eight. 

Dixaine, douzaine, 18 quinzaine, 17 a number of 10, 12 [dozen), 15. 

Vingtaine; trentaine, . . a score ; thirty of a kind. 

Q,uarantaine ; cinquantaine, . forty, fifty of a kind. 

Une centaine; un millier, 19 . hundred, thousand of a kind. 

8. Some nouns in ure are common to both languages : creature, miniature. 

9. French nouns ending in me, with twelve exceptions, among which is 
cuisine, kitchen, are the same in English: carabine, machine, medecine, 
origine, etc. 10. N6 n 'bre frakzee6 n n6r', partitive numbers. 

11. Moitie and demi are synonyms ; the former is a noun and the lattei'an 
adjective. See pages 119 and 129, notes 27 and 32. 

12. With the exception of moittt, tiers and quart, the partitive numbers are 
only the ordinal numbers preceded by the nominator of the fraction. 
Instead of un tiers, un quart, etc., la troisieme partie, la quatrieme parlie, 
etc., may be used. 13. N6 n 'bre kdlSkteef , collective numbers. 

14. Une pair e d'amis, de chevaux, de souliers, a nair of friends, of horses, of 
shoes ; e. g.: two persons or things of the same kind. 

15. Une couple d'hommes, d'amfs (de), a couple of men, of eggs ; means sim- 
ply the number of two men, two eggs. 

16. Un couple d'amis, a pair of friends ; un heureux couple, a happy couple 
(man and woman); un couple de pigeons, a pair of pigeons (male and 
female); in these cases couple indicates two beings united by love or 
friendly ties. The difference is illustrated by the following examples : " une 
couple " de pigeons suf jit pour un dejeuner, a couple of pigeons are sufficient 
for a breakfast ; " un couple de pigeons suffit pour peupler une voliere, a pair 
of pigeons is sufficient to stock an aviary. 

17. By huitaine is meant a week, and by quinzaine a fortnight. 

18. Une demi douzaine, vingt douzaines et demie. 

19. Un millier, also un million, are used in an undetermined sense to mean 
a large number of persons or things of the same kinc« 

hi 



168 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANCAIS. 

1. Comme 20 vous etes pale ! Qu'avez-vous ? 

2. Je ne me sens 21 pas bien, je devrais 22 aller 23 con* 

suiter 24 un bon medecin. 

3. Allez 23 voir 24 le docteur Koux, le meilleur 25 prati- 

cien pour les affections de la gorge. 

4. Croyez-vous 26 que je ferais 27 mieux 25 d'y aller?* 

5 . Oui, sans tarder . Je vais chercher 28 une voiture. * 

6. Cocher, je vous prends a la course. Conduisez- 

nous rue de Kivoli, No. 74.* 

7. Arr^tez, cocher ! Voici votre pourboire.* 

8. Docteur, j'ai besoin de vos services. 

9. Asseyez-vous, 29 monsieur. Depuis quand vous 

sentez-vous indispose ? 30 * 

10. Depuis quelques jours. Je ressens 31 un mal- 

aise general.* 

♦TRADUCTION LITT^RALE. 

4. Belie ve-you that I shall-do better of there to go ? 

5. Yes, without to delay. I go to look for a carriage. 

6. Coachman, I you take to the run. Drive-us street 

7. Stop, coachman ! See-here your for-drink (tip). 

9. Seat-you, sir. Since when you feel-you indisposed? 

10. Since some days. I feel an uneasiness general. 

20. See page 163, note 38. 

21. Ind. pres. of the irr. verb sentir: je sens, tu sens, il sent, nous sentons, 
vous sentez, Us sentent. 22. See page 90, Troisieme Conjugaison. 

23. The construction to go and consult, to come and tell, is never used in 
French; the two infinitives are not separated by the conjunction et, nor 
do these verbs of motion require any preposition after them ; e. g.: aller 
onsulter, venir dire, etc.; to go to consult, to come to say, etc. 



TENTH LESSON. 



169 



PRONONCIATION. 
1 pa'l e .... 

2 devrk'-zalay' k6 n swltay / 

.... med e sa n/ . 

3 roo, — prateesio n/ 

gor'zh 6 . 



5 tarday' vwatwr'. 5. 



6. Koshay'. . . . pro n -za la koors. 

KoMweezay' reevolee / 

swaso n/ t e -kator / z e . 

7 Arraytay' poor- 

bwar'. 

8 sayrvees'. 

9. Asfeyay' a n dispozay / ? 



10 rayso n/ e n mal^ / z e 



TRADUCTION. 

1. How pale you are ! What 

is the matter ? 

2. I do not feel well. I ought 

to go and consult a good 
physician. 

3. Go and see Doctor Roux, 

the best practitioner for 
throat ailments. 

4. Do you believe I had better 

call on him f 
Yes, without delay. lam go- 
ing for a carriage. 

6. Driver, I engage you by the 

trip. Take us to 74 Ri~ 
voli street. 

7. Stop, driver/ This is for 

you. 

8. Doctor, I need your help. 

9. Be seated, sir. How long 

have you been indis- 
posed ? 

10. For the past few days. I 

feel generally run down. 



24. See page 135, note 39. 

25. See page 119, note 29. The adjectives which are compared irregularly 
are : bon, good ; meilleur, better ; le meilleur, the best. Mauvais, bad ; pire, 
worse ; le pire, the worst. Grand, great ; majeur or plus grand, greater ; le 
majeur or le plus grand, the greatest. Petit, small ; moindre or plus petit, 
smaller ; le moindre or le plus petit, the smallest. 

26. From croire : je crois, tu crois, il croit, nous croyons, vous croyez, Us croient. 
Croire is followed by que when preceding a verb not in the infinitive. 

27. Conditional tense of the irreg. verb /aire : jeferais, luferais, il ferait, etc. 

28. Alter, venir or envoyer ehercher, is translated by to go for, or to go and 
fetch; to come for, or to come and fetch; to send for, or to send and fetch, 
See note 23. 

29. Imperative of the pronominal irr. verb s'asseoir, to sit down : assieds- 
toi (aseeay'-twa'), asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous. 

30. In, as a prefix, is changed to im before c, m,snidp; e.g.: immodSre', 
immoderate ; and to il or ir, when the next letter is an I or r : illogique, 
illogical ; irrationnel, irrational. 

31. Ind. pres. of ressentir, compound of sentir. See note 21. 



170 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. Le pouls n'est pas fort 32 regulier. Yoyons la 

langue. 

12. Est-ce grave ce que 33 j'ai, docteur?* 

13. Non; un peu de fievre et de derangement 

causes par les brusques 34 changements de 
temps. 

14. Je vais 23 vous ecrire une ordonnance. Vous 

prendrez une cuilleree 35 de la medecine tous 
les soirs avant de vous endormir 36 (coucher). 

15. Tres bien. Je vais 23 aller 24 chez le pharmacien 

en sortant 37 d'ici.* 

16. C'est cela I 38 Et ne manquez pas de vous soigner 

des ce soir meme. 39 * 

17. Je le ferai sans doute. Combien vous dois-je? 

18. Mon prix ordinaire est vingt francs. 

19. Les voila ! Je reviendrai d'ici a deux jours. 

20. Vous vous porterez beaucoup mieux, meme 39 

vous serez peut-etre tout a fait retabli. 



12. Is-that grave that which I have, doctor? 

15 I go to go house the pharmacist in leaving of here. 

16. That-is that-there. And not fail no of your to care from 
this evening same. 



32. See page 61, note 25. 33. See page 66, note 10. 

34. The place of the adjective, like that of the adverb (page 165, note 49) is 
variable. Generally the adjective is placed after the nouns with which it 
agrees in gender and number. Brusques changements or vice versa may be 
properly vised in this case. Some adjectives change the sense of the expres- 
sion according to the place they take. We will treat of these peculiarities in 
the second part of this book. 



TENTH LESSON. 



171 



11. Le poo 



12. £s gra'v e . . . . ? 

13 fiay / vr e derro D/ zh e - 

mo n/ c6zay / bms'k e 



14 kweeyferay' voo- 

zo n dormi / r (kooshay / ). 



15 farmaseea n/ o n sorto n/ 

16. Sfe sela'! — swaniay' 

17 dwa'sh 8 ? 

18 pree-zordeenfe'i* 

19 

20 porteray' pe-t^ti* 

too-ta f b 



11. Your pulse is not very reg- 

ular. Let me see your 
tongue. 

12. Is what I have serious, 

doctor ? 

13. No ; some fever and some 

trouble brought on by 
these sudden changes of 
the weather. 

14. I shall write a prescription 

for you. Take a teaspoon- 
ful of the medicine every 
night before going to bed. 

15. Very well. I will go to the 

druggist when I leave 
here. 

16. That 1 sit! And do not fail 

to take good care of your- 
self from this very night. 

17. J will, without any doubt. 

How much do I owe you f 

18. My regular price is twenty 

francs. 

19. Here it is. 1 will call 

again within two days. 

20. You will feel much better, 

and perhaps you will be, 
entirely recovered. 



35. The final ie generally gives to the noun expressed by the root an idea 
of entirety ; &s,journie, a full day, from jour, day : bouchie, a mouthful, from 
bouche, mouth; poignie, a handful, from poing (pwa n '), fist, etc. 

36. tfendormir, to fall asleep ; compound of dormir. See note 2. En is a 
prefix often used in the compounding of verbs ; as, s'enrhumer, to catch 
cold, from rhume, cold in the head ; enregistrer, to register, from registre, 
register, etc. 

37. See page 161, note 20. 

38. C'est cela ! or c'est pa / it is so ! See page 120, note 33. 

39. Mime, in this case, is an adjective : ce jour (mois, etc.) mime, this very 
game day (month, etc.). Often m&me is an adverb and then corresponds to 
even; as in non settlement, vous serez mieux, mime vous serez guiri, not only 
Will you feel better, you will even be cured. 



172 



CORTINA METHOD. 



ONZliME LEgON. 

Meubles. 1 

La table; une chaise (she'z 6 ), . the table ; a chair. 
Un fauteuil 2 (fote'iy 6 ) ; un sofa, . an arm-chair ; a sofa. 
TJneberceuse 3 (bayrse / z e ); un canape, a rocking chair; a lounge. 



Un banc (bo n ) ; un tabouret, . 

Un bureau (bwro) ; un secretaire, 

Une bibliotheque* (beebleeote'k 6 ), 

Une armoire ; 5 une commode, 

Le lavabo; la toilette 2 (twale'fr 5 ), 

Le miroir ; 6 paravent, ecran, . 

Une garde-robe 2 7 (gard e -ro / b e ), 

L'acajou (lakazhoo') ; le noyer, 8 . 

L'ebene (laybe'n e ); le pin (pa n ), , 

Le bois 2 blanc (blo n )/dur (dwr), 

Le tiroir ; 9 un gueridon (gayreedo n/ ), the drawer ; a stand, 

Un tableau ; un cadre, . . . a picture; a frame. 

Une peinture 10 (pa n twr / ) ; gravure, 10 a painting ; an engraving, 

Une chandelle ; bougie (boozhee') 

Un chandelier ; la lumiere, . 

Le gaz (ga / z e ); petrole (paytrol 7 ), 

Une lampe ; allumer ; eteindre, . 

Le lit (lee); le bois de lit, 

Un matelas ; sommier elastique, . 

Untraversin (travayrsa n/ ), -. 

Un oreiller; un coussin (koosa n/ ), 

Une taie d'oreiller (tay-doreyay 7 ), 



a bench; a stool. 

a desk; an escritoire. 

a bookcase. 

cupboard; chest of drawers. 

washstand ; dressing table, 

the looking glass ; screen. 

a wardrobe. 

mahogany ; walnut. 

ebony ; pine. 

soft wood; hard wood. 



a candle; a wax candle, 
a candlestick; the light, 
the gas ; petroleum. [ guish. 
a lamp; to light; to extin- 
the bed; the bedstead, 
amattress; spring mattress, 
a bolster. 

a pillow; a cushion, 
a pillow-case. 



1. Me'bl e , furniture. 

2. Notice the gender. 

3. Derived from bercer, to rock ; and the latter from berceau, cradle. 

4. The same word, meaning library, was used in the preceding lesson. 

5. The final oire (not oir) belongs to many nouns and adjectives which 
terminate in English in ry: gloire, glory; mimoire, memory; illusoire, 
illusory, etc. 

6. Miroir designates all kinds of looking glasses; a very large glass 
(mirror), or plate glass, is called glace. 

7. Same derivation as in English -; from garder, to ward, and robe, robe. 

8. The final ier is added to the names of several fruits to form those o* 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



173 



Adject if s 11 Hultiplicatifs ou Multiples. 12 
Simple (sa n/ pl e ); unique 13 (unee'k 6 ), simple, alone ; only, unique. 
Double; triple (tree'pl 6 ), . . double; treble, threefold. 



Quadruple ikwadru'pP), 
Quintuple (ka n t?/ / pl e ), . 
Sextuple; septuple, 
Octuple; nonuple, . 
Decuple; centuple, 



Adjectifs de 
"One fois (fwa') ; deux fois, 15 
Trois, quatre, cent fois, 15 
TJn millon de fois, . 
Cette fois, cette fois-ci, 16 
"One autre 17 fois ; cette fois-la, 16 
Chaque fois ; l'autre fois, 
La premiere, derniere fois, 
La fois prochaine, . 
Q,uelquefois ; parfois, 
Plusieurs fois (ph/zeeer 7 ), 
Diverses fois (deevayr^), 
Peu de fois ; toutes les fois, 
Souvent (soova n/ ); toujours, 



. quadruple. 

. quintuple. 

. sextuple; septuple. 

. octuple; ninefold. 

. decuple; centuple. 

Repetition. 14, 

. once; twice. 

. three, four, one hundred 

. one million times, [times. 

. this time. 

. another time; that time. 

. each time ; the other time. 

. the first, last time. 

. the next time. 

. sometimes. 

. several times. 

. various times. 

. a few times ; all times. 

. often ; always. 



the trees ; as, cerise, cherry, cerisier. cherry tree ; noix, walnut, noyer, walnut 
tree. etc. 

9. From tirer, to pull, a very important verb, as it is translated by to draiv, 
to lug, toplv.ek, to pull asunder, to twitch, to tug, to take up, out, off, etc. 

10. See page 167. note 8. 

11. The preposition a is derived from the Latin ad. The original word 
denotes tendency just as in English : adverbe, adverb ; admettre, to admit. 
Often the d is changed into the consonant which follows the prefix, and 
sometimes it is dropped : as accepter, to accept : aviser, to advise, etc. 

12. Adzhektif midtiplikatif oo multee'pl 6 , proportional adjectives or 
multiples. 

13. The final ique. which is found in a great many words, corresponds to 
the English termination ic for the nouns, and ical for the adjectives : trag- 
ique, tragic, tragical : eomique. comic, comical, etc. 

14. Adzhektif de raypayteesio n '. adjectives of repetition. 

15. It has been noted, page 139. that adjectives terminating in s or z do not 
change in the plural. 

16. Ci or Id is added to nouns preceded by the demonstrative adjectives 
ce. cet. cette, ces. as expletives to denote the positions here or there. See 
pages 140 and 143. 17. See page 141, note 28. 



174 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRAN£AIS. 

1. Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui? 

2. Un temps magnifique ; tout a, fait delicieux.* 

3. Ouvrez la feneire, s'il 18 vous plait, et voyez 

comment est le temps.* 

4. II fait un soleil superbe, mais il fait tr&s 19 froid.* 

5. Oui, bien 19 froid. Combien de 20 degres le ther- 

mometre 21 indique-t-il? Est-il au-dessus 22 
ou au-dessous de 22 zero ? 

6. II marque quatre degres au-dessus de zero. 

7. II me semble que nous allons avoir du mauvais 

temps ; le barometre marque pluie. 

8. Plait -il ? 18 — 23 Je dis que le barometre descend et je 

crains 24 que nous n'ayons 24 de l'eau.* 

9. L'orage approche ; il y a beaucoup de 20 vent. II 

y a enormement de boue dans les rues. 

10. Quels degres le tbermometre atteint-il 25 en 

France? * 



* TRADUCTION LITT&RALE. 

% A weather magnificent ; all to done delightful. 

3. Open the window, if it you please, and see how is the weather. 

4. It makes a sun superb, but it makes very cold. 

8. Please-it? — and I fear that we not may-have of the rain. 

10. Which degrees the thermometer reaches-it in France? 

18. The i of si is dropped only before il or Us : s'il vous plait, translates i/ 
you please. Platt-il? means does it please* viz.: plail-il a monsieur que 
fenleve le mere f does it please the gentleman if I remove the sugar? Plait- 
il ? is also equivalent to que disiez-vous ? what did you say ? 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



175 



PRONONCIATION. 

1 f e-teeF . . . . ? 

2 manyeefee / k e ; too-ta fe 

dayleesie'. 
3. Oovray / seel voo pie* 

ay vwayay' 

4 solely* aupev'lf — 

5 degray' le tayrmo- 

may'tr* a n deek-teel / ? — 
6-desu' oo 6-desoo' de 
zayro / ? 

6 mar'k* 

7 so n/ bl e — move 7 to n ; 

— ph^ee'. 

8. Ple-teel'?— . . . . dayso n/ .... 
cra n ke noo neyo a/ de 16. 



9. Lorra'zh e apro'sh 6 ; ay- 

normaymo n/ de boo — 



10 ata n/ -teel / . . . . ? 



TRADUCTION. 

1. What kind of weather is it 

to-day f 

2. Beautiful weather; per- 

fectly delightful ! 

3. Open the window, if you 

please, and see how the 
weather is. 

4. The sun shines gloriously, 

but it is very cold. 

5. Yes, very. How many de- 

grees does the thermom- 
eter register ? Is it above 
or below zero ? 

6. It is 4 degrees above zero. 

7. It seems to me thai we will 

have bad weather; the 
barometer points to rain. 

8. "Ibeg your pardon?" 23 — U I 

say that the barometer is 
falling, and I fear we 
shall have rain." 

9. The storm is approaching ; 

it is very windy. There is 
considerable mud in the 
streets. 

10. What degree does the ther- 

mometer reach inFrance? 



19. Fb-oid is here an adjective; thus tres or Men can be used, but not 
beavcoup; see page 150, note 28. 

20. See page 61, note 28. Combien, adverb of quantity, when followed by a 
noun, governs the preposition de. 

21. Metre, meter, termination of most of the instruments of measure, as : 
chronometre, dynamometre, gazometre, etc. 

22. See Locutions Prepositives, page 161. 

23. Le tiret (— ), the dash, is used in French to mark in dialogue the change 
of interlocutor (speaker), instead of the quotation marks used in English. 

24. After the verbs expressing duty, possibility, desire or command, the 
subjunctive mood must be used in French; those expressing fear require 
also the prefix ne. 25. Pres. ind. of atteindre, to reach. 



176 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. Dans le Midi 26 le mercure monte quelquefois 

jusqu'a quarante degres 27 a l'ombre.* 

12. Et jusqu'ou descend-il 28 dans le Nord ? 

13. Nous y avons rarement des temperatures 10 plus 

froides que 29 dix degres au-dessous de zero.* 

14. Mais a Nice il ne gele jamais. 

15. Aussi, 30 l'liiver j est-il a peu pres inconnu. 31 

16. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'il va pleuvoir? 

17. Le ciel est tres nuageux, 32 mais je crois qu'il 

fait trop froid pour qu'il 33 pleuve.* 

18. II neige deja. II faut mettre^un impermeable 35 

et des caoutchoucs car un parapluie ne servi- 
rait a 36 rien.* 

19. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'il fait trop chaud pour 

la saison? 

20. La chaleur est suffocante. II n'y a pas un 

souffle d'air. 



11. In the midday the mercury mounts sometimes till 40° 

13. We there have seldom of the temperatures more cold than 

17. The sky is very cloudy, but I believe that it makes too 

18. It snows already. It must to put-in as an umbrella not 

would serve to nothing. 

26. Mi is an abbreviation of demi, meaning half: midi, half of the day 
noon ; mi-cargme, half of Lent. 

27. The thermometer in France is gauged by the Centigrade scale, and in 
the United States by that of the Fahrenheit. 32 degrees F. corresponds to 
zero C, and zero F. to less 18 (-18) C; that is, one deg. F. equals only five- 
ninths (5-9) of one deg. C. The rule to reduce C. degrees to F. degrees is : first 
find the difference between the given number and -18, and then multiply 
this difference by 5-9; the result will be the temperature in F. degrees. 
The reduction to C. degrees is obtained by a reverse process. 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



177 



11 mayrkwr / m6 n/ t e kel / k e 

fwa' .... 16 n/ br e . 

12. & zhwskoo' dayso n/ -teel' 
. ... ? 

18 ra^mo 11 ' de to n pay- 

ratwr/ -plu frwa'd e 

6-desoo' de zayro 7 . 

14 nis zhh'l* zhame'. 

15. Osee / , leevayr' pe pre- 

za^konw'. 
16 plevwar'? 

17 nwazhe' poor keel 

ple'v" 5 . 

18 ne'zlr 2 dayzha' e n - 

na n payrmaya / bl e ay de 
kaoochoo' paraplwee' 

19 sh6 . . . . sezo n/ ? 



12. 



13. 



11. In the southern part the 
mercury sometimes as- 
cends to 40° in the shade. 

And how far does it de- 
scend in the north ? 

We seldom have the tem- 
perature colder than ten 
degrees below zero. 

14. But at Nice it never freezes. 

15. Consequently, winter is 

there almost unknown. 

16. Don't you think it is going 

to rain? 

17. The sky is very cloudy, but 

I think it is too cold to 
rain. 

It is snowing already. You 
must put on your rubber 
coat and rubbers, as an 
umbrella would be useless. 

Don't you think that it is 
too warm for the season f 



18 



19 



20. La shaler' e swfoko n/ t e . 
soo'lr 2 der. 



20. The heat is suffocating ; 
there is not a breath of air. 



28. Notice that the final d of descend-il is sounded like t, deso n '-teel\ as is 
the case with all verbs the stems of which end in d. 

29. To form the comparative of superiority or inferiority of the adjectives 
and adverbs plus is added in the first case and moins in the second ; que 
follows in both cases. The comparative of equality is formed by means of 
the expression aussi que: ilfait aussi froid ici qu' en France. 

30. Aussi, adverb, means also. "When a conjunction, as in this case, it is 
a synonym of done, thus, consequently. 

31. See page 168, note 30. 32. Nuageux, cloudy ; from nuage, a cloud. 

33. Pour que, like many other conjunctions, governs the subjunctive 
mood : quHl pleuve, that it rains. 

34. Mettre forms many compound verbs: admettre (note 11), commettre 
(p. 130, n. 11), demettre (p. 166, n. 2), promettre, permettre, omeilre, remettre 
(p. 46, n. 8), soumetire and transmetlre. 

35. The final able belongs to both languages, and forms adjectives from 
verbs : admirable, comparable, par donnable, etc. 

36. See page 161, note 12. 



178 CORTINA METHOD. 



DOXJZIEME LEgOK 

Linge et Vaisselle. 1 

Les draps 2 (dra); la courte-pointe, the sheets; the spread. 

Une couverture de laine, de coton, a woolen, cotton blanket. 

Une serviette de toilette 3 (twale / t e ), 1 i owe i 

Un essuie-main (eswee'-ma 11 ), / 

Le couvre-pied 4 (koo'vi^-piay'), . the comfortable. 

Un chiffon (sheef6 n/ ); un torchon, 5 a rag ; a dish cloth. 

Le tapis (tapee'); la tapisserie, . the carpet; the tapestry. 

Une carpette, un petit tapis, . . a rug. 

La natte ; une aiguiere 6 (eguie / r e ), the matting ; a ewer or jug. 

Un pot 6 (p6); une cruche a eau, . pitcher; water pitcher Jug. 

Un bassin 7 (basa n/ ), une cuvette, 8 . a basin, a wash basin. 

Le vase ; le seau ; le crachoir, . the vase; pail; cuspidor. 

Les flacons de parfumerie, 9 . . the perfumery bottles. 

Le Foyer et ses UstensUes. 10 

La cheminee (shemeenay 7 ), . . chimney; mantelpiece. 

Une allumette; unporte-allumettes, a match; a match box. 

Du bois a bruler (bwa-za brwlay'), , firewood. 

Le charbon; le coke (k6'k e ), . . the coal; the coke. 

Des charbons ardents ; des cendres, live coals ; ashes. 

La flamme; la fumee; 11 le balai, , . the flame; smoke; broom. 

La pelle a feu ; les pincettes (pa n se / t e ) , the coal shovel ; the tongs. 

1. La n 'zh« ay vesay'l*, linen and crockery. 

2. Drap means both sheet and cloth (woolen fabric). 

3. To distinguish it from une serviette de table or simply une serviette, 
a napkin. 4. More lit., the foot coverlet. 5. Torsh6°', dish cloth, duster. 

6. Aiguiere, is the water pitcher or the ewer which is placed in the wash 
basin. Pot enters into the composition of several compound nouns; as, 
pot d eau, a water pitcher ; pot d'eau, a pitcher of water, full of water ; pot d 
fleurs, flower pot ; un pot defleurs, a pot of flowers, etc. 

7. See page 56, sentence 16, for another meaning of bassin. 

8. Cuvette, from cuve, tub or vat. 

9. Lit., the flasks of perfumery. Par and per are inseparable prefixes 
common to both languages, denoting persistence, duration or completion ; 
as, paralysie, paralysis ; par/ait, perfect ; perfection, perfection. P. 177, n. 34. 

10. Le f way ay' ay se-zwsto n seel', the fireplace and its appurtenances. 

11. From fumer, to smoke. 



TWELFTH LESSON. 



179 



Parties du Monde. 12 Habitants. 13 

Europe (ero'p 6 ), . . Europe, . l'Europeen (leropayo Q/ ). 
Amerique(^inayree / k e ), America, l'Americain (lamayreeka n/ )« 
Australie (pstralee'), . Australia, l'Australien (lostraleea u/ ). 
Asie (azee'), . . . Asia, . . l'Asiatique (lazeeatee'k 6 ). 
Afrique (afri / k e ), . . AfHca, . l'Africain (lafrika n/ ). 



Royanmes, Empires et Republiques. u 



Allemagne (alema / ny e ) 
Autriche (6tree / sh e ), . 
Belgique (b&lzkee'k 6 ), 
Espagne (espa'ny e ), 
Etats-Unis (ayta-zimee 
France (fro n/ s e ), . 
Hollande {ho\o n/ d e ) , 
Angleterre (o D gl e tayr / ), 
Italie (italee / ), . 
Grece (gre^), . 
Portugal (portwgal' 
Prusse (prw's 6 ), . 
Saxe (sax), . 
Suede (sttfe'd"), . 
Suisse (s?<ee / s e ), . 
Norvege (norve / zh e ), 
Turquie (twrkee'), 
Hongrie (^6 n gree') 
Bussie (rwsee'), . 
Chine (shee'n e ), 
Japon (zhapo n/ ), 
Mexique (mayksee'k 6 ), 
Nicaragua (neecaragwa'), 
Guatemala (gwataymala') 
Costa-Rica (kosta-reeka'), 
Salvador (Salvador'), 
Honduras (hcPdurhs'). 



Germany, 

Austria, 

Belgium, 

Spain, 

United States, 

France, 

Holland, 

England, 

Italy, . 

Greece, 

Portugal, 

Prussia, 

Saxony, 

Sweden, 

Switzerland, 

Norway, 

Turkey, 

Hungary, 

Russia, . 

China, . 

Japan, 

Mexico, 

Nicaragua, 

Guatemala, 

Costa Rica, 

Salvador, . 

Honduras, . 



Nationalites.™ 
. PAllemand. 
. l'Autrichien. 
. le Beige. 
. l'Espagnol. 
. l'Americain. 
. le Francais. 
. le Hollandais. 16 
. l'Anglais. 
. l'ltalien. 
. le Grec. 
. le Portugais. 
. le Prussien. 
. le Saxon. 
. le Suedois. 
. le Suisse. 
. le Norvegien. 
. le Turc. 
. le Hongrois. 16 
. le Russe. 
. le Chinois. 
. le Japonais. 
. le Mexicain. 
. le Nicaraguien. 
. le Guatemalien. 
. le Costa-Ricien. 
. le Salvadorien. 
. le Hondurassien. 



12. Partee' du m6 n 'd*, parts of the world. 18. Abito n ', inhabitants. 

14. Rwayo'me, o n peer'-zay raypublee'k e . kingdoms, empires and republics. 

15. See page 47; names of nationalities are written with a capital except 
when used as adjectives: M. Tin Tel est un Francais, Mr. So-and-So is a 
Frenchman ; il est francais, he is French. 16. i?olo Q day'. i76 D grwa/. 



180 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. Demandez 17 a M. Joseph Durand quand 18 il aura 

besoin de cet argent. 19 

2. II en a besoin de suite, car il a plusieurs achats 

a faire aujourd'hui. 

3. Ou fera-t-il faire 20 ses v&tements ? * 

4. Chez Legrand Freres ; ce sont 21 les tailleurs a la 

mode a Toulouse.* 

5. Bonjour, MM. 22 Legrand; je desire me faire 

faire 20 un complet 23 de demi-saison.* 

6. Montrez-moi vos dernier s echantillons. 

7. Ceci me platt. Prenez-moi mesure pour un cos- 

tume de cette etoffe et de cette coupe. 

8. Desirez-vous le veston 24 serre a la taille? 25 

9. Faites-le-moi 26 plutot 27 tres a l'aise f 8 et n'oubliez 

pas que je suis on ne peut plus presse.* 

10. Je ferai mon possible 29 pour vous finir le tout 

pour merer edi 30 ou jeudi. 30 

♦TRADUCTION LITTERALE. 

3. Where will-make-he to make his clothes ? 

4 these are the tailors to the fashion at Toulouse . 

5 I desire to-me to make to make a complete of half-season. 

9. Do-it-me rather very to the ease one not can more pressed. 

17. Demander is translated by to ask, to demand, to beg. 

18. Quand, when, is an adverb ; quant d, as to, is a compound preposition. 

19. Lit., silver. See page 113, note 30. 20. See page 115, note 39. 

21. Ce is used before est, is, and sont, are, to point out a person or thing : 
e'est mon lailleur, that is my tailor; it is also used instead of the personal 
pronoun he, she or they, when est or sont is followed by a noun or a pronoun 
denoting the same person or thing to which ce refers, as in the text, e. g.: 
je le connais, e'est mon tailleur, I know him, he is my tailor. 



TWELFTH LESSON. 



181 



PRONONCIATION. TRADUCTION. 

1 zhozef 7 dwro n/ , ar- 1. Ask Mr. Joseph Durand 

zho n/ . when he will need that 

money. 

2 plwzier'-zasha'-za fhr 2. He needs it at once, as he 

has many purchases to 

make to-day. 

3. Where will he have his 
clothes made f 

4. At Legrand Bros.' They 
are the fashionable tailors 
in Toulouse. 

5. Good morning, gentlemen. 
I would like to have a 
spring {fall) suit made. 

6. Show me the latest samples. 



3 vet e mo n/ ? 

4. .... legro n/ frfe'r e ; .... ta- 
yer' .... tooloo / z e . 

5 niaysie' ko n pl&' de 

demee / -sfezo n/ . 



6. . . . d^rnifer / -zaysho n teey6 n/ 

7 pl& mezwr' .... kos- 7. 

tzj'm 6 sfe-taytof 

koop. 
8 vaysto n/ sayrray' a la 8. 

ta'y e ? 

9 pk«to' tvh-zk-Wz? .... 9. 

o n ne pe plw praysay'. 

10 zhedee'. 10. 



/ like this. Take my meas- 
ure for a suit of this cloth, 
and this style. 

Do you wish the sack coat 
tight-fitting f 

Make it rather loose; and 
do not forget that lam in 
a great hurry. 
I will do my best to have 
everything finished by 
Wednesday or Thursday 



22. Abbreviation of messieurs, sirs ; M. is that of monsieur, sir. 

23. Complet, complete, means the three pieces of a suit. 

24. Veston, a sack coat. Un paletot is the generic term a coat ; une redin^ 
gote, a frock coat ; un habit de soiree, an evening dress coat. 

25. Serre d la taille, lit., tight to the waist. 26. See page 41, " Note." 

27. See page 52, note 8. Tot is used as an affix to the adverbs aussi, bien, 
si, to form other adverbs : aussildt, as soon as ; bientdt, soon ; sitdt, as soon. 

28. Aise, ease ; etre a raise, to be at ease ; e~tre bien d son aise, to be perfectly 
at ease ; etre mal d son aise, to be uneasy. 

29. Idiomatical expression. The final ible, like able, page 177, note 35, 
denotes aptitude, fitness, and serves to form adjectives alike in both lan- 
guages : possible, sensible, terrible, etc. 

30. The names of the days are not preceded by any preposition : je viendrai 
dimanche, I will call on Sunday. 



182 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. Maintenant accompagnez-moi chez mon bot- 

tier, 31 boulevard de la Bastille, puis nous 
rentrerons 32 ensemble a l'hotel.* 

12. G-argon, n'est-il venu personne me demander?* 

13. Un monsieur a laisse sa carte; il reviendra 

dans une demi-heure. 

14. Quand il viendra, f aites-le 33 monter. * 

15. M. 22 Blanc vient d'arriver, monsieur. 

16. Ah! mon vieux! 34 comment vas-tu? Je suis 

enchante de te voir de retour.* 
IT. Merci, mon cher f 4 c'est un vrai bonheur de se 
retrouver chez soi. 

18. Mais tu as fait pour ainsi dire le tour du 

monde, n'est-ce pas ? 

19. Presque, mais c'est fini ; j'en ai assez.* 

20. Vas-tu reellement rester ici a demeure P 35 — 36 Bien 

entendu ; je vais mettre mes affaires en 
ordre et vivre de mes rentes.* 



11 then we shall-re-enter together at the hotel. 

12. Waiter, not is-he come some-person for me to-ask? 

14. When he will-come, make-him ascend. 

16. Ah ! my old ! how goest-thou? .... of thee to-see of return. 

19. Almost, but that is finished ; I of it have enough. 

20. Goest-thou really to remain here at dwelling? Well under- 

stood ; I go to put my affairs in order and to live 

31. From botte, boot; another word, meaning shoemaker, is cordonnier t 
but it is not so desirable as bottler ; it approximates savelier, cobbler. 



TWELFTH LESSON. 



183 



11 botiay', booPvar' de 

la bastee'y e 



12. Garso D/ , . 



13. 



14. 



15. 



16. 



l&say' sa kar't e 



blo n 



retool'. 



17 boner 7 



18 poora n see / dlr 



19 zho n -ne asay'. 

20 rfcstay'-reesee' a de- 

mer' ? — Beea n/ -no n to n dw / 
or'dr* ro n/ t e . 



11. Now, come with me to my 

bootmaker' s, boulevard of 
the Bastille ; then we will 
return together to the 
hotel. 

12. Porter, has no person 

called to see me 9 

13. A gentleman left his card ; 

he will return in half an 
hour. 

14. When he comes, show him 



15. Mr. White has just arrived, 

sir. 

16. Ah / old fellow f how are 

you? lam delighted to 
see you have returned. 

17. Thanks, old boy ; it is in- 

deed a pleasure to find 
oneself at home again. 

18. Why, you have about made 

the tour of the world, 
have you not? 

19. Very nearly, but the end has 

come ; Fve had enough. 

20. "Are you really going to 

settle down hereP m "Of 
course, lam going to ar- 
range my affairs and live 
on my income. 17 



32. The vowel e of the suffix re is often dropped in the compound verbs : 
rappeler, to recall, from appeler, to call. Instead of retourner, to return, 
renlrer, literally to re-enter, is very much used. 

33. See p. 49, n. 22. Faites-" le " and not faites-" lui." Lui is the dative case 
of the pronoun il and stands for d il; le is the accusative case which /aire 
governs here ; /aire, as entendre, savoir, voir, croire,pouvoir, vouloir, etc., when 
followed by an infinitive, do not admit any preposition between. 

34. Familiar expression used between intimate friends, just as man cher, 
my dear, and corresponding to the English, old man, old fellow, my boy, etc. 

35. Hester a demeure, or s'gtablir, to settle, to establish oneself 

36. See page 175, note 23. 

13 



184 CORTINA METHOD. 



SEOONDE PAETIE. 
BEGEMS de compakaison dans les adjectifs 

ET LES ADVEBBES. 1 

Tout adjectif ou adverbe est susceptible de trois 
degres de significations: le positif le comparatif et le 
superlatif. . Exemples : 

Mon eheval est noir. My horse is black. 

Plus noir que le vdtre. Blacker than yours. 

Le plus noir de tous. The blackest of all. 

Le comparatif se forme en ajoutant 2 plus a V adjectif 
quand on 3 veut 4 marquer la supSrioriU ; moins, pas si ou 
pas aussi, pour marquer YinferioritS, et aussi, Yegalite: 

II est savant; plus, moins He is learned, more, less 
(pas si, pas aussi), aussi, learned than, as learned as 
savant que 5 vous. you are. 

Le superlatif absolve se forme par Y addition 7 de tres a 
V adjectif, mais on ajoute le (masc), la (fern.), les (pi.)? 
plus, ou le, la, les, moins, pour former le superlatif 
relatif:* 

II est tres savant; le plus, le He is very learned; the most, 
moins savant de tous. the least learned of all. 

1. Degreea of comparison of adjectives and adverbs. 

2. Pres. part, of ajouter (azhootay'), to add. See page 161, note 20. 

3. K6 n to n '. As before remarked, final d is sounded like t when connected 
with the vowel of the next word. 

4. Ye, third person of the pres. ind. of vouloir, to wish. 

5. See page 177, note 29. 

6. The " superlative absolute " does not admit of any comparison. 

7. Ladeesio 11 '. The d is doubled in words like addition, addition ; adduetiort, 
adduction ; reddition, reddition, and derivatives. 

8. The "superlative relative" admits of comparison. 



PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE AND ADVERB. 185 

Les memes regies sont applicables aux adverbes ; ex. : 

Je parle tres clairement. I speak very clearly. 

Plus clairement que vous. More clearly than you do. 

Le 9 plus clairement. The most clearly. 

Remarque. 10 — Bon, bien, etc., forment leurs compara- 
tifs et superlatife irregulierment, 11 voyez 12 pages 119 et 
169, notes 29 et 25 respectivement. 13 



PLACE DE L'ADJECTTF ET DE L'ADVERBE. 1 

Uadjectifse place 2 apres le nom qu'il qualifie. 3 
Exceptions. — IV Les adjeciifs suivants precedent 5 
generalement le substantif : 

Beau, beautiful. Jeune, young. Moindre, least. 

Bon, good. Joli, pretty. Nouveau, new. 

Grand, great, large. Mauvais, bad. Petit, small. 

Gros, large, big. Meilleur, better. Vieux, old. 

2 . 4 Quand Vadjectif a moins de syllables qne le nom, il 
est place avant lui par raison d'enphonie : 

Vn sage ennemi. A wise enemy. 

9. It has been noted, page 72, note 3, that there is no neuter in French. 
"When the gender is not indicated the masc. art. le is used. 

10. Remar'k e , remark or observation. 

11. The doubling of the r follows the same rules in both languages. In 
the case of words beginning with cor, ir, the r is always doubled. 

12. Second person pi. of the imp. of voir, to see, page 130, note 4. 

13. Note that the comparatives of the adjectives have regular forms for 
the feminine and the plural: bon, bonne, bons, bonnes; meilleur, meilleur e, 
meilleurs, meilleures, le meilleur, la meilleure, les meilleurs, meilleures, etc. 

1. Place of the adjective and adverb. 

2. Lit., places itself. 3. Kaleefee', qualifies. 

4. To enumerate, as in this case, the adverbs premierement, deuxiemement, 
etc. are generally replaced by the Latin equivalents : primo, secundo (say- 
ko n do'), tertio (terseeoO, quarto, quinto (kwintoOi sexto, septimo, octavo, nono, 
dicimo, undecimo, duodecimo, 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, 12th. 

5. Pre is an inseparable prefix which denotes anteriority or superiority : 
pre'ce'der, preambule, predominer, preferer, etc. 



186 CORTINA METHOD. 

3 . 4 Plusieurs* adjeciifSj selon 7 qu'ils sont places avant 
ou apres le nom, ont une signification differente j 8 ex. : 

Un homme brave. A brave man. 

Un brave homme. A worthy man. 

Un homme grand. A tall man. 

Un grand homme. A great man. 

Une femme honnete. A polite woman. 

Une honnete femme. A virtuous woman. 

Un homme bon. A good man. 

Un bon homme. A simple man. 

Un homme galant. A courteous man. 

Un galant homme. A gentle man. 

Une femme sage. A wise woman. 

Une s&ge-femme. A midwife. 

Une chose certaine. A sure thing. 

Une certaine chose. A certain {stated) thing. 

La mer haute. The high water. 

La haute mer. The high sea. 

Vadverbe se place inline" diatement apr£s le verbe; et, 
dans les temps composes, entre Pauxiliaire et le parti- 
cipe. Les adverbes de plusieurs syilabes et les locu- 
tions adverbiales se placent apres le participe j ex. : 

II a tres bien parle. He spoke very well. 

II a parle correctement. He spoke correctly. 

Les adverbes de temps tels que 9 Mer, aujourd'hui, demain, 
etc., pen vent &tre places avant le sujet, mais aucun 
adverbe ne peut se placer 10 entre le sujet et le verbe : 

Hier, j'ai dine au restaurant. \ Yesterday I dined at the res- 
J'ai din6 hier au restaurant. * taurant. 

6. Plwsier', several. 7. Seld n ', accoi'ding. 

8. The prefix dis has two different meanings : a negative one, as in dis- 
grdce, disgrace, from grdce, grace ; and another denoting diffusion, as in 
distendre, to extend, from tendre, to tender. Sometimes the s is lost: di< 
mirmer, to diminish, or changed into another consonant, as in difforme, 
difform, from forme, form, and different, different. 9. Tels que, such as. 

10. No adverb can be placed ; the negative ne must precede the verb even 
with another negative : aucun ne peut. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 

VERSES IRREGULIERS. 

Les verbes qui ne se conjuguent pas suivant les mo- 
deles parler, finir, recevoir et rendre 1 sont appeles 
verbes irreguliers. 

Les verbes irreguliers se divisent 2 en deux categories : 
eeux qui bien qu' irreguliers dans leurs temps primitifs* 
ont leurs temps derives formes regulierement, d'apres les 
regies de la Formation des Temps;* et, ceux qui forment 
irregulierement non seulement leurs temps primitifs, mais 
aussi leurs temps derives. 

La premiere categorie se subdivise 5 en huit classes ; 
la seconde categorie forme la neuvieme classe. 

Classe I (2 me Conjugation*). 

Les verbes terminus a Finfinitif en entir, 7 comme 
sentir, to feelj to smell, et les quatre verbes dormir, to 
sleep; partir,fo depart or to leave; servir, to serve; sor- 
tir, to go out, sont irreguliers au participe present, qu'ils 
forment en ajoutant ant au radical, au lieu de issant, 8 et 
aux trois personnes du singulier de V indicatif present dont 9 
les terminaisons sont s, s, t, au lieu de is, is, it, la con- 
sonne du radical ayant ete* d'abord supprim6e. Ex.: 

1. Pages 80 to 84. 

2. Se divisent, reflective form of the reg. verb diviser ; it must be translated 
by the passive form : are divided. 

3. Those which although irregular in their primitive tenses. 

4. Pages 77 to 79. 

5. Sub is a prefix expressing an inferior state or degree, as subalterne, 
subordinate; subjuguer, subjugate, etc. Sometimes the b is dropped, as in 
sujet, subject; page 177, note 34. 

6. Notice that in the first eight classes enter only verbs of the 2d and 4th 
conjs., with the exception of three belonging to the 3d in class VIII. Of the 
1st. there are only two single irregular verbs, and they belong to class IX. 

7. See page 90, " Note." 

8. The irregularity is that they add the final ant instead of issant, like the 
verbs of the 1st conj., though they belong to the 2d conj. 

9. 0/ which, see page 144, note 15. 



1S8 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Sentir. 



Sent l0 -ant. 



INFINITIFS PRESENTS. 

Dormir. Partir. Servir. 

PARTICIPES PRESENTS. 

Dorm-smt. Part-suit. Serv-ant. 



INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 



dorm-ons, 



Je sen-s, dor-s, 

Tu " -s, " -s, 

II " -t, " -t, 

Nous se?it-ons, l ° 
Vous " -ez, ' 

lis " -ent, l 

Sent wn 
Dorm 
Part 
Serv 
Sort 
Sent 
Dorm 
Part 
Serv 
Sort 



-ez, 



-ent, 



par-s, 

"-s, 

"-t, 
part-ons, 

" -ez, 

" -ent, 



ser-s, 

"-t, 

serv-ons, 
" -ez, 
" -ent, 



Sortir. 



Sort-ant, 



sor-s. 

"-s. 

" -t. 
sort-on*- 

" -ez. 
" -ent. 



Imparfaits. 



Subjonctifs 
Presents. 



Imp6ratifs. 



- -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 1 



- -e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 



>■ -ons, -ez. 



f Sen ] 




' Sent 


Dor 




Dorm 


-(Par 


h-s,^ 


Part 


Ser 




Serv 


ISor , 




[Sort 



Temps Beguliers: 

PARTICIPES PASSES. 

Dorm-\, Part-i } Serv-i, 



Sent-i. 



i 10 



Sort-i. 



10. The heavy type is used to point out the irregularities ; italics denote 
the regular roots, and Roman type the finals, as in the second part of Book I 
when treating of the regular verbs. 

11. The reader will readily supply the personal pronouns which must 
always accompany the French verb. See page 48, note 18. 

12. The tenses are presented in this manner to distinguish the primitive 
tenses, which are given in columns, from the derived tenses, which are 
printed with brackets. The latter follow all the irregularities of the former 
according to the rules given on pages 77 to 79, which are of great importance 
in acquiring a good knowledge of French verbs. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



189 



PASSES DEFINIS. 



Je sent-ia, 10 


dorm-is, 10 


part-is™ 


ser v-is, 10 


sorMs. 10 


Tu " -is, 


" -is, 


" -is, 


« -is, 


" -is. I 


11 " -it, 


" -it, 


" -it, 


11 -it, 


" -it. 


Nous " -imes, 


" -imes, 


" -imes, 


" -imes, 


11 -imes. 


Vous " -ites, 


", -ites, 


" -ites, 


" -ites, 


" -ites. 


lis " -irent, 


11 -irent, 


" -irent, 


M -irent, 


" -irent 




r Sent n ' 












Dorm 










Subj. Imp. 


Part 


-isse 


, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 18 




Serv 












.Sort . 











- -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 



•ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 



' Sentir 

Dormir 
Futurs. \ Partir 

Servir 

Sortir 
' Sentir 

Dormir 
Conditionnels. \ Partir 

Servir 

Sortir 

Se conjuguent identiquement de la m6me maniere les com- 
poses: ressentir (to feel), ^ressentir (to have a presentiment)^ 
consentir (to consent), assentir 13 (to assent); endormir (to lull to 
sleep), s'eftdormir (to fall asleep), se ren&ormir (to fall asleep 
again); d^partir (to divide or grant), se cZepartir (to deviate), 
repartir 14 (to leave again); desservir (to clear the {able), res- 
servir (to serve again); ressortir (to go out again); lb mentir (to 
lie) et ses composes c^mentir (to contradict), rementir (to lie 
again) et le verbe se repentir (to repent). 

Classe II (2 me Conjugation). 
Les verbes terminus a l'infinitif en frir ou vrir, 
sont irr£guliers au participe present, qu'ils forment en 

13. Defective ; used only in the infinitive. 

14. Repartir must not be confounded with repartir (to divide, to share), 
which is regular and conjugated like finir. 

15. Assoriir, to match, is regular. 



190 CORTINA METHOD. 

ajoutant simplement ant au radical j 16 au participe passe* 
qu'ils forment en supprimant la consonne r du radical 
et ajoutant la terminaison ert, et aux trois personnes du 
singulier de Vindicatif present dont 9 les terminaisons sont 
e, es, e, ons, ez, ent, au lieu de is, is, it, issons, issez, 
issent. Exemples : 

INFINITIFS PRES. PARTICTPES PRES. PARTICIPES PAS. 

Offrir, to offer. Offr-trnt. Off-ert. 

Ouvrir, to open. Owvr-ant. Ouv-ert. 

INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 

J' offr-e, . ouvr-e. Nous offr-ons, oww-ons. 12 

Tu " -es, " -es. Vous " -ez, k< -ez. 

II " -e, " -es. lis " -ent, " -ent. 

Imparfaits. { ~w r \ -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 10 12 
<• Ouvr > 

Subj. Pr6s. { Vff r X _ e> _ eSj ^ -ions, -iez, -ent. 
v Ouvr > 

Iniperatifs. X Vp r \ -e, -ons, -ez. 
l Ouvr i 

Temps Beguliers: 

PASSES D&FINIS. 

J' offr-is, ouvr-is. Nous offr-lmes, om>r-fmes. 12 

Tu " -is, " -is. Vous " -ites, " -ites. 

II " -it, " -it. -lis " -irent, " -irent. 

Subj. Imp. { Vf* r }-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 
<- Ouvr i 

Futurs. < VjJ r ' ir X .^ _ as> _ a> ^ng^ _e Z _ on t, 

I Ouvrir i 

Conditionnels. \ JJ rxr \ -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
I Ouvrir i 

Se conjuguent de m6me 17 les composes : rouvrir (to reopen), 
couvrir (to cover), decouvrir (to uncover), recouvrir (recover); 
mgsoffrir 18 (to underbid), et le verbe souffrir (to suffer). 

16. Like class I. 

17. The idea is se conjuguent de {la) mtme (maniere), is conjugated in the 
tame way ; see page 73, No. 3. 

18. See page 161. note 24. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



191 



Classe III (4 me Conjugaisori). 

Les verbes termines a l'infinitif en aindre, 19 eindre 
et oindre 20 sont irreguliers dans tous leurs temps prinii- 
tifs. ' lis changent, au participe present et au passe defini, 
les consonnes finales nd du radical en gn avant d'aj outer 
les terminaisons regulieres ; au participe passe et au pre- 
sent de Vindicatif ils suppriment le d final du radical et 
fonnent le participe par V addition d'un t au lieu d'un u: 



INFINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES. 


PART. PASSES. 


Craindre, to fear. 


Oa*gn-ant. 


Crain-t. 


Peindre, to paint. 


Peign-ant. 


Pein-t. 


Joindre, to join. 


Jbign-ant. 


Join-t. 


INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 




Je crain-s, 


pein-s, 


join-s. 


Tu " -s, 


" -s, 


" -s. 


11 " -t, 


" -t, 


" -t. 


Nous craign-ons, 


peign-ons, 


joign-ona. 


Vous " -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -ez. 


Ils " -ent, 


11 -ent, 


" -ent. 


PASSES DEFINIS. 




Je craign-is, 


peign-is, 


joign-ia. 


Tu " -is, 


" -is, 


" -is. 


11 " -it, 


" "it, 


" -it. 


•Nous " -imes, 


11 -imes, 


" -imes. 


Vous " -ites, 


" -ites, 


" -ites. 


Ils " -irent, 


11 -irent, 


11 -irent. 


rOraign.] 






Imparfaits. •! Peign 


- -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, 


-iez, -aient. 


{ Joign J 


i 





19. On page 90, treating of the regular verbs, those of the fourth conjuga- 
tion are divided into three classes, all three of which, according to several 
grammarians, are considered as regular, though, in our opinion, those of 
the 2d and 3d classes ought to be treated as irregular verbs. We are sus- 
tained in this by a large number of authorities. 

20. Except poindre, to dawn, which is impersonal. 



V 



192 CORTINA METHOD. 

(Crain -i r craign \ 
Pein V -s, -j peign !• -ons, -ez. 
Join J ^ joign J 
{Craign \ 
Peign I -e, -es, -e, -ons, -ez, -ent. 
Joign J 
{Craign \ 
Peign > -isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issentr 
Joign j 

Temps Beguliers : 

{Craindr\ 
Peindr V -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 
Joindr ) 
{Craindr\ 
Peindr V -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Joindr J 

Sont conjugu6s d'une maniere identique les verbes plaindre 
{to pity), sepleandre (to complain), contr&indre (to compel), re- 
peindre (to repaint), c^peindre (to depict); eeindre (to gird) et 
son compose* enceindre (to surround), peindre (to moan); Eeindre 
(to tinge or dye) et ses composes Eeindre (to extinguish), dfr 
Eeindre (to take off), atteindre (to reach), retein&re (to retinge); 
les verbes /eindre ( to feign), ^preindre (to strain), enf reindre (to 
infringe), aveindre (to fetch out),e~treindre (to clasp), astreindre 
(to constrain), restreindre (to restrain); rejoindre (to rejoin), ad- 
joindre (to direct), cfa'sjoindre (to disunite) et le verbe oindre (to 
anoint). 

Classe IY (4 me Conjugaisori). 
Les verbes terminus a l'infinitif en aitre 21 et oitre 21 
sont irreguliers dans tous leurs temps primitifs. lis 
changent au participe prisent, et aux trois personnes sin- 
gulieres de Yindicatif present, la consonne finale t du 
radical respectivement en ssant, s, s, t, au participe 
passe et au passe defini ils suppriment la syllabe finale du 

21. The circumflex accent over the i recalls the s with which the word was 
originally spelled. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



193 



radical ait ou oit avant d 7 aj outer respectivement les ter- 
minaisons u et us, us, ut, umes, utes, urent. Exemples : 



INFINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES. 


PART. PASSES 


Paraitre, to appear, 


Paraiss-Siiit. 


Par-u. 


Connaitre, to know. 


Connaiss-smt. 


Conn-u. 


Croitre, to grow. 


Ooiss-ant. 

INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 


Cr-u. 22 


Je parai-s, 


connai-s, 


croi-^s. 


Tu " -s, 


" "S, 


" -s. 


11 parai 23 -t, 


connai 23 -t, 


" -t. 


Nous paraiss-cms, 


connaiss-ons, 


croiss-ons. 


Vous " -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -ez. 


lis " -ent, 


" -ent, 

PASSES DEFINIS. 


" -ent. 


Je par-us, 


conn-us, 


cr-u 22 s. 


Tu " -us, 


" -us, 


' '-us. 


11 " -ut, 


" -ut, 


"-ut. 


Nous " -umes, 


" -umes, 


"-umes. 


Vous " -utes, 


" -utes, 


"-utes. 


lis " -urent, 


14 -urent, 


"-urent. 



{Parai&s \ 
Connaiss j- -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Croiss J 

(pdraiss 



c Connai ^ 

Pare 

Croi 
cParaiss ^ 



Parai l -s, -J connaiss V -ons, -ez. 
Croi J { croiss J 



Subj. Pr6s. -j Connaiss V-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 

i Croiss J 

rPar , 
Subj. Imp. -j Conn v-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

(Cr J 

22. The past part., the pres. of the ind. and the past def. of croitre, retain 
the circumflex accent to distinguish them from the corresponding tenses 
of the verb croire, class VIII. 

23. The verbs in altre and oitre retain the circumflex accent whenever 
the i is followed by t. 



194 CORTINA METHOD. 

Temps BSguliers: 

{Paraitr ^ 
Connattr I -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 
Croitr ) 
{Paraitr \ 
Connattr > -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Croitr J 
Se conjuguent d'une maniere identique les composed: ap- 
paraitre {to appear unexpectedly), comparaitre (to appear 
before a judge), c&sparaitre (to disappear), reparaitre (to reap- 
pear), reconnaitre (to acknowledge or to recognize), ra^connaitre 
(to disregard); accroitre (to increase), d£croitre (to decrease), 
recroitre (to grow again), et le verbe paitre 24 (to graze) et ses 
composes repaitre 24 (to feed) et se repaitre 24 (to feast), 

Classe V (4 me Conjugation). 
Les verbes termines a l'infinitif en uire 19 sont irregu- 
liers en ce qu'ils prennent 25 un s euphonique au partieipe 
prSsent* et an passe d$fini avant d'ajouter les terminaisons 
regulieres, et qu'ils ont le partieipe passe termini par un t 
ainsi que 26 la troisieme personne singuliere de Yindicatif 
present, Exemples : 

INFINITIFS PRES. PARTICIPES PRES. PART. PASSES. 

Conduire, to conduct or lead. Cb/itfms-ant. Condui-t. 

Detruire, to destroy. De~trui8-a,nt. Ditrui-t. 

INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 

Je conduis, de"truis. Nous conduis^ns, d€truis i -ona. 
Tu " -s, " -s. Vous " -ez, " -ez. 

II " -t> " -t. lis M -ent. " -ent. 

PASSES DEFINIS. 

Je conduis-ia, de'truis-is. Nous conduis-tmes, detruia-lmes. 
Tu " -is, " -is. Vous " -ites, " -ftes. 

II " -it, " -it. lis " -irent. " -irent. 

24. It has no past definite and, consequently, no imp. of the subj.; note 12. 
Its compounds, however, repaitre et se repaitre, have all their tenses. 

25. En ce qu'ils prennent, as (because) they take. 

26. Ainsi que, as, or just as. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 

Imparfaits. j ~*J *f s | -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Subj. Pres. {^°™**f s }-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
Subj. Imp. | ™* ^j-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 
Temps ESguliers: 

Condition. { ^ dmr }-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
*. Detruir > 

Se conjuguent sur les m§mes modeles les composes: €con- 
duire (to show out), reconduire (to reconduct); produire (to 
produce) et son compost reproduire (to reproduce); c^duire 
(to deduct), rMuire (to reduce), s&luire (to seduce), tfraduire (to 
translate), enduire (to coat or lay over), induire (to induce), 
intro&uire (to introduce); constrvdxe (to construct) et son com- 
pose reconstruire (to reconstruct); instrvdre (to instruct), cuire" 
(to cook) et son compose" recuire (to cook again); le verbe d6- 
fectif 6ruire 28 (to rustle), et les verbes faire 29 (to shine), require 29 
(to glitter), raiire (to hurt or injure), dont la seule difference est 
le participe pass6 sans t ; soit : lui, relui, nui. 

Classe YI (4 me Conjugation). 
Les verbes terminer a Pinfinitif en aire — excepte 
faire* et traire zl — et le verbe lire et ses composes, prennent 
egalement V s euphonique au participe present et un t a la 
troisieme personne singuliere de Y indicatif present, comme 
la classe V, mais le participe passe et le passe dejini sont 
en u et us, us, ut, etc., comme la classe IV. Exemples : 

27. Page 107, note 42. 

28. Is used only in the infinitive and the pres. and imp. of the indicative. 

29. Luire and reluire have no past definite, consequently no imperfect of 
the subjunctive. 30. Belongs to class IX. 

31. Defective verb which will be given in Book IV. 



196 



CORTINA METHOD. 



INFINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES. 


PART. F 


Plaire, to please. 


Plais-ant. 


Pl-u. 


Taire, to silence. 


Tais-smt. 


T-u. 


Lire, to read. 


Zis-ant. 

INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 


L-u. 


Je plais, 


tais, 


lis. 


Tu « -s, 


»-s, 


"-S. 


11 plai S2 -t, 


tai 32 -t, 


"-t. 


Nous plais-ons, 


tais-ons, 


lis-ons. 


Vous " -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -ezo 


lis " -ent, 


" -ent, 

PASSES DEFINIS. 


"-ent. 


Je pl-us, 


t-US, 


1-us. 


Tu "-us, 


"-US, 


"-us. 


11 "-ut, 


"-Ut, 


"-ut. 


Nous "-umes, 


"-umes, 


"-umes. 


Vous "-utes, 


"-utes, 


"-utes. 


lis "-urent, 


"-urent, 


"-urent. 



{Plais \ 
Tarn > -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Lis ) . 
Plai ~\ ( plais 



{nai -J cpiais \ 
Tai >--s, -J tais U 
Id J Uis ) 



ons, -ez. 



Plais 



Subj. Pr6s. < Tais J--e, -es, -e, r ions, -iez, -ent. 
(..Lis J 



Subj. Imp 



•a 



■usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 



Temps Beguliers : 



Futurs. 






Plair 






■< Tair [■ -ai, -as, -a, -ons, -e*, -ont. 
ILir ) 
c Plair \ 



Condition. X Tair v-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
^Lir J 



32. In plaire, taire and their compounds, the i of the 3d person sing, of the 
pres. of the ind. takes a circumflex accent. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 197 

Se conjuguent d'une facon identique les composes: com- 
plaire 32 (to humor or please), deplaire 32 (to displease) se taire (to 
be silent) . relire (to read again), £lire (to elect), reelire (to elect 
anew). 

Classe YII (4 me Conjugation). 

Les verbes termines a rinfinitif en ure, ore, 33 et les 
verbes rire (to laugh) et sourive (to smile), ont conime par- 
ticipe passe le radical du verbe et forment le present et le 
passe deflni de Yindicatif en ajoutant a ce radical les ter 
minaisons generates s, s, t, ons, ez, ent pour le premier 
temps et s, s, t, mes, tes, rent pour le second. 34 Ex. : 

INFINITIFS PRES. PART. PASSES. 

Conclure, to conclude. Sourire, to smile. Concl-u. Sour-i. 

INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 

Je conclus, 34, sourish Nous conclu-ons, sourirons. 
Tu " -s, " -s. Vous " -ez, " -ez. 

II M -t, " -t. lis " -ent, " -ent. 

PASSES DEFINIS. 

Je concl-us, 34 sour-is. 34 Nous concl-umes, sour-imes. 
Tu " -us, "\ -is. Vous " -utes, " -ites. 

II " -ut, "1 -it, lis " -urent, " -irent. 

Subi Imt) { Concl-u^se, -usses, -ut, 35 -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 
i Sour-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 

Temps Beguliers: 

Part. Pres. Conclu-sait. Souri-smt. 

Imparfaits. i i - /0nc i -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
t Souri j 

Futurs. I Conclur | _ ai ^ _ ont< 

I Sourir J 

Condition. I Conc }-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
t Sourir j 

33. All defective verbs. 

34. In verbs of this class the singular person of the present indicative is 
identical with that of the past definite. 

35. QuHl conclut ; the circumflex accent is all that discriminates this tense 
from the past definite. 



198 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Imperatifs. { Conclu 1 ^ ^ 

Subj. Pr6s. { ^ onc ? w j-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
I. Souri j 

Se conjuguent de la m§me maniere: exclure {to exclude), 
clore 36 {to close) et ses composes eclore {to hatch) 31 et enclore 36 
(to inclose, to fence). 

Classe VIII. 
Les verbes de cette classe, au nombre de dix-neuf (19), 
ont des irregularites speciales a chacun d'eux. 38 

1°. Deuxieme Conjugaison. 
Q,uatre (4) verbes simples appartiennent a cette con- 
jugaison; savoir: 



INPINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES 




PART. 


PASSES. 


Assaillir, to assail. 


Assaill-SLJit. 




Assaill-L 


Bouillir, to boil. 


JBouill-ant. 




Bouill-i. 


Fuir, to flee. 


jFky^-ant. 




Fu-i. 




Vetir, to clothe. 


Vet-ant. 




VSt-u. 






INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 






J' assaill-e. 


bou-s, 


/w-is. 


» 


ve*t-8. 


Tu " -es, 


"-S, 


"-is, 


> 


"-S. 


11 " -e, 


"-*, 


"-it, 


i 


u 


Nous " -ons, 


bouill-ohs, 


/wy^-ons, 


"-ons. 


Vous " -ez, 


" -ez, 


<< 


-ez, 


"-ez. 


lis " -ent, 


" -ent, 


(< 


-ent, 


"-ent. 



f Assaill*, -ons, -ez. 

Imperatifs. \ * ou ; s > *°"f -° ns > ■*» 
j i^w-is, /wy^-ons, -ez. 

v Fe£-s, -ons, -ez. 



36. These verbs will be treated of in Book IV. 

37. When speaking of eggs ; when of flowers, to blow; of light, to dawn. 

38. The verbs of this class, nineteen in number, have each their special irreg- 
ularities. 

39. When fuir, croire, etc., retain the i in the stem, this letter is always 
changed to y before a vowel other than e mute: fuy ons, fuyez; croyons, 
croyez; fuy ions, fuy iez; croyions, croyiez, etc. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



199 



Temps Eeguliers : 



assaill- 



J' 

Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 

lis 



Imparfaits. 



Subj. Pr6s. 



Subj. Imp. 



Futurs. 



Condition. 



is, 

■is, 

■it, 

imes, 

ites, 

irent, 



PASSES DEFINIS, 

bou ill-is, 
" -is, 
« -it, 
" -imes, 
" -Ites, 
11 -irent, 



fUrlS, 

"-is, 
"-it, 
"-Imes, 
"-ites, 
" -irent, 



vit-is. 
-is. 
-it. 

-imes. 
-ites. 
-irent. 



{Assaill *\ 
Bouill ( 
Fu^ ( 
Vet J 



-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 



Assaill ~\ 

uUl V -e, -es, -e, -ions, 39 -iez, 39 -ent. 



Fui™ 

vet 

{Assaill 
Bouill 
Fu 
V6t 

{Assaillir 
Bouillir 
Fuir 
VStir 
{Assaillir ^ 
out ir i . _. _^ _i ong _j ez - a i en t. 
Fuir ( 
Vetir J 



•isse, -isses, -it, -issiez, -issiez, -issent. 



-ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 



Se conjuguent comme assaillir: faillir 40 {to fail) et son com- 
pose defaillir 41 (to faint); saillir 42 (to gush out, to project) et 
tressaillir (to tremble); comme bouillir: rebouillir (to reboil); 

40. This verb is defective and will be seen later. Notice, however, that it 
is not translated by to fail (in a business sense), which is rendered by /aire 
faillite, lit., to make failure. 

41. Now generally used with the verb senlir, as : je me sens di/aillir, or je 
sens mes forces de/aillir, I feel faint, or, I feel my strength giving way. 

42. When an architectural term, as in cette corniche saille, that cornice 
projects, it is conjugated like assaillir; but it is regular in the sense of to 
gush out, e. g.: le sang saillit, the blood gushes out. 

14 



200 



CORTINA METHOD. 



comme fuir : s'enfuir (to run away); com me vetir : cfevetir {to 
undress), se devetir (to undress oneself), revetir (to dress) et se 
revetir (to dress oneself). 

Troisieme Conjugation. 

Trois (3) verbes simples appartiennent a cette conju- 
gaison; savoir: 

INFINITIFS PRES. PART. PRES. PART. PASSES. 

Pourvoir, to provide. Pourvoy-smt. Pourv-u. 

Prevoir, to foresee. PrSvoy-smt. Prev-u. 

Sursoy-ant. Surs-is. 



Surseoir, to suspend. 



Je pourvoi-s, 
Tu " -s, 

II " -t, 

Nous pourvoy-ons, 
Vous " -ez, 
lis pourvoireiat, 



Je pourv-us. 



Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



-us, 

-ut, 

-times, 

-tites, 

-urent, 



INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 

prevoi-s, 

" -s, 

" -t, 
prgvoy-ons, 

li -ez, 
pre"voi-ent, 

PASSES DEFINIS. 

pr6v-is, 

-is, 



ii 

" "it, 

" -imes, 

w -ites, 

" -irent. 



sursoi-s. 

" -s. 

11 -t. 
sursoy-ons. 

" -ez. 
sursoi-ent. 



swrs-is. 
" -is. 
" -it. 
" -imes. 
" -ites. 
" -irent. 



{Pourvoy \ 
Prevoy I -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Sursoy J 

{Pourvoi-s, pourvoy-ons, -ez. 
Prevoi-s, prgvoy-oiis, -ez. 
Sursoi-s, sursoy-ons, -ez. 
f Pourvoy ou pourvoi \ 

■j Prevoy ou pr&voi y-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
1 Sursoy ou sursoi J 



Subj. Pr6s. 
Subj. Imp. 



f Prev \ _. g .i SS es -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 
I Surs J 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



201 



Temps Beguliers: 
Subj. Imp. Pourv-usse, -usses, -tit, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 



{Pourvoir 
Prevoir 
Surseoir 

{Pourvoii 
PrZvoir 
Surseoir 



[■ -ai, -as, -a, -ons -ez, -ont. 



ir l-ais, -ai 
4r J 



ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 



De meme d^pourvoir, 43 to unprovide. 

Quatrieme Conjugaison. 

II y a douze (12) verbes simples qui appartiennent a 
eette conjugaison j savoir : 

INFINITIFS PRES. PART. PRES. 

Coudre, to sew. Cows-ant. 

Croire, to believe. Ooy 39 -ant. 

ZXs-ant. 

J&cWv-ant. 



Dire, to say or tell. 
IScrire, to write. 



PART. PASSES. 

Cous-u. 
Cr-w. 22 , 
Di-t. 
JZcri-t. 



coud-s. 



Je 

Tu 
II " 

Nous cows-ons, 
Vous " -ez, 
lis " -ent, 



INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 

croi-s, 22 di-Sy 

u _ <<_ a 



croy^-ons, 

11 -ez, 
croi-ent. 



"-t, 

dis-ons, 
dites,** 
dis-ent, 

PASSES DEFINIS. 



Je 

Tu " 
II 

Nous " 
Vous " 

lis 



cows-is, 



-IS, 

-it, 

-imes, 

-ites, 

-irent, 



cr-us, 22 

"-us, 

"-ut, 

11 -umes, 

"-utes, 

"-urent, 



d-is, 
"-is, 
"-it, 

"-imes, 
"-ites, 45 
"-irent, 



&cririi. 
" -s. 
" -t. 
ecnv-ons. 
" -ez. 
" -ent. 

ieriv-is. 
" -is. 
" -it. 
" -imes. 
" -ites. 
" -irent. 



43. Is only employed in the infinitive and past participle. 

44. Dire, f aire and dire are the only verbs of which the 2d person pi. of the 
pres. ind. and of the imperative does not end in ez; these persons are 
respectively : diles,faites, ties (imperative soyez). 

45. The only difference with the same person of the ind. pres. and of 
the imperative is the circumflex accent. 



CORTINA METHOD. 

C Cous "j 
Imparfaits. J Q™Y y _ a i 9j _ a i s> m& i^ .j onSj .j eZj ^i en t. 

I jttcriv ) 
Cous ~\ 

Subj. Pres. -< ^^ I -e, -es, -e, -ions, 39 -iez, 39 -ent. 
Dis I 

£lcriv J 

Cous \ 

Cr-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussious, -ussiez, -ussent. 

{Couds, cous-ons, -ez. 
a-o^,cro^-ons,-ez 
Dis, dis-ons, dites. 4445 
jficris, £cWv-ons, -ez. 

Temps Beguliers: 

{Coudr ~\ 
Croir y ^ mQS ^ ^ <>n ^ ^ ^^ 
j@crir J 
C Coudr \ 

Condition. J J? ir V -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
V j&crir J 

Se conjuguent comme coudre: decoudre {to rip), recoudre 
(to sew again); comme croire: accroire (to make believe), me- 
croire (to disbelieve); comme dire : redire 46 (to repeat), se de'dire 46 
(to retract), pr£dire 46 (£o predict), mferdire 46 (to forbid), contre' 
dire 46 (to contradict), m^dire 46 (to slander); 41 et les verbes confire 
(to preserve) et circoncire (to circumcise), part. pas. circoncis; 
comme ecrire: decrire (to describe), recrire (to rewrite), et les 
autres verbes terminus en crire: inscrire (to inscribe), prescrire 
(to prescribe), sowscrire (to suscribe), transcrire (to transcribe), 
proscrire (to banish), circonscrive (to circumscribe). 

46. The 2d person pi. of redire is vous redites ; but all the other compounds 
of dire form this person regularly : vous pi-Sdisez, conlredisez, etc. In tHe 
past definite they follow all the irregularities of the simple verb. 

47. Maudire, to curse, belongs to class IX. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



203 



INFINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES. 


PART. PASSES. 


Mettre, to put 


Mett-antS 8 


M-is. 


Moudre, to grind. 


Moul-smt. 




Moul-u. 


Naitre, to be born. 


iVmss-ant 




Ne. 


Prendre, to take. 


Pren-ant. 




Pr-is. 




INDICATIFS PRESENTS. 




Je met-s, 


mouds, 


nav-B,, 


prend-s. 


Tu " -s, 


" -B, 


«-S, 


11 -s. 


11 


(( 


nai 22 -t, 


ii 


Nous rae^-ons, 


moul-ons, 


ncwss-ons, 


pren-ons. 


Vous n -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -ez. 


lis « -ent. 


" -ent, 


11 -ent, 


prenn i9 -ent. 




PASSES DEFINIS. 




Je m-is, 


moul-us, 


naqu-is, 


pr-is. 


Tu "-is, 


" -us, 


" -is, 


" -is. 


11 "-it, 


" -ut, 


" -it, 


"-it. 


Nous "-tines, 


M -umes, 


11 -imes, 


" -imes. 


Vous "-ites, 


11 -utes, 


" -ites, 


"-ites. 


lis "-irent, 


11 -urent, 


11 -irent, 


" -irent 



{Moul i 
JVmss y -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Pren J 
{Moul \ 
Naiss [ -e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
Pren 49 ) 

f M 1 

J Naqu > -isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent 

J Pr J 

v J/oul-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 
Met-s, mett-ons, -ez. 
Mouds, moul-ons, -ez. 
JVm-s, naiss-ons, -ez. 
Prends, pren-ons, -ez. 
Temps Reguliers ; 
Imparfait. Jfe^-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
Subj. Pres. Mett^-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 

48. The double l is kept in the present participle, the plural of the ind. 
pres. and the derived forms. 

49. The n is doubled before an e mute : prenru-e, -et, -e, -ent. 



Subj. Imp. 



Imp£ratifs. 



204: 



CORTINA METHOD. 



{Mettr iS 
Moudr y _ ai _ as _ a _ ons _q Z _o nt# 
Naitr 
Prendr 

Mettr* 8 

Condition. ^ Mouar \ _ a ^ g _ a j _ a j^ _i ong _i eZj -aient. 
Naitr 
Prendr 

Se conjuguent comme mettre les composes: admettre (te 
admit), eommettre (commit), compromettre (to compromise), 
demettre (to dislocate), emettre (to issue), entremQttxe (to inter' 
fere), omettre (to omit), permettre (to permit), jpromettre (to 
promise), remettre (to remit), se remettre (to recover from ill- 
ness), sowmettre (to submit), transmettxe (to transmit); comme 
moudre : emoudre (to grind knives) et remoudre (to re-grind); 
comme naitre : renaitre 50 (to be born again, to revive); comme 
prendre : apprendre (to learn), desapprendre (to unlearn or for- 
get), comprendre (to understand), snft-eprendre (to undertake), 
s'eprendre (to fall in love or be charmed), se meprendre (to mis- 
take), rqpprendre (to learn again), swrprendre (to surprise). 



INFINITIFS PRES. 


PART. PRES. 




PART. PASSES. 


Hesoudre, to resolve. 


Resolv-ant. 




Resol-u. 51 


Suffire, to suffice. 


Suffis-smt. 




Suff-i. 


Suivre, to follow. 


Suiv-snat. 




Suiv-i. 


Vivre, to live. 


Viv-hnt. 




Vec-u. 


INDIOATIFS PRESENTS. 




Je resou-s, 


suffi-s, sui-s, 52 


vi-s. 


Tu " -s, 


" -s, " 


-s, 


"-S. 


11 " -t, 


" -t, 


-t, 


"-t. 


Nous resolv-ons, 


suffis-ons, suiv-ons, 


viv-ons. 


Vous " .-ez, 


'" -ez, 


-ez, 


11 -ez. 


lis " -ent, 


" -ent, " 


-ent, 


u -ent. 



50. JRenallre has no past participle and consequently no compound tenses. 

51. It has another past participle : rSsous. See page 108, note 43. 

52. The verbs to follow and to be, are spelled the same in the 1st person 
sing. ind. pres., so they can only be distinguished by the context ; ex.: je suis 
Frctn?ais, I am a Frenchman ; je suis le cours defranQais, I attend (follow) the 
French course. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



205 



Je r6sol-us, 
Tu " -us, 
II " -ut, 

Nous " -umes, 
Vous " -utes, 
lis " -urent, 

f Resolv ") 



PASSES DEFINIS 

suff-is, 
" -is, 
" -it, 
11 -imes, 
" -Ites, 
M -irent, 



smv-is, 53 



-is, 

-it, 

-imes, 

-ites, 

-irent, 



vec-us. 
" -us. 
" -ut. 



(i 



-umes. 



" -utes. 
1 -urent. 



Subj. Pr6s. 



tSu/Jia 



> -e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 



Imparfaits. J f^ 8 



r, , . -r (_ eS ° \ -usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

Subj. Imp. ■] Vec / ' ' ' 

I Suff-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 

{Resou-s, resolv-ons, -ez. 
Suffix sutfi&om -ez. 
Sui-s, suiv-ons, -ez. 
Vi-s, viv"OJis f -ez. 

Temps Beguliers: 

Subj. Pr£s. { f^ V }-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 
i Viv > 

Subj. Imp. Suiv-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 

f Resolv \ 

V -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

I 
v Viv 
C RZsoudr 

j Suivr 

{Risoudr \ 
kufjir I _. _. _ a - t .j ong _j ez . a i en t. 

Se conjuguent comme resoudre les composes : a&soudre 54 
(to absolve) , disso\xdve bi (to dissolve); comme suivre: s'ensuivre 
(to ensue), powrsuivre (to sue, to pursue); comme vivre: re- 
vivre (to live anew) et swrvivre (to survive). 

53. This tense is perfectly regular (note 10); it is placed among the irreg- 
ular ones only for the sake of symmetry. 

54. The past participles of absoudre and dissoudre are absous and dissous. 



Futurs. 



Condition. 



-ai, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 



206 CORTINA METHOD. 

CLASSE IX. 

II y a dix-huit (18) verbes simples de cette categorie. 

Premiere Conjugaison. 
Deux (2) verbes appartiennent a cette conjugaison 



1. Aller, to go. AU-ant. 10 AllS. 



PRESENT. 


FUTUR. 


COND. 


SUBJ. PRES. 


Je v-ais, 


ir-ai, u 


ir-ais, 


aill-e. 56 


Tu "-as, 


"-as, 


"-ais, 


" -es. 


11 "-a, 


"-a, 


"-ait, 


" -€. 


ISs. 55 all-ons. 


"-OllS, 


"-ions, 


a^-ions. 


Vs. 55 "-ez, 


"-ez, 


"-iez, 


" -iez. 


lis. v-ont, 


"-ont, 


"-aient, 


aill-ent. 



IMPER. 



V-a. 



Allons. 
" -ez. 



Temps Rtyuliers: 

Imparfait. ^^ 10 -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Pas. D6f. ^l^-ai, -as, -a, -ames, -ates, -erent. 

Subj. Imp. ^L^-asse, -asses, -at, -assions, -assiez, -assent. 

Se conjugue sur aller, le verbe s'en aller 57 (to go away) qui est 
son seul compost. 



2. Envoyer, to send. Envoy-ant. 10 Envoys. 



PRESENT. 


FUTUR. 


CONDITION. 


SUBJ. PRES. 


J 7 envoi-e, 


enverr-ai, 


enverr-ais, 


envoi-e. 56 


Tu " -es, 


<( 


-as, 


n 


-ais, 


" -es. 


11 " -e, 


(< 


-a, 


a 


-ait, 


" -e. 


JSs. envoy-ons, 


u 


-ons, 


<< 


-ions, 


envoy-ions. 


Vs. " -ez, 


n 


-ez, 


<< 


-iez, 


" -iez. 


lis envoi-ent, 


u 


-ont, 


(< 


-aient, 


envoi-ent. 



IMPER. 



Envoi-e. 



-ez. 



55. Ns. and vs. are abbreviations for nous and vous. 

56. It is understood that in the tenses of the subjunctive mood the 
verb is conjugated with the conjunction que (that) preceding the pronoun: 
que faille, que tu allies, quHl aille, etc., that I may go, that thou mayst go, 
•etc. This omission, like the one of the pronouns, note 11, is made only to 
simplify these tables of verbs. 

57. S'en aller is a reflective verb which will be more fully conjugated 
further on. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



207 



Temps Regvliers: 
Imparfait. Envoy-sis, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Pas. Def. Envoy-ai, -as, -a, -ames, -ates, -erent. 
Subj.Imp. 56 i7m;o?/-asse, -asses, -at, -assions, -assiez, -assent. 

Conjuguez 58 d'une facon identique renvoyer, to send back. 

Deuximxe Conjugaison. 
Cinq (5) verbes appartiennenb a cette conjugaison : 

1. Acquerir, to acquire. Acqu^-sait. Acqu-is. 



PRESENT. 


PAS. DEF. 


FUTUR. 


CONDITION. 


J' acquievs, 


acqu-is, 


acquerr-ai, 


acgwerr-ais. 


Tu " -s, 




-is, 


u 


-as, 


" -ais. 


11 " -t, 




-it, 


a 


-a, 


" -ait. 


Ns. acque'r-ons, 




-imes, 


u 


-ons, 


11 -ions. 


Vs. " -ez, 




-Ites, 


a 


-ez, 


" -iez. 


lis acquier-ent. 




-irent, 


a 


-ont, 


11 -aient. 


IMPERATIF. 




SURJ. PRES. 

J' acquier-e, 




IMP. 

acqu-isse. 








Acquier-s. 




Tu 


" -es, 




11 -isses. 






11 " -e, 

Ns. acquer-ions, 




" -It. 

" -issions. 


Acquer-ons. 






" -ez. 




Vs. 


" -iez, 




11 -issiez. 






lis acgwier-ent, 




11 -issent. 




Imparfait. Acqu£ 


r-ais 


, -ais, -ait, -ions, ■ 


iez, -aient. 


De m§me querir 59 (to fetch), 


s'en querir (fo 


inquire), requerir 



(to require), conquerir (to conquer) et reeonquerir (to reconquer). 
2. Cueillir, to gather or pluck. Cueill-&nt. Cueill-i. 



PRESENT. 

Je cueill-e, 

Tu 

II 

Ns. 

Vs. 

lis 



-ons, 

-ez, 

-ent, 



FUTUR. 
cueiller-Sii, 
" -as, 

11 -a, 

" -ons, 

" -ez, 

u -ont, 



CONDITION. 

cueiller-ais. 
" -ais. 
" -ait. 
" -ions. 
11 -iez. 
11 -aient. 



IMPER. 



Cueill-e. 



Cueill-ons. 



58. Imperative of conjuguer, 2d person pi.: conjugate. 

59. Only used in the infinitive mood with aller ; alter querir, to go and 
fetch ; je vais qu&rir, tu vas qutrir, etc., I go and fetch, etc. 



208 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Imparfait. Cueill-a,is, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Subj. Pres. Cueill-e y -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 

Temps BSguliers: 
Pas. D£f. Cueill-is, -is, -it, -imes, -ites, -irent. 
Subj. Imp. Cueill-isse, -isses, -it, -issions, -issiez, -issent. 

Se conjuguent de meme les composes accueillir (to receive) 
et recueillir (to reap or gather). 

3. Courir, to run. Cow-ant. Cour-u.. 



Je 


cour-Sy 


Tu 


" -s, 


11 


" -t, 


Ns. 


" -ons, 


Vs. 


" -ez, 


lis 


" -ent, 



FUTUR. 

cowr-ai, 



COND. 

cowr-ais. 
-ais. 



IMPER. 



u 



Cour-s. 

Cour-ons. 
" -ez. 



PAS. DEF. 

cowr-us, 

" -us, " -as, 

" -ut, a -a, " -ait. 

" -umes, " -ons, " -ions. 

11 -utes, u -ez, " -iez. 

11 -urent, " -ont, " -aient. 

Imparfait. Ctowr-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Subj. Pres. Cour-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 

Subj. Imp. Cowr-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

Se conjuguent demesne tousles composes : accourir (torunup), 
concourir (to concur), discouviv (to discourse), encourir (to incur) y 
joarcourir (to go over), recourir (to run again) etsecourir (to help). 

4. Mourir, to die. Mour-&nt. Mort. 



PRESENT. 


PASSE DEFINI. 


FUTUR. 


Je meur-s, 60 


mour-us, 


mowr-ai. 


Tu V -s, 


" -us, 


« 


-as. 


11 " -t, 


. " -ut, 


u 


-a. 


Ns. mowr-ons, 


" -umes, 61 


a 


-ons. 


Vs. " -ez, 


" -utes, 


(( 


-ez. 


lis meur-ent, 


" -urent, 


(< 


-ont. 


CONDITIONNEL. 


SUBJ. PRES. 


IMPER. 


Je mom-r-ais, 


meur-e. 










Tu " -ais, 


" -es. 


ilfeur 


-s. 


11 " -ait, 


" -e. 










Ns. " -ions, 


mour-ions. 


Mour-ons. 


Vs. " -iez, 


" -iez. 


a 


-ez. 


lis " -aient, 


meur-ent. 











Mer, etc., moord n \ mooray', me're. 



Moorw'm e , mooru't e , mooru'r 6 . 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



209 



Imparfait. Mour-&is, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Subj. Imp. Mbur-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

5. Venir, to come. Fen-ant. Ven-u. 

PRESENT. 

Je vien-s, 

Tu " -s, 

II * -t, 

Ns. ven-oiis, win-mes, " -ons, 

Vs. " -ez, " -tes, " -ez, " -iez. 

lis vienn-ent, win-rent, " -ont, " -aient. 



PAS. DEF. 

vin-s, 62 

u -s, 

u -t, 
win-mes, 

" -tes, 
win-rent, 



FUTUR. 

viendr-ai, 

" -as, 



CONDITION. 

tiendr-ais. 
" -ais. 
" -ait. 
" -ions. 



SUBJ. PRES. 

Je vienn-e, 62 
-es, 



Tu 

II « -e,' 

Ns. wen-ions, 



SUBJ. IMP. 

win-sse. 63 

u 



IMPER. 



Fien-s. 62 



win-t. 

win-ssions. Fen-ons. 

Vs. " -iez, " -ssiez. " -ez. 

lis wienn-ent, " -ssent. 

Imparfait. Fen-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Se conjuguent de m6me tous les verbes en enir, savoir: 
avenir ou advenir (to happen), contrevenir (to contravene or in- 
fringe), circonvenir (to circumvent), convenir (to admit or suit), 
deveniv (to become), disconvemx (to deny), mtervenir (to inter- 
vene), parvenir (to attain), pr&venxr (to inform), provernx (to 
proceed), revenir (to return), se souvenir (to recollect), se ressou- 
venir (to remember), sw&venir (to help, to support), snrvenir (to 
happen unexpectedly); tenir (to hold), s'a&stenir (to abstain), 
appartexnx (to belong to), contenir (to contain), detenir (to de- 
tain), enfr-etenir (to keep), maintemx (to maintain), o&tenir (to 
obtain), retenir (to retain), sontenir (to sustain). 

62. Va n , va n , va n , va^'m 6 , va n 't e , va n/ r«. Venir, viens,vins,vienne,vinsse. The 
change of e mute into an accented diphthong or vowel : ie, i, in this and 
similar verbs, is explained as follows : In venir, for instance, the accent 
falls on the syllable nir ; but when the final ir of the infinitive is dropped 
it must fall on the only remaining syllable, the stem ve-n, and as a syllable 
ending in e mute can never carry the accent, the e must be changed into 
some other vowel or diphthong. In viendr-ai, viendr-as, viendr-a, etc., the 
finals ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont, are the respective persons of the auxiliary to have, 
and they were in old French separated from the stem so that the future 
was a compound tense, just as in English, I shall have, thou wilt have, etc. 

63. Va n s, va n s, va D , va n seeo n ', va n seeay', va n 's». 



210 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Troisieme Conjugaison. 
Huit (8) verbes appartiennent a cette conjugaison 



1. M 


iouvoir, to move. Mowv-amt. 


Mu. 


PRESENT. 


PAS. DEF. FUTUR. 


CONDITION. 


Je meu 62 -s, w 


m-us,* 5 mouvr-Eii, 


mouvr-siis. 


Tu " -s, 


"-us, " 


-as, 


11 -ais. 


11 " -t, 


"-ut, " 


-a, 


" -ait. 


Ns. mouv-ons, 


"-times, " 


-ons, 


" -ions. 


Vs. " -ez, 


"-utes, " 


-ez, 


" -iez. 


lis raeuv-ent, 


"-urent, " 


-ont, 


" -aient 


SUBJ. PRES. 


SUBJ. IMP. 




IMPER. 


Je ?neuv* s -e, 
Tu " -es, 


m-usse. 66 
"-usses. 








Jfeu w -s. 


11 " -e, 
Ns. mottv-ions, 


"-ussions. 








Mouv-ona. 


Vs. " -iez, 


"-ussiez. 




" -ez. 


lis meuv-ent, 


"-ussent. 







Temps Begulier: 
Imp. Jfouv-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Se conjuguent de mgme ^mouvoir (to stir) et promouvoir (to 
promote). 



2. Pouvoir, fo be able. Powv-ant. 

PRESENT. PASSE DEFINI. 

Je pui-B ou peu 62 -x, CT p-us, 68 

Tu £>eu-x, "-us, 

II " -t, "-ut, 

Ns. jpowv-ons, ' '-limes, 

Vs. " -ez, "-utes, 

lis peuv-ent, "-urent, 



Pu. 



FUTUR. 

powrr-ai. 
11 -as. 
11 -a. 
" -ons. 
" -ez. 
" -ont. 



64. Me, me, me, moov6 n \ moovay', me'v*. 

65. Mm, mu, mu, mu'm 1 , rnw't 8 , mu'r*. 

66. Mu's*, mu?B», mu, musee6 B/ , museeay', mu's*. 

67. The interrogative form always used is pui»-jet not peuxrje f 

68. Pu, pu, pu, pu'm«, pu't*, pu'r*. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



211 



CONDITIONNKL. 


SUBJ. PRES. 


SUBJ. IMP. 


Je powrr-ais, 


2?uiss-e, 


p-usse. 


Tu " -ais, 


" -es, 


"-usses. 


11 " -ait, 


« -e, 


"-ut. 


Na. M -ions, 


11 -ions, 


"-ussions. 


Vs. u -iez, 


11 -iez, 


"-ussiez. 


lis " -aient, 


" -ent, 


"-ussent. 



L'imperatif n'est pas employe. 69 

Temps Regvlier: 
Imp. Powi^ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

3. Prevaloir, to prevail. JPreval-SLiit. 



PRESENT. 


FUTUR. 


Je prev&u-x, 


pr^vaudr-ai, 


Tu " -x, 


" -as, 


11 u -t, 


" -a, 


Ns. pr6val-oii8 } 


11 -ons, 


Vs. " -ez, 


11 -ez, 


Us " -ent, 


11 -ont, 



Pr&val-u. 

CONDITIONNEL. IMPERATIF. 

pr^vsLiidr-ais. 



-ais. 


JVeuau-x. 


-ait. 
-ions. 




Preval-oiis 


-iez. 


" -ez. 


-aient. 





Temps BSgtdiers: 

Imparfait. Pr£va£-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Pas. Def. JPreval-us, -us, -ut, -times, -utes, -urent. 

Subj. Pr6s. Prgval-e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. 

Subj. Imp. Pr6val-usse, -usses, -ut, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

Le verbe se prevaloir (to take advantage) se conjugue de 
mfime. 



4. Asseoir 


, 61 to sit down. 


Assey-Siiit. 


Ass 


-is. 


PRESENT. 


IMPARFAIT. 


PAS. DEF. 




FUTUR. 


J' assied-s, 70 


assey-ais, 


ass-is, 




assier-ai. 


Tu " -s, 


" -ais, 


"-is, 




11 -as. 


11 " 


" -ait, 


" "it, 




11 -a. 


Ns. assey-ons, 


11 -ions, 


" -imes, 




" -ons. 


Vs. " -ez, 


" -iez, 


" -ites, 




" -ez. 


lis assei-ent, 


11 -aient, 


11 -irent, 




11 -ont. 



69. The imperative is not used. 

70. Zhaseeay', aseeay', aseeay', aseyo 11 ', aseyay', ase'y*. 



212 



CORTINA METHOD. 



CONDITION. 

J' assier-ais, 
Tu " -ais, 
II " -ait, 
Ns. " -ions, 
Vs. " -iez, 
lis 



SUBJ. PRES. 

assei-e, 71 



-es, 



assey-ions, 
" -iez, 
-aient, assei-ent, 



IMP. SUBJ. 

ass-isse. 
" -isses. 
" -it. 

" -issions. 
" -issiez. 
11 -issent. 



IMPER. 



^.ssied-s. 



^Issey-ons. 
" -ez. 



Le verbe asseoir est plus souvent employe pronominale- 
ment: 72 s'asseoir (to sit down), qui se conjugue identiquement 
de la m6me maniere, sauf l'addition du pronom reflechi : 73 je 
rri'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons, etc., etc.; 
il en est de m£me du 74 verbe se rasseoir (to sit down again). Se 
conjuguent aussi sur le m§me modele surseoir 75 (to respite) et 
le verbe dgfectif seoir (to become or to suit). 



PRESENT. 

Je sai-s, 
Tu "-s, 
II " -t, 
Ns. sav-onSy 
Vs. " -ez, 
lis " -ent, 

CONDITION. 

Je saur-ais, 
Tu " -ais, 
II " -ait, 

Ns. " -ions, 
Vs. " -iez, 

-aient, 



lis 



>ir, to know. 


Sach-ant. Su. 




IMPARFAIT. 


PAS. DEF. 


FUTUR. 


sav-ais, 53 


s-us, 


saur-ai. 


" -ais, 


"-us, 


" -as. 


" -ait, 


"-ut, 


" -a. 


" -ions, 


"-times, 


" -ons. 


11 -iez, 


"-tites, 


" -ez. 


" -aient, 


"-urent, 


" -ont. 


SUBJ. PRES. » 


SUBJ. IMP. 


IMPER. 


sach-e, 
" -es, 


s-usse. 

"-usses. 




iSach-e. 


" -e 


"-tit. 






11 -ions, 


"-ussions. 


/Skch-ons 


11 -iez, 


"-ussiez. 


" -ez. 


11 -ent, 


"-ussent. 







71. Ase'y 6 , etc., aseyeeG n ', aseyeeay', ase'y«. 

72. Is more often used as a pronominal verb. 

73. Save (except) the addition of the reflective pronoun. 
1 74. The same occurs for. 

75. On page 200 we have given another way of conjugating this verb in 
Class VIII. Asseoir is also conjugated on hoth models, but the above is 
the one now generally followed. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



213 



6. Valoir, to be worth. Val-ont. Val-u. 



PRESENT. 


FUTUR. 


CONDITIONNEL. 


SUBJ. PRES 


Je vau-x, 


vcradr-ai, 


vaudr-ais, 


vaiU.-e. 16 


Tu " -x, 


11 -as, 


" -ais, 


" -es. 


11 " -t, 


" -a, 


" -ait, 


" -e. 


Ns. val-ons, 


" -ons, 


" -ions, 


vaMons. 


Vs. " -ez, 


" -ez, 


" -iez, 


" -iez. 


lis " -ent, 


" -ont, 


" -aient, 


vaill-ent. 



L'imperatif n'est pas employ^. 69 

Temps RSguliers: 
Imparfait. Val-a,is, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
Pas. D6f. Val-u$, -us, -ut, -times, -utes, -urent. 
Subj. Imp. FaZ-usse, -usses, -tit, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 

De m§me equiv&loir {to be equivalent) et revaloir (to serve 
one out). 

7. Voir, to see. Fby-ant. Vu. 

PAS. DEF. 



PRESENT. 

Je voi-s, 
Tu " -s, 
II " -t, 
Ns. voy-ons, 
Vs. " -ez, 
lis foi-ent, 

CONDITIONNEL. 

Je verr-ais, 



IMPARFAIT. 

voy-ais, 
" -ais, 
" -ait, 
" -ions, 



-iez, 
-aient, 



SUBJ. PRES. 



Tu 
II 

Ns. 
Vs. 
lis 



-ais, 

-ait, 

-ions, 

-iez, 

-aient, 



voy-ions, 

11 -iez, 
voz-ent, 



"-is, 

"-it, 

"-imes, 

"-ites, 

"-irent, 

SUBJ. IMP. 

v-isse. 78 

"-isses. 

"-it. 

"-issions. 

"-issiez. 

"-issent. 



FUTUR. 

verr-ai. 

" -as. 

" -a. 
u 



u 



-ons. 
-ez. 
" -ont. 

IMPER. 



VbirB. 



Foy-ons. 



Se conjuguent de m§me les composes ?-evoir (to set 
entrevoiv (to catch a glimpse of). 

76. Va'iy e , va'iy e , va'iye, valeeo n ', valeeay', va'iy*. 

77. Vwa, etc., vwayio n> , vwayiay', vwa. 

78. Vees, vees, vee, veeseeo n ', veeseeay', vees. 



et 



214 



CORTINA METHOD, 



8. Vouloir, 62 79 to wish, will or want 

PRESENT. 



Je t?eu-x, 

Tu " -x, 
II " -t, 

Ns. voul-ons, 
Vs. " -ez, 



FUTUR. 

vowdr-ai, 
11 -as, 
" ^ 
44 -ons, 
44 -ez, 
" -ont, 



COND. 

wwdr-ais, 
44 -ais, 
11 -ait, 
11 -ions, 
41 -iez, 
41 -aient. 



FbwZ-ant. Voul-u. 

SUBJ. PRES. IMPER. 

-ueuill-e. 80 



voul-ions. 

44 -iez. 
-ueuill-ent. 



Feuill- 



Feuill-ez. 



lis. veul-ent, 

Temps ESguliers: 

Imparfait. Void-ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

Pas. D6f. Voul-us, -us, -ut, -times, -tites, -urent. 82 

Subj. Imp. Voul-usse, -usses, -tit, -ussions, -ussiez, -ussent. 83 



'-usses. i?oi-s. 

'-ut. 

'-ussions. J5uv-ons. 



•-ussiez. 
4 '-ussent. 



Quatrieme Conjugaison. 
Trois (3) verbes seulement sont ranges dans cette 
classe; 84 savoir: 

1. Boire, to drink. Buv-ant. Bu. 

PRES. IMP. PAS. DEF. SUB J. PRES. SUBJ. IMP. IMPER. 

Boi-s, 6uv-ais, b-us, 85 fcoiv-e, 86 b-usse. 

" -s, " -ais, "-us, " -es, 

" -t, " -ait, "-ut, " -e, 

Z?uv-ons, " -ions, "-umes, 6uv-ions, 

" -ez, " -iez, "-utes, " -iez, 

J2ow-ent, " -aient, "-urent, '6oiv-ent, 

Temps Eegvliers: 

Futur. Boir-Sbi, -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 
Cond. Boi?'-&is, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 

79. The only compound is en vouloir, to have a grudge ; fen veux, tu en 
veux, il en veul, nous en voulons, vous en voulez, ils en veulent, etc., etc. 

80. Ve'iy 8 , etc., voolee6 n ', vooleeay', ve'iy 8 . 

81. The 1st person pi. is lacking. The 2d person pi., veuillez (veiyayO, cor- 
responds to the English please or ivill you, etc.: veuillez me rendre ce service, 
will you (or please) render me this service. 

82. Voolu', etc., voolu'm«, voolu't 6 , voolu'r*. 

83. Voolu's*, voolu's 8 , vooht', voolusee6 n ', etc. 

84. Only three verbs are ranged in this class. 

86. Bu, bu, bu, bu'm°, bu't*, bu'r«. 86. Bwav«, etc., buveeo»', buveeay 7 , bwa'v. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



215 



Les seuls composes sont emboire 87 (to imbibe) et reboire 87 (to 
drink again). 



2. Faire, 


to make or do. 


-Pais-ant. 88 


Fait. 


PRESENT. 


IMP AE FAIT. 


PAS. DEF. 


FUTUR. 


Je fai-s, 


fais-sds, 


f-is, 


/er-ai. 


Tu "-s, 


" -ais, 


"-is, 


11 -as. 


11 " -t, 


" -ait, 


"-it, 


"-a. 


Ns. /cn's-ons, 88 


11 -ions, 


"-imes, 


" -ons. 


Vs. /crates,** 


11 -iez, 


"-ites, 


"-ez. 


lis font, 


11 -aient, 


"-irent, 


" -ont. 


CONDITION. 


SUBJ. PRES. 


SUBJ. IMP. 


IMPER. 


Je /er-ais, 


/ass-e, 


f-isse. 






Tu " -ais, 


" -es, 


"-isses. 


JFhirB. 


11 " -ait, 
Ns. " -ions, 


" -ions, 


"-it. 
"-issions. 




.Fa /s-ons. 88 


Vs. " -iez, 


" -iez, 


"-issiez. 


Faites." 


lis " -aient, 


" -ent; 


"-issent. 





Tous les composes de faire se conjuguent sur ce modele : 
contrefaire (to counterfeit), d*efaire (to undo), se cZefaire de (to 
get rid of), parfaire (to complete), refaire (to do again), satis- 
faire (to satisfy), surfaire (to overcharge), /o?*faire 69 (to forfeit) 
et malf&ire* 9 (to do mischief). 



3. Maudire, to curse. Maudiss-scni. Maudi-t. 



PRESENT. 


IMPARFAIT. 


PASSE DEF. 


Je ynaudi-s, 


maudiss-ais, 


maud-is. 


Tu " -s, 


" -ais, 


« 


-is. 


11 " -t, 


" -ait, 


i< 


-it. 


Ns. maudiss-ons, 


" -ions, 


a 


-inies. 


Vs. " -ez, 


" -iez, 


u 


-ites. 


lis " -ent, 


" -aient, 


a 


-irent. 



87. Seldom used ; boire encore (or de nouveau), to drink again, is the more 
proper form. 

88. Fez6 n '. Note the peculiar pronunciation of the diphthong at, -^vhich 
is exceptional, being that represented by e in italics. 

89. Seldom used except in the infinitive and the past participle. 

15 



216 



CORTINA METHOD. 



SUBJ. 


PRES 




Je maudiss-e, 


Tu 


il 


-es, 


11 


n 


-e» 


Ns. 


« 


-ions 


Vs. 


<( 


-iez, 


lis 


a 


-ent, 



SUBJ. IMP. 

maud-isse. 
" -isses. 
" -it. 
" -issions. 
" -issiez. 
" -issent. 



IMPERATIF. 



Temps Beguliers: 
Futur. Maudir-&i } -as, -a, -ons, -ez, -ont. 
Cond. Maudir-Siis, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 



Maudis. 



Maudiss-ons. 



MODES ET TEMPS DU VERBE. 
Mode Subjonctif. 1 
Le verbe de la proposition principals est toujours au 
mode indicatif, au mode conditionnel oil au mode imperatif.* 
Le verbe de la proposition subordonnee* se met a Findica- 
tif si Ton considere comme certain et positif b ce qu'il 
exprime ; 6 mais il se met au subjonctif si Ton 7 considere 
Fidee exprimee comme douteuse 8 ou seulement possible: 

INDICATIF. SUBJONCTIF. 

Oui, il me choisit. II se peut quHl me choisisse. 

Yes, he chooses me. May be he will choose me. 

t/'affirme quHl vous punira. Je ne pense pas quHl vous punisse. 

/ declare that he will pun~ I do not think that he will 
ish you. punish you. 

De ce principe d£coulent les six regies suivantes. 9 

Le subjonctif est employe 10 dans la phrase subordonnee : 

1. While the indicative mood denotes that an act takes or will take place, 
the subjunctive mood represents this act as being dependent on a supposi- 
tion, a doubt, a wish, a fear, expressed by a preceding verb. It is called 
subjunctive because it is always joined to another proposition, to which it is 
subordinated, by a conjunction, either expressed or understood. 

2. Principal proposition. 3. According to the rules given in books I and II. 
4. The verb of the dependent proposition. 5. See definition, page 93. 
6. What he expresses. 7. See page 146, notes 23 and 24. 

8. Doote'z e , doubtful. 9. From this principle spring the following six rules. 
10. Est employe, passive form, is employed, used. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 217 

1°. Apres les verbes et les expressions qui expriment le 
doute, le desir, la crainte, la surprise, la supposition, la volonte, 
lajoie, la honte ou V affliction. 11 Exemples : 

Je doute quHl le sache. 12 I doubt his knowing it. 12 

Vous e'tes heureux qu'^ soit You are happy that he ar- 

arrive. rived. 

Jl s'etonne que nous soyons ici. He wonders that we are here. 

Nous desirous quHls parteut. 12 We wish them to leave. 12 

lis veuleut que nous sortions. They want us to go out. 1 ' 2 

2°. Apres les phrases interrogatives ou negatives, s'il 
y a doute dans l'idee : 

Je ne veuxpas quHl le sache. 13 I do not want him to know it. 
Croyez-vous qxiHl parte ? Do you believe that he will leave f 

3°. Apres les phrases et les verbes impersonnels. 14 Ex.: 

II est temps que vous partiez. It is time for you to leave. 
II faut qu'zY le fasse. He must do it. 

4°. Apres les expressions le plus, le moins, le pire, le 
moindre, le seul, le premier, le dernier, 15 quand la phrase est 
relative ; c'est-a-dire, commence par un pronom relatif : 

Le premier qui £'ait 13 su. TJie first who knew it. 

Le seul qui puisse 13 lefaire. The only one who can do it. 

11. Doubt, desire, fear, surprise, supposition, will, joy, shame or affliction. 
It may be noticed by the sentence of the text that the article is repeated 
before each noun in French, except when there is gradation in the enu- 
meration ; e. g.: femmes, enfanls, vieillards, tons etaient Id. 

12. Note that the present participle or infinitive with a possessive as a 
subject is rendered by the French present subjunctive, the personal pro- 
noun corresponding to the possessive. 

13. If the verb of the dependent sentence expresses a positive act the 
indicative mood must be used. In the text it is not declared nor denied 
" that he knows it ; " but it might be expressed according to the idea in the 
mind of the speaker: je ne veuxpas dire guHl le sait. 

14. These verbs are conjugated with the pronoun il in the 3d person only; 
thus : il est utile, il est nZcessaire, etc. 

15. See note 11. The repetition of the article also takes place in the supers 
lative form of the adjective, as in : de la maniere la plus simple et laplusclaire 



218 CORTINA METHOD. 

5°. Apres une expression vague ou indeterminee : 

Je cherche quelqu'un qui le I seek someone who knows 

connaisse. [sachent. him. 

II y a peu 16 d? homines qui le There are/ew nien who know it. 

6°. Apres les conjunctions composees suivantes : afin 
que, a moins que, avant que, en, au, cas que, 11 Men que, 
quoique,™ de peur, de crainte que, 19 jusqiCa ce que, loin 
que, non que, nonobstant que, malgre que, 20 pour que, 
pour peu que, pourvu que, sans que, si peu que, si tant 
est que, sort que, suppose^ que, 21 quelque que, quel que, 
qui que, <^oi que, 22 e£ que : 

JHrai le voir avant qu'?7 parte. I shall go and see him before he 
Pourvu qaHl vienne ! Provided he comes. [leaves. 

Soit que vous partiez, soit que Whether yon leave, or whether 

vous restiez .... you remain 

duels que soient vos metrites, Whatever may be your deserts, 

soyez modeste. [piti&. be modest. 

Qui que vous soyez, ayez Whomsoever you are, have pity. 

Q,uoi que vous ecriviez Whatever you write 

Quelque effort que vous fassiez. Whatever effort you make. 
Venez, que je vous dise la Come, that I may tell you the 

chose. matter. 

Eemarque. — Si le temps du verbe de la proposition 
principale est au present de Vindicatif ou au futur, le sub- 
jonctif est au pre* sent ow an passS ; si le verbe principal 
est a un temps passS ou au conditionnel, Yimparfait ou le 
plus-que-parfait du subjonctif est employ e\ 23 Exemples : 

Je doute f qa'il le fasse, > I doubt f his doing it, 

Je douterai \ cpim Va.it fait > I shall doubt 1 his having done it. 

J'ai doute f qu il le fit, \ I doubted f his cfo£rc# it, 

Je douterais I quHl Pent fait. / 1 would doubt I his having done it. 

16. Pew might also govern the indicative : le peu queje sais. 

17. In order that, unless, be/ore, in case. 18. Although. 19. For fear, lest. 

20. UnZiZ that, far from, not that, notwithstanding that, in spite of. 

21. In order that, however little, provided that, without that, so little that, if so 
much that, whether that, suppose that. 22. Whatever, what ever, whomsoever. 



s 

LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



219 



LISTE COMPLETE DES VERBES IRREGULIERS. 



Premiere Conjtjgaison. 

Verbes. Conjugue comme : l 

Aller, to 2 go, page 206. 

S'en aller, go away, aller. 
Envoyer, send, page 206. 

Renvoyer,se?id back,envoyer. 

Deuxieme Conjugaison. 
S'abstenir, abstain, venir. 
Accourir, run to, courir. 
Accueillir, receive, cueillir. 
Acquerir, acquire, page 207. 
Advenir, happen, venir. 
Appartenir, belong, venir. 
Assaillir, assail, page 198. 
Avenir, happen, venir. 
Bouillir,6o^, [reach, page 198. 
Circonvenir, to over- venir. 
Concourir, concur, courir. 
Conquerir, conquer, acquerir. 
Consentir, consent, sentir. 
Contenir, contain, venir. 
Contrevenir, 3 " 

Con venir, agree, " 

Courir, run, page 208. 

Couvrir, cover, ouvrir. 

Cueillir, gather, page 207. 
Decouvrir, discover, ouvrir. 
Dementir,c/zi;e the lie, sentir. 
Se departir, give up, partir. 
Desservir,* servir. 

Detenir, detain, venir. 
Devenir, become, " 

Devetir, undress, vetir. 



Verbes. Conjugue comme .- 1 

Se devetir, 5 [agree, vGtir. 
Disconvenir, dis- venir. 
Discourir,discowrse, courir. 
Dormir, sleep, page 188. 

Endormir,^^ asleep, dormir. 
S'endormir,/a^ asleep, l ' 
Encourir, incur, courir. 
S'enfuir, run away, fuir. 
S'enquerir, inquire, acqu6rir„ 
Entretenir, keep up, venir. 
S'entretenir,co?2verse, " 
Entr'ouvrir, open a ouvrir. 
Y\nx,flee, [little, page 198. 
Tntervem.r,intervene, venir. 
Maintenir, main tain, " 
Mentir, lie, sentir. 

THLQSoffriv,underbid, offrir. 
Mourir, die, page 208. 

Obtenir, obtain, venir. 
Offrir, offer, page 190. 

Ouvrir, open, page 190. 

Parcourir, run over, courir. 
Partir, set out, page 188. 

Parvenir, foresee, venir. 
Pressentir, attain, sentir. 
Prevenir, prevent, venir. 
Pro venir, proceed, " 
Rebouillir, reboil, bouillir. 
Reconquerir, recon- acquerir. 
Recourir, 6 [quer, courir. 
Recouvrir, re-cover, ouvrir. 
Recueillir, collect, cueillir. 
Redevenir, 7 venir. 



1. Conjugated like. 

2. Hereafter, to save room in this table, we suppress the sign of the infin- 
itive, to. 3. Contravene. 4. Clear the table. 

5. Undress oneself. 6. Run over. 7. Become again. 



220 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Verbes. Conjugug comme . 

Se rendormir, sleep dormir. 
Repartir, 8 [again, partir. 
Se repentir, repent, sentir. 
Requerir, require, acqugrir. 
Ressentir, resent, sentir. 
Be ressentir, feel, sentir. 
Resservir, 9 [again, servir. 
Ressortir, to go out sortir. 
Se ressouvenir, 10 venir. 
Retenir, retain, " 

Revenir, return, u 

Revetir, indorse, v6tir. 
Rouvrir, reopen, ouvrir. 
Secourir, help, courir. 

Sentir, feel, smell, page 188. 
Servir, serve, use, u 188. 
Sortir, go out, " 188. 

Souffrir, suffer, offrir. 
Soutenir, maintain, venir. 
Se souvenir, 11 " 

Subvenir, supply, tl 
Survenir, befall, " 

Tenir, hold, " 

Tressaillir, start, assaillir. 
Venir, come, page 209. 

Vetir, clothe, " 198. 

Troisieme Conjugaison. 

S'asseoir, sit down, page 211. 
Avoir, have, [vide, u 146. 
Depourvoir, unpro- pourvoir. 
Emouvoir, stir up, mouvoir. 
Entrevoir, 12 voir. 

Equivaloir, 13 valoir. 



Verbes. Conjugu$ comme: 

Mouvoir, move, page 210. 
Pourvoir, provide, " 200. 
Pouvoir, be able, " 210. 

Prevaloir, prevail, " 211. 
Prevoir, foresee, " 200. 

Promouvoir, pro- mouvoir. 
Rasseoir, 14 [mote, asseoir. 
Revaloir, 15 valoir. 

Revoir, see again, voir. 
Savoir, know, page 212. 

Surseoir, suspend, " 200. 
Valoir, be worth, " 213. 
Voir, see, [want, " 213. 
Vo\xLoir y wish, will or " 214. 

Quatrieme Conjugaison. 
Absoudre, absolve, r6soudre. 
Accroire, 16 croire. 

Accroitre, increase, croitre. 
Adjoindre, adjoin, joindre. 
Admettre, admit, mettre. 
Apparaitre, appear, paraitre. 
Apprendre, learn, prendre. 
Astreindre,res£rain,peindre. 
Atteindre, reach, " 

Aveindre, bring out, " 
Boire, drink, page 214. 

Ceindre, gird, [cise, peindre. 
Circoncire, circum- dire. 
Circonscrire, 17 6crire. 

Commettre, commit, mettre. 
Comparaitre,a£>pear,parattre. 
Complaire, 18 plaire. 

Comprendre, 19 prendre. 

Compromettre, 20 mettre. 



8. Set out again. 9. Serve again. 10. Remember. 11. Remember. 
12. Have a glimpse. 13. Be equivalent. 14. Sit down again. 

15. Return like for like. 16. Make believe. 17. Circumscribe. 

18. Comply with. 19. Understand. 20. Compromise. 



LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



221 



Verbes. Conjugui comme : 

Conclure, conclude, page 197. 
Conduire, conduct, " 194. 
Coniire, pickle, dire. 

Conjoindre, 21 joindre. 

Connaitre, know, page 193. 
Construire,co?2s£?^c£,conduire. 
Contraindre, compel, craindre. 
Contredire, 22 tfeit, dire. 
Contref aire, counter- faire. 
Coudre, sew, page 201. 

Craindre, fear, " 191. 

Croire, believe, " 201. 

Croitre, ^row r/p, " 193. 
Cuire, coo/:, conduire. 

Decoudre, rip, coudre. 

Decrire, describe, 6crire. 
Decroitre, decrease, croitre. 
Dedire, gainsay, dire. 
Se dedire, detract, " 
Deduire, deduct, conduire. 
Defaire, undo faire. 

Se def aire , get rid of, ' ' 
Dejoindre, disjoin, joindre. 
Demettre, disjoint, mettre. 
Se demettre, resign, u 
Depeindre, depict, peindre. 
Deplaire, displease, plaire. 
Desapprendre, 23 prendre. 
Beteindre, discolor, peindre. 
Detruire, destroy, page 194. 
Dire, tell, [pear, " 201. 
Disparaitre, disap- paraitre. 
Dissoudre, dissolve, resoudre. 
JSconduire, show out, conduire. 
JScrire, write, page 201. 

JSlire, elect, lire. 



Verbes. ConjuguS comme : 

ISmettre, issue, mettre. 

ISmoudre, grind, moudre. 
Enceindre, encom- peindre. 
Enduire,<2au6, [pass, conduire. 
Enfreindre,m/ - ?-/»5'e,peindre. 
Enjoindre, enjoin, joindre. 
S'entremettre, 24 mettre. 
Entreprendre, 25 [owf, prendre. 
lSpreindre, squeeze peindre. 
S'eprendre, 26 prendre. 

^lteindre,ea;^n^wisA,peindre. 
Etre, be, page 152. 

Fjtreindre, clasp, peindre. 
Exclure, exclude, concluire. 
Faire, make, page 215. 

Feindre, feign, peindre. 

Induire. induce, conduire. 
Inscrire, inscribe, 6crire. 
Instruire, instruct, conduire. 
Interdire, interdict, dire. 
Introduire, intro- conduire. 
Joindre, join, [duce, page 191. 
Lire, read, " 196. 

Maudire, curse, " 215. 

Meconnaitre, 27 connaitre. 

Mecroire, disbelieve, croire. 
Medire, slander, dire. 
Se meprendre, mis- prendre. 
Mettre, put, [take, page 203. 
Moudre, grind, " 203. 

Naitre, be born, " 203. 

Oindre, anoint, joindre. 

Omettre, omit, mettre. 

Paraitre, appear , page 193. 
Peindre, paint, " 191. 

Permettre, permit, mettre. 



21. Join together. 
25. Undertake, 



22. Contradict. 23. Unlearn. 24. Intermeddle. 
26. Be charmed. 27. Not to know. 



222 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Verbes. Conjugue' comme : 

Plaindre, pity, craindre. 

Plaire, please, page 196. 

Se plaire sidelight in, plaire. 
Poursuivre, pursue, suivre. 
Predire, foretell, dire. 
Prendre, take, page 203. 

Prescrire, prescribe, ecrire. 
Produire, produce, conduire. 
Promettre, promise, mettre. 
Proscrire,proscrz6e, ecrire. 
Rapprendre, 28 prendre. 

Heboire, d?Hnk again,boire. 
Reconduire, 29 conduire. 

Reconnaitre, 30 connaitre. 



Reconstruire, 



conduire. 



J&ecoudve, seiv again, coudre. 
J&ecYive, wj'ite again, 6crire. 
Recroitre, 32 croitre. 

Recuire,coo& again, cuire. 
Redefaire, 33 faire. 

Redire, say again, dire. 
Reduire, reduce, conduire. 
Refaire, do again, faire. 
Rejoindre, rejoin, joindre. 
Relire, read again, lire. 
Remettre,pw7! again,mettre. 



Verbes. ConjuguS comme:- 

Remoudre, 3 * moudre. 

Renaitre, revive, naitre. 
Repaitre, feed, paraitre. 

Reparaitre, reappear, " 
Reprendre, 36 \duce, prendre. 
Reproduire, repro- conduire. 
Resoudre, resolve, page 204. 
Restreindre,res£rem*,peindre. 
Revivre, live again, vivre. 
Rire, laugh, sourire. 

Satisfaire, satisfy, faire. 
Seduire, seduce, conduire. 
Soumettre, submit, mettre. 
Sourire, smile, page 197. 

Souscrire, subscribe, Ecrire. 
Suffire, suffice, page 204. 

Suivre, follow, " 204. 

Surf aire, ov erchargejaire. 
Sur-prendxe, su?p?'ise, prendre. 
Survivre, survive, vivre. 
Se taire, be silent, page 196. 
Teindre, dye, peindre. 

Traduire, translate, conduire. 
Transcrire, 36 [mit, ecrire. 
Transmettre, trans- rnettre. 
Vivre, live, page 204.. 



28. Learn again. 29. Lead back-. 30. Know again. 31. Reconstruct 
32. Grow again. 33. Undo again. 34. Grind again. 

35. Take again. 36. Transcribe. 



END OF BOOK III. 



QUATRIEME LIVRE. 

PEEMIEEE PAKTIE. 



TEEIZI^ME LEgON. 



La Ville. 1 



Une cite; un village (veeWzh e ), 
La commune 2 (komw / n e ) ; la capitale 
Les rues; une avenue (kv e nu), 
Une ruelle (nth'!*) ; un passage, . 
La chaussee 3 (shosay / ) ; le trottoir, 
L'eglise ; la cathedrale, . 
Un palais ; une chaumiere, . 
Un hotel; une auberge 4 (ober'zlr 2 ), 
Un monument ; edifice, . 
Un monastere ; couvent, 
Un hdpital ; hospice, 
L'hotel des Postes ; 5 la Bourse, . 
Une ecole ; un college, . 
L'universite ; le musee, . 
Un quartier ; les faubourgs, . 
L'omnibus (omneebws 7 ); le fiacre, 
Le pare; le square, 6 la place, 
La fontaine ; le reverbere, 



a city ; a village. 
, the town ; the capital, 
the streets ; an avenue, 
a lane; a passage, arcade, 
the road; the sidewalk, 
the church; the cathedral, 
a palace; a cottage. 
a hotel; an inn. 
a monument ; a building, 
a monastery ; convent. 
a hospital; refuge, 
the Post Office; Stock Ex- 
a school; a college, [change, 
the university ; museum. 
a district; the suburbs, 
the omnibus, stage ; cab. 
the park ; square, place, 
thx fountain ; street lamp. 



1. La veel, the city, the town : &tre en ville, to be in town ; diner, souper, 
etc., en mile, to dine, sup, etc., away, in town. 

2. Municipality, municipality, is a synonym. 

3. The middle of the street; rez-de-chaussee, the ground floor. 

4. Also tavern. 

5. Literally, the hotel of the mails. 

6. Leskwar 7 ; taken from the English ; the public garden in the center of 
a square is known by the same name. 



224 CORTINA METHOD. 

Conjonctions. 1 
Les conjonctions simples les plus employees sont : 
Ainsiythus.Auss^sOjtherefore. Or, 17 now, but. 
Car 9 (kar), for. Pourtant, 18 however. 

Cependant, 10 however. Puisque, 19 since. 

Comme (ko'm 6 ), as. Q,uand, 12 when. Que, that. 

Done, 11 so j then. Et, 11 and. Quoique 20 (kwa'ke), although. 

Lorsque, ia when. Mais, but. Si, if, whether, suppose. 
Neanmoins, 13 nevertheless. Sinon, 21 otherwise. {times. 

Ni 14 — ni, neither — nor. [why. Soit,' 22 whether. Tantot, 22 some* 
Ou-ou, 15 either-or. Pourquoi, 16 Toutefois, 23 nevertheless, still. 

Les principales locutions conjonctives 2i sont : 

A condition que, 25 provided. Apres que, 26 after. 

Ann que, 26 \ ^ ^^ ^ as Avant que, 26 before. 



Ainsi que, 25 J Attendu que, 27 1 whereaSm 

A mesure que, 27 m proportion Au lieu que, 27 / 

A moins que, 26 28 unless. [as. Aussi bien que, 27 as well as. 

7. K6 n zho n ksi6 u ', conjunctions; are parts of speech used to connect the 
different parts of a sentence. 8. See page 177, note 30. 

9. See page 120, note 34. 10. Cependant je le veux, however I want it. 

11. Page 52, note 9. Done is often rendered by therefore; ex.: cela est bon, 
done e'est cher, that is good, therefore it is dear. See page 65. note 44. 

12. Lorsque governs the indicative mood; e.g.: lorsque (quand) fStudie 
fapprends, when I study I learn. 

13. Nayo n mwa a '. Compound of nSant, nothing, and moins, less. 

14. Ni is used to join similar parts of a negative sentence: ni Pierre ni 
Jean, neither Peter nor John. It is also used in connection with non phes; 
e. g.: ni lui non plus, nor he either. 

15. Ou is the opposite of ni, and therefore used to unite the parts of a 
positive sentence : ou Jean ou Pierre, either John or Peter. It is sometimes 
followed by bien: vous viendrez ou bien firai vous chercher, you will come 
or I will call for you. 

16. This conjunction, like many others, may enter in the compounding of 
comparative expressions ; e. g.: et voila {e'est) pourquoi je le disais, and there 
is (that is) why I said so. 

17. Or, racontez-nous Vhistoire, now, tell us the story. 

18. Pourtant. je le veux, however I want it. 

19. Puisque je ne puis pas lefaire, since I cannot do it. 

20. A synonym of bien que ; both require the subjunctive, page 218, 6°. 

21. Denotes opposition ; signifies if not, in the contrary ease: si vous voulez, 
je leferai, sinon, pas, if you wish, I shall do it; if not, I shall not. 

22. Soit bon, soil mauvais. Soit is often replaced by ou: ou {tantdt) triste ou 
(iantdt) joyeux 'zhwaye'), either (sometimes) sad or (sometimes) gay. 



THIRTEENTH LESSON. 225 

AussitSt que, as soon as. Parce que, 273 * because. 

Autant que, 27 w as much as. Pendant que, 27 35 while. 

Bien que, 2526 although. Pour peu que, 26 /o7' little that 

De crainte que, 2628 ) for fear, Pour que, 26 /or, in order that. 

3De peur que, 26 28 i lest.\that. Pourvu que, 26 provided that. 

De maniere (facon) que, 25 so Sans que, 26 without. 

De meme 30 que, 27 the same as. Selon que, 27 according, as, 

De sorte que, 25 so that. Si bien que, 25 so that. 

Depuis que, 2731 since. Si ce n'est que, 25 but for. 

Des que, 2732 as soon as. Sinon que, 25 otherwise that. 

En cas que, 26 in case that. Soit que, 26 whether. 

Jusqu'a ce que, 26 until. Suppose que, 26 supposing that. 

Loin que, 26 far from. Tandis que, 2735 while. 

Outre que, 27 33 besides. Tant que, 27 35 as long as. 

Non plus que, 27 no more than. Tellement que, 25 36 so much that. 

Non que, 26 not that. Vu que, 27 considering. 

23. J'espere venir,toulefois je ne le promets pas, I hope to come, still I do 
not promise it. 24. Lokusi6 n ' k6 n zho n ktee'v e , conjunctive phrases. . 

25. This expression governs the indicative or the subjunctive mood 
according to the positive or doubtful sense expressed by the preceding verb ; 
e. g.: je leferai d condition (ainsi, de maniere, de facon, de sorte, si bien, si ce 
n'est, sinon, tellement) que vous soyez (serez) satis/ait. Soyez, subjunctive, 
admits doubt ; serez, indicative, affirms the fact that you will be satisfied. 
Notice that many of these expressions which in French must have que do 
not require that in English : d moins que vous veniez, unless you come. 

26. Governs the subjunctive mood. 27. Governs the indicative. 

28. A moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require ne before the verb ; 
e. g.: d moins (de crainte, de peur) quHl ne vienne avant dix heures je partirai, 
unless (for fear, lest) he comes before ten, I shall leave. 

29. Elle est belle autant qu'elle est riche, she is as beautiful as she is rich ; 
d 1 autant plus (moins) queje vous le dis, so much (less) so, that I tell it to you. 

30. Page 190, note 17. 31. Depuis que vous etes id, since you are here. 

32. Des que vous ites rentre, as soon as you entered. 

33. Outre que je finis ce travail, besides that I finish this work. 

34. Par ce que, in three words, is equivalent to d'apres la chose que, accord- 
ing to what, from what ; e. g.: je sais par ce que Von m'en a dit, I know from 
what (according to what) I have been told. 

35. Denotes simultaneousness of actions: asseyez-vous pendant que je finis 
la lettre, sit down while I finish my letter. "When there is opposition of 
actions expressed tandis que is used: vous jouez tandis que voire frere tra- 
vaille, you play while your brother works. When duration of time is 
expressed tant que is employed : je serai id tant que vous y resterez, I will be 
here as long as you will remain. 

36. Je parte tellement queje me fatigue, I speak so much that I tire myself 



CORTINA METHOD. 
FRANCAIS. 

1. A quelle heure vous etes 37 vous couche 37 hier soir, 

que je vous trouve eucore au lit? 38 

2. Je me suis 37 couche tres tard et j'ai dormi trop 

longtemps ce matin. 

3. Moi, je n'ai pu 39 m'endormir 37 40 avant 41 quatre 

heures, et me voici trop tdt 42 au rendez-vous. 

4. Mon domestique ne m'a pas appele, c'est pour- 

quoi 16 je ne me suis point 43 reveille. 

5. Je vais oter mon manteau 44 en vous attendant. 

6. Faites. 45 Mais asseyez-vous 46 done. 11 Je vais 

me lever, 37 prendre mon bain et m'habiller. 37 

7. Votre chambre est mal exposee, il n'y a pas 

autant de 47 soleil que 48 dans la mienne. 

8. Pas tant 49 de soleil ! Vous plaisantez ! 50 Vous 

vous trompez 37 51 du tout au tout. 

9. Comme vous voudrez, n'en parlous plus. 

10. Cela vaudra mieux, nous pourrions manquer 

le train de banlieue 52 et les Malinchart nous 
attendent a St. Germain. 53 

57. Page 154, 2*. The pronominal verbs are conjugated with two prons. of 
the same person, the 2d being the reflective pronoun me, te, se, nous, vous,se. 

38. Au lit, lit, at the bed, not dans le lit, in the bed. 

39. Pas or point may be left out in negative sentences after the verbs 
cessei % , to cease; oser, to dare; pouvoir, to be able, and savoir, to know, 
especially when they are followed by an infinitive (page 120, note 31). 

40. Page 171, note 36. 41. Page 160, note 14. 42. Trop t6l, too soon. 

43. Point, adverb, is used, like pas, to strengthen the negative ne. Ne point 
is more emphatic than ne pas. 

44. Any kind of long and loose overgarment for man or woman is called 
manteau, cloak or mantle. 45. Faites, do, imperative of /aire. 



THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



227 



PRONONCIATION. 

1 kooshay 7 6 lee? 



TRADUCTION. 



2. 



tr6 16 n to n/ . 



3 ro D day-voo 7 . 



4 domesteek 7 pwa n/ 

rayveyay 7 . 

5. Zhe ve-zotay 7 mo n mo^o' 

.... voo-zato n do n/ . 

6. Fe 7 t e .... levay 7 , pro n/ dr e 

m6 n ba u ay mabeeyay 7 . 

7 ma-laykspozay 7 



8 pleso n7 tay 7 ! . . 

pay 7 dw too 6 too. 

9 no n parl6 n/ plu. 

10 v6dra 7 mie 7 . . 

rio n/ bo n lie 7 . 

la n shar 7 



1. At what time did you retire 
last night, that I find you 
still in bed f 

2. I went to bed very late and 
I have overslept myself 
this morning. 

3. I did not go to sleep until 4, 
and here I am too early 
for our appointment. 

4. My servant failed to call me. 
That is why I did not 
awake. 

5. I will take off my cloak 
while waiting for you. 

6. Do so, and be seated. lam 
going to get up, take a 
bath and dress. 

7. Your room is not well sit- 
uated/ there is not so 
much sun as in mine. 

8. Not so much sun ? You are 
jesting ! You are entirely 
mistaken. 

9. Just as you please ; we will 
not argue about it. 

10. That ivill be better; we 
might miss the suburban 

zhayrma 117 . train,andtheMalincharts 

are waiting for us at St. 
Germain. 



tro r 



poor- 
. ma- 



48. The reflective pronoun must follow the imperative mood. 

47. Autant, like aussi, page 184, expresses comparison, but is only used 
-with nouns or verbs; in the case of nouns it requires the preposition c!e 
and que in the comparison of verbs. 48. Page 177, note 29. 

49. Page 61, note 26. Tant does not express comparison, but quantity or 
intensity; like autant, it is used before nouns or verbs. Before nouns it 
governs de, but in case of verbs que is not absolutely required. 

50. Plaisanter, to joke. 51. From se tromper, to be mistaken. 
52. Banlieue, suburbs. 53. Small town in the suburbs of Paris. 



228 CORTINA METHOD. 

11. A propos, avez-vous appris 54 que Mile. 55 Malin- 

chart se marie? 

12. Non! Qui epouse 56 -t-elle? Le jeune substitut 

du procureur? 57 

13. Non pas : 58 l'employe de son pere, M. 59 Kemy. 

14. Ah ! alors, c'est pour le diner des fiangailles 60 

qu'on nous invite. 

15. Probablement. Nous void a la gare. 61 Pre- 

nons-nous un compartiment de f umeurs ? 

16. Parbleu ! 62 Par ici, voici ce qu'il nous faut. 

17. Eegardez la-bas 63 cette dame 64 en toilette 65 de 

soie noire, n'est-ce pas Mine. 59 de G-enouilly ? 

18. Impossible, elle voyage 66 a Petranger. 

19. Se peut-il 67 que je me trompe 51 a ce point? Mais 

nous sommes a destination. 

20. Descendons vite, peut-etre pourrons-nous re- 

trouver dans la foule la dame en noir. 68 

54. Referring to news the verb apprendre, to learn, is used in French 
instead of entendre, to hear, which is employed in English : avez-vous appris 
la nouvelle f did you hear the news? 

55. Mademoiselle, abbreviated Mile., is used before a first name, a family 
name, or when addressing a young lady, when, with the exception of very 
intimate acquaintances, it should never be omitted. In other cases demoi- 
selle, a synonym of jeune fille, is used. 

56. See page 101, note 23. 57. Solicitor. 

58. When the adverb non is used in an emphatic manner, pas is added 
to it : non pas, denies with energy. 

59. The article is omitted before monsieur, madame, mademoiselle ; but it is 
used before other nouns of title, dignity, etc.: Monsieur Vevique, Monsieur le 
comte, Monsieur le procureur de la RSpublique, etc. 

60. Fiancailles, funtrailles (funerals), Unebres (shadows), are among the 
few nouns used in the plural only. 



THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



229 



11. X prop6 / mad'towa- 

zel' se maree' ? 

12 aypoo'z-te'l'? .... 

swbsteetw 7 du prokwrer'? 

13. N6 n pa : o n plwayay / , 

raymee / . 

14 feeo n sa / y e ko n nooza n - 

vee't e . 

15. Probablemo n/ .... gar ... . 
ko n parteemo n/ de fwmer' ? 



16. Parble' . . . . se keel noo f6. 16. 



17 la-ba' .... twale't e de 

swa' nwkr 7 , zhe- 

nooiyee / ? 

18 laytro n zhay / . 

19. Se pe-teel' .... tro n/ p e a se 
pwa n/ ? 

20 foo'l e .... 



11. By the way, did you hear 

that Miss Malinchart is 
going to be married? 

12. No * Whom does she mar" 

ry f the young assistant of 
the district attorney f 

13. No, no; the employee of 

her father, Mr. Remy. 

14. Well! then, it is for the be- 

trothal repast we are in- 
vited. 

15. Very likely. Here we are 

at the station. Shall we 
take a smoking cart 
Certainly! This way ; here 
is what we want. 

17. Look down there. That 

lady dressed in black; is 
she not Mrs. de Genowilly? 

18. Impossible; she is travel- 

ing abroad. 

19. Can it be that lam so much 

mistaken? But here we 
are at our destination. 

20. Let us step down quickly ; 

perhaps we may find the 
lady in black inthe crowd. 



61. Gave is a glass roofed depot, always of greater importance than an 
ordinary station. 

62. Exclamation equivalent to certainly, of course, etc. 

63. Ld-bas, down there ; la-haut, up there. 

64. Page 60, note 23. 

65. Toilette is translated by bureau as well as by dress. 

66. Page 156, " Remark." There are no special forms in French to express 
the progressive or emphatic English forms : she is travelling, she does travel, 
are translated by elle voyage, she travels. Notice sentence 10. 

67. Interrogative form of il se peut, it is possible, ind. pres. of the im- 
personal verb se pouvoir, to be possible. Like all other impersonal verbs it 
governs the subjunctive mood. 

68. Mi noir and not en noire, feminine form, because the adjective noir ia 
here used as a noun. La dame en blanc, en deiiil (in mou' hing), etc. 



230 CORTINA METHOD. 

QUATOKZI&ME LEgOK 

La Ville (suite 1 ). 

Le maire 2 (mer) ; les citoyens, . the mayor; the citizens. 
L'echevin 3 (aysheva n/ ) ; conseiller, 3 the alderman ; counselor. 
Le gouverneur; l'avocat (lavoka'), the governor ; the lawyer. 
La garnison; police (polee^), . the garrison; police. 
TJn sergent de ville (sayrzho n/ ), . a policeman. 
TJn garde municipal, . . .a municipal guard. 
La douane* (dooa'n 6 ) ; banque, 4 . the custom house ; bank. 
TJne maison de banque, . , .a banking firm (or house). 
TJncommissionnaire(k6meesioner / ), a commission merchant. 
TJn courtier en merchandises, . a merchandise broker. 
TJn agent de change (sho n/ zh e ), . a stock broker. 
TJn changeur(sho n zher / ); club (klwb), a money changer ; club. 
Un negociant ; une society, . . a merchant ; a society. 
TJne compagnie (kd^anyee 7 ) ; cafe, a company ; coffeehouse. 
TJne police d'assurance (dtoro^) j a Hf . fi insurancepolicyt 

sur la vie, contre Pmcendie, ) 
Les portes de la ville, . . . the gates of the city 
TJn pont (po n ) ; le marche, . . abridge; the market. 
La prison; lecimetiere(seemetier / ), the prison; the cemetery. 

La Famille (suite de la page 47). 

Legrand-pere, 5 ) arandfather * La grand'mere, 6 1 grandmo- 

L'aieul, 5 i y J ' L'aieule, 5 > ther. [ther. 

Le bisaieul, 7 great-grandfa- La bisaieule, 7 great-grandmo- 

Le petit-fils, grandson, [ther. Jja-petite-^lle^granddaughter. 

Beau-pere, 8 father-in-law. Belle-mere, 8 mother-in-law. 

1. S?/ee't e , continuation. 2. Le maire, la mere, la mer are homonyms. 

3. L'echevin has charge of a department of the town ; le conseiller is a rep- 
resentative in the city council. 4. Douanier, banquier, p. 125, n. 21. 

5. Grand-pere and grand'mere are generally used instead of a'ietil and 
a'ieule, except in the sense of ancestors : vies a'ieux. 

6. Grand in this and similar expressions does not take the feminine 
ending, the apostrophe replacing the mute e: grandWoute, highway ; grand?- 
messe, high mass ; grand'peur, great fright ; grand'peine, great trouble, etc. 

7. Arriere-grand-pere and arriere-grand'mere are more commonly used. 
Arriere-petit-fils, great-grandson ; ai-riere-petite-fille, great-granddaughter. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



231 



Le beau-fils, the stepson. 
Le gendre, 9 the son-in-law. 
Beau-frere, brother-in-law. 
Demi-frere, half brother. 
Oncle, uncle. Neveu, nephew. 
Cousin (koosa n/ ), cousin (m.). 
Cousin germain, first cousin. 
Parrain (parra n/ ), godfather. 
Filleul (feeye'l), godson. 



Belle-fille, stepdaughter. 
Bru 9 (bru), daughter-in-law. 
La belle-sceur^Ae sister-in-law, 
Demi-sceur, half sister. 
Tante, aunt. Niece, niece. 

Cousine (koosee'n e ), cousin (f.). 
Cousine germaine, first cousin. 
Marraine, godmother. [ter. 
Filleule (feeye'y 6 ), goddaugh- 



Iles et Bepubliques. Nationalites. 

Iles Britanniques, British Islands, \ Anglais. Hab. de 
Grande Bretagne, Great Britain, i la G-. Bretagne. 10 



Irlande (irlo n/ d e ), 


. Ireland, 


. Irlandais. 


Ecosse (ayko's 6 ), 


. Scotland, 


. Ecossais. 


Pays de Galles, . 


. Wales, . 


. Gallois. 


Antilles, . 


. West Indies, . Hab. des Antilles. 11 


Cuba (kitba'), 


. Cuba, . 


. Cubain (ki*ba n/ ). 


Haiti (aeetee / ), . 


. Hayti, . 


. Haitien (aeesia n/ ). 


La Jamaique, 12 . 


. Jamaica, 


. Hab. de la Jamaique. 


St. Domingue, 13 . 


. St. Domingo 


, . Hab. de St. Domingue. 


Porto Rico, . 


. Porto Rico, 


. Porto-Ricien. 


Amerique du Sud 


. South America, Americain du Sud. 


RepubliqueArgentine,^4r#en#ne Bep., . Argentin (arzho n ta n/ ). 


Bolivie (boleevf), 


. Bolivia, 


. Bolivien (boleevia n/ ). 


Bresil (brayzeel'), 


. Brazil, . 


. Bresilien. 


Chili (sheelee'), • 


. Chile, . 


. Chilien. 


Colombie (kol6 n bl'), 


. Columbia, 


. Colombien. 


JSquateur (aykwater 


'), Ecuador, 


. JSquatorien. 


Perou (payroo'), 


. Peru, . 


. Peruvien(payrwvia n/ ). 


Venezuela, . 


. Venezuela, 


. Venezuelien. 



8. Beait-pere translates both stepfather and father-in-law ; belle^nere, step- 
mother and mother-in-law. 

9. Beau-fils and belle-fille are generally used instead of gendre and bru. 

10. Habitant de la Grande-Bretagne. A Breton is an inhabitant of 
Bretagne, France. 11. Habitant des Antilles. 

12. La Zhamaee'k'. The article la is an integral part of the name of the 
island, as le is in Le Hdvre and la in La Havane. There are only a few 
names of cities and islands which have kept the article in this manner- 

13. Sa n doma n 'gu e . St. is the abbreviation for saint. 

16 



232 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. Quelles places 14 avez-vous ? 

2. J'ai pris 15 une loge. Auriez-vous prefere une 

baignoire? 16 

3. L'une me convient aussi bien que 17 l'autre. 

A quelle heure est la representation ? 

4. A huit heures precises. 

5. Alors, nous avons tout le temps. 

6. Oui, nous pourrions faire un tres agreable tour 

de promenade 18 au Pare Central. 

7. J'y 19 pensais. Allons-y 19 de ce pas. 20 

8. C'est cela ; j'aime la marche, apr&s le diner 21 

parce qu'elle me fait beaucoup de 22 bien. 

9. Quelle superbe rue! Que de beaux edifices! 

Voyez ces belles pelouses, 23 ces jardins an- 
glais ! 24 

10. Nous voici a l'entree du pare. Suivons cette 

allee 25 d'acacias. 

11. Vous rappelez-vous le nom de cette plante? 

12. Laquelle? Celle avec ce sombre feuillage? 

1 3. Oui, en francais nous l'appelons lierre. 

14. Place, place, spot; here stands for seats in the theater. 

15. Past part, of the irreg. verb prendre, to take, page 203. 

16. Baignoire, lit., bath tub, designates also the ground floor boxes in the 
theater because of their shape. 17. Page 184. 

18. Simply une tres agreable promenade would also be correct. 

19. The first pronoun y stands for d cela, to it, the second for Id, there. J'y 
pensais, literally I to it was thinking ; the French say penser a quelqiCun, or d 
quelque chose ,' penser de quelqu'un, de quelque chose is to form an opinion 
about somebody or something, page 104, note 26. • 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



233 





PRONONCIATION. 


TRADUCTION. 


1. . 


. . . pla's e 


1. What seats have you f 


2. . 


. . . pree-zw r n e lo / zh e 


2. I have taken an upper box. 




baynywa'r? 


Would you havepreferred 
a lower one ?- 


3. . 


. . . k6 n via n/ reprayso n - 


3. One suits me as well as the 




tasi6 n/ ? 


other. At what time is 
the play f 


4. . 


*•• 


4. Precisely at eight o'clock. 


5. . 




5. Then we have plenty of time. 


6. . 


. . . toor de promena / d e 6 


6. Yes, we could have a very 




park so n tral / . 


pleasant walk through 
the Central Park. 


7. . 


... de se pa. 


7. I was thinking of it. Let us 
go there at once. 


8. . 


• • • 


8. Very well; I like a walk 
after dinner, as it does me 
much good. 


9. . 


. . . swpayr'b e rti! bd- 


9. What a beautiful street! 




zaydifi / s e ! p e loo's e 


How many fine buildings! 




zharda n/ -zo n glfc' ! 


Look at these handsome 
lawns and squares. 


10. 


alay' dakaseea'. 


10. Here we are at the entrance 
of the park. Let us go 
along this acacia path. 


11. 


. . . . pla n/ t e ? 


11. Do you remember the name 
of this plant f 


12. 


sd^br* feiya'zh e ? 


12. Which one? The one with 
dark foliage f 


13. 


.... lifers 


13. Yes ; in Fi^ench we call it 
"lierre" (ivy). 



20. De cepas, of this step, idiom meaning at once, presently. 

21. The infinitives may be used as nouns, as the present participle is in 
English, and then they may be determined and qualified by articles and 
adjectives : le meilleur manger, the best eating ; unparler tres connect, a very 
correct speech. 22. See page 175, note 20. Bien is used as a noun. 

28. Lawns or greens, grass plots. 

24. Used in French as a synonym of squares, page 223, note 6. 

25. AlUe, path planted with trees. 



234 CORTINA METHOD. 

14. Et son embleme : 26 ' ' je meurs 27 ott je m'at- 

tache," 28 est des plus poetiques. 

15. Mon Dieu! 29 que vous §tes melancolique ce 

soir. Avez-vous lu 30 les journaux? 

16. lis ne m'interessent guere. 31 Y 19 parle-t-on dej& 

de la grande exposition de 1900 P 32 

17. Certes. 33 On dit qu'elle sera le resume de tous 

les progres du siecle. 

18. La France brillera surtout par ses Beaux- Arts. 

19. Oui, et l'Amerique nous a montre & Chicago, 

il j a quelques annees, tout ce qu'il faut 
attendre 34 de la mecanique et de Telectricite. 

20. L'Allemagne n'aura-t-elle point 85 son tour? 36 

Mais il est vrai que le genie allemand 
penche 37 plut6t vers 38 la philosophie 39 et les 
sciences abstraites.^ 

26. The final me, originating from the Greek, is used in English under the 
form of ma, or simply m; in French it is the final of a large number of mas- 
culine nouns, though the final is a feminine one : I'ipigramme, the epigram ; 
le UUgramme, the telegram ; le probleme, the problem, etc. 

27. Meurs, pres. ind. of the irreg. verb mourir, page 208. 

28. Emblem of the ivy : "Language of Flowers." 

29. Mon Dieu! Grand Dieu ! del! etc., are exclamations properly used. 

30. Past part, of the irreg. verb lire, page 196. 

31. Guere, adverb of negation, is generally preceded by another negative 
and is equivalent to a little, not much: il n'a guere d'argent, he has but little 
'not much) money. 

32. Lit., there does one speak already of the great exhibition of 1900. 

33. Certes, adverb of manner, is an abbreviation of certainemenl. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



235 



14 c^bl&'m 6 : " zhe mer oo 

zhe mata'sh 6 " poay- 

ti'k e . 

15 maylo n koli / k e \u 

\b zhoorno'? 

16 ma n tayray 's e gu&r 

eksposeesi6 n/ de dees-nef 
so D/ ? 

17. Sayr'tf rayzwmay' 

progray / du sife / kl e . 



20 toor? zhaynee'al e - 

mo n/ po n/ sh e vayr 

sio n 's e abstr&'tf. 



16. 



17. 



18 

19 fo-tato^dr* .... lay- 19 

layktreeseetay'. 



14. And its emblem — "I die 

where I am attached" — 
is most poetic. 

15. Dear me! how gloomy you 

are to-night. Have you 
read the newspapers ? 

They interest me but little. 
Do they speak about the 
great exhibition of 1900 
already f 

Certainly. They say that 
it will be the embodiment 
of all the progress of the 
centxiry. 
18. France will shine especially 
through her Fine Arts. 

Yes, and America shoived 
us at Chicago, a few years 
ago, all that could be ex- 
pected of mechanism and 
electricity. 

Will not Germany have its 
turn f Of course it is true 
that the German genius 
tends more toward phi- 
losophy and abstract sci- 



20. 



34. Literally, all what it must be expected. 

35. It has been noted, page 226, note 43, that ne point Is more emphatic 
than nepas; point denies positively. Pas must be used instead of point 
when the following word begins with a vowel, or is an adverb or a numeral. 

36. IPaura-t-elle point son tour? will she not have her turn? Avoir son 
tour, to have his turn. 

37. From pencher, to incline, to bend, to tend to. 

38. See page 161, note 22. 

39. The final phie corresponds to the English phy and forms a large 
number of derivatives in both languages: from philosophic, philosophy, 
philosophe, philosoph, philosophique, philosophical, philosophiquement, phi- 
losophically ; biographie, biography, biographe, biograph, etc. 



236 CORTINA METHOD. 

QUINZliME LEgOK. 

Articles de Toilette. 1 

Le cabinet de toilette, boudoir, 2 . the lavatory or toilet room. 
La brosse a cheveux, ongles, habits, the hair, nail, clothes brush. 
Un peigne (pe / ny e ); un peignoir, a comb; a wrapper (lady 1 s)* 
Un razoir; une eponge (aypo n/ zh e ), a razor; a sponge. 
Une lime a ongles; un tablier, . a nail file; an apron. 
Les epingles a cheveux, . . the hair pins. 
lies boucles ou pendants d'oreilles, 3 the ear rings. 
Une bague.; 4 un bracelet; collier, a ring ; bracelet ; necklace. 
Du ruban (rwbo a/ ); l'evantail, . ribbon; the fan. 
IaQ manchon ; la fourrure, . . the muff ; the fur. 
L'eau de toilette, de Cologne, . toilet, cologne water. 
La poudre dentifrice, 5 . . . the tooth powder. 
I<e savon ; le cosmetique, . . the soap ; the cosmetic. 
Le parfum (parfe n/ ) ; se parfumer, 6 the perfume; to perfume. 
Le pedicure ; la pince, . . . the corn cutter ; the nippers. 
Les outils de manicure, . . . the manicure 1 s tools. 

Articles de Couture.' 1 
Le panier a ouvrage (oovra'zh 6 ), . the work basket. 
La machine a coudre, . . . the sewing machine. 
L'aiguille; 8 epingle; un de, . . the needle; pin; a thimble. 
Lesciseaux; lefil; la soie, . . the scissors; thread; silk. 
Une aiguillee 9 de coton, de -fil, . a needleful of cotton, silk. 

1. Artee'kl" de twale't 6 , toilet articles. 

2. Boudoir (boodwar'), a lady's private room. 

3. Les boucles oVoreilles, literally, the buckles of ears. Boucle also means 
ringlet : boucle de cheveux, hair ringlet. 

4. Anneau : anneau de fiancailles, de mariage, engagement, wedding, ring. 

5. Dentifrice, do n teefree's e . 6. Se parfwmay', to perfume oneself. 
7. Artee'kl 8 de kootw'r 6 , sewing materials. 8. figui'y 8 . 

9. See page 171, note 35. 

10. Adverbs of time are those which answer to the question quandf when? 

11. A present, mainlenant, now. The former is used in respect to transitory 
circumstances, and the latter when they express permanency ; as, je ne puis 
vous accompagner dprSsenl, I cannot accompany you at present ; mairntenant 
quefai une position je ne pour rai plus vous accompagner, now that I have a 
situation I shall not be able to accompany you any more. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 237 

Adverbes de Temps. 10 
Alors; a present; 11 apres, 12 . then ; presently ; after. 
Aujourd'hui ; auparavant, . to-day; before, first. 
Aussitdt; autrefois; bientot, immediately ; formerly ; soon, 
D'abord; demain; depuis, 12 . at fir at; to-morrow ; since. 
Deja ; 13 dorenavant, . . . already; henceforth. 
Encore; enfin; ensuite, 12 . stilly yet; at last; afterwards. 
Hier; jadis; jamais, . . yesterday ; formerly ; never. 
Longtemps; lors; m.aiii.teriB,-n.t, n a long time ; then; now. [then. 
Naguere; u parfois; plus; 13 puis, w formerly ; sometimes; no more; 
Quand ; quelquefois ; sitot, . when ; sometimes ; so soon. 
Soudain; souvent; tantdt, . suddenly; often; by and by. 
Tard; t6t; 15 toujours, . . late; early; always, ever. 
Tout a Pheure ; 16 tout de suite, 16 presently, by and by; at once. 

Adverbes de Lieu. 1,1 

Ailleurs ; alentour, . . elsewhere; around. 
Qa; 18 la; dedans, 19 . . . here; there; into, within. 
Dehors; 1819 dessous; 1819 dessus, 1819 outside; beloiv, under ; above, 
En; ici 18 (ci); y, . . .in; here; there. [upon. 

Loin; ou; 18 partout, . , far; where; everywhere. 

12. Apres, depuis, ensuite, puis, after. Apres is the most used and is placed 
after the verb : nous verrons apres, we shall see after. Depuis means since : 
depuis le 15, je ne Vai pas revu, since {after) the 15th, I have not seen him. 
Ensuite, puis, signify afterwards, then: travaillons, ensuite (puis) nousjouerons, 
or, et nousjouerons ensuite, let us work ; afterwards (then) we will play. 

13. Dejd, already, plus, no more. The first word is used in the affirmative 
and the second in the negative : il est dejd temps, it is time already ; il n'est 
plus temps, it is no more time (it is too late). 

14. Naguere is also translated by in previous time. 

15. T61, early, a synonym of de bonne heure, page 124, note 13. 

16. See "Index," lout, used in idioms. 

17. Advert de lie', adverbs of place. Answertothe questions, ou? where? 
d'ou? whence? par out through where? 

18. These adverbs form compounds : deed, on this side ; deld, on the other 
side ; jusque-ld, until there or then ; par ici, this way ; jusqu'ou f until where ? 
how far? etc., note 17. 

19. Many of these adverbs are likely to be confounded with the same 
words used as prepositions, see pages 160-161. They are adverbs when they 
have no complement, but modify verbs ; while prepositions have always 
a noun or a part of a sentence as a complement; as, le livre est sous (prep.) 
la table, placez-le dessus (adv.), the book is under the table ; place it on top. 



238 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRANgAIS. 

1. II me faut quitter 20 cet hotel de suite. 

2. Pourquoi faut-il que vous le quittiez 21 si 22 vite? 

3. Je dois le quitter parce qu'on y fait trop de 23 

bruit pour l'etat de ma sante. 

4. Vous devriez prendre un appartement meuble 

dans un quartier tranquille. 

5. Je louerais plutot un appartement non 24 garni. 25 

6. Combien de pieces vous faut-il? 

7. Trois, plus la salle de bain : un salon, un cabi- 

net de travail et une chambre a coucher. 

8. Je crois que j'ai votre affaire. 26 Avec la pen- 

sion 27 ce serait cinq cents francs par mois. 
Cela vous irait-il ? 28 

9. Cela me semble un peu cher. 

10. Tout desireux 29 que je suis de vous obliger, je 

ne pourrais trouver rien de 23 meilleur marche. 

11. Vous avez beau dire, 30 c'est exorbitant; et y 

a-t-il une reduction pour les mois d'ete ? 

20. I must leave, or, it is necessary for me to leave. "We may also say, 
according to note 31, page 113, ilfaut queje quitte, the impersonal verb ilfaut 
requiring the subjunctive mood ; page 217, 3°. 21. Page 114, note 36. 

22. Si stands here for tant, so (much). The same difference exists between 
si and tant as between a,ussi and autant, page 227, note 47 ; tant is used with 
nouns and verbs and si with adjectives and adverbs : il a tant de m&rite et 
il est si modeste, he has so much merit and he is so modest. Si is sometimes 
used for quelque, however, in which case it always modifies an adjective: 
si (quelque) riche quHl soit, however rich he is. 23. Page 175, note 20. 

24. Non is here a separable prefix, synonymous with pas. 

25. Past part, de garnir, to garnish, synonym of meubte, furnished. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 



239 



5. 



7. 



9. 
10. 

11. 



PRONONCIATION. 

, keetay / 

. keeteeay' 

. brwee' so n tay / . 



nd n garnee'. 



po n si6 n/ sa n -so n/ fro Q 

. . . voo-zeerfc'-teel? 



so n/ bl e .... 

. mfcyer' marshay'. 



TRADUCTION. 

1. I must leave this hotel at 

once. 

2. Why must you leave it in 

such haste ? 

3. I must leave it because they 

make too much noise for 
the state of my health. 

4. You ought to take a fur- 

nished apartment in a 
quiet neighborhood. 

5. I would rather rent an un- 

furnished fiat. 

6. How many rooms do you 

need? 

7. Three, besides the bath 

room ; a parlor, a study 
and a bedroom. 

8. I believe I have what you 

want. With board, it will 
be 500 francs per month. 
Would that suit you ? 

9. That seems to me rather 

expensive. 

10. Anxious as I am to please 

you, I could not find any- 
thing cheaper. 

11. Youmay say what youivW, 

it is exorbitant. Is there 
any reduction for the sum- 
mer months f 



26. Lit., I believe that I have your business {affair). 

27. Pension, boarding. XJne pension is also synonym of pensionnat, a 
boarding school. 28. lAt.,wouldthatgo you? 

29. Tout, like si, is also an equivalent of quelque, however, note 22. Both 
words are used indiscriminately before an adjective, except in the case of 
the indicative or subjunctive mood, tout governing the former and si, or 
quelque, the latter : tout (si, quelque) riche quHl est (soit). 

30. Avoir beau is always followed by an infinitive and is translated by to 
be in vain, to be useless: fai beau leur dire, I tell them in vain. 



240 CORTINA METHOD. 

12. C'est une question a debattre. 31 

13. Ecoutez. 32 Je ne veux pas chercher plus long- 

temps. Mes bagages 33 sont en bas. Faisons 
affaire. 

14. Qa va! 3 * Vous payez un mois d'avance? 

C'est un recu de vingt-cinq louis 35 que je vais 
vous faire. 

15. Vous etes tout a fait ancien regime : vous 

comptez encore par louis, 

16. Voulez-vous que je dise 36 25 napoleons? 35 

17. Comme vous voudrez. Disons tout simple- 

ment cinq cents francs. Veuillez 37 me lire 
le recu, s'il vous plait ? 

18. Mais certainement. "Kegu de Monsieur Du- 

bois la somme de 500 francs, pour loyer et 
pension dans un immeuble, 38 sis rue Belliard, 
No. 290, pour le mois d'aout prochain. Mar- 
seilles, le 29 juillet, dix-huit cent quatre- 
vingt-quinze (1895 39 ). (Signe) Marin." 

19. Voila qui est bien. Voici mon cheque. 

20. Parfait ! Au plaisir de vous revoir. 

31. Literally, to debate. 

32. Xtcoutez ! listen ! dites done ! well, then ! voyons ! see here ! are familiar 
sentences used to call the attention of the person addressed, to what is 
going to be said. 

33. Mes bagages or mon bagage, my baggage. 

34. Qa va! literally, it goes. 

35. Gold coin worth twenty francs (four dollars). 

36. Pres. of the sub. of dire, to say or tell, page 217, 1°. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 



241 



12 kesti6 n/ a dayba'tr*. 12. 

13. Aykootay' baga'zh e 13. 

so n -to n -ba/. Fez6 n -zafer'. 



14. Sa va ! — resw / de va n t- 14. 
sa n/ lwee / 



15 o n sia n/ rayzhee'm 6 15. 

k6 n tay / -zo n kor / . 

16 dee's e . . . . napolayo n/ ? 16. 

17 too sa n pl e mo n/ . . . .? 17. 



18 dwbwa' la s6 / m e .... 18. 

lwayay' do n -se n - 

neeme'bl 6 , see Tic beyiar, 
nwmayro' de so n ka'tr 6 - 

va n -dees Marse'eey c 

le va n t-nef zhweeyay', 
deezwi' so n ka / tr e -va n ka n/ - 
z e . (SeenyayO Mara n/ . 

19 sh£k. 19. 

20 20. 



That is a question to be 
discussed. 

Look here ! I do not wish 
to search any longer. My 
baggage is below. Let us 
come to an agreement. 

Very well; will you pay a 
month in advance f Ltis 
a receipt for twenty-five 
louis that L am going to 
make out for you. 

You are entirely too old 
fashioned; you still fig- 
ure by louis. 

Do you want me to say 
twenty-five napoleons ? 

As you please. Let us say 
plainly five hundred 
francs. Will you read 
the receipt, if you please f 

Certainly. u Received from 
Mr. Dubois the sum of 500 
francs, for room and 
board in the house located 
290 Belliard st., for the 
month of August next. 
Marseilles, July 29, 1895. 
{Signed) Marin. 11 

That is correct. Here is 

my check. 
All right ! Until I see you 

again. 



37. See page 214, note 81. 

38. Immeuble, real estate ; Mens immeubles, real estate possessions ; Mens 
meubles, personal property, chattels. 

39. Note that in computing hundreds from 11 to 19, it is customary to use 
onze cent, douze cent, etc., eleven hundred, twelve hundred, etc., instead of 
mil cent, mil deux cent, etc.; but it is not extended over 19 hundred as is 
sometimes done in English. 



242 



CORTINA METHOD. 



SEIZlfiME LEgON. 



Articles de Papeterie 

Une lettre ; note, un billet, 
XTne carte ; carte postale, . 
Une carte geographique, 2 . 
Du papier a lettre, a copier, 
Du papier ordinaire, buvard, 3 . 
Une feuille de papier, . 
Une enveloppe ; timbre-poste, . 
Un cachet ; timbre ; 4 canif, 
Une plume d'acier, d'oie, 5 . 
Un porte-plume ; porte-feuille, . 
Un porte-monnaie ; le crayon, . 
De l'encre rouge, a copier, . 
La gomme a effacer ; la colle, . 
Un caoutchouc ; un grattoir, 
Tailler (tay6) un crayon, . 
Tenir les livres, la comptabilite, 
Un annuaire du commerce, 6 
Un cahier ; grand livre, 
Le livre de caisse ; le journal, . 
La facture ; le connaissement, . 
Une regie ; ligner un registre, 7 % 
Le calendrier ; la circulaire, 



on de Bureau} 

a letter ; note. 

a card; postal card, 

a map, chart. 

writingpaper, copyingpaper. 

ordinary paper, blotting 

a sheet of paper. [paper. 

an envelope ; postage stamp. 

a seal; a stamp; a penknife. 

a steel pen, a quill. 

a penholder ; portfolio. 

apocketbook; the pencil. 

red ink, copying ink. 

the erasing gum ; mucilage, 

a rubber ; an eraser. 

to sharpen a pencil. 

to keep books, the accounts. 

a trade directory. 

a copybook; ledger. 

the cash book; the journal. 

the invoice; the bill of lading. 

a rule ; to rule a blank book. 

the calender ; the circular. 



1. Stationery or writing materials. 

2. Ique is the final of nouns of sciences and arts, and corresponds to the 
final ic in English, page 173, note 13. 

3. From boire, to drink ; bu, drunk. Papier buvard, lit., drinking paper. 

4. Timbre, paper stamp, also a call bell. 

5. Dwa, of goose. Une plume cVoie, a quill. 6. A commercial annual. 
7. Register in the sense of blank book. 8. Animals ; sing., animal. 
9. Beema'n e , of two hands; adj., bimane: Vhomme est bimane, man is 

bimane. 10. Beepe'd«, of two feet. 11. Young ass. 12. Zhumo '. 

13. Or taure (tor're); bceuf, ox. 14. Brebee'. 15. Ser, page 24, " F.'» 

16. Truee'« or coche (ko'sh*). 17. Oors. 

18. Adverbs of manner answer to the question how* Besides those given 

in the above list, almost all the adverbs ending in ment (ly) are also 

adverbs of manner : poliment, politely : doucement, slowly, sweetly or softly, 

etc. They are equivalent to the preposition avec, with, accompanying a 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 243 

Animaux.* 

Bimane, 9 bimana. Ane, ass; anesse, ass (f.). 

Bipede, 10 biped. Anon, 11 bourrique, donkey. 

Quadrupede, quadruped. Mulet,mule,mwte(m.),77H«te(f.). 

Singe,guenon,ape, female ape. Cheval, horse; jument, 12 //?are. 

Tigre, tigresse, tiger, tigress. Crapaud, toad. Lynx, lynx. 

Taureau, bull; vache, 13 cow. Loup, louve, he-wolf, she-wolf. 

Veau, genisse, calf heifer. Cnien, chienne, dog, bitch. 

Better, ram; brebis, 14 ew e. Chat, chatte, cat, she-cat. 

Le bouc, the he-goat. Renard,/oa;; lapin, rabbit. 

La chevre, the she-goat. L'ecureuil, the squirrel. 

Cerf, 15 biche, stag, hind. L'elephant, the elephant. 

Mouton, sheep ; &gne&vL,lamb. Ours, " bear; sanglier, boar. 

Cochon, trv&e, 1 * pig, sow. Rat, rat; souris, mouse. 

Lion, lionne, lion, lioness. Le chameau, the camel. 

Adverbes de Maniere. 19 

Autrement; meme, 19 . . otherwise ; even, also. 
Ainsi; bien f° comme, . . so, thus; well; as, like. 
Comment; ensemble; expres, how; together; expressly. 
Casuellement; 18 soudainement, 18 caswa^,y/ suddenly. [softly. 
Debout; vite; doucement, 18 . standing; quick, fast; slowly, 
Gratis; plutot; 21 quasi (kasi'), free; rather; very near, almost. 
Mai; mieux; pis (pee), . badly; better; worse. 

Sciemment (seeamo n/ ), . . knowingly. 

noun: avecpolitesse, with politeness; avec douceur, with sweetness or soft- 
ness. To form an adverb the final ment is added to the masc. form of the 
adjective if it ends with a vowel, and to the fern, form if the masc. ends 
with a consonant: joli, joliment ; seul, settlement. Beau,nouveau,fou, mou, 
are exceptions, as they form the adverbs from the fern.: bellement, nouvelle- 
ment,follement, mollement. The adjectives ending in nt change this final in 
mment: prudent, prudemrnent, elegant, eligamment. 

19. In French as in English, though not to such a great extent, several 
adjectives are used as adverbs ; they are adjectives when qualifying a noun 
or a pronoun, les memes hommes, the same men ; and adverbs when modify- 
ing verbs : les meres aiment meme les defauts de leurs en/ants, mothers love 
even the defects of their children ; page 171, note 39. 

20. Some adverbs like hien, assez, ires, etc., modify adjectives or other 
adverbs: assez bien, tresjolie, etc. Bien requires de and the article before 
the noun. Bien des hommes, many men ; page 175, note 20. 

21. See page 52, note 8. 



244 CORTINA METHOD. 

FRAN5AIS. 

1. D'apres ce qu'on m'en avait dit, j'esperals 

trouver ici une temperature des plus 22 agre- 
ables. 

2. Voulez-vous dire que le climat est malsain 23 et 

que vous vous trouvez 24 desappointe ? 

3. Assurement ! 25 Hier, en allant du quai a la 

Poste, il a tour a tour 26 (alternativement) plu ? 
grele, neige et gele. 27 

4. Et apres il j avait un tel verglas 28 que j'ai man- 

que de tomber. 29 Cependant nous avons 
aussi des journees de soleil. 

5. Malheureusement trop rares, car le mauvais 

temps me fait beaucoup de tort 30 a la sante. 

6. Moi, ce qui m'est surtout desagreable, c'est le 

degel, Phumidite. 

7. Je le congois. Mais laissons la ce sujet fasti- 

dieux et parlons de nos etudes. 

8. Je le veux bien. Causons litterature ou theatre, 

si vous le voulez. 

9. Lisez-vous encore autant que 31 vous le faisiez 

il y a deux ans ? 

22. Des plus, of the most. Genitive form of the superlative, corresponding 
to the English a most. 

23. See page 161, note 24. 

24. Vous vous trouvez, literally, you find yourself; from the active verb 
trouver, to find, used reflectively. 

25. Assurement, assuredly, certainly, without any doubt, derived from 
assure, past participle of the verb assurer, to assure. 

26. Literally, turn by turn, alternately. 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



245 



PRONONCIATION. 

1 ko^c^-navk' to n - 

payratwr' 



2 kleema' ay malsa n/ 

daysapwa n tay / ? 

3. Aswraymo n/ ! kay' 

too-ra toor plw, gray- 
lay 7 , nfezhay' ay zMay'. 



4 vayrgla' — Sepo n do n/ 4 



5 tro y&'t*, .... t6-r& la 



6 dayzhk'l, 



7 ko n swa' swzhay' 

fasteedie' 

8 K6z6 n/ leetayratwr' oo 

laya'tr* 3 , .... 



9. 



TRADUCTION. 

1. According to what I had 

been told, I expected to 
find here a most agree- 
able temperature, 

2. Do you mean that the cli- 

mate is unhealthy and 
you are disappointed ? 

3. Undoubtedly! Yesterday, 

going from the wharf to 
the Post Office, it alter- 
nately rained, hailed, 
snowed and froze. 

And afterward there was 
so much frost that I al- 
most fell. However, we 
have also sunny days. 
5. Too scarce, unfortunately, 
as the bad weather affects 
my health very much. 

What is especially disagree- 
able to me, is the thawing 
and the humidity. 

I understand ; but let us quit 
this tiresome subject and 
talk about our studies. 

8. As you wish. Let us talk 

about literature or the 
theater, if you like. 

9. Do you still read as much 

as you did two years ago ? 



6. 



7. 



27. Past participles of the impersonal verbs pleuvoir, greler, neiger and 
geler, to rain, to hail, to snow and to freeze. 

28. Vergkzs, white frost or rime which is formed when it freezes right after 
it has rained or drizzled. 

29. Tai manque de tornber, literally, I have failed to fall. The English way 
of expressing this idea can also he employed in French : je suis presque 
tombe, I almost fell. 

30. Faire du tort or du mal, to harm or hurt ; literally, to do wrong or evil • 
page 150, note 23. 31. Page 227, note 47. 



246 CORTINA METHOD. 

10. Oh! oui. J'ai lu tous les classiques frangais, 

anglais et espagnols. 

11. Je prefere lire les grands romanciers. 32 

12. Comme distraction, je les lis parfois. 

13. Dans le cas ou 33 vous seriez a court de livres, je 

pourrais vous preter Dumas pere, 34 Victor 
Hugo et GJ-eorge Sand. 

14. Bien aimable. 35 J'ai lu toutes leurs ceuvres 

et egalement celles 36 d'autres ecrivains ce- 
lebres. 

15. Lisiez-vous l'original ou la traduction? 

16. Rien que les originaux, monsieur. 

17. Et vous les avez parfaitement compris? 

18. Comment! J'en preferais la lecture a celle 36 

des auteurs de ma langue maternelle. 

19. Je vous en felicite. La connaissance 37 appro- 

fondie 38 des langues etrangeres est la plus 
utile, 39 en meme temps que la plus agreable, 
de toutes celles 36 qu'il nous est permis d'ac- 
querir. 

20. Merci de votre approbation. 

32. Romanciers, novelists (page 125, note 21), derived from roman, novel. 

33. Preferable to dans le cas que, on account of the cacophony cas que. 

34. The elder Dumas, to distinguish him from his son, Dumas fils, who 
bears the same name, Alexandre, also a celebi-ated novelist and playwright. 

35. Contraction of vous Ues bien aimable, you are very amiable, kind. 

36. To avoid the repetition of the noun, the demonstrative pronouns celui, 
celle, ceux, celles are used, and they are rendered in English by the demon- 
strative this, these, that, those, or by the one. 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



247 



10 klasee'k, .... 

11 romo n seeay / . 

12 lee ... . 

13 a koor .... duma / 

ugb' ay zhor / zh e so Q . 



14 ler-se'vi* aykree- 

va n/ -sayle / br e . 



15. 



16. 
17. 

18. 



k6 n pree / ? 

de-zoter' de ma lo n/ gu e 



19 La konayso n/ s e apro 

fo n dee / dakayreer'. 



20 



10. Oh ! yes. I have read all 

the French, English and 
Spanish classics. 

11. I prefer reading the great 

novelists. 

12. As a pastime I read them, 

once in a while. 

13. In case you should be short 

of books, I could lend you 
the elder Dumas, Victor 
Hugo and George Sand. 

14. Very kind of you, but I have 

read all their works and 
those of other celebrated 
authors as well. 

15. Did you read the original 

or the translation f 

16. Nothing but the originals. 

17. And did you understand 

them perfectly f 

18. Why ! I preferred their 

reading to that of the au- 
thors inmy mother tongue. 

19. I congratulate you, for a 

thorough knowledge of 
foreign languages is the 
most useful, as well as the 
most agreeable, of all 
those which we are al- 
lowed to acquire. 

20. Thank you for your ap- 

proval. 



37. The n is generally doubled in words beginning with con or in; con- 
naitre, connaissement, innocence, etc. 

38. Profonde may also be used. Generally pro/onde is used in a physical 
sense, and approfondie in a figurative or mental sense. The latter is the 
past part, of approfondir, to deepen ; pro fond, deep, is an original adjective. 

39. The suffixes il, He, in the adjectives denote quality, or manner of being, 
for the root: civil, civile, docile, fertile, etc. 

17 



248 CORTINA METHOD 



SECONDE PAETIE. 

DU GENRE DANS LES SUBSTANTIFS. 

Le feminin se forme de trois manieres differentes : 
1°. En ajoutant 1 un e muet au masculin : 
Le marquis, the marquis; la marquise, the marchioness. 

Remaeques. — 1. Les substantifs qui se terminent 
en x changent cette lettre en s avant d^aj outer Fe muet: 
L'epoux, the husband; l'epouse, the wife. 

2. Ceux qui se terminent 2 en er, ier, prennent un ac- 
cent grave sur Y avant- dernier e (ere, iere). Ex.: 

Le berger, the shepherd; la bergere, the shepherdess. 

Le jardinier, the gardener; la jardiniere, t?ie female gardener, 

3. Ceux en n ou t redoublent la consonne : 

Le baron, the baron; la baronne, the baroness. 
Le chat, the cat; la chatte, the she-cat. 

Exceptions. — Ceux en ain y in, et quelques uns en an: 

Un Romain, a Roman; une Romaine, a Roman woman. 
Un orphelin, an orphan boy ; une orpheline, an orphan girl. 
Un faisan, a pheasant; une faisane, a hen pheasant. 

4. Ceux en e changent cette voyelle en esse : 3 

L'abbe, 4 the abbot; l'abbesse, the abbess. 

Le negre, the negro ; la negresse, 5 the negress. 

- — — — — _ ^ 

1. By adding. 2. Those ivhich end. 

3. In English these have generally the feminine in ess : due, duke, ducfo 
esse, duchess ; pretre, priest, prUresse, priestess, etc. 

4. The b is doubled in abbe, abbot; gibbosity, gibbosity; rabbin, rabbi; 
sabbat, sabbath, and in their derivatives. 5. Note the change of e into S. 



THE GENDER. 249 

5. Ceux en eur se terminent en euse ou ice : 

Le chanteur, the singer; la chanteuse, 6 the songstress. 
L'acteur, the actor; l'actrice, the actress. 

6. Bailleur, lessor; defendeur, defendant; devin, 
diviner; enchanteur, magician; pecheur, sinner; ven- 
geur, avenger, forment le feminin en esse : bailleresse, 
defenderesse, etc. Chasseur, hunter, fait chasseuse 
dans V usage general et chasseresse en poesie. 

2°. En employ ant des noms differ ents. 7 

3°. En ajoutant nn qualificatif 8 qui determine le genre : 

Un auteur, an author ; une femme auteur. 

TJn artiste, 9 an artist; une femme artiste. 

XiQ rossignol male, the cock nightingale ; le rossignol femelle. 

Observations. — 1°. Pour les toes animes les genres 
sont faciles a reconnaitre 10 en francais : sont masculins, 
les noms d'hommes et d'animaux males; sont feminins 
les noms de femmes et d'auimaux femelles. 

2°. Pour les 6tres inanimes, ou les choses, 11 il faut re- 
marquer que les noms des lettres de V alphabet sont mas- 
culins ; 12 que les noms termines par e muet sont pour la 
plupart feminins, excepte ceux en age, aire, ege et iste. 1 * 

3°. Sont encore generalement du masculin : les noms de 
contrees, excepte quand ils se terminent par un e muet ; u 

6. When it is a celebrated name cantatrice is used. 

7. See the Vocabularies on Family, lessons 1st and 14th, pages 47 and 230, 
and the vocabulary of Animals, lesson 16th, page 243. 

8. Kaleefeekatif 7 , from qualifier, to qualify. The final fier corresponds to 
fy, as in justifier, to justify ; fortifier, to fortify ; signifier, to signify, etc. 

9. Nouns ending in iste in French and ist in English are common to both 
genders : fabuliste,fataliste, moraliste, etc. 

10. To recognize in the sense of to distinguish. 11. The things or objects. 

12. According to the French Academy, but the feminine gender prevails 
for the following letters : /, h, I, m, n, v and s. 

13. La table, la leitre, etc.; le courage, un abicedaire (an alphabet booK), le 
coi'tege (the retinue), un organisle (an organ player), etc. 

14. Le Portugal, le Danemark; la France, la Russie, VEspagne, etc. 



250 CORTINA METHOD. 

et les noms termines par une autre lettre que Ve muet, 
excepte ceux en eur, ion et te, qui sont feminins. 15 
4°. Yoici quelques mots dont le genre est douteux : 

Genre Masculin. 
Albatre, alabaster. Exemple, example. Intervalle, interval. 
Ambre, amber. Exorde, exordium. Isthme, isthmus. 

Antipode, antipode. Girofie, cfove. [sphere. Obelisque, obelisk. 
Centime, centime. Hemisphere, hemi- Ongle, nail. 
1tcla,ir,lightningflash.Incen&ie,fire. Ulcere, ulcer. 

32piderme, cuticle, Indice, indication. Ustensile, utensil. 

Genre Feminin. 

Argile, clay. liberie, ebony. Nacre, mother -of* 

Armoire, closet. iScritoire, inkstand. Oasis, oasis, [pearl. 

Artere, artery. Horloge, clock. Once, ounce. 

Alarme, alarm. Idole, idol. Paroi, inner surface. 

Noms des Deux Genres. 16 

Aigle, eagle, au propre et au figure, 17 est masculin: 

L'aigle est fier. The eagle is fierce. 

Cet homme n } est pas un aigle. This man is not a genius. 

Dans le sens d'enseigne 18 il est feminin : 

L 1 aigle americaine. The american eagle (standard). 

Amour, love; delice, delight; orgue, organ, sont 
masculins au singulier et feminins au pluriel : 19 

TJn bel amour, a great love ; de belles amours. 

Un grand delice, a great delight ; de grandes delices. 

Un grand orgue, a large organ ; de grandes orgues. 

Automne, autumn, est des deux genres. 20 

Couple, pair, est masc. ; couple, couple, est feminin. 21 

15. Le chdteau, le pays, le bois, etc.; la douleur, (page 68, note 26), la nation, 
la devotion (page 117, note 10), la bonte, la Uberte (page 121, note 40). 

16. Nouns of both genders. 17. In a proper and in a figurative sense. 

18. In the sense of standard (banner, ensign). 

19. Love, personified by the pagans as a god, is always masculine. 

20. The masculine is generally admitted. 21. Page 167, notes 14, 15, 16. 



THE NUMBER. 251 

Hymne, hymn, est masculin excepte lorsqu'il signifie 
chant d'eglise: 

Z'hymne national. The national hymn (anthem). 

Les belles hymnes chr6tiennes. The beautiful Christian hymns. 

GEuvre, work, est toujours feminin an plnriel ; an sin- 
gulier il est masculin en terme d' architecture on bien 
quaud il designe 1' ensemble des onvrages d'un auteur: 

Les ceuvres completes de Ma- The complete works of Racine. 

Tout Z'ceuvre de Mozart, [cine. All Mozart's works. 

Le gros oeuvre de cette maison. The main ivalls of this house. 

Gent est feminin au singulier, et signifie race, tribe. 
Au pluriel, gens, 22 people, persons, folks, vent au feminin 
1'adjectif qui le precede iinmediatement, et au masculin 
celui qui le suit ou ne le precede pas immediatement : 

Les bonnes gens. [lent. The good folks. 

Heureux les gens qui travail- Happy are those who work. 

Les gens d y ici so tit bons. The people here are good. 

Suivi d'un complement gens est toujours masculin: 
Certains gens de lettres. Certain men of letters. 

DTJ NOMBRE DANS LES STJBSTANTIFS. 

I. Noms 1 Double Pluriel. 1 
1°. Aieul, grandfather: aieuls, aieux. Le premier 

est employe dans le sens de grand-pere pater nel et maternel; 

le second dans le sens d'ancetres. 2 

2°. Ciel, cielo: cieux, ciels. La premiere forme 

dans le sens propre, et la deuxieme dans le sens figure" : 

Notre p&re qui efes aux cieux. Our Father who art in heaven 
Cet artiste fait bien les ciels. This artist paints skies well. 

22. Gent, as well as the adjective tout, drops the t in their plural forms; 
lesjeunes gens, the young folks; nous tous, all of us. 

1. Number of the substantives. Nouns having two plural. forms. Continua» 
tion of le pluriel, page 74. 2. Ancestors, page 230, note 5. 



252 CORTINA METHOD. 

3°. Oeil (e'iy e ), eye, fait yeux (ie) au propre et au 
figure j mais il fait oeils (e'iy e ) dans les composes : 
Oeils-de-beuf, bulVs eyes. Oeils-de-chat, cafs eyes? 

4°. Travail, woi% fait travaux, excepte quand il 
designe une machine 4 ou un rapport ofnciel, 5 et alors il 
fait travails. 

II. NOMS INVAEIABLES. 

1. Quelques noms ne s'emploient qu'au singulier: 
1°. Les noms de metaux : argent, platine, 6 etc. 

2°. Les noms abstraits : franchise, 7 egoisme, 8 etc. 

3°. Ceux de sciences et d'art: la chimie, la sculp- 
ture, 1 'agriculture, etc. 

4°. Les mots employes substantivement : le beau, le 
manger, 9 les si, les car, les pourquoi, 10 etc. 

2. Certains noms ne s'emploient qu'au pluriel : 

Accordailles,&e£ro^- Armoiries, arms. 11 Fiangailles, 12 betroth' 
Frais, expenses, [ing. Funerailles, 12 /imer- Vivres,provisions. \al 
Confins, confines. Vepres, vespers. [ate.Broussailles, bushes. 
Mceurs, customs. Decombres, rubbish. Premices, first-fruits. 
Tenebres, 12 darkness. Depens, expenses. Obseques, obsequies. 

III. ^"oms Composes. 
1. Quand les noms composes sont ecrits en un seul 
mot, ils suivent la regie des noms simples : 

Un portemanteau, a portmanteau ; pi., des portemanteaux. 

3. Precious stone. 

4. A contrivance for holding a horse in a blacksmith's shop. 

5. Official report. 6. The names of metals ; silver, platinum. 

7. The final ise is added to some adjectives to form nouns, as sottise, fool- 
ishness, from sot, fool ; couardise, cowardice, from couard, coward ; franchise, 
frankness, from franc, frank, etc. 

8. The final isme forms abstract nouns, corresponding to those ending in 
ism in English, as ego'isme, magnitisme, mecanisme, etc. 

9. Page 233, note 21. 10. The ifs, the whys, the wherefores. 
11. In the meaning of coal of arms. 12. Page 228, note 60. 



THE NUMBER. 253 

Exceptions : 

Gentilhomme, gentleman; pi., gentilshommes. 13 
Bonliomme, good natured man; pi., bonshommes. 15 

2. S'ils sont ecrits en deux mots (noms ou adjectife) 
tous deux prennent la marque du pluriel : 

Des choux-fleurs, cauliflowers. Des pores-epics, porcupines. 

Eemaeques. — 1°. S'il y a une preposition exprimee 
ou sous-entendue, 14 entre les deux noms, le premier seul 
prend la marque du pluriel : 15 

Des chefs-d'oeuvre, master works. Des H6tels-Dieu, hospitals. 

2°. Si dans le substantif compose il entre un adverbe, 
une preposition, une conjonction, etc., ces mots restent 
toujours invariables : 16 

Des contre-amiraux, rear-admirals. 
Des passe-partout, pass keys. 

IY. Noms Propkes. 

1. Les noms propres de personnes ne prennent point 
la marque du pluriel, excepte quand ils sont employes 
comme noms communs : 

Les deux Corneille Uaient The two Corneilles were broth- 

fr&res. ers. 

Les Bourbons sontfrangais et The Bourbons are French and 

espagnols. Spanish. 

J y ai plusieurs Raphaels. I have several Raphaels. 

2. Ceux de pays prennent la marque du pluriel : 
Les trois Ameriques. The three Americas. 

13. Note that each of the two corresponding words take the plural. 

14. Expressed or understood. 

15. There are a few exceptions to this rule among them : des tite-d-tSte, 
some private interview; des pied-d-terre, occasional lodgings. 

16. Bric-dbrac may be included in this rule. If used by themselves, the 
compounding words have no meaning whatever. 



254 CORTINA METHOD. 

PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 

(Suite de la page 75.) 

lis peuvent etre employes comme sujets et comme 

complements directs ou indirects: 

Je, tu, il, ils, 1 sont toujours sujets. 
Nous, vous, elle, elles, 1 sont sujets 2 ou complements.* 
Me, te, se, le, la, les, sont comp. directs* ou indirects: 6 
Moi, toi, soi, lui, leur, eux, 16 en, y, sont ordi- 

nairement complements indirects. 

1. Nous avons deja dit que les pronoms se placent avant 
le verbe, exeepte dans 1' interrogation et P exclamation : 7 

JE?itendez-vo\xs ? Vient-il ? Chante-t-il Men ! 

Eemarque. — Les pronoms complements: me, te, se, 
nous, vous, se, qui accompagnent le verbe reflechi, se 
placent avant le verbe, 7 m6me dans P interrogation: 

Nous nous asseyons. 8 We sit down. 

Vous asseyez-vous P Do you sit down ? 

2. Quand il y a deux pronoms complements, Pun 
direct, P autre indirect, le pronom de la premiere ou de la 
deuxieme personne precede celui de la troisieme personne. 

1. See page 63, note 35. 2. Elle est marine. 3. Je vais chez elle. 

4. Je me lave les mains. 5. H me donne un livre. 

6. Page 68, note 24. These pronouns do not follow immediately after the 
verb, but are separated from it by some other word not a negation. Ex.: qui 
voilf "moi," who sees? I. "Moi," qui suis fatigue, "je" travaille ; et"toi," 
au contraire, " tu" ne fais rien, I, who am tired, (J) work, and you, on the 
contrary, {you) do nothing. " Votis " parlez plus que " lui " (qu'eux) you talk 
more than he does (than they do). Sometimes these pronouns seem to be 
united closely with the verb, but they are always separated by the sense : 
"moi," /aire cela! I, to do that! Note that to separate them from the 
verb, the corresponding pronouns je, tu, etc., are often used, as has been 
explained in the last paragraph of note 35, page 63. 

7. The only exception is in the imperative (page 227, note 46) affirmative 
form ; but in the negative the pronoun objective follows : suivez-nous, follow 
us ; ne " nous" suivez pas, do not follow us. 

8. Literally : we ourselves seat. 

9. Literally : you seat yourself t 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 255 

Cependant, le complement direct ?e, 7a, les, precede le com- 
plement indirect lid, leur, mais il suit le complement 
indirect se. Le tableau suivant eclair cit cette regie : 10 

Me le, me la, me les. 11 Te le, te la, te les. 11 

Nous le, nous la, nous les. 12 Vous le, vous 7a, vous 7es. 12 
I«e lui, la 7wz, les lui. 13 Le 7ewr, la 7ewr, les leur. u 

Se 7e, se la, se 7es. 15 

Kezviarques. — 1°. Si le verbe est a Fimperatif et le sens 
est affirmatif le complement direct se place toujours avant 
le complement indirect, quelle que soit la personne : 16 

Dites-le-nous, tell it to us. Bepetez-les-leur, repeat them to them. 

2°. Si le sens est negatif le complement indirect 
s'enonce 17 le premier, excepte hii, leur, qui se placent 18 
apres V autre pronom: 
Ne me le ditespas. Do not tell it to me. 

3°. Le pronom en suit 19 tons les autres pronoms com- 
plements et precede immediatement le verbe : 

Ne nous en parlez plus. Do not speak to us about it anymore. 

4°. Y, suit aussi tons les autres pronoms excepte en: 20 

Je l'y ai trouve. I found it there. [there f 

Combien y en aura-t-il f How many of them will there be 

10. The following table elucidates the rule. 

11. It (him) to me (thee); it (her) to me (thee); them to me (thee); ex.: il 
me (te) le {la, les) donne, he gives it (him, her, them) to me (thee). 

12. It (him) to us (you); it (her) to us (you); them to us (you); ex.: il nous 
(vous) le (la, les) raconte, he relates it (them) to us (you). 

13. It (him) to him (her); it (her) to him (her); them to him (her); ex.: je 
le lui (la, lui, les lui) ai dit (dite, dits, dites), I have told it to him (it to her, 
them to him or her). 

14. It (him) to them ; it (her) to them ; them to them ; ex.: je le leur (la leur, 
les leur) enseignerai, I shall teach it (them) to them. 

15. It to himself (herself, themselves); them to himself (herself, them- 
selves); ex.: il se V (se la, se les) imagine, he fancies it (to himself). 

16. Whoever be the person. 17. Is expressed. 
18. Which are placed. 19. Follows. 
20. u Y n also follows all the other pronouns except " en." 



256 CORTINA METHOD. 

VERBES REFLECHIS. 1 

Le verbe reflechi est celui dont le sujet fait et supporte 
Taction; 2 il doit done 6tre conjugue avec deux prononis 
de la meme personne ; le premier est le sujet, le second 
est le complement. Ex. : il se lave, he washes himself; nous 
nous perdons, we lose ourselves. Ces pronoms sont : 
Je me, tu te, il se, nous nous, vous vous, ils se. 

II faut distinguer deux sortes de verbes reflechis : 

1°. Oeux reflechis par nature ou essentiellement rSflSchis y 
e'est-a-dire, qui ne s'emploient jamais autrement ; 3 comme 
s'evanouir, to faint; se repentir, to repent. 

2°. Les verbes actifs ou neutres employes comme 
verbes reflechis et qui sont appeles accidentellenient refle- 
chis: se lever, to rise; de lever, to raise; s'endormir, 
to go to sleep; de dormir, to sleep. 

Yoici la liste des verbes essentiellement reflechis: 

S'abstenir, to abstain, [bow. S'empresser, to be earnest. 

S'accouder, to lean on one's el- S'en aller, to go away. 

S'accroupir, to squat, to crouch. S'enquerir, to inquire. 

S'adonner, to take to. S'evader, to escape. 

S'agenouiller, to kneel down. S'evanouir, to faint. 

S'arroger, arrogate to oneself. S'evertuer, to exert oneself. 

Se blottir, to crouch down. S'extasier, to be enraptured. 

Se cabrer, to prance, to rear* Se gargariser, to gargle. 

Se dedire, to retract. S'ingenier, to exercise one's 

Se demener, to struggle. S'ingerer, to meddle. [wits. 

Se desister, to desist from. Se mefier, to mistrust. 

S'ebahir, to wonder. Se meprendre, to mistake. 

S'ecrier, to cry out. Se moquer, to make fun of. 

S'ecrouler, to founder. Se parjurer, to perjure oneself. 

S'emparer, to seize, to invade. Se ratatiner, to shrivel. 

1. Ver'b e rayflayshee', reflective verbs. 

2. The reflective or pronominal verbs (page 154, note 13) are those conju- 
gated with two pronouns of the same person ; the first is the subject, the 
second the object; thus the same person performs and receives the action 
expressed by the verb. 3. In another icay. 



REFLEXIVE VERBS. 257 

Se raviser, to change one's Se remparer, to /orta/,?/ oneself. 

Se rebeller, to rebel. \mind. Se rengorger, to assume airs. 

Se recrier, to exclaim. Se repentir, to repent. 

Se refugier, to take refuge. Se souvenir, to remember. 

MODELE DE LA CONJUGAISON DU YEEBE 
KEFL^CHI. 

INFINITIF PRESENT. PARTICIPE PRESENT. 

Se perd-re, to lose oneself. Se -perd-ant, losing oneself. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

PRESENT. 
Singulier. Pluriel. 

Je me perd-s, I lose Nous nous perd-ons, We lose 

tu te perd-s, myself vous vous perd-ez, ourselves, 

il, elle, se perd. etc. Us, elles, se psvd-ent. etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Je me perd-cws, I was losing JVs.ns.perd-zons, We were losing 
tu te perd-cm, myself vous vous perd-zez, ourselves, 

il, elle, se perd-ait. etc. Us, elles, se perd-aient. etc. 

PASSE DEFINE. 

Je me perd-zs, I lost Nous nous perd4mes, We lost 

tu te perd-is, myself vous vous perd-ites, ourselves, 

il, elle, se perd-#. etc. Us, elles, se perd-irent. etc. 

FUTUR. 

Je me perdr-m, I shall lose Ns. ns. perdr-ons, We shall lose 
tu te perdr-as, myself vous vous perdr-ez, ourselves, 

il, elle, se perdr-a. etc. Us, elles, se perdr-on^. etc. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL.— present. 
Je me perdr-cm, I should lose iVs.ns.perdr-iorcs,We should lose 
tu te perdr-m's, myself vous vs. perdr-iez, ourselves, 

il, elle, se perdr-az7, etc. Us, elles, se perdr-aient. etc. 

MODE IMP^RATIF.— present. 

Perdons-nous, let us lose ourselves. 



Perds-toi, 4 lose thyself. Perdez-vous, lose yourself. 

4. The objective pronoun te (2d person sing.) is changed to toi when placed 
after the verb. 



258 CORTINA METHOD. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

PRESENT. 

Quejeme perd-e, That I lost Que ras.ns.perd-zons,Thatwe lost 
que tu te perd-es, myself, que vs.vous perd-iez, ourselves, 
qu.m, elle, se perd-e. etc. quHls,elles,seiperd-ent. etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Que je me perd-me, That I lost Q. ns. ns. pevd-issions, That we 
que tu te perd-isses, myself, q.vs.vs.iperd-issiez, lost ourselves, 
qu'^,eWe,seperd-^. etc. quHls,elles,se-perd-issent. etc. 

Temps Composes. 

INFTNITIF PASSE, [self GERONDIF PASSE, [self. 

S'Stre 5 perd-w, to have lost one- S'etant perd-w, having lost one' 

PASSE INDEFINI. 
Singulier. Pluriel. 

Je me suis perd-w, -we, 5 etc. 6 Nous nous sommesperd-ws,-wes, 5 etc. 6 

PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 

Je m'6tais perd-w, -ue, etc. 7 Nous nous etions perd-ws, -ues, etc. 7 

PASSE ANTERIEUR. 

Je me fus perd-w, -ue, etc. 8 Nous nous fumes perd-ws, -ues, etc. 8 

FUTUR ANTERIEUR. 

Je me serai perd-w, -ue, etc. 9 Nous nous serons perd-ws, -ues, etc. 9 

MODE CONDITIQNNEL.— passe. 
Je me serais perd-w,-we,etc. 10 Nous nous serions -perd-us,-ues,etc. l ° 

MODE SUBJONCTIF.— passe. 
Q.je me sois perd-w,-we, etc. 11 Q. ns. ns. soyons perd-ws,-wes, etc. 11 

PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 

Q.Jeme fusseperd-w,-we,etc. 12 Q. ns.ns.fussions per d-us, -ues, etc.™ 

5. Fem. form. It has been previously said that the pronominal verbs are 
conjugated with the auxiliary Ure, and not with avoir, as in English. 

6. I have lost myself, etc. We have lost ourselves, etc. 

7. I had lost myself, etc. We had lost ourselves, etc. 

8. I had lost myself, etc. We had lost ourselves, etc. 

9. I shall have lost myself, etc. We shall have lost ourselves, etc. 

10. I should have lost myself, etc. We should have lost ourselves, etc. 

11. That I have lost myself, etc. That we have lost ourselves, etc. 

12. That I had lost myself, etc. That we had lost ourselves, etc. 



REFLEXIVE VERBS. 259 

CONJUGAISON DTJ YEEBE COMPOS^ E^FL^CHI 
S'EN ALLER, 13 TO GO AWAY. 

PARTICIPE PRESENT. PARTICIPE PASSE. 

S'en allant, going away. S'en alle, gone away. 

MODE INDICATTF.— present. 

Singulier. Pluriel. 

Je m'en vais, I am going Ns. nous en allons, We are going 
tu t'en vas, away, vous vous en allez, away, 

il, elle, s'en va. etc. Us, elles, s'en vont. etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Je m'en allais, etc. u Nous nous en allions, etc. 

PASSE DEFINI. 

Je m'en allai, etc. 15 Nous nous en allames, etc. 

FUTUR. 

Je m'en irai, 16 etc. Nous nous en irons, etc. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL. 
Je m'en irais, 17 etc. Nous nous en irions, etc. 

MODE IMP^RATIF. 

— Allons-nous en, let us go away. 

Fa-t'en, thou go away. Allez-vous en, you go away. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF.— present. 
Qneje m'en aille, 18 etc. Que nous nous en allions, etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Que Je m'en allasse, etc. 19 Que ns. nous en allassions, etc. 

Temps Composes. 
Je m'en suis all6, etc. 20 Je m'en Uais all§, etc. 21 

Je m'en/ws all6, etc. 22 Je m'en serai all6, etc. 23 

Je m'en serais all6, etc. 24 Queje m'en sois all6, etc. 25 

Queje m'en. fusse alle, etc. 26 

13. P. 206, note 57. ' 14. 1 was going away, etc. 15. 1 went aivay, etc. 

16. I shall go away. 17. 1 should go away. 18. That I go away. 

19. That I went away, etc. 20. I have gone away, etc. 

21. I have been going away, etc. 22. I had gone away, etc. 

23. I shall have gone away, etc. 24. I should have gone away, etc. 

25. That I have gone aivay, etc. 26. That I had gone away, etc. 



260 CORTINA METHOD. 

VERBES R^CIPROQTJES. 1 

lis expriment que deux sujets accomplissent mutuelle- 
ment Vun sur V autre Paction marquee par le verbe : 

Les chiens et les loups se bat- The dogs and the wolves fight 

tent. 2 {each other). [other. 

Paul et Virginie s'aiment. 3 Paul and Virginia love each 

VERBES PASSIFS. 1 

Le verbe passif est celui qui exprime une action 
soufferte, supportee, par le sujet : 

FORME PASSIVE. 

L'agneau 2 est mange par leloup. The lamb is eaten by the wolf. 

FORME ACTIVE. 

Le loup mange Vagneau. The wolf eats the lamb. 

MODULE DE LA CONJUGAISON DU 
YEEBE PASSIF. 

MODE INFINITIF.— present. 
Etre aime, 3 to be loved. 

PARTICIPE PRESENT. PARTICIPE PASSE. 

JStant aime, 3 being loved. JSte aime, 3 been loved. 

MODE INDICATIF.— present. 

Singulier. Pluriel. 

Je suis aime, -6e, s lam' JVs. sommes aim&s^&es? We are 
tu es aim€ f -ee, loved, vs. etes aims' s, -&es, loved, 

il, elle, est aim&, -ee? etc. ils t elles, sont aimes, -Zes. etc. 

1. Reciprocal verbs are so called because they express reciprocity, or 
exchange of actions between two or more persons. 

2. Se battent, les uns les autres is understood. 

3. Uun V autre, one another, is understood. 

1. Properly speaking there are no passive verbs in French, but the passive 
voice is expressed by means of the verb to be and the past participle of an 
active verb. Only active verbs, or those governing a direct object (page 151, 
note 30) can be used in the passive voice. 2. Lanyd'. 

3. The past participle of the passive verb agrees in gender and number 
with the subject: Ure aime, (he) to be loved; Ure aimee (she) to be loved; 
Ztre aimes (they, masc.) to be loved ; Ure aimies (they, fern.) to be loved. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 261 

IMPARFAIT. 

«/'etais aim£, -ee, etc. Nous etions aimes, -ees, etc. 

PASSE DEFINE. 

Je fus aime, -ee, etc. Nous fumes aimes, -ees, etc. 

FUTUR SIMPLE. 

Je serai aime, -ee, etc. Nous serons aimes, -ees, etc. 

MODE CONDITIONNEL.— present. 

Je serais aime, -ee, etc. Nous serions aimes, -ees, etc. 

MODE IMP^RATIF.— present. 
Sois aime, -ee. Soyons aimers, -e"es. Soyez aimes, -ees. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF.— present. 
Queje sois aime, -ee, etc. Que nous soyons aim€s, -ees, etc. 

IMPARFAIT. 

Que je fusse aime, -ee, etc. Que nous fussions aimes, -ees, etc. 
Temps Composes. 
MODE INFINITIF. 
Avoir ete 4 aime*, -ee, 5 etc. Ayant ete aime, -ee, 6 etc. 

MODE INDICATIF. 

Singulier. Pluriel. 

«7'ai ete aim&, -ee, etc. J"'avais ete aime, -€es, etc. 

«/'eus ete aime, -ee, etc. J"'aurai ete aime, -ees, etc. 

J^aurais ete aime, -e*e, etc. 

MODE SUBJONCTIF. 

Que j'aie ete aime, -ee, etc. Que j'eusse ete aime, -e"es, etc. 

VERBES IMPERSONNELS. 
Les verbes impersonnels sont ceux qui expriment une 
action qu'on ne peut attribuer a aucun sujet, a aucune 
per sonne determinee r 1 
II neige, 1 it snoivs. Qu'il pleuve, 1 that it rains. 

4. Page 150, 1st. 5. To have been loved. 6. Having been loved. 

1. As in English they can be used only in the infinitive mood, present 
and past participles, and in the third person sing, in all the tenses ; that 
is why they are called impersonal : the pronoun il (it) bearing then a vague, 
undetermined sense. Page 117, note 17. 



262 CORTINA METHOD. 

Les verbes sont ou impersonnels par nature, comme il 
tonne, it thunders; il vente, it blows, ou bien ce sont 
des verbes actifs ou neutres employes impersonnelleinent, 
comme il tombe de la grSle, it is hailing; il convient 
Wdbeir, it is proper to obey, etc. 

MODULE DTJ VEEBE IMPERSONNEL. 

Tonner, to thunder; tonnant, tonne. 

MODE INDICATIF. MODE COXDITrONNEL. 

II tonne, it thunders. II tonnerait, it would thunder, 
II tonnait, it was thundering. mode subjonctif. 

II tonna, it thundered. Qu J il tonne, that it thunders. 

II tonnera, it will thunder. Qu J il tonnat, that it thundered. 

Temps Composes. 

II a tonn6, it has thundered. II aurait tonn6, it would have 
II avait tonn6, it had thun- thundered. 

dered. Qu^il ait tonn6, that it has 

II eut tonn6, it had thundered. thundered. 
II aura tonne, it will have Qu r \\ eUt tonn6, that it had 

thundered. thundered. 

Table des Principaux Verbes Impersonnels. 

Agir, 2 to be the question. Degeler, to thaiv. 

Arriver, 3 to happen, to occur. Dependre, to depend. 
Appartenir, 4 to be privileged. Deplaire, to displease. 
Bruiner, to drizzle. iSclairer, to light. 

Y avoir, 5 to be there. Faire, 6 to be, to make. 

Convenir, to be convenient, suit. Falloir, 7 to be necessary. 

2. Ex.: il s'agit de Vhonneur, it is a question of honor. As a personal verb 
it means to act. 

3. II nous est arrive que it occurred to us that As a personal verb 

it corresponds to the English to arrive. 

4. Ex.: il n' 'appartienl qu'aux personnes instruites de se bien ezprimer ; 
educated persons alone are privileged to express themselves properly. 
As a neuter verb it means to appertain, to belong. 5. Page 151, No. 3. 

6. It is impersonal when used in reference to weather or temperature: il 
fait beau temps, it is fine weather; il/ail bon, it is nice. 

7. Page 113. note 31. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 263 

Geler, to freeze. Repleuvoir, to rain again. 

Greler, to hail. Resulter, to result. 

Gresiller, to sleet. Sembler, 10 to seem. 

Importer, 8 to matter. Suffire, 11 to be sufficient. 

Neiger, to snow. Tarder, 12 to be longing. 

Paraitre, 9 to appear, to seem. Tenir a, 13 to depend. 

Plaire, to please. Tonner, to thunder. 

Pleuvoir, to rain. Venter, to blow. 



VERBES DEPECTIFS. 

Ce sonfc les verbes dont la conjugaison manque d'un ou 
de plusieurs teuips. 1 Les principaux sont : 2 

DeUXIEJIE COXJTJGAISOX. 
1. Faillir, to fail, to be fainting ; faill-ant, faill-i. 

Indicatif present — 3 me personne : il faut. 3 Ex.: 

Le cceur me faut. j M hetXYtfaUs me . 

Le cozur me manque. 3 J 

2. Gesir,* to lie ; gis-ant. 

PRESENT. IMPARFAIT. 

Nous gis-ons, Je gis-ais, Nous gis-ions, 



rows " -ez, tu " -ais, vous " -iez, 

Il,elle, g-it. Us, elles, " -ent. il,elle, " -ait. ils,elles, u -aient. 

8. To matter, to concern, to be of importance : ilimporte qu'onlefasse,it 
matters (it is of importance) that it be done. 

9. Uparait que voxis avezfroid, it seems that you are cold. 

10. U semble que vous rri'avez oubliS, it seems that you have forgotten me ; a 
ce qu'il me semble, as it seems (appears) to me. 

11. II suffll queje le dise, it is sufficient that I say so. 

12. II me tarde de vous voir, I am longing to see you. As a personal verb 
it is equivalent to the English to delay, to tarry. 

13. II ne tient pas & moi, it does not depend upon me. As a personal verb 
it means to hold (see page 209). 

1. The irregularities of those defective verbs which permit it. have been 
classified with the irregular verbs, pages 189 to 216, but they will be repeated 
here in the list with those which have not yet been mentioned. 

2. Or, les plus importants sont, the most important are. 

3. Page 199, note 40. The missing tenses are supplied by manquer, to want. 

4. The missing tenses are supplied by etre coucM, to lie down. 

18 



2m 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Troisieme Conjugaison. 
1. Dechoir, to fall off, to decline; d6ch-u. 5 



PRESENT. 

Je dechoi-s, 

Tu " -s, 

II, elle, " -t, 
Nous deehoy-ons 
Votes " -ez, 

Ils,elles, d6choi-ent. 

IMPERATIF. 



FUTUR. 

d6cherr-ai, 



D6choi- 



D6choy-ons. 



PAS. DEF. 

d6ch-us, 
" -us, 
M -ut, 
" -umes, 
" -utes, 
" -urent, 

SUBJ. PRES. 

Queje d6choi-e, 

" tu " -es, 

Qu' it, elle, " -e, 
Que nous d6choy-ions, 
11 -iez, 



-a, 
-ons, 
-ez, 
-ont, 



" -ez. " vous 
Qu r Us, elles, dechoi-ent, 

2. ISchoir, to become due; 6ch6-ant, 6ch-u. 
Indicatif present — 3 me personne : II echoit ou il echet 



COND. 

d6cherr-ais. 
" -ais. 
" -ait. 
11 -ions. 
" -iez. 
11 -aient e 

IMPARFAIT. 

dech-usse. 
11 -usses. 
" -iit. 
" -ussions. 
" -ussiez. 



-ussent. 



PAS. 


DEF. 


FUTUR. 


CONDITION. 


j> 


6ch-us, 


6cherr-ai, 


echerr-ais. 


Tu 


" -us, 


" -as, 


" -ais. 


II, elle, 


" -ut, 


" -a, 


11 -ait. 


Nous 


" -umes, 


" -ons, 


" -ions. 


Vous 


" -utes, 


, " "®B, 


" -iez. 


Us, elles, 


" -urent, 


" -ont, 


" -aient. 



3. Falloir, to be necessary; fall-u. 
II fau-t, fall-ait, fall-ut, faudr-a, faudr-ait, faill-e, fall-ut. 6 

4. Seoir J t08eat / s6-ant, sis. 7 

' I to suit, be becoming; sey-ant. 7 

U sied, sey-ait, sier-a, si6r-ait, siee. 7 

II sieent, sey-aient, sier-ont, si6r-aient, sie-ent. 7 

5. Has no present participle, and consequently no imperfect of indicative. 

6. Has no pres. part, or imperative and is only used in the 3d pers. sing. 

7. For the first signification, these two are the only forms in use ; for the 
second, the third person is used as given in the text. 

8. Only used in a figurative sense ; in the literal sense /aire frire is always 
employed, as in the case of cuire, page 107, note 42. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



265 



{ 


QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. 




1. Frire , 8 to fry ; fri-t. 




PRESENT. 


FUTUR. 


COND. 


•Te fr-is, 8 


Je frir-ai, 


Je frir-ais, 


tu "-is, 8 


tu " -as, 


tu " -ais, 


il,elle, "-it. 8 


«7, e£te, ' ' -a. 


il, elle, " -ait. 




JVbtis " -ons, 


Nous " -ions, 


IMPERATIF. 


vows " -ez, 


vous " -iez, 


Fri-s. 


zTs, e^es, " -ont. 


ils,elles, " -aient. 


2. 


Traire, to milk; tray-ant. 


, trait. 


PRESENT. 


IMPARF. FUTUR. 


COND. PRES.SUBJ. 


Je trai-s, 


tray-ais, trair-ai, trair-ais, trai-e. 


Tu " -s, 


" -ais, " -as, 


" -ais, " -es. 


/£, ette, " -t, 


-art, -a, 


" -ait, " -e. 


iVbws tray-ons 


, c< -ions, " -ons, 


" -ions, tray-ions. 


Vous " -ez, 


11 -iez, " -ez, 


" -iez, " -iez. 


i7s, eZZes, trai-ent, 


11 -aient, " -ont, 


11 -aient, trai-ent. 



Se conjuguent sur traire: afrstraire, to abstract; cfc'straire, 
to divert; errtraire, to extract; re?itraire, to darn; retraire, to 
milk again; sowstraire, to subtract. 

Table des Yerbes Defectifs. 



Premiere Conjugaison. 
Ambler, 9 to amble. 
JSclopper, 10 to lame. 
Puer, 11 to stink. 

Deuxieme Conjugaison. 
Assentir, 12 to assent. 
Defaillir, 13 to faint. 



iSbouillir, 1 * to boil away. 
S'enfuir, 15 to run away. 
Faillir, 16 to fail. 
Gesir, 17 to lie. 
Ouir, 18 to hear. 
Querir, 19 to fetch. 
Saillir, 20 to gush, to project. 
Surgir, 21 to arise. 



9. Is used only in the third person. 

10. Only used in the infinitive and the past part.: ecloppe. 

11. It is generally replaced by sentir mauvais, as an attenuation : il sent 
{sentait, sentit, sentira, sentirait, etc.) mauvais. 12. Page 189, note 13. 

13. Used only in the infinitive and indicative present, page 199, note 41. 

14. In the infinitive and past participle. 

15. Only the first and second persons of the subj. imp. are missing. 

16. Page 263. 17. Page 263. 18. Page 106, note 32. 
19. Page 207, note 59. 20. Page 199, note 42. 21. In the third person. 



266 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Troisieme Conjugaison. 
Apparoir, 22 to appear. 
Choir, 23 to fall. 
Comparoir, 24 to appear. 
Dechoir, 25 to fall off. 
Depourvoir, 26 to unprovlde. 
Lenoir, 27 to fall due. 
Palloir, 28 to be necessary. 
Promouvoir, 29 to promote. 
Havoir, 30 to have again. 
Seoir, 31 to seat, to suit. 

Quatrieme Conjugaison. 
Absoudre, 32 to absolve. 
Accroire, 33 to make believe. 



Abstraire, 34 to abstract 
Braire, 35 to bray. 
Bruire, 36 to rustle. 
Clore, 37 to close. 
Dissoudre, 32 to dissolve. 
llclore, 38 to hatch. 
Extraire, 34 to extract. 
Frire, 39 to fry. 
Luire, 40 to shine. 
Paitre, 41 to pasture. 
Henaitre, 42 to be born again-. 
Sourdre, 43 to spring. 
Soustraire, 34 to subtract. 
Tistre, 44 to weave, 
Traire, 34 to milk. 



22. Used only in the third person singular, ind. pres., as a judicial term; 
also in the infinitive : il appert, it appears. 

23. Only in the infinitive : prenez garde de cJwir, take care not to fall. In 
all its tenses it is supplied by tomber, to fall. 

24. Only in the infinitive. 25. Page 264. 

26. It is only employed in the infinitive and past participle. 

27. Page 264. 28. See page 264. 29. Imp. and past part. 

30. Only in the infinitive. 

31. Page 264. Only the third persons of the pres., imp., future, cond., and 
pres. and imp. of the subj. are used. 

32. The past participles of absoudre and dissoudre are absous and dissous. 
The past def. and the imp. of the subjunctive are lacking. 

33. Used only in the infinitive with, the v erb faire: /aire accroire. 

34. Page 265. 

35. Only in the infinitive and the following third persons: il brait, its 
braient; ilbraira,ils brairont; il brairait, ils brairaient. Other tenses are 
supplied by se mettre d braire, to go and start braying. 

36. Page 195, note 28. 

37. The inf., the past part., the sing, of the pres. of the ind., the future, the 
cond., the second person sing, of the imper., and the pres. of the subj. are 
used. The other tenses are supplied by fermer, to shut. 

38. Page 198, note 37. Used in the inf. and the following third persons : il 
eclot, ils eclosent ; il eclora ; ils icloront, il eclorait, ils ecloraienl ; quHl Sclose ; 
quHls eclosent. Past part. Sclos. Is replaced by s'Spanouir when speaking of 
flowers, by sortir de Voeuf when of eggs. 

39. See page 265. 40. See page 195. note 29. 

41. The past def. and the imp. of the subj. are wanting. They are supplied 
by envoy er paitre. 

42. See page 204, note 50. 43. Imp. and 3d persons ind. pres. are used. 
44. Past part., tissu. In all the other tenses tisser, to weave, is used. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 267 

MODES ET TEMPS DTJ VERBE. 
Mode Infintif. 1 

1. Nous avons deja dit, page 233, note 21, que l'infini- 
tif est souvent employe substantivement : 2 

Au sortir 3 du tMdtre. When 8 leaving the theater. 

Mentir est honteux. Lying is shameful. 

Plaisanter n 1 est pas repondre. Joking is not answering. 

2. L'infinitif s'emploie apres toutes les prepositions, 
except^ enf et, apres les expressions impersonnelles : 

Pour apprendre a commander To learn how to command we 

il taut d'abord obeir. must first obey. 

Apres avoir dit eela il dut After saying that, he had to 

partir. leave. 

3. Quand deux verbes se suivent, le second se met a 
l'infinitif, 5 precede ou non d'une preposition, a moins que 
le premier verbe ne soit un auxiliaire : 

Je veux parler & monfr&re. I wish to speak to my brother. 
H n'ose pas venir. He dare not come. 

Verbes Suites d'un Infinitif sans Preposition. 

Aimer mieux, pre/er.Compter, expect. Devoir, have to, must. 
Aller, go, be about to. Concevoir, conceive, "facoxitex, listen. 
Affirmer, affirm. Confesser, confess. Entendre, hear. 
Apercevoir,percewe.Daigner, deign. Envoyer, send. 

Croire, believe. Declarer, declare. Esperer, hope. 

Assurer, assert. Desirer, desire. Faillir, come near to. 

1. The infinitive mood presents the action or state expressed by the verb 
in a vague, undetermined manner, which does not allow any distinction 
of persons. 

2. The infinitive is used substantively in French instead of the pres. part, 
in English : le manger, the eating ; le dorinir, the sleeping (do not confound 
with le sommeil, the sleep); le vivre, the living ; les dires, the sayings, etc. 

3. The pres. part, may be employed in French, whenever the conjunction 
Of time (when) can be replaced by en, Ex.: en sortant du theatre. 

4. See page 161, note 20. 5. The second is used in the infinitive. 



268 CORTINA METHOD. 

J?a,iYe,cause,get,have.3?refeveY, prefer. Voir, see. 
Falloir, be necessary. Pretendre, pretend. Sembler, seem. 
S'imaginer, fancy. Savoir, know. Souhaiter, wish. 

Laisser, allow, let. Reconnaitre. 6 Valoir mieux, be bet* 

Paraitre, appear. Regarder, look at. Venir, come. [ter. 
Pouvoir, be able. Revenir, come back. Vouloir, be willing. 

VERBES BEttlSSANT LA PREPOSITION a AYANT UN 
INFINITIF. 

S'abaisser, stoop. Decider, decide. Parvenir, succeed. 

Aboutir, join. Destiner, destinate, Pencher, incline. 

S'accoutumer. 7 Determiner. 12 [e£m#?2.Penser, think, [vere. 

S'acharner, be eager* Bevouer, devote. Perseverer, perse' 
Admettre, admit. Disposer, dispose. Persister, persist. 
Aider, help. [self. Employer. 13 Se plaire, please. 

S' amuse?, amuse one- S ? engager. u [age. Plier, bend. 
S'appliquer, apply. Encoiirager, encour- Preparer, prepare. 
Apprendre, learn. Enseigner, teach. Pretendre, pretend. 
S'appreter. 8 S'exercer. 15 Provoquer, provoke. 

Aspirer, aspire. Exhort er, exhort. Reduire, reduce. 

Assigner, summon. S'exposer, expose one-Se resigner, resign. 
S'attacher. 9 Se fatiguer, 18 [self. Se resoudre, resolve. 

Autoriser, authorize. Gagner, gain~ Renoncer, renounce. 

Avoir, have to. S'habituer. 17 Repugner. 20 

Balancer, balance. Se hasarder, venture- Reussir, succeed. 
Ckercher, seek. Hesiter, hesitate- Servir, serve. 

Commencer, begin. Instruire, instruct. Songer, think. 
Condammer. 10 Inviter, invite. Suffire, be sufficient 

Condescendre. 11 [ute. Se mettre. 18 [nate. Tarder. 21 
Contribuer, contrib- S'obstiner, be obsti- Travailler, work. 
Consentir, consent. Occuper, occupy. Vieer, aim, aspire. 
Consister, consist. S'offrir. 19 Se vouer, devote. 

6. To acknowledge, to recognize. 7. To accustom oneself. 

8. To prepare Oneself, to make oneself ready. 9. To be attached to- 

10. To condemn, to sentence. 11. To condescend. 

12. To determine, to persuade, to induce. 13. To employ, to occupy. 

14. To bind oneself. 15. To exercise oneself. 

16. To fatigue oneself. 17. To get accustomed. 

18. To set about, to begin. 19. To offer, to stand forth. 

20. To be repugnant, to inspire aversion. 21. To delay, to tarry. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 



269 



Verbes Kegissant la Preposition de avant un 
Infinitif. 
S'abstenir, abstain. Essayer, try. Pardonner, forgive. 

Accepter, accept. S'etonner, be aston- Parler, speak. 
S'accuser, accuse one-lSviter, avoid, [ished. Persuader, persuade. 
Achever, finish, [self. S'excuser, excuse owe-Permettre, permit. 



Affecter, affect. 

S'afniger, grieve. 

Ambitionner. 22 

S'applaudir. 23 

Apprehender. 2 * 

Avertir, warn. 

Blamer, blame. 

Cesser, cease. 

Choisir, choose. 

Commander. 25 

Conjurer, entreat. 

Conseiller, advise. 

Se contenter, be con- Inspirer, inspire. 

Craindre,/ear. [tented Jurer, swear. 

Crier, cry out. Louer, praise. 

Dedaigner, disdain. Manquer, fail to. 



Defendre, forbid. 

Se depecher, hasten 

Detester, detest. 

Differer, differ. 

Dire, say, tell. 

Discontinuer, discon- Obliger, oblige. 

iScrire, write, [tinue. Obtenir, obtain. 

S'efforcer. 26 Offrir, offer. 

Empecher, hinder. Omettre, omit. 



Feindre, feign, [self. Se plaindre, com- 

Feliciter. 28 Trier, request, [plain. 

Finir, finish. Tr omettre, promise. 

Fremir, shudder. Proposer, propose. 
Se natter, flatter one- Protester, protest. 
Gager, wager, [self. Punir, punish. 
Se garder. 29 Se rappeler. 33 

Gemir, groan. Recommander. 3 * 

Se glorifier. 30 Refuser, refuse. 

Se hater, make haste. Regretter, regret. 
S'indigner, be indig- Se rejouir, rejoice. 
Imaginer. 31 [nant. Se repentir, repent. 

Reprocher, reproach. 

Se reserver. 35 

Resoudre, resolve. 

Rire, laugh. 

Risquer, risk. 

Rougir, blush. 

Soupconner, suspect. 

Se souvenir. 36 

Suggerer, 37 suggest. 

Supplier. 38 

Tacher, 39 endeavor. 

Trembler, tremble. 

Tenter, try, attempt. 



Mediter. 32 
Se meler, interfere. 
Menacer, threaten. 
Meriter, deserve. 
Negliger, neglect. 



Entreprendre. 27 Ordonner, prescribe. Se vanter, boast. 

22. To be ambitious. 23. To applaud oneself. 24. To apprehend, to fear. 
25. To command. 26. To exert oneself. 27. To undertake. 

28. To congratulate. 29. To guard oneself. 30. To glorify, to be proud of. 
31. To imagine. 32. To meditate. 33. To recollect, to remember. 

34. To recommend. 35. To reserve oneself. 36. To remember. 

37. The consonant g is doubled in agglomerer, to agglomerate ; aggraver f 
to aggravate ; suggerer, to suggest, and their derivatives. 

38. To supplicate, to beseech. 39. Also to try, to strive.. 



270 CORTINA METHOD. 

Participe 1 Present. 2 

1. Le participe present employe conime verbe expri- 
mant une action 3 est toujours invariable : 

Les marteaux frappant Ven- The hammers striking the 

Glume. 4 * anvil. 

Uneftlle obeissant 4 b ten. A girl obeying well. 

J^ai vu des enfants jouant. 5 I have seen children playing.* 

Eemarques. — 1°. Nous avons deja dit, page 156, 
"Remark," que le participe present anglais precede du 
verbe etre, se rend siuiplement par le temps correspon- 
dant de Pindicatif. 6 

2°. Le participe present s'emploie seul ou precede de 
la preposition en. 1 La preposition accompagne le parti- 
cipe quand le moment ou la maniere d'executer Faction 
est indiquee. 8 Exemples : 

En partant a 10 heures, vous Leaving at 10, you have plenty 

avez tout le temps. of time. 

On apprend en etudiant. We learn by studying. 

1. The participle is a form of the verb, so called because it participates 
both of the verb and the adjective. As a participle it expresses an action 
and is always invariable; but as an adjective it indicates a state or qual- 
ity, and agrees in gender and number. 

2. There are two kinds of participles. The participe present, invariably 
ending in ant, and the participe passe, which has different terminations. 
See the models of verbs, pages 80 to 84. 

3. Expressing (stating) an action. 

4. Or qui frappent Venclume, which strike the anvil ; une fille qui obttt 
bien, a girl who obeys well. 

5. Or quijouaient, who played. Except after a preposition (see page 267, 
No. 2) the present participle is used in French as in English: voyant que 
vous ne veniez pas, je rrCen suis allt, seeing that you did not come, I went 
away. This construction can be avoided in both languages by using an 
adverb of time : comme (quand, lorsque) je voyais (vis) que vous ne veniez pas, 
je m'en suis alls, as (when) I saw that you did not come, I went away. 

6. See page 229, note 66. This construction is rendered in familiar style 
by itre en train de: il etait en train de lire quand je suis entrS, he was 
reading when I entered. 

7. Page 161, note 20. 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VEBB 271 

3°. En general si le sujet est un substantif il doit pre- 
ceder le participe, mais il le suit si c'est un prononi; 
excepte, si Ton veut donner plus d'eniphase a la phrase, 
dans quel cas 9 le pronom est repete avant le participe et 
avant le verbe principal : 

Son frere ^ayant apjiris s'est His brother having learnt of it 
fdche. [blait. became angry. [bled. 
En le voyant venir, elle trem- Seeing him coming, she trena- 
il eux, le sachant, se turent. And they ^knowing it,kept silent. 

2. Le participe present exprimant un etat est plutot 
adjectif 1 et s'accorde en genre et en nombre avec le sujet ; 
il est alors appele adjectif verbal : 

Les debris flottants sur la mer. Wrecks, floating on the sea. 
Vnefille bien obeissante. A very obedient girl. 

Des ressemblances frappantes. Striking likeness. 

KE3IARQUES. — 1°. L' adjectif verbal est souvent 10 pre- 
cede d'un adverbe, tandis que 11 le participe en est suivi : u 

Des esprits toujours agissants. 13 Minds always active. 
Cefte/emmeagissant u touj ours. This woman, always acting. 

2°. II n'est jamais precede de la preposition en, mais 
parfois du verbe etre : 

Cettefleur est charmante. This flower is charming, [health. 

Ces enfants sont bien portants. Those children are in good 

3°. II a un sens passif dans quelques expressions : 

Argent comptant, cash money. Couleur voyante, showy color. 
Poste restante, general delivery. Places payantes, paying seats. 

8. This preposition, on account of euphony, can neither be used after the 
pronoun en nor after the objective pronouns moi, loi, lui, eux: lorsque fen 
sortats, when I went out of it (page 267, note 3), instead of "en " en sorlant ; 
lui Vapprenant, se tut, he hearing of it, kept silent, instead of lui " en," etc. 

9. Except, if more emphasis must be given to the sentence, in which case. 

10. Soovoa', often. 11. Page 225, note 35. 

12. The participle being followed by it. 

13. Adjective, acting. 14. Pres. part, of the verb agir, to act. 



272 CORTINA METHOD. 

Participe Passe. 1 

1. Le participe passe peut etre joint au substantif sans 
Paide d'un verbe; il est alors un veritable adjectif: 

Les m&rites recompenses. The merits rewarded. 

Les villes detruites. The cities destroyed. 

2. Employe comme substantif, il en suit les regies : 
Les blesses, the wounded. Les mariees, the brides. 

3. Joint a 1'auxiliaire etre, il s'accorde avec le sujet : 

Le port est ferme. The port is closed. 

La porte est fermee. The door is shut. 

Eemaeques. — 1°. Le participe passe des verbes passifs 
s'accorde toujours avec le sujet. 2 

2°. II en est de meme de celui de quelques verbes 
neutres, comme aller, venir, partir, arriver, etc. 3 

3°. Les verbes impersonnels ay ant toujours pour sujet 
le pronom il, leurs participes passes ne changent jamais.* 

4. Joint a Pauxiliaire avoir, le participe passe s'ac- 
corde avec le complement direct quand il en est precede, 
mais il reste invariable quand le complement direct le 
suit, ou quand il n'y a pas de regime direct. Ex. : 

Les fleurs quefai coupees. 5 The flowers which I have cut. 
II a cueilli des fleurs. 6 He has plucked flowers. [us. 

Ces livres nous ont servi. 7 These books have been useful to 

Remarques. — 1°. Les verbes neutres, n'ayant jamais 
de complement direct, ceux qui se conjuguent avec 
avoir, 3 ont toujours leurs participes passes in variables: 

1. The past participle is used in three cases : 1st, with the auxiliaries to 
form the compound tenses : fai la, I have read ; Us s'en sont allis, they have 
gone away ; 2d, with the verb etre to form the passive voice : il est puni, he 
is punished; 3d, as a plain adjective: mere cherie, cherished mother. 

2. Page 260, note 3. 3. Page 156, 4th. 4. Page 261, note 1. 
5. The direct regimen precedes. 6. The direct complement follows. 
7. There is no accusative case (direct regimen), but a dative case (indirect 

regimen). 



MOODS AND TENSES OF THE VERB. 273 

Nousavonsdorm.iquat7*eheures. We have slept four hours. 
Les soldats ont campe. The soldiers are encamped. 

2°. De meme les verbes impersonnels conjugues avec 
avoir ont leurs participes in variables, car ils n ? ont jamais 8 
de complement direct : 

II a plu tresfort. It has rained very hard, [place. 

Les inondations quHl y a eu. The floods which have taken 

5. Le participe passe des verbes reflechis, bien que 
toujours conjugue avec etre, 9 suit les regies du participe 
avec avoir. II en resulte que les verbes essentiellement 
reflechis qui ont toujours comme complement direct leur 
deuxi&me pronom, ont leurs participes variables, tandis 
que les verbes accidentellement reflechis peuvent avoir leurs 
participes variables ou invariables suivant la place du 
complement direct : 

La maison a 9 est ecroulee. 5 The house has fallen in. [finger. 

Elle a 1 est piquee au doigt? She has pricked herself in the 

Elle s'est pique le doigt. 6 She has pricked her finger. 

Elles se sont parle. 7 They have talked to each other. 

6. Le participe passe suivi d'un infinitif, s'accorde 10 
s'il a pour compl. direct le nom ou pronom qui precede, 
mais il reste invariable s'il a pour compl. direct 1' infinitif : 

Ces femmesje les ai entendues I have heard these women 

chanter. 11 [du chanter. 12 sing. [before. 

Ces airs, je les ai deja enten- I have heard these tunes sung 

Eemarques. — 1°. Le participe fait suivi d'un infini- 
tif est toujours invariable. 13 Ex. : 

La maison quHl a fait ba- The house which he caused to 
tir. be built. 

8. For they never have. 9. Page 154, 2d. 

10. Agrees. 11. That is : fai entendu cesfemmes chantant. 

12. Or, fai dejd entendu chanter ces airs. 

13. The past participle fa it is always used as a kind of auxiliary. 



274 CORTINA METHOD. 

2°. S'il y a une preposition entre le participe et Finfi- 
nitif la regie reste la m6me : 

II nous a pries d^crire. He has begged us to write. 

Les sentiments quHl a tache The feelings he has tried to in- 
de vous inspirer. spire in us. 

3°. Quelquefois Pinfinitif est sous-entendu, u particu- 
lierement avec les participes du, pu et voulu, qui 
restent alors invariables : 

Je lui ai rendu tous les services I have rendered him all the ser- 
quefai pu et quefai du. 15 vices that I could and should, 

7. Le participe passe" prec6d6 du pronom en reste 
invariable, mais si le pronom est accompagne* d'un ad- 
verbe de quantity cet adverbe est le complement et le 
participe s'accorde avec lui: 

Vous avez plus de livres que je You have more books than I 

n'en ai lu. have read. 

Plus il a eu de livres 1 plus il The more books he has had, the 

en a lus. more he has read of them. 

Remaeques. — 1°. Le participe ne s'accorde pas si 
V adverbe suit le pronom en au lieu de le pr6e£der: 
t/'en ai tant visite. I have visited so many of them. 

2°. Apres autantle participe est touj ours invariable: 

Autant il a etudie de langues, As many languages as he stud- 
autant il en a appris. ied, so many he learned. 

14. Understood. 15. Lui rendre is understood. 



END OF BOOK IV. 



CINQUIEME LIYRE. 

PREMIERE PARTIE. 

DIX-SEPTIEME LEfON. 
Sens, Sensations et Facultes Meniales. 1 



La vue; Pouie 2 (looee / ), . 
L'odorat ; 3 le gout ; le toucher,* 
La raison ; le jugement, 
L'imagination ; 5 la pensee, . 
La volonte ; 6 l'idee ; le desir, 
La foi ; Pesperance ; 3 la charite, 
Lamemoire; 5 lajoie (zhwa'), 
Le plaisir ; l'amour ; le genie, 6 
La haine ; 7 Penvie ; le degout, 
La jalousie ; 8 la stupidite, 9 . 
TJn soupir ; gemissement ; cri, 
TJn sourire ; Peternuement, . 
Une larme ; le baillement, 
Le ronnement ; ronfler, . 
Un eclat de rire ; rire, . 
Le temperament ; la constitution 
La nature ; le caractere, 
La sante ; la maladie, . 



the sight; the hearing, 
the smell; taste; touch, 
the reason; judgment, 
the imagination ; thought, 
the will ; idea ; desire, 
the faith ; hope; charity, 
the memory ; joy. 
the pleasure ; love; genius, 
the hate; envy; disgust, 
the jealousy ; stupidity, 
a sigh; moan; cry. 
a smile; the sneezing. 
a tear; the gaping, 
the snoring ; to snore, 
burst of laughter ; to laugh, 
the temperament ; constitu- 
the noAure ; temper, [tion. 
the health ; sickness. 



1. Corporal senses, sensations and mental faculties. 

2. Noun derived from the verb ouir, to hear, page 106, note 32. 

3. From odeur, odor. 4. To ucher, to touch. 5. See "Endings" in Index. 

6. Genie has only one plural form in French : des ginies, genii or geniuses. 

7. La ftene. 

8. Jalousie is the noun ; jalouz, fern, jalouse, jealous, is the adjective. 

9. The adjective is slupide, stupid. The ending ide corresponds to id in 
English : acide, solide, candide, etc. 



276 



CORTINA METHOD. 



La debilite ; la convalescence, 1 

L'enfance ; 10 l'adolescence, 10 

Lajeunesse; maturite, . 

La vieillesse ; caducite, 

La force ; faiblesse, 

La beaute ; la laideur, . 



the debility ; convalescence, 
the childhood; adolescence, 
the youth; maturity, 
the old age; caducity, 
the strength; weakness, 
the beauty ; ugliness. 



Les Couleurs. 



Blanc, blanche, 11 white. 
Jaune (zhd'n 6 ), yellow, [ion 
Bleu, 12 blue. Vermeil, vermil 
Orange, orange. Rose, pink. 
Pensee, dark violet. 

Adverbes de QuantiU. n 

A peu pres, environ, 14 . . almost, about. 

Assez; aussi; 15 autant, 15 

Beaucoup ; 16 n combien, 17 

Davantage ; 18 guere, . 

Moins; 16 peu; 16 plus, 1618 

Presque ; si ; 19 tant, 19 

Tellement; 19 tres; trop, 16 



Lilas, lilac. Rouge, red. 
Noir, 12 black. Vert, 12 green. 
Brun 12 (bre n ), brown. {violet. 
Gris(gri), g?*ay. Violet, violette, 
Pourpre (poo r/ pr e ),£wrpte. 



enough; also; as much. 
much,many; how much,many. 
more; but little, 
less; little, few; more, 
almost ; so ; so much, so many. 
so much; very; too much. 



Adverbes d'Ordre. 20 
Apres; enfin; ensuite, . . after; at last; afterward. 
D'abord; premierement, 21 . first; firstly. 
Secondement, 21 troisiemement,etc.$econcZZ;?/, thirdly, etc. 

10. See page 109, note 2. Words in ence are often common in both lan- 
guages : presence, prudence, etc. 

11. Irregular fem. form. See page 138, 6th. 

12. The fem. form is regular: bleue; noire, verte, brune. 

13. Adverbs of quantity answer to the word combien f how many? 

14. Literally, surrounding ; les environs de la ville. 15. See page 227, note 47. 

16. Most of these adverbs followed by nouns require the preposition de: 
combien de livres avez-vous? fat beaucoup (peu, assez, etc.) de livres, how 
many books have you ? I have many (few, enough, etc.) books, p. 175, n. 20. 

17. The same word is rendered by both singular and plural. 

18. Davantage, plus, more. In negative sentences with phis, pas may be 
omitted if davantage is not used : je n'en dis plus or pas davantage, I will 
not say any more. Davantage is used with verbs especially when accom- 
panied by the preposition en ; plus is used with nouns and verbs : celui-ci 
a plus deforce; celui-ld en a davantage. 19. See page 238, note 22. 

20. Adverbs of order. They express order. All answer to comment * how ? 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



277 



Adverbes d 1 Affirmation et de Negation. 

Assurement; certes, . . . assuredly; certainly. 

Certainement ; oui; si, 22 



Sans doute ; d'accord, 
Volontiers; vraiment, 
Non, ne, pas, point, 23 
Point (pas) du tout, . 
Rien, non plus, pardon, 2 * 



certainly; yes; oh yes. 

undoubtedly ; granted. 

willingly ; truly. 

no, not. 

not at all. 

nothing, no more, not so % 



Adverbes de Doute. 25 
Peut-etre, cela se peut, 26 . . . perhaps, maybe. 
Par hasard ; 26 probablement, . . perchance; probably. 

Locutions Adverbiales. 



Amerveille; amoitie, 

A Penvers ; a regret, 

A l'envi ; 27 a l'etourdie, 28 . 

A tort et a travers, . 

A l'improviste ; tout a coup, 29 

A pied ; par cceur, 

En grqs ; en detail, . 

Pour rire ; par megarde, . 

Sans reflexion, . 



marvelously; at half, 
wrong side; with regret, 
vying; giddily, 
at random. 

unexpectedly ; suddenly, 
on foot; by heart, 
wholesale; at retail, 
for fun; by mistake, 
heedlessly. 



21. See page 185, note 4. 

22. Si is used instead of oui when answering affirmatively to an interrog- 
ative-negative sentence : il n'y a pas de hautes maisons en France f Si, il y 
en a. Ne voulez-vous pas m > accompagnerf Si, je veux Men. Ord may be 
used instead of si in these cases, but si cannot be substituted for oui in other 
cases. 23. See the "Index." 

24. Used the same as pardonnez, je vous demande pardon, etc., without 
any negative when rectifying what is told to us, just as pardon me is em- 
ployed in English : etes-vous Francaisf Pardon, je suis Suisse. Are you a 
Frenchman? Pardon, I am a Swiss. 25. Adverbs of doubt. 

26. Both signify perhaps, maybe, it is possible, probably, in declarative 
entences. In interrogative sentences par hazard (par-razar'), is used : irez- 

vous par hazard en Europe f Peut-etre {cela se peut). "Will you perchance go 
to Europe? Maybe (it is possible). 

27. En vie (fem.) envy. Notice that the final e has been droppped in the 
adverbial expi-ession. 28. Eiourdi, adjective, giddy, beedless, thoughtless. 

29. See Index, tout used idiomatically. Tout a coup means suddenly ; tout 
d'un coup signifies all at once, in one time ; e. g.: il but le verre de vin tout d'un 
coup, he drank the glass of wine all at once (in one draught). 



278 CORTINA METHOD. 

UNE JOUKNEE A PAEIS. 1 

Le voyageur qui, arrive a la gare de St. Lazare 2 
par le premier train, a fait le pro jet de voir Paris 
en un jour, a devant lui une tache 3 laborieuse. 
Mais la chose a ete faite ; et alors, pourquoi ne la 
repeterions-nous pas avec nos eleves qui sont d'in- 
trepides voyageurs ? 

Pour ne pas perdre de temps nous envoyons nos 
bagages a Photel Terminus, attenant 4 a la gare, et 
nous nous y rendons nous-memes 5 pour retenir 
nos appartements, changer de toilette 6 et faire 
nos preparatifs de la journee. 

Tout ce qu'il nous faut pour accomplir notre tour 
de force, 7 est un bon itineraire et une voiture de- 
couverte attelee 8 d'un bon cheval. 

Partis de l'hotel, quelques tours de roue 9 dans la 
rue du Havre, nous amenent 10 devant les magasins 
du Printemps, un des trois grands bazars de Paris ; 
mais notre programme ne nous permet point de 
nous y arreter et quelques pas plus loin nous debou- 
chons 11 sur la Place de la Madeleine, ou, grace a 
l'heure matinale, nous arrivons encore a temps 
pour le Marche aux fleurs. 12 Mais ne nous attar- 

1. A day in Paris. Remark that this and the following lessons are not 
intended to be translated, as translation is entirely contrary to the idea of 
this Method. The text is only a subject for conversation between the teacher 
and the pupils. They will suppose that they are proceeding through this 
journey. See " Directions," page 5, first paragraph, and follow observation. 

2. 81. Lazarus depot. 3. Task. 4. Contiguous. 

5. And we will go there ourselves. 

6. To engage our rooms, change our dress. 

7. This expression, literal ly, a feat of strength, means a hard task. 

8. Hitched. 9. Turns of wheels. 10. See page 98, note 10. 
11. Infinitive, deboucher, to issue. 12. Flower market. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 279 

dons pas 13 dans ce'charmant "oasis de verdure et de 
fleurs au beau milieu de la grande ville, 14 et admi- 
rons de suite La Madeleine, la superbe eglise au 
style romain qui est la paroisse la plus aristocra- 
tique 15 de la capitale. 

Quittant 16 la place de la Madeleine, nous prenons 
le boulevard Malesherbes, 17 qui nous conduit a St. 
Augustin, 18 temple dans le style de la Renais- 
sance ; 19 puis, un peu plus loin, au Pare Monceau, 
jardin assez vaste, entoure 20 d'avenues ou sont 
batis 21 de beaux hotels prives. 

Le pare of fre un point de vue magnif ique sur les 
coupoles dorees de l'Eglise Russe et sur VArc de 
Triomphe de VEtoile, pres duquel nous arrivons 
bientot. Ce dernier monument est un des plus 
beaux de son genre ; il est construit au milieu 
d'une place qui domine d'un cote les Champs-Ely - 
sees et de l'autre le Bois de Boulogne. 22 De cette 
place rayonnent 23 douze larges avenues qui vues 24 
du centre presentent un aspect grandiose. 

L'une de ces avenues appelee Avenue du Bois 
de Boulogne nous mene au bois du meme nom ; la 
promenade 25 favorite de tout le Paris elegant. 

13. But let us not delay. 14. Right in the center of the great city. 

15. The most aristocratic parish. 16. Leaving. 

17. Lamoignon de Malesherbes, after whom the boulevard is named, was a 
minister and afterward one of the defending lawyers of Louis XVI. He 
was born in Paris 1721, and was beheaded in 1794. 18. Sa D t6g«sta»'. 

19. Renaissance : the revival of learning and art in the sixteenth century ; 
the style of architecture of that period. 20. Surrounded. 

21. Where are built. 22. Boulogne is a town in the outskirts of Paris. 

23. Radiate, meaning here run. 24. Which seen. 

25. Pro is a prefix denoting direction toward, and is common in both lan- 
guages : procedei', to proceed ; proclamer, to proclaim ; prqjeter, to project, etc. 
19 



280 CORTINA METHOD. 

Le bois renferme 26 un grand nombre de points 
interessants : le Carrefour des Lacs, 27 le Pavilion 
Chinois, 28 le Chalet, 29 la Grande Cascade, 30 l'Hippo- 
drome, la Mare de Longchamps, 31 le Chateau de 
Bagatelle, 32 Madrid, 33 etc. ; aussi faudrait-il une 
journee entiere 34 pour le visiter completement. 

Eentrant dans Paris par la Porte Maillot* 5 nous 
remontons 36 l'avenue de la Grande Armee, puis, 
repassant sous Tare de triomphe, nous descendons 
dans le centre de la ville par les Champs-Elysees. 
Ceux-ci se composent d'une large avenue princi- 
pale et de contre-allees 37 coupees de charmantes 
pelouses 38 et de frais massifs qui encadrent des 
fontaines jaillissantes. 39 

Sur l'avenue nous trouvons a notre droite le 
Panorama national, le Palais de l'Industrie ou se 
tient annuellement le Salon, 40 le Eestaurant Le- 
doyen et le Cafe- Concert de l'Horloge ; a notre 
gauche le Cirque d'Ete, le Theatre Guignol, 1' Alca- 
zar d'Ete et le Cafe des Ambassadeurs. 

Les Champs-Elysees aboutissent 41 a la Place de 
la Concorde qui les felie 42 aux Jardins des Tuile- 
ries. Tout autour de la place s'elevent des co- 

26. Contains. 27. The crossing of the lakes. 

28. Chinese summer house. 29. Swiss cottage 

30. The ending ade in nouns is common in both languages : barricade, 
brigade, parade, etc. 31. Longchamps Pond. 32. Castle of Bagatelle (trifle). 

33. So called on account of the Castle of Madrid, which formerly stood 
there. 34. Therefore a whole day would be necessary. 

35. Maillot's Gate. 36. We walk up. 

37. Sidewalks in the meaning of lateral avenues running like the central 
one. 38. Page 233, note 23. 39. Sparkling, spouting. 

40. Where the Exhibition of Paintings takes place every year. 

41. Terminate at. 42. Which connects them. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 281 

lonnes ; aux angles 43 huit pavilions sont surmon- 
tes 44 de statues colossales representant les princi- 
pales villes de France. Au nord et au sud sont 
deux grands jets d'eau ; 45 au centre se dresse 
YObelisque de Louqsorf* monolithe de granit rose 
couvert d'hieroglyphes, 47 provenant des mines de 
Thebes. 

Si nous traversons ensuite les jardins de l'ancien 
Palais des Tuileries, detruit en 1870, nous arrivons 
au Palais du Louvre. Celui-ci avec ses nombreux 
pavilions, ses cours interieures dont certaines parties 
sont des merveilles 48 d' architecture, ses musees de 
peinture, de sculpture, d'antiquites, et toutes ses 
autres curiosites, demanderait, a lui seul, 49 plu- 
sieurs jours pour etre visit e soigneusement. 50 

Sortant du Louvre par la rue de Rivoli nous 
nous trouvons Place du Palais-Royal sur laquelle 
sont les Grands Magasins du Louvre. C'est dans 
les galeries du Palais-Royal que nous ferons une 
longue halte. 51 Nous y trouvons au rez-de-chaus- 
see 52 de riches magasins de bijouterie 53 et de fleurs, 
et a l'entresol 54 des restaurants renommes parmi 
lesquels nous n'avons qu'a faire notre choix. 55 

Apres dejeuner nous passons les ponts ; ce qui, 
pour un Parisien, signifie se rendre sur la rive 56 
gauche de la &eme, 57 appelee aussi Qualifier 58 Latin. 

43. At the angles (corners). 44. Topped with. . 45. Waterspouts. 

46. Or de Luxor. 47. Hieroglyphs. 48. Marvels. 

49. For it alone would require. 50. Carefully. 

51. Stop {rest). 52. Page 223, note 3. 53. Jewelry. 

54. Mezzanine floor. 55. Selection. 56. Side, literally, bank. 

57. The river which divides Paris into two parts. 58. Ward. 



282 CORTINA METHOD. 

Traversant le fleuve 59 sur le Pont des Arts nous 
nous trouvons devant le Palais de Vlnstitut ; sui- 
vant ensuite les quais 60 vers l'ouest nous rencon- 
trons successivement VEcole des Beaux-Arts, le 
Palais de la Legion d'Honneur, la Chambre des 
Deputes, les Ministeres, puis enfin le Trocadero 61 
a droite et le Champ de Mars 62 a gauche ou nous 
voyons encore, derniers vestiges de la grande expo- 
sition de 1889, la Tour Eiffel et la Galerie des 
Machines. Si nous quittons le Champ de Mars 
par l'Ecole Militaire et l'avenue de la Motte-Piquet, 
nous visitons Y Hotel des Invalides et le tombeau 
de Napoleon : descendant ensuite le boulevard des 
Invalides nous arrivons rue de Sevres devant les 
Magasins du Bon-Marche. 

De la rue des Sevres, cinq minutes de trajet nous 
transportent par la rue de Vaugirard, au Palais et 
au Jardin du Luxembourg. Dans le palais se 
tiennent les seances du Senate On y trouve egale- 
ment un superbe musee de peinture. 

Au sortir du Luxembourg nous sommes sur le 
Boulevard St. Michel, le rendez-vous favori de la 
jeunesse des Ecoles. Bien des folies mais aussi 
bien de belles choses ont ete congues ou commen- 
cees sur le BouV Miche 6 * comme l'appelle 1' argot 65 
des etudiants. La rue Soufflot nous conduit au 
Pantheon ou eglise Ste. Genevieve : ici reposent les 
plus grandes illustrations franchises. 

59. A large river running into the sea. 60. Ke, docks. 

61. Name taken from a stronghold near Cadiz, Spain. 62. Martian Fields. 

63. The sittings of the Senate. 64. Bool mee'sh 8 . 65. Slang. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 283 

Eevenant sur nos pas, a Tangle des boulevards 
St. Michel et St. Germain nous visitons le superbe 
musee d'antiquites installe dans VHotel Cluny. 
Continuant a suivre le boulevard jusqu'au Pont 
St. Michel nous entrons dans la Cite, 66 ile fonnee 
au centre de Paris par deux bras de la Seine, dans 
laquelle se trouvent le Palais de Justice, la Pre- 
fecture de Police, la Caserne 61 de la Garde Republi- 
caine, V Hotel- Dieu 6 * et YEglise Notre-Dame, ce 
chef-d'oeuvre de pierre qui a ete si admirable- 
ment decrit par Victor Hugo. 

A l'extremite orientale de Tile de la Cite et a 
Tentree du nouveau Pont St. Louis nous visitons 
la Morgue, 69 qui remet en memoire 70 les contes 
macabres 71 d'Edgard Poe. 72 

Debouchant 11 du pont dans Ytle St. Louis nous 
traversons celle-ci dans toute sa longueur pour 
prendre le Pont Sully 73 et repasser sur la rive 56 
gauche ou nous visitons la Halle aux Vins u et le 
Jardin des Plantes. Eevenant sur la rive droite 
par le Pont d' Austerlitz, nous rencontrons la Pri- 
son de Mazas, si souvent citee dans les romans a la 
mode, puis la Place de la Bastille et la Colonne 
de Juillet surmontee 4 * du Genie de la Liberte. 

Suivant ensuite le Faubourg 75 St. Antoine nous 

66. City, the most ancient part of the town. 

67. Soldiers 1 quarters or barracks. 68. The principal hospital. 

69. Place where the bodies of unknown persons found dead are exposed 
to public view. 70. Which recalls. 

71. Devilish ; danse macabre, dance of death. 

72. An original American poet, died 1849. 

73. After the Duke of Sully, a celebrated Minister of State of Henri IV of 
Navarre, King of France. 74. Wine market. 75. Suburb. 



284: CORTINA METHOD. 

atteignons 76 la Place de la Nation. Puis, laissant 
la Barriere du Trone sur notre droite, remontons 
les Boulevards de Charonne et de Menilmontant 
jusqu'a la Boquette, prison devant laquelle se font 
les executions capitales, et jusqu'au Pere Lachaise 77 
le cimetiere historique de Paris. 

Du cimetiere, l'avenue de la Eepublique nous 
conduit en droite ligne 78 a la place du meme nom 
ou s'eleve une colossale statue en bronze de la 
Eepublique. De la Place de la Eepublique nous 
suivons les boulevards interieurs, depuis la Porte 
St. Martin et la Porte St. Denis, arcs de triomphe 
de moindres dimensions que celui de l'Etoile, jus- 
qu'au boulevard des Italiens. 

Nous atteignons 76 ce dernier, l'endroit le plus 
central et le plus frequente, a l'heure ou chacun 
dans la grande ville prend le repas 79 le plus substan- 
tiel, le diner. Nous nous conformerons a T usage 
general et apres nous etre restaures comme nous 
nous trouvons a deux pas $e Y Opera, et de la Come- 
die Frangaise nous passerons notre soiree a l'un de 
ces deux theatres, les plus f ameux de Paris : le pre- 
mier dans le genre lyrique et le second dans les 
genres comique et tragique. Une petite course en 
voiture apres le spectacle nous ramene, par la rue 
Auber et le boulevard Haussmann, a la gare de 
l'Ouest, notre point de depart. 

76. Infinitive atleindre, to reach. 

77. After the name of Father La Chaise, Jesuit confessor of Louis XIV. 

78. In straight direction. 79. Take the meal. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



285 



DIX-HUITIEME LE£OK 



Le Corps. 



La tete ; les membres, . 

Le bras (bra); lajarnbe, 2 

Le coude ; le genou, 3 

La main ; le pied (peeay'), . 

Les doigts ; les doigts du pied, 4 . 

Le pouce ; l'index, .... 

Le doigt du milieu ou medius, 5 

L'annulaire : le petit doigt, . 

La main droite, gauche, 

Les phalanges : les ongles, . 

La plante du pied ; le talon, 

Les cheveux ; le front, . 

Le visage, la face ; les traits, 

La physionomie ; les tempes, 

Les yeux ; les paupieres, 

Les cils ; 6 les sourcils, 6 . 

Une oreille ; le nez ; la joue, 

La bouche ; les levres, . 

La langue ; le palais, 

La dent ; les molaires, . 

Lementon; labarbe; la moustache, 

Les favoris ; le cou ; la gorge, 

La poitrine ; le dos, 

Le cote ; les cotes, . 

Les poumons ; les nerfs, 

L'estomac ; les entrailles, 

Le foie ; le cceur ; le sang, 

Les veines ; les os ; 7 la peau, 

Un tendon ; le pouls ; la voix, 

Le souffle ; la transpiration, 



the head ; the limbs. 
the arm; the leg. 2 
the elbow ; the knee. 
the hand; the foot, 
the fingers ; the toes. 
the thumb ; the index, 
the middle finger, [finger, 
the ring finger ; the small 
the right, left hand, 
phedanxes or joints ; nails, 
the sole of the foot ; the heel, 
the hair ; the forehead, 
the face ; the features, 
the physiognomy ; temples, 
the eyes ; the eyelids, 
the eyelashes ; the eyebrows, 
an ear; thenose; the cheek, 
the mouth; the lips, 
tongue ; roof of the moidh. 
the tooth ; the molar teeth, 
the chin; beard; mustache, 
the whiskers; neck; throat, 
the chest ; the back, 
the side ; the ribs, 
the lungs; the nerves, 
the stomach ; the bowels, 
the liver ; the heart; blood, 
the veins ; the bones; skin, 
a sinew; the pulse ; voice, 
the breath; perspired ion . 



1. Le kor, the body. 

2. There is nothing improper in the use of jambe in French; les membres 
inferieurs may also be employed. 

3. Le zhmoo'. 4. Dwa.' du peeay' or orteils. 5. Maydeew's. 

6. L6 seel ; le soorsee'. 7. Un os (e°-nos), a bone ; des os (de-zo), bones. 



286 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Insectes.* 



cX-Sls 



L'abeille, the bee. • 

La cigale, the l&em^/ 

La sauterelle, the grasshopper . 

La fourmi, the ant. 

L'araignee, the spider. 

Le grillon, the cricket. 

Le scorpion, the scorpion. 

La blatte, the cockroach. 

La mouche, the fly. 



La puce, 9 the flea. 

Le pou, 10 the louse. 

La punaise, 11 the bedbug. 

Le moustique, the mosquito. 

La guepe, the wasp. 

L'escargot, the snail. 

Le ver, the worm. 

La scolopendre, the centipede. 

Le papillon, the butterfly. 



Phrases Usuelles. 

Pour Offrir. 12 
Permettez-moi, madame, de Allow me, madam, to offer 



vous offrir ceci. [telle. 

Veuillez accepter cette baga- 
Puis-je vous V offrir? 
Acceptez sHl vous plait ceci en 

souvenir de mot. [sir. 



you this. 

Please accept this trifle. 

May I offer it to you? 

Please accept this in remem- 
brance of me. 



Prenez-le pour me faire plai- Take it to oblige me. 

Pour Remercter. 13 
Merci. Grand merci. Thanks. Many thanks. 

Je vous suis tres oblige, [bontes. I am much obliged to you. 
Nous vous remercions de vos We thank you for your kind- 
Vous Stes bien aimable. You are very kind. [ness. 

Pour Exprimer la Satisfaction. 11 



J 1 en suis enchante 



>pour vous. 



J 1 en suis eharme 
Pile est tr&s contente de moi. 
lis sont fort satisfaits. [voir ! 
Que je suis heureux de vous 
Je vous enfelicite. 



I am delighted (enchanted) 

with it for your sake. 
She is well pleased with me. 
They are well satisfied. 
How happy I am to see you ! 
I congratulate you for it. 



Pour Exprimer le Chagrin. 15 
Pen suis tresfdche. I am ve^ sorry for it. 

C'est regrettable. [s&re! It is too bad. 

Quel dommage! Quelle mi- What a pity! What misery! 

8. A n say'kt% insects. 9. Pws. 10. Poo. 11. P«n6s'. 12. To offer. 
13. To thank. 14. To express satisfaction. 15. To express sorrow. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 287 

A TRAVERS LA FRANCE. 1 

— 2 Mes chers eleves : — Apres notre course rapide 
dans Paris, je vous ai promis que nous ferions 
ensemble un tour de France. 3 

— Nous sommes impatients, cher maitre, de vous 
accompagner dans cette nouvelle excursion. 

— Dans notre tour de France nous ferons comme 
l'artisan du bon vieux temps, nous visiterons les 
points du pays qui interessent plus specialement 
notre art, la langue frangaise. 

Et, puisque 4 nous partons de Paris, notre pre- 
miere etape 5 sera tout naturellement Versailles, 6 
le berceau 7 du beau langage, du frangais classique 
du XVII 6 (dix-septieme) siecle. 

— Versailles a ete pour ainsi dire cree 8 par votre 
grand roi Louis XIV, n'est-ce pas ? 

— C'est cela meme, c'est au "Roi-Soleil" 9 qu'est 
dti le magnifique palais, qui apres avoir ete long- 
temps la demeure de nos souverains est de notre 
temps 10 le lieu de reunion du Congres ; et aussi le 

1. Through France. A or au travers expresses the same idea, but the 
latter expression is always followed by de: il luipassa son SpSe " au travers 
du " corps, he pierced him with his sword through the body. 

2. See page 175. note 23. 

3. This expression, besides the meaning a journey through France, has the 
following historical signification: in the middle ages the artisan or me- 
chanic who wished to become master of his trade was obliged to make a 
journey through France, visiting especially the towns where his trade or 
profession was most honored and so perfecting himself in it; this was 
called /aire son tour de France. 

4. And as. 5. Stop, halting place. 6. VSrsa'y. 7. Cradle. 

8. Past part, of creer, to create, of which the fern, form crtee is one of the 
rare examples of three e's coming together in one word. 

9. Louis XIV chose a rising sun as an emblem, and therefore was called 
the Sun-King. 10. Is in our time (actually).- 



288 CORTINA METHOD. 

beau pare dessine par Le Notre, 11 embelli par de 
superbes travaux hydrauliques : 12 "les grandes 
eaux de Versailles." 13 

C'est au meme roi qu'il faut attribuer la perfec- 
tion et l'essor auxquels atteignit 14 la langue. C'est 
a sa cour, dans ce meme palais de Versailles, que 
fut parle pour la premiere fois ce langage pur et 
severe, clair quoique image, 15 qui est le francais 
classique. C'est a son influence que nous devons 
la pleiade 16 d'ecrivains illustres qui ont enrichi la 
langue d'eeuvres immortelles. C'est enfin a ses 
victoires et a l'eclat 17 de son regne qu'il faut rap- 
porter 18 1' adoption du francais comme langue diplo- 
matique, et comme la langue des cours et de la 
bonne societe dans tous les pays. 

Mais quittons cette ville des grands souvenirs 
monarchiques pour Fontainebleau qui nous rap- 
pelle l'epoque Napoleonienne. Savez-vous_a quel 
evenement 19 je fais allusion? 

— Oui, monsieur. Aux "Adieux de Fontaine- 
bleau ;" a l'abdication de Napoleon P r . 

— A merveille. 20 Je vous aurai tout dit au sujet 
de Fontainebleau si je vous mentionne la belle foret 
du meme nom. 21 

11. Drawn by Le N6tre, a celebrated architect and designer who flourished 
in the years 1613-1700. 12. Adorned {beautified) by superb watemvorks. 

13. The great waterworks of Versailles play the first Sunday in every month; 
they are very complicated and raise the water to a wonderful height. 

14. Ay lesor' 6kayl' atenyee'. and the scope to which reached. 

15. Embellished with imagery pictures, here adorned with metaphors. 

16. Pleya'd 6 , group. In Astronomy les pleiades, the pleiades. 

17. Laykla', splendor, glitter, 18. To bring back, to relate. 
19. Event. 20. Marvelous, well said. 
21. Fontainebleau (fdnt£n e bl6'), famous for its forest and castle. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 289 

Quelques heures de voyage nous amenent 22 a 
Orleans, rancienne capitale de l'Orleanais, pro- 
vince qui avec l'lle de France, formait le patri- 
moine des premiers dues de France ; dont l'idiome 
etait un dialecte de la langue romane, dialecte qui 
sous le nom de francais supplanta bientot tous les 
autres idiomes neo-latins, 23 au fur et a mesure 24 
que les rois capetiens 25 reunissaient sous leur domi- 
nation toutes les provinces de l'ancienne Gaule. 26 

— De ces differents dialectes, il doit certainement 
rester des traces 27 dans le langage parle du peuple ? 

— Plus que cela, le peuple dans chaque province 
garde son ancien idiome, mais celui-ci n'etant plus 
ecrit est tombe a l'etat de patois. 28 

— Mais, vers 29 quelle epoque a lieu cette chute 30 
des differents dialectes romans au rang de patois, 
e'est a dire d'idiome non ecrit et seulement parle, 
si nous comprenons bien? 

— Votre definition est parfaite. Ce changement 
et la naissance de la langue franchise succedant 
a la langue romane se passent au XIV e siecle. 31 

22. P. 98, n. 10. 23. Nayo-lata n ', the modern idioms derived from the Latin. 

24. 6 fur ay a mesur', idiomatical expression meaning as soon as. 

25. Third dynasty of French Kings issued from Hughes Capet (ugw ka- 
pay'), of whom the offspring are divided into three branches: 1st, the 
Capetians, direct from Hugh Capet to Charles IV (987-1328); 2d, the Valois, 
from Philip IV to Henri III (1328-1589); 3d, the Bourbons, from Henri IV to 
Louis XVI (1589-1792) and from Louis XVIII to Louis-Philip (1814-1848). 

26. Gallia or Gaul, a province of the ancient roman empire between the 
ocean, the Rhine, the Alps, the Mediterranean and the Pyrenees. 

27. Traces, vestiges, remains. 

28. Patwa', dialect peculiar to a province. 

29. Vayr, about, toward. 30. This change, lit., fall. 

31. This change and the birth of the French language succeeding the Roman 
occurred in the lUth century. 



290 CORTINA METHOD. 

Mais reprenons le cours 32 de notre excursion. 
Nous sommes a Orleans et nous ne pouvons 
la quitter sans rappeler le siege memorable de 
cette ville par les Anglais en 1428. C'est la que 
Jeanne d'Arc inaugura cette mission merveilleuse 
qui devait sauver la France de la domination an- 
glaise. Quittant Orleans nous passons a Blois, 
qui a un beau chateau historique ; a Tours, oil se 
parle le f rancais le plus harmonieux ; a Poitiers, 
celebre par deux grandes batailles ; a Limoges, ou 
se parle deja un patois du midi, le limousin. 

— Est-on d'accord 33 sur une limite pour la divi- 
sion de la France en provinces du Nord et du Midi ? 

— Absolument, non. Si Ton s'en tient a la dif- 
ference de langage, la Loire 34 est la limite la plus 
rationnelle. Mais bien des personnes n'appellent 
midi de la France que la partie beaucoup plus au 
sud de la Loire. 

— Merci ; et quelle sera notre prochaine station ? 

— Angouleme, sur la Charente, 35 chef -lieu 36 du 
depart ement du meme nom. Mais nous ne nous y 
arretons pas et nous atteignons de suite Bordeaux, 
ancienne capitale de la Guyenne, 37 actuellement 
chef -lieu 36 de la Gironde. 38 C'est une des plus 
grandes villes de France, un port important, et le 

32. But let us resume the course. 

33. Do they {people) agree. 

34. La lwa'r% a large river in France which flows into the Atlantic Ocean. 

35. River which flows into the sea : fleuve. 

36. Chief city, capital. 37. Guyfc'n', ancient province of France. 
38. River formed by two others, La Garonne and La Dordogne; also a 

department which gave its name to a famous party in the French Revolu- 
tion, les girondtns. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 291 

centre d'un grand commerce de vins et d'eaux-de- 
vie. 39 On y parle avec un accent fortement pro- 
nonce provenant de l'ancien dialecte gascon. 40 

— II a ete fait beancoup de plaisanteries sur les 
Gascons, n'est-ce pas, 41 monsieur? 

— Oui, et cela a cause de leur vanterie outree, 42 
a tel point que le mot gasconnade est passe dans 
la langue comme synonyme de fanfaronnade. De 
Bordeaux nous arrivons a Toulouse, autre ville 
importante sur la Garonne 38 et ancienne capitale 
du Languedoc. 43 II s'y tient une Academie de 
Jeux-Floraux qui a pour but l'encouragement 44 de 
la renaissance de la langue d'oc 45 ou provengale. 

Mais arrivons a Pau, ancienne capitale du Beam. 46 
Le climat y est tres doux, c'est une station hiver- 
nale tres frequentee. 47 Le peuple y parle le basque, 
un idiome fort ancien tres different des langues 
europeennes et dont Torigine s'est perdue. 

— Cette langue est parait-il tres curieuse ? 

— Oui, elle interesse fort les philologues. Elle est 
parlee dans tout le departement des Basses-Pyre- 
nees dont Pau est le chef -lieu. Dans ce meme de- 
partement nous visitons Biarritz, sur le golfe de 
Gascogne, justement renomme comme station bal- 

39. 6 de vie, brandy ; lit., water of life. 

40. Of La Gascogne, ancient province. 

41. Many jokes have been made about the Gascons, is it not so, sirf 

42. Extreme bragging, boasting. 

43. Another ancient province of Southern France which has been divided 
since the revolution into eight departments. 

44. Incitement, support. 

45. Langue d'oc or languedocienne, Roman dialect of the Languedoc. 

46. Old province, nowadays the department of Basses-Pyrenees. 

47. Frayko D tay' e . 



292 CORTINA METHOD. 

neaire : c'est la plage la plus aristocratique du con- 
tinent. Traversant ensuite Bayonne, place forte 
sur FAdour, 48 nous passons a Tarbes dans les 
Hautes-Pyrenees, a Foix sur FAriege, 49 a Perpi- 
gnan, ancienne capitale du Koussillon, 50 ou plus de 
100,000 habitants parlent la langue catalane, deri- 
vee du latin et tres voisine de Fespagnol. Apres 
Perpignan nous visitons Montpellier, Nimes et 
Marseilles. , 

— C'est la troisieme ville de France ? 

— Oui, et un port tres commergant sur la Medi- 
terranee. Marseilles fut fondee par une colonie 
phoceenne 51 vers Fan 600 avant Jesus-Christ. Ses 
habitants sont restes tres hardis et entreprenants. 52 

— Ne considere-t-on pas un peu les Marseillais 
comme les Gascons ? 

— Si, on peut meme dire qu'un Marseillais vaut 
un Gascon et demi. 

— Pourquoi, monsieur, le chant national fran- 
gais s'appelle-t-il ' ' Marseillaise ? " 

— Ce chant patriotique fut compose en 1792, 
pour Farmee du Ehin par un officier, Eouget de 
Lisle, mais il fut introduit a Paris la premiere fois 
par les federes marseillais et de la son nora de 
Marseillaise. Mais continuous notre voyage sur le 
littoral 53 de la Mediterranee. Nous atteignons Tou- 
lon, port de guerre important, Nice, la station 

48. River running into the Gulf of Gascogne. 

49. An affluent of the Garonne. 

50. Roosilyo n/ , ancient province which is now the department of les 
Pyrenees-Orientales. 51. From Phocee, ancient Greek colony. 

52. Very bold and enterprising, 53. Coast, s/iore. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 293 

hivernale la plus frequent ee et la plus elegante sur 
le continent europeen ; puis remontant au nord 
nous trouvons Aix-en-Provence, fondee par les 
Komains en 123 avant Jesus - Christ ; Avignon, 
Tancienne ville des papes, et Lyon. 

— La plus grande ville de France apres Paris ? 

— Parfaitement. Elle a un demi million d'habi- 
tants, une position strategique importante au con- 
fluent 54 du Khone et de la Saone, une industrie et 
un commerce florissants. De Lyon nous sommes 
en peu de temps a Besanqon, renommee pour son 
ecole d'horlogerie. Apres Besangon nous trouvons 
Dijon en Bourgogne, dont le commerce de vins et 
de moutarde est universeilement repandu ; reve- 
nant vers le centre du pays nous rencontrons 
Troyes en Champagne, 55 celebre par ses vins mous- 
seux, 55 Chalons-sur-Marne, ou se trouve un camp 
tres important. 

— N'est-ce pas aussi une localite historique ? 

— Certes. Attila y fut vaincu, en 451, par le ge- 
neral romain Aetius. Mais quittant not re marche 
au nord pour faire une poussee 56 a Test nous visi 
tons Nancy, ancienne capitale de la Lorraine, vilit 
celebre par son academie. 

De Nancy nous suivons la vallee de la Meuse 57 
jusqu'a Sedan, dans les Ardennes, 58 Mezieres et 

54. At the confluence, place where two rivers run together. 

55. Old province of France, capital Troyes; vins mousseux, foaming wines. 

56. Lit., to make a thrust, a push, here to take a direction. 

57. River which springs in France, flows through Belgium and Holland, 
then into the North Sea. 

58. A region in the N. E. of France covered with mountainous forests. 



294 CORTINA METHOD. 

Charleville, les deux villes jumelles, 59 puis tour- 
nant a l'ouest et passant par les villes manufactu- 
rieres de Eoubaix et Valenciennes nous attei- 
gnons Lille, la ville la plus importante de cette 
partie de la France. 

Lille est a peu de distance des cotes du nord 60 de 
la France, sur lesquelles nous trouvons les ports de 

DUNKERQUE, CALAIS, BOULOGNE et DIEPPE. A l'in- 

terieur nous visitons encore Amiens, sur la Somme, 61 
ancienne capitale de la Picardie. 

Kejoignant la Seine a Eouen, nous sommes en 
pleine Normandie, autrefois une importante pro- 
vince dont les habitants ont conserve leur dialecte 
provincial, le normand. Dans la province voisine, 
la Bretagne, que notre itineraire ne nous permet 
pas de visiter cette fois, la langue parlee est le bas 
breton, d'origine celtique. 

— Apres tout ce que vous nous avez dit des 
patois provinciaux nous devons conclure 62 qu'en 
France, comme du reste dans tous les vieux pays, 
le peuple tient 63 avant tout a sa langue. 

— Votre observation est tres juste. Les institu- 
tions politiques changent, le langage reste. Mais 
nous voici au Havre, le port le plus important 
de France, a l'embouchure 64 de la Seine, sur la 
Manche. C'est ici que nous nous rembarquerons 
pour nos rives natales. 65 

59. Fern, form of jumeaux, twins. BO. Of the northern coasts. 

61. River which flows into the English Channel. 62. To conclude or infer. 
63. Cares, hold. 64. At the mouth. 65. Native shores. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



295 



DIX-NEUVlfiME LEfON. 



Terre et Mer. 1 



Un bois ; 2 une foret ; 2 une prairie, 

Une plaine ; un fosse ; un desert, 

Une colline (koli'>i e ) ; une montagne, 

TJne vallee (valay') ; un vallon, . 

Un tronc (tro n k) d'arbre, 

La branche ; les feuilles (fe / iy e ), . 

La racine ; la semence, . 

L'herbe ; le champ ; 3 la campagne, 

La source ; le ruisseau, . 

La riviere ; 4 te fleuve, 4 . 

Le lac ; l'etang ; la mare, 

Le marais ; marecage (mareka'zh 6 ).. 

Le golfe ; detroit ; canal, 

La baie ; les cotes ; la plage, 

Un orage ; une tempete ; le calme, 

Un navire, batiment marchand, . 

La cargaison ; le fret, . 

Un navire, vaisseau de guerre, 

Un voilier ; une barque, 

Un bateau a vapeur, 

Une ancre ; les mats, 

Les voiles ; le pavilion, 

Le gouvernail ; la cheminee, 

Timonier; pilote, .... 

Capitaine ; officier ; matelot, 

Le salon ; la cabine ; le pont, 

La proue ; la passerelle ; la poupe, 

Babord ; tribord ; cale (ka'l e ), 



a wood ; forest ; meadow. 

a plain; ditch; desert. 

a hill ; mountain. 

a valley ; dale. 

a tree trunk. 

the branch ; the leaves, 

the root; the seed. 

the grass ; field; country. 

the spring ; the brook. 

the river ; the large river. 

the lake; thepool; thepond. 

the marsh; swamp. 

the gulf ; strait; canal. 

the bay ; shores; seashore. 

a storm; tempest; the calm, 

a merchant ship. 

the cargo ; the freight. 

a man-of-war. 

a sailboat; a bark. 

a steamboat. 

an anchor ; the masts. 

the sails; the flag. 

the rudder ; the funnel. 

helmsman; pilot. 

captain; officer; sailor. 

the saloon; the cabin; deck. 

the bow ; bridge; stern. 

port; starboard; hold. 



1. Land and sea. 

2. Bois has three significations: lumber wood or timber, wood or forest and 
firewood or fuel. 

3. Un champ is a field ; a cultivated field, champ de labour; un champ de 
bataille, a battlefield, etc. 

4. Riviere is any kind of a river ; fleuve is a river which flows into the 
sea. See page 282, note 59. 

20 



296 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Agriculture. 5 

. the farm; farmer. 

husbandman ; field hand. 

to sow ; the sowing. 

a plow; harrow. 

a spade ; pickaxe; shovel. 

a scythe; sickle; hoe. 

mower ; reaper. 



La ferme ; le fermier, 

Le laboureur ; 6 le journalier, 

Semer ; la semaille, 

TJne charrue ; une herse, 

Une beche ; pioche ; pelle, . 

Une faux ; faucille ; un sarcloir, 

Faucheuse ; moissonneuse, . 

Le chariot; la charrette; 7 charretier, 7 car£/ cart driver. 

Moisson; grain; ble, . . . harvest; grain; corn. 

TJn epi de froment, de ble, 8 . . an ear of wheat, of corn. 

Avoine ; seigle ; orge, . . . oats; rye; barley. 

Foin; pa.ille ; trefle, . . . hay; straw; clover. 

Lelin; le cotonnier, . . . the flax; the cotton plant. 

Interjections. 9 
Les principales sont : 

Ahlah! Aie! (aee),oA/ [vol 



Bah! so! pshaw! Bravo! 10 bra- 
Qa ! come on ! Crac ! there ! 
Chutl 11 hist! Diantre! donHsay! 
Eh! oh! ¥il l2 fy! Oh! ho! 
He! ho! Helas l ri alas! 



H.oW. li ?iallo!say. r M.otvis lb hush! 
Parbleu! (pa r ble')> to be sure! 
Pif! Mm! Paf! bourn! 
Ouf! oh! Ouais! 16 hey! 
Sus ! come on ! cheer up ! 
Vivat ! (veevaf) , hurra! huzza! 



Mots pris accidentellement comme Interjections. 



Alerte ! be quick ! 

Allons ! well ! Allez ! go on ! 

Arretez ! stop ! 

Bon ! good ! Ciel ! heavens ! 

Courage ! cheer up ! 



Dites ! say ! Ferme ! steady ! 
Halte! {hhVt e ),stop! 
Malheur ! pity! bad ! 
Paix! softly! Peste! by 

Silence ! silence! [George! 



5. Agreekwltat'r 6 . 6. From labourer, to till, to plough. 

7. Note the duplication of the r in the two last words. 

8. Un epi, a spike or head of corn or grain. 

9. Interjections are parts of speech which express unreasoned and unex- 
pected expressions of feelings. They are classified according to the latter: 
expressing sorrow, as hsias! ah! joy, as ah! vivat! admiration, as eh! oh! 
imprecation, as parbleu! surprise, oh! bah! others to call attention, as 
arretez! halte ! others for silence, as chut! silence f others to encourage, as 
courage! sus! (sus), etc., etc. 

10. Br&vd'. 11. Shwf. 12. Fee. 18. Ayla's*, 
14. HoW. 15. Motus'. 16. Way'. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



297 



Locutions Interjectives. 



Au feu ! fire ! [give me ! 

Dieu me pardonne ! God for- 
Oh. I mon Dieu ! Oh ! dear me ! 
Fi done le coquin ! for shame, 
Hebien! well! [the scoundrel/ 
Juste ciel ! good heavens ! 
He quoi ! what ! 



Oui da ! ay indeed ! 

En verite ! indeed ! 

Or ga ! well now ! 

Malheur a lui ! shame on him ! 

Prenez garde ! look out ! 

Q,uel malheur ! what a pity ! 

Quelle honte ! ivhat a shame ! 



Phrases TJsuelles (suite). 
Pour Demander son Chemin. 17 
Est-cepar ici le chemin de ? Is this the way to ? 



Va-t-on & X 18 par cette route f 
Quel est le chemin leplus court f 
Quelle route dois-je prendre ? 
Allez droit devant vous. 
Tour nez a gauche, vous nepou- 
vez-vous tromper. [pr&s. 

Est-ce loin dHci? C'est tout 



Does this road lead to X? 
Which is the shortest way ? 
Which road must I take ? 
Go straight ahead. 
Turn to the left, you cannot 
miss your way. [by. 

Is it far from here ? It is near- 



Pour Exprimer l' Admiration, la Surprise. 19 



Quoi! Beellement! Est-cepos- 
sible f Ce n 1 est pas possible ! 

Vous me surprenez. Je ne 
puis le croire. 

Cela me par ait unpeufort. 20 

Ci est admirable, incroyable ! 



What! Really! Is it pos- 
sible ? It is not possible ! 

You astonish me. I cannot 
believe it. 

It seems hard to believe. 

It is admirable, incredible ! 



Pour Exprimer la Sympathie, l'Antipathie. 



II est mon meilleur ami. 
Cest un ami intime. 
Jeferais tout pour lui. 
Je ne Vaime 22 pas. Il ne me 

revient pas. 23 
Elle le deteste; elle le hait. 
II ne nous est pas sympathique. 
II nous est antipathique. 



He is my best friend. 
He is an intimate friend. 
I would do anything for him. 
I don't like him. I don't like 
his looks. [him. 

She detests him; she hates 
He is not agreeable to us. 
He is disagreeable to us. 



17. To inquire one's way. 18. Iks. 
20. That seems to me a little hard. 
22. Aimer means both to love, to like. 



19. To express admiration, surprise. 
21. To express symjmthy, antipathy. 
23. He does not come back to me. 



298 CORTINA METHOD. 

LITTEEATUEE CLASSIQUE. 

— Parmi 1 le grand nombre d'ecrivains des siecles 
passes, dont les noms sont arrives jusqu'a nous, 
quels sont ceux que nous citerons dans cette 
courte etude ; et auxquels d'entre eux decernerons- 
nous 2 les palmes dans les differents genres de lit- 
terature ? 

Telle est la question a laquelle il nous faut 
repondre. Et d'abord, 3 disons que laissant de cote 4 
les auteurs dont le langage a vieilli, 5 nous prenons 
pour point de depart la reforme classique de Mal- 
herbe 6 et nous nous occupons exclusivement de 
cette langue mtire 7 et perfectionnee, aujourd'hui 
parlee et comprise par les classes instruites de la 
societe francaise. 

Par cette exclusion, nous perdons l'occasion de 
parler d'ceuvres importantes et curieuses telles que 
la Chanson de Roland , 8 les Romans de la Rose et 
de Renart, les Chansons d? Amour, les Chroniques 

de VlLLEHARDOUIN, 9 JOINVILLE 10 et FROISSART ; n 

d'ecrivains immortels- tels que Calvin, 12 Eabelais 13 
et Montaigne ; 14 mais ces oeuvres et ces ecrivains 

I. See page 161, note 21. 2. Shall we concede. 3. And first, in the first place. 
4. De cdte, aside. 5. From vieillir, to get old, to age. 

6. Francois de Malherbe, a poet, born in Caen (ko n ), 1555-1628. 

7. Lit., ripe, mattered. 

8. Roland, a celebrated paladin in the romances of chivalry (knighthood). 

9. Geoffroi de Villehardouin, celebrated chronicler of the 12th century. 

10. Jean de Joinville (zhooa n veel') accompanied St. Lonis, King of Franc&, 
to Egypt, and wrote a curious description of the Crusade. 

II. Jean de Froissart (frwasa'r), historian and poet, 1337-1410. ' 

12. Jean Calvin (kalva n/ ),a great religious reformer, 1509-1564. 

13. Francois Rabelais, a famous writer, 1495-1553. 

14. Michel de Montaigne (mo n ta'ny e ), a celebrated moralist, 1533-1592. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 299 

appartiennent au vieux frangais du Moyen-Age. 
Nous ne pouvons nous arreter davantage 15 sur les 
naifs 16 et charmants poetes de l'epoque de la Renais- 
sance 11 dont Clement Marot 18 et Eonsard 19 sont 
les chefs d'ecole. Nous ne pouvons pas plus entrer 
dans l'histoire si interessante des origines de notre 
theatre ni de celles des societes litteraires telles 
que V Hotel Rambouillet 20 et VAcademie Franqaise 
fondee par le Cardinal de Eichelieu 21 en 1635. 

Arrivons done de suite a l'epoque classique du 
dix-septieme siecle qui s'ouvre, litterairement par- 
lant, avec Franqois de Malherbe, 6 qui a ete pro- 
clarae par Boileau 22 le premier maitre de la poesie 
francaise, pour la purete de la langue et la ca- 
dence harmonieuse du vers. 

11 Enfin Malherbe vint, 23 et le premier en France, 
" Fit 24 sentir dans les vers une juste cadence, 
" D'un mot mis a sa place enseigna le pouvoir 25 
11 Et r6duisit la muse aux regies du devoir. 26 

A la meme epoque le pompeux Balzac 27 et Pin- 
genieux Voiture 28 portent 29 dans la prose la meme 

15. See page 276, note 18. 16. Simple, natural, artless. 

17. The revival of art and sciences in the 16th century. 18. Poet, 1495-1544. 

19. Pierre de Ronssard, the head of the pUiade, a group of famous writers 
during the Renaissance, 1524-1585. 

20. Catherine de Vivonne, marchioness of Rambouillet (ro n booiye'), 1588- 
1665, entertained in her hotel de Rambouillet, in Paris, the most famous 
writers, philosophers and scientists of her time. 

21. Armand du Plessis, cardinal de Richelieu, a famous statesman min- 
ister of Louis XIII, 1585-1642. 

22. Nicolas Boileau-Despreaux (bwal6 / -d&pray6'), a celebrated satirist 
and didactic poet, 1636-1711. 23. Came. 24. Made, did. 

25. "0/ a word in its right place taught the weight." 

26. "And persuaded the muse to the rides of duty." 

27. The pompous Balzac, celebrated writer, 1594-1654. 

28. Vincent Voiture, prosator, 1598-1648. 29. Bring or carry. 



4 



300 CORTINA METHOD. 

severite laborieuse que Malherbe dans la poesie, 
tandis que Descartes 30 accomplit 31 la meme re- 
forme dans la philosophie. 

Mais c'est au theatre que les Belles-Lettres fran- 
chises renaissantes devaient jeter le plus d'eclat. 32 
Notre genie dramatique, renferme jusque-la dans 
Fimitation des litteratures etrangeres, speciale- 
ment du theatre espagnol, cree avec Corneille 33 la 
tragedie frangaise. Pierre Corneille inaugure avec 
le Cid, sur une donnee 3 * espagnole, tout un nou- 
veau systeme dramatique qu'il continue et deve- 
ioppe 35 dans ses autres chefs-d'oeuvre tragiques : 36 
Horace, Cinna, Polyeucte, etc. 

Apres le sublime Corneille vient le sensible et 
profond Kacine, 37 qui nous donne une autre serie 
de tragedies immortelles : Andromaque, Britanni- 
cus, Mithridate, Iphigenie, Phedre, Esther et Atha- 
lie; cette derniere, suivant Voltaire, 38 "le chef- 
d'oeuvre de l'esprit humain." 

Tandis que la tragedie se transformait et se 
perfectionnait graduellement, la comedie nee des 
Farces du Moyen-Age 39 etait renouvelee sur tous 
les points a la f ois par une seule et meme main : 
celle de Moliere. 40 

30. Celebrated methematician and philosopher,1595-1650. 31. Accomplishes. 

32. But it is on the stage that the revived French belles-lettres were going to 
tlirow the greatest luster. 

33. Pierre Corneille, called " le grand Corneille," great tragic poet, 1606-1684, 
was the real creator of tragedy in France. 

34. On a plot. 35. And unfolds. 36. Tragical masterpieces. 

37. Jean Racine, famous tragic poet, 1639-1699. 

38. Arouet de Voltaire, celebrated philosopher and writer. 1694-1778. 

39. Farce-comedies of the middle ages. 

40. Jean-Baptiste Moliere, famous comedian and dramatist, 1622-1673. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 301 

Jean Poquelin dit de Moliere, 41 etait comme 
Shakespeare, 42 a la fois comedien 43 et auteur drama- 
tique. Comme lui, il a cree des types immortels. 
Eien de plus amusant 44 dans la farce, 39 sans exclure 
la portee morale, 45 que Sganarelle, le Medecin mal- 
gre lui, 46 Georges Dandin, le Bourgeois Gentil- 
homme, 47 le Malade Imaginaire, etc. ; rien de plus 
vif, dans la comedie d' intrigue, et de plus spiri- 
tual que YEtourdi, 48 le Depit Amoureux, 49 Amphi- 
tryon; rien enfin, dans la comedie de caractere, 
de plus humain et de plus parfait que les Precieuses 
Ridicules, YEcole des Maris, Tartufe, Don Juan, 
le Misanthrope, YAvare et les Femmes Savantes. 50 

Hors 51 du theatre, la litterature classique du 17 me 
siecle a encore bien d'autres ecrivains illustres a 
noter. C'est d'abord La Fontaine, 52 dans ]a fable 
et le conte ; dans la poesie didactique Boileau, 22 qui 
ecrit YArt Poetique et est appele "le legislateur 
du Parnasse"; Bossuet 53 dans la prose de l'histoire 
et de la chaire 54 et a un moindre degre Fene- 
LON, 55 BouRDALOUE, 56 etc. Dans la Philosophie et la 
Morale il faut citer comme appartenant a cette 

41. Jean Poquelin is the real name, and MoliZre the stage and pen name 
(nom de plume). 

42. The greatest English poet, 1564-1616. 

43. Comedian, actor. 44. Pleasant, entertaining. 
45. Moral influence. 46. The physician against his will. 
47. The common citizen gentleman. 48. The giddyhead. 

49. The spite of love. 50. The learned women. 51. Outside. 

52. Jean de la Fontaine, poet, celebrated especially for his Fables. 1622-1695. 

53. Celebrated writer, theologian and religious orator, was bishop of 
Meaux, 1627-1704. 54. Pulpit. 

55. Francois de Salignac de la Mothe-F6nelon, famous religious writer, 
archbishop of Cambrai. tutor of the Duke of Burgundy, 1652-1715. 

56. Celebrated predicator, 1632-1704. 



302 CORTINA METHOD. 

epoque Blaise Pascal, 57 un genie universel; La 
Eochefoucauld, 58 Pauteur des Maximes, et La 
Bruyere, 59 celui des Caracteres. Dans le Koman il 
faut nommer Mlle. de Scudery 60 et Mme. de la 
Fayette ; 61 dans l'Histoire, les Memoires et la Cor- 
respondance, Mezeray, 62 Saint-Simon 63 et Mme. de 
Sevigne 64 dont les Lettres sont dans toutes les 
bibliotheques. 

La litterature du siecle suivant perd le pur atti- 
cisme 65 du siecle de Louis XIV, pour prendre une 
tournure 66 plus philosophique. Un homme domine 
le 18 me siecle et parait le remplir tout entier, c'est 
Voltaire. 38 II s'exerce 67 dans presque tous les 
genres a la fois et il semble toujours plus philo- 
sophe qu'il n'est artiste. Ses oeuvres comprennent 
un poeme epique : la Henriade; m des tragedies: 
Oedipe, 69 Mahomet, 70 Mer ope, Zaire, etc. ; des epitres 71 
des discours, des oeuvres historiques importantes : 
YHistoire de Charles JfiJ(douze), le Siecle de Louis 
XZ"F(quatorze); des romans et une correspondance 
variee et curieuse. 

57. A philosopher and scientist who lived from 1623-1662. 

58. Celebrated moralist, writer, 1613-1680, not to be confounded with the 
philanthropist La Rochefoucauld-Liancourt, 1747-1827. 

59. Famous moralist, 1645-1696. 

60. Madeleine de Scud6ry, sister of Georges, a drama author. She wrote 
le Grand Cyrus and Clelie, two long novels which had great success in 
their time. 61. Countess de la Fayette, celebrated novelist, 1634-1693. 

62. Eudes de MSzeray, historian, 1610-1683. 

63. Louis de Rouvroy, duke of St. Simon, diplomat and author of very 
interesting Memoires, 1675-1755. 

64. Marie de Rabutin-Chantal, marchioness of S6vign6 (sayvinyay'), a 
most extraordinary woman of the time of Louis XIV; her Letters are unex- 
celled. 1626-1696. 65. Atticism, purity of style. 

66. Turn. 67. Practice. 68. La ho n reea'd«. 

69. JSdee'p. 70. Maomay'. 71. Epistles, letters. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 303 

A cote de Voltaire, et presque aussi fameux que 
lui, se place Jean- Jacques Bousseau, 72 le phiio- 
sophe de Geneve. 73 Toutes ses ceuvres portent et 
resteront a jamais, 74 que ce soit un roman d'amour 75 
comme la Nouvelle Heloise, ou un traite pedago- 
gique comme YEmile, une doctrine philosophique 
comme le Contrat Social, ou une effravante 76 
autobiographie comme les Confessions. 

Au second plan 77 des deux colosses du siecle 
viennent Montesquieu, 78 l'auteur de V Esprit des 
Lois; Buffon, 79 Fecrivain de VHistoire Naturelle; 
Diderot, 80 D'Alembert, 81 Condillac 82 et tous les 
autres ecrivains philosophies qui ont collabore a 
PEncyclopedie, recueil S3 de toutes les connaissances 
humaines au 18 me siecle, et qui par leurs ecrits et 
leurs doctrines ont prepare la Kevolution francaise. 

En dehors 84 du mouvement philosophique, le 
XVII me siecle a un grand nombre d' ecrivains tant 
au theatre que 85 dans la poesie iyrique ou la prose, 
mais ce ne sont que des figures secondaires. 

Vers la fin du siecle il est necessaire de distin- 
guer la litterature pure de la litterature d'action. 

72. Is placed Jean-Jacques (John James) Bousseau, a great philosopher and 
prosator, 1712-1778. He must be distinguished from Jean-Baptiste Rous- 
seau, a poet, 1671-1741. 

73. Geneva. Switzerland. 

74. All his writings have weight and will remain forever. 

75. Whether it be a love novel. 76. Appalling, dreadful. 
TJ. Secondly, next to. 78. Celebrated publicist. 1689-175-5. 

79. Naturalist and writer, 1707-1788. 

80. Famous writer and the chief editor of V Encyclopedic, 1713-1784. 

81. Jean le Rond d'Alembert, celebrated mathematician, 1717-1783. 

82. fitienne Bonnet de Condillac, philosopher, chief of the sensualist 
school. 83. Reke'yo, collection. 

84. Outside. 85. For the theater as well as. 



304: CORTINA METHOD. 

Dans la premiere, la poesie s'inspirant du sentiment 
de la nature fait une place de plus en plus grande 
au genre descriptif . Bernardin de St. Pierre 86 y 
excelle 87 dans ses Etudes de la Nature et son immor- 
tel roman Paul et Virginie. Dans la litterature 
d' action la Ee volution qui termine le siecle, renou- 
velle l'eloquence politique et le pamphlet, 88 et cree 
le journalisme. Les ecrivains font place aux ora- 
teurs: Mirabeau, 89 Danton, 90 Vergniaud, 91 Eobes- 
pierre 92 et Marat 93 parlent et agissent; ils ecri- 
vent peu. 

Le temps est aux actes. Cependant meme dans 
la tourmente revolutionnaire la poesie n'abdique 
pas completement ; elle s'affirme jusqu'au pied de 
l'echafaud, 94 avec Andre Chenier 95 l'auteur de la 
Jeune Captive ; et, sur les champs de bataille, avec 
la Marseillaise de Eouget de l'Lisle. 96 

86. Celebrated writer, 1737-1814. 87. Is superior. 

88. Pamphlet : a short satirical writing. 

89. Count of Mirabeau, famous orator of the revolution, 1749-1791. 

90. Celebrated conventional, born 1759 and guillotined in 1794. 

91. Famous orator of the Girondiris party, born in Limoges 1753, died on 
the scaffold 1793. 

92. Maximilien de Robespierre, celebrated revolutionist executed in 1794. 

93. Another famous revolutionist assassinated by Charlotte Corday, 1793. 

94. The scaffold. 95. 1762-1794. 96. 1776-1836. See page 292. 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 305 

YINGTI^ME LEgON. 

Fruits et Arbres Fruitier s. 1 
Citron; 2 orange; oranger, 3 . lemon; orange; orange tree. 
Mure j 1 cerise ; l peche, pecher, 3 mulberry; cherry; peach, 
Poinme ; poire ; prune, . . apple ; pear ; plum. [-tree. 
Pigue ; datte ; amande, . . fig; date; almond, [berry. 
Praise ; framboise ; groseille, . strawberry ; raspberry ; goose- 
Marron 2 ou chataigne ; abricot, chestnut; apricot. [bush. 
Noix, noyer f noisette, noisetier, 4 walnut, -tree ; hazelnut, hazel 
Raisin; vigne ; 3 grenade, . . grape; vine; pomegranate. 
Banane ; melon ; 5 melon d'eau, 5 banana; melon; watermelon. 
Ananas; 5 raisin sec ; 6 olive, . pineapple; raisin; olive. 

Legumes^ (suite de la page 159). 
Artichaut; radis ; navet, . . artichoke; radish; turnip. 
Concombre ; celeri ; epinard, . cucumber ; celery ; spinach. 
Asperge ; champignon ; lentille, asparagus; mushroom; lentil. 
Carotte ; potiron ; chou, . . carrot; pumpkin; cabbage. 
Persil; poireau; panais, . . parsley ; leek; parsnip. 

Fleurs. 
Rose ; bouton de rose ; oeillet, 8 . rose ; rosebud ; pink. [ley. 
Pensee ; violette ; muguet, . . pansy; violet; lily of the val- 
Myrte ; immortelle, . . . myrtle; everlasting, [cinth. 
Jasmin ; heliotrope ; hyacinthe, 9 jasmine ; heliotrope ; hya- 
Pavot ; tulipe, .... poppy; tulip. [som. 

Lis; 10 orchidee; fleur d'oranger, 11 lily; orchid; orange blos- 
Marguerite ; dahlia ; chevre-feuille, daisy; dahlia; honeysuckle. 
Myosotis; 12 camelia, . . . forget-me-not; camellia. 

1. Fruit and fruit trees. With a few exceptions the names of fruit trees 
are omitted in this vocabulary, as they are regularly formed, by adding ier 
to the noun designating the fruit, unless this ends with e, when ier is sub- 
stituted for it ; e.g.: pommier, milrier, cerisier, bananier, etc. (page 59, note 22). 

2. The n is doubled before adding the ending: citronnier, maronnier, etc. 

3. One of the exceptions mentioned in note 1. 

4. Hazel bush, one of the Vs in the name of the fruit is dropped. 

5. Designates both the plant and the fruit. 

6. Dry grapes; raisin de corinthe, currants. 

7. Laygii'm e . vegetables. 8. .Eiyay'. 9. Zhasa n 't e . 10. Lee. 

11. IAt.,floiver of the orange tree. 12. Meeosotees' or il ne m'oubliezpas." 



306 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Oiseaux. 
Aigle; faucon ; vautour, 
Coq ; u poule ; u poulet, . 
Canard ; cane ; caneton, 
Oie ; cygne ; cigogne, 
Paon; 15 faisan; becasse, 
Dindon ; dinde ; dindonneau, 
Pigeon ; tourterelle ; corbeau, 
Merle ; grive ; caille, 
Perdrix; alouette, .... 
Chauve-souris ; hibou; ehouette, . 
Canari; rossignol; moineau, 
Linotte ; fauvette ; pie, 

Poissons, BeptUes et 

Alligator; 17 caiman; crocodile, . 
Anguille ; crevette ; brochet, 
Anchois ; sardine ; clovisse, . 
Crabe, ecrevisse ; escargot, . 
Grenouille; lezard; maquereau, . 
Veau marin ; 18 requin ; baleine, . 
Morue ; 19 hareng ; saumon, . 
Turbot; thon; truite, . 
Vipere; couleuvre; crapaud, 
Tortue ; ecailledetortue ; 20 coquille, 



eagle; falcon; vulture, 
cock; hen; chicken, 
duck; (female); (young), 
goose; swan; stork, [cock, 
peacock ; pheasant ; wood- 
turkey; (female); (young), 
pigeon; turtle dove; raven, 
blackbird; thrush; quail, 
partridge; swallow, 
bat; owl; owlet. [row. 
canary; nightingale; spar- 
linnet; tomtit; magpie. 

Coquillages. 16 

alligator; caiman; croco- 
eel; shrimp; pike. [dile, 
anchovy ; sardine; clam, 
crab; crawfish; snail, 
frog ; lizard; mackerel, 
seal; shark; whale, 
codfish; herring ; salmon, 
turbot; tunny ; trout, 
viper; snake; toad, 
turtle; tortoiseshell ; shell. 



Expressions Generates (suite et fin). 
Pour Exprimer la Colere. 21 



Je suisfdche (en colere). 
Je nepuis retenir ma colere. 
Je ne me sens plus defureur. 
II n } est pas de bonne humeur. 
Je le veux ainsi. Silence ! 



I am cross (angry). 

I cannot contain my anger. 

I ana beside myself. 

He is not in a good humor. 

I will have it so. Silence ! 



13. Waz6', birds. Considered as food they are called volatile (vola'eey*), 
fowl or poultry. 14. Fattened and ready to eat, chapon, poularde. 

15. Po». The o is silent, also in Laon (lo n ), a city. 

16. Fishes, reptiles and shellfish. 

17. Variety of American crocodile. 18. Sea calf. 

19. Morue, salt codfish, when fresh is called cabillaud. and when smoked 
me~luehe. 20. Ayka'y* de tortu'*. 21. To express anger. 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 307 

LITTERATURE MODERNE. 

— L'aperqu 1 que vous nous avez donne sur les 
ecrivains classiques et leurs oeuvres nous a si fort 
interesses que nous sommes impatients de vous 
entendre traiter des auteurs du 19 e siecle. 

— Le resume que je puis vous presenter des litte- 
rateurs contemporains est encore plus incomplet 
que celui des ecrivains 2 des siecles precedents. 

Ceci se congoit si Ton reflechit que pour l'epoque 
contemporaine les noms se multiplient tandis que 
la critique de la posterite n'a pas encore rendu son 
arret impartial. 3 Et, malgre 4 que la curiosite soit 
plus eveillee 5 au sujet des ceuvres des auteurs de 
notre temps il a fallu 6 nous borner 7 strictement 
aux grands noms et aux oeuvres maitresses dont 
l'eclatante superiprite 8 est incontestable. - 

— Apres la Revolution, quels sont les ecrivains 
qui prennent la tete du mouvement litteraire ? 

— Les trois chefs du mouvement furent Cha- 
teaubriand, 9 Mme. de Stael 10 et Joseph de Mais- 
tre. 11 Ce sont des auteurs profondement Chre- 
tiens. Le premier et le plus grand porta la 
renovation des idees chretiennes en France a son 
apogee dans le Genie du Christianisme, dont deux 

1. Aper£ii,a, synonym of resume, summary. 

2. Than that of the writers. 

3. Has not yet rendered its disinterested decree. 

4. In sjnte of. 5. Awakened. 

6. It has been necessary. 7. To limit ourselves. 

8. The striking superiority. 

9. Francois Rene. Viscount de Chateaubriand, 1789-1848. 

10. Baroness de Stael, celebrated authoress, 1766-1817. 

11. Count de Maistre (raa'tr), political writer, 1754-1821. 



308 CORTINA METHOD. 

episodes admirables, Atala et Bene, doivent vous 
interesser plus specialement. 

— Oui, monsieur, parce que l'auteur en a place 
les scenes au Nouveau- Monde sur les bords 12 du 
Mississippi et des chutes du Niagara. 13 

— Je voisjivec plaisir que vous avez lu ces tou- 
chantes nouvelles. 14 Chateaubriand donna ensuite 
sous la meme inspiration poetique et religieuse un 
poeme epique en prose, les Martyrs. On a encore 
de lui les Memoir es oV Outre -tombe, ceuvre pos- 
thume. 

De Mme. de Stael je vous citerai De VAlle- 
magne, 15 De la Litterature 16 et deux romans philo- 
sophiques, Delphine et Corinne. 

— Et Joseph de Maistre, qui nous est le plus 
inconnu 17 des trois, qu'a-t-il ecrit ? 

—II est le theoricien de l'absolutisme en politique 
et en religion, et il a developpe sa doctrine 18 dang 
un livre fameux, les Soirees de St. Petersbourg. 

A part ces trois ecrivains, 1' Empire et les pre- 
mieres annees de la Eestauration ne nous offrent 
aucun talent de premier ordre ; la litterature of f i- 
cielle maintenue plus ou moins servilement dans 
les traditions classiques se mourait d'epuisement. 19 

— Quels ont ete les regenerateurs des lettres a 
cette epoque? 

— La renovation litteraire se produisit particu- 
lierement dans deux genres. Dans le genre ly- 

12. On the shoi-es. 13. And of Niagara Falls. 14. Short novels. 

15. On Germany. 16. On literature. 17. The most unknown to us. 

18. He has unfolded his theories. 19. Exhaustion, wearing out. 



y TWENTIETH LESSON. 309 

rique, c'est d'abord Beranger 20 qui donne a la 
simple chanson une grandeur incomparable ; c'est 
ensuite Casimir Delavigne, 21 qui dans ses Messe- 
niennes 22 rajeunit l'elegie ; 23 c'est enfin Lamartine 24 
qui dans ses Meditations et ses Harmonies trans- 
forme 25 si completement la poetique lyrique par la 
profondeur du sentiment et la melodie du vers 
qu'il semble l'avoir recreee. 

Avec eux il nous faut citer Alfred de Vigny, 26 
l'auteur d'Eloa et de Chatterton, et Victor Hugo, 27 
qui a vingt ans ecrit ses Odes et Ballades, suivies 
des Orientates et des Feuilles d 'Automne. 28 

— Victor Hugo est le plus grand poete moderne ? 

— En effet, c'est un chef d'ecole et un admirable 
genie. C'est autour de lui qui se groupa sous le 
nom de " Cenacle, " 29 une nouvelle pleiade de poetes 
qui fonder ent l'ecole moderne du Komantisme, la- 
quelle porta plus specialement ses reformes dans le 
genre dramatique. Victor Hugo donna lui-meme 
le manif este du romantisme dans la preface celebre 
du drame de Cromwell, qui n'etait point ecrit pour 
la scene ; puis il fit representer au theatre Hernani 
(1830), superbe drame qui est reste le principal 

20. A ballad and song writer, 1789-1857. 

21. A tragic poet, 1793-1843. 22. Poetry of great patriotism. 

23. A mournful or plaintive poem (Webster). 

24. Alphonse de Lamartine, very celebrated poet who was also a states- 
man, member of the provisory government of 1848. He has written novels 
and works of history and philosophy, 1790-1869. 

25. Trans, inseparable prefix found in many words common to both lan- 
guages. I^'ansporter, transcrire, transferer, etc. 

26. Poet, 1799-1863. 

27. The greatest modern French writer, 1802-85. 28. Autumn leaves. 
29. A group of persons sharing the same ideas and belief. 



310 CORTINA METHOD. 

type litteraire du genre qui detrona l'antique tra- 
gedie. Poursuivant ses luttes melees de chutes et 
de triomphes, 30 le chef du romantisme produisit 
successivement Marion Delorme, Le Rot s' amuse, 
Lucrece Borgia, Ruy-Blas, Les Burgraves. 

— Nous avons vu plusieurs de ces drames, mais 
en quoi dif ferent-ils du theatre classique ? 

— Sans entrer dans de longs details, je vous dirai 
que le theatre romantique differe du classique 
sous les deux points de vue du fond et de la forme. 
Pour le fond, c'est-a-dire pour le sujet et la ma- 
niere de le traiter, le romantisme s'ecarte 31 de la 
regie antique des trois unites de lieu, de temps, 
d' action : de ces trois elle ne reconnait que la der- 
niere. Pour la forme la reaction n'est pas moins 
grande. S'affranchissant 32 des vieilles regies, les 
ecrivains du cenacle 29 acceptent pour le vers lyrique 
tous les caprices du rhythme, du sentiment et de 
l'imagination. Certains d'entre-eux poussent 33 jus- 
qu'a Pidolatrie Tamour de la forme et font du style 
une merveilleuse ciselure. 34 Tels sont parmi une 
brillante phalange Alfred de Musset 35 et Theo- 
phile Gautier. 36 

— Quels furent au theatre les continuateurs de 
Victor Hugo? 

— Nous citerons parmi les plus celebres, Fran- 
qois Ponsard 37 et Alexandre Dumas pere. 38 

30. Pursuing his struggles, mingled urith defeats and triumplis. 

31. Differs. 32. Freeing itself '. 33. Bring; lit., push. 
34. Chisel work. 35. Very sentimental poet, 1810-1857. 
36. Poet and art critic, 1811-72. 37. Poet and playwright, 1814-1867. 
38. Famous novelist and dramatist, 1803-1870. 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 311 

— La comedie subit-elle egalement une transfor- 
mation sous l'impulsion de Tecole romantique? 

— Parfaitement. De meme que la tragedie est 
remplacee par le drame, la comedie de caracteres 
et la farce 39 classique sont devenues la comedie de 
mceurs bourgeoises 40 et le vaudeville. 41 

Une legion d'auteurs, morts d'hier ou encore 
vivants, se presentent a nous ; nous citerons : Eu- 
gene Scribe, 42 dont les meilleures comedies sont 
Adrienne Lecouvreur et le Mariage d' Argent;** 
Emile Augier, 44 l'auteur de VAventuriere et des 
Lionnes Pauvres, etc.; Th. Barriere, 45 qui a ecrit 
les Filles de Marbre et les Faux - Bonshommes ; 
Ernest Legouve, 46 Par Droit de Conquete, Bea- 
trix; Octave Feuillet, 47 Dalila et le Roman d'un 
Jeune Homme Pauvre; Alex. Dumas fils, 48 l'auteur 
de la Dame aux Camelias et du Demi-Monde, etc. ; 
Victorien SARDOU, 49 dont les plus belles comedies 
au repertoire sont les Pattes de Mouches, Nos In- 
times, la Famille Benoiton et Rabagas. 

— :N'est-ce pas Sardou qui a ecrit les principales 
pieces a succes 50 de Mme. Sarah Bernhardt? 

— Justement. Et pour cela il a change sa ma- 
niere de proceder, il a, en fait, cree un genre spe- 
cial pour la grande tragedienne ; c'est la piece a 
grand spectacle et dans laquelle un seul caractere, 

39. Farce comedy. 40. Common customs or morals. 

41. Light comedy. The modern English meaning of vaudeville is different 
from the French. 42. Play wright, 1791-1861. 43. Married for money. 

44. Famous playwright, 1820-1890. 

45. Theodore Barriere, dramatist, 1823-77. 46. Born in 1S07. 47. 1812-1894. 
48. 1824-November, 1895. 49. Born in 1831. 50. Successful plays. 

21 



312 CORTINA METHOD. 

Fheroine, est avant tout mis en relief; telles sont: 
La Tosca, Fedora, Theodora et Gismonda. 

— Faut-il conclure que le theatre frangais con- 
temporain appartient a l'ecole romantique? 

— Non pas absolument : notre epoque contem- 
poraine est une epoque de transition, le roman- 
tisme est a son declin. Tandis qu'une partie de 
nos ecrivains actuels tendent a revenir aux formes 
classiques, d'autres plus nombreux veulent pous- 
ser jusqu'a 1' extreme les reformes du romantisme. 
II semble que les_ecrivains de cette ecole fatigues 
de peindre le beau et le moral desirent se renfer- 
mer desormais 51 dans la peinture des vices sociaux 
et des laideurs 52 naturelles. De meme dans le 
style, repoussant la periode, la construction noble 
et le style soutenu ils pretendent faire parler leurs 
personnages au theatre ou dans le livre tels qu'ils 
parleraient dans la vie ou pis encore. 

— C'est l'ecole naturaliste, ir est-ce-pas, monsieur? 

— Oui, naturaliste ou realiste. Deja la reaction 
contre cette ecole est formidable. Cependant vous 
dire 53 quelle sera l'ecole triomphante de l'epoque fu- 
ture est impossible. Je le repete, nous sommes en 
pleine transition et la litterature du vingtieme 
siecle est pour nous une inconnue. 5 * 

— La situation que vous venez de nous depeindre 55 
pour le genre dramatique se reproduit sans nul 
doute 56 dans les dif f erents genres de la litterature ? 

51. Henceforth. 52. Deformities. 53. However to tell you. 

54. An unknown. 55. To describe. 

56. Without any doubt. 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 313 

— Identiquement. Dans la poesie lyrique, tan- 
dis que Lamartine 24 ajoute a ses premieres oeuvres, 
Jocelyn et la Chute oVun Ange^ Victor Hugo, 27 le 
livre vengeur des Chdtzments, les melancoliques 
Contemplations, Paventureuse Legende des Siecles, 
les capricieuses Chansons des Rues et des Bois, 57 
et qu'une f oule 58 de poetes moms fameux marchent 
sur leurs traces : 59 Reboul, 60 Leconte de Lisle7 61 
Baudelaire, 62 De B anville, 63 Sully-Proudhomme, u 
De Bornier, 65 Theuriet, 66 Coppee, 67 Deroulede, 68 
etc. ; unjiutre groupe de versificateurs s'ingenient 
a introduire 1' analyse dans la poesie : ce sont les 
Psychologues dont Paul Bourget 69 est le chef et 
Jean Richepin 70 l'extremiste ; enfin un troisieme 
groupe, les Decadents sacrifient le fond a la forme, 
leur seule preoccupation est la recherche de l'har- 
monie, de la rime et de la couleur : le style est 
indecis, l'esprit et 1' eloquence en sont bannis. Les 
chefs de cette derniere ecole sont Paul Verlaine 
et Stephen Mallarme. 71 

— Et le roman contemporain, monsieur, vous ne 
nous en avez pas encore parle? 

— C'est precisement a ce genre que j'arrive. La 
peinture du siecle par lui-meme se produit surtout 
dans le roman. Celui-ci envahit les revues, les 
journaux, il publie des quantites innombrables de 
volumes, prend tous les tons, toutes les formes, 

57. The fanciful songs of the streets and woods. 

58. A crowd; a large number. 59. Their footsteps. 60. 179&-1864. 61,1818-1894. 
62. 1821-1867. 63. Born in 1823. 64. In 1839. 65. In 1825. 66. In 1833. 
67. In 1842. 68. In 1846. 69. Author of Outre-mer, born in 1852. 

70. Born in 1849. 71. Respectively born in 1844 and 1842. 



314 CORTINA METHOD. 

traite tous les sujets. Dans la premiere moitie du 
siecle deux grands noms sontji tirer hors de pair : 
Honore de Balzac 72 et George Sand. 73 

Le premier est le romancier qui a ete, qui est 
encore le plus lu, ses personages sont des carac- 
teres si vrais, si ressemblants qu'ils sont immor- 
tels : Eugenie Grandet, la Cousine Bette, le Cousin 
Pons, le Pere Goriot, le Lys dans la Vallee, le 
Medecin Campagne, la Peau de Chagrin, etc. , sont 
connus de tous. 

Le second ecrivit plus de cent volumes ; il f aut 
citer surtout la Mare au Diable, Indiana, Lelia, 
Mauprat, le Marquis de Villemer, etc. 

Parmi les autres grands romanciers de ce siecle 
nous citerons : V. Hugo, l'auteur de Notre Dame 
de Paris, Les Miser ables, Quatre- Vingt-Treize, etc. ; 
Charles Nodier, 74 de Trilby, la Fee aux Miettes; 
Dumas pere, 38 des Trois Mousquetaires, Monte - 
Cristo, etc. ; Eugene Sue 75 des Mysteres de Paris et 
duJuif-Errant; Merimee., 76 Souvestre, 77 Sandeau, 78 
Erckmann-Chatrian, 79 About, 80 Claretie. 81 

— Tous ces auteurs sont-ils de l'ecole romantique? 

72. The most celebrated French novelist, 1799-1850. 

73. Aurore Dupin, baroness Dudevant, better known as George Sand, the 
greatest female French novelist, 1804-1876. 

74. Man of letters and bibliographer, 1780-1844. 

75. Novelist, 1804-1857. 

76. Prosper Merimee, novelist, author of Colomba, 1803-1870. 

77. Emil Souvestre, novelist, 1806-1854. 

78. Jules Sandeau, celebrated novelist, 1811-1883. 

79. Emil Erckmann,born in 1822,and Alexandre Chatrian, 1826-1890, known 
;as Erckmann-Chatrian, authors of historical novels. 

80. Edmund About, novelist and journalist, author of Le Roman d'un 
^Brave Homme, 1828-1885. 

81. Jules Claretie, dramatist and novelist, born in 1840: 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 315 

— Ce sont ou des romantiques ou des classiques 
modernes. Les tendances realistes commencent a 
se montrer avec CHAMPFLEURY 82 et Henri Murger; 83 
mais le premier maitre realiste est Flaubert ; 84 > 
ses ouvrages sont peu nombreux mais admirable- 
ment soignes t 85 citons Mme. Bovary et Salammbo. 86 - 
Apres lui viennent les freres GoNCOURT, 87 qui pous- 
sent le realisme au point ou il va devenir le natu- 
ralisme de Zola et de ses disciples. 

Se rattachant aux realistes mais sans tomber 
dans les exces nous nommerons les plus celebres, 
Alphonse Daudet 88 et Pierre Loti. 89 

Emile Zola 90 est le chef de l'ecole naturaliste ; 
dans ses ouvrages il nous donne l'histoire d'une 
famille, les Rougon-Macquart, sous le second em- 
pire; nous recommanderons de lui la Curee, Une 
Page d' Amour, la Debacle, le Beve et Lourdes. 
Parmi ses disciples il faut citer surtout Guy de 
Maupassant 91 et Rene Maizeroy. 92 

— Vous ne nous avez point parle de la philoso- 
phie et de l'histoire au 19 me siecle? 

— C'est par quelques mots a ce sujet que je ter- 
minerai. S'il est un genre dans lequel notre siecle 
est superieur, c'est sans contredit 93 dans la Philoso- 

82. Novelist, born in 1821. 

83. A poet and novelist, author of Les Scenes de la Vie de Boheme, 1822-1861 

84. Gustave Flaubert, writer, 1821-1880. 85. Carefully written. 

86. Mad. Bovary and Salammbd are two masterpieces, both for the way 
the subjects are treated and the perfect form of the style. 

87. Edmund, born in 1822, and Jules, 1830-1870. 

88. Celebrated novelist, born in 1840. 

80. Pseudonym of Julien Viand, a lieutenant of the navy and renowned 
novelist, born in 1850. 90. Born in 1840. 91. Novelist, 1850-1894. 

92. Novelist and journalist, 1852. 93. Unquestionably. 



316 CORTINA-METHOD. 

phie, la Critique et PHistoire. Les noms fameux 
abondent : dans la philosophie religieuse Lamen- 
nais, 94 Lacordaire, 95 Montalembert 96 et Mgr. 
Dupanloup f dans l'Universite Eoyer-Collard, 98 
V. Cousin, 99 Jouffroy, 100 Jules Simon; 101 en dehors 
.des spheres officielles, Pierre Leroux, 102 Auguste 
Comte, 103 Proudhon, 104 Littre; 106 dans l'histoire, 
Augustin Thierry, 106 Thiers, 107 Mignet, 108 Gui- 
zot, 109 Michelet, 110 Louis Blanc, 111 Victor Du- 
*ruy, 112 etc., etc. 

I La critique a son tour est devenue une histoire 
lumineuse et feconde, grace a 1'impulsion donnee 
par ViLLEMAiN 113 et continuee dans l'Universite et la 
Presse par St. Marc Girardin, 114 Philarete Chas- 
les, 115 Jules Janin, 116 Ste. "Beuve 117 et une foule 58 de 
savants professeurs et d'ingenieux journalistes. 

94. Religious orator and philosopher, 1782-1854. 

95. Religious orator, 1802-1861. 96. Statesman, 1810-1870. 

' 97. Monseigneur (mo n s6nyer') Dupanloup, historian and orator, 1802-1877. 

98. Philosopher and political orator, 1765-1845. 

99. Victor Cousin, historian, 1792-1867. 

100. Historian and philosopher, 1796-1842. 

101. Philosopher and statesman, born in 1814. 
. 102. Philosopher and writer. 1797-1871. 

103. Philosopher and economist, 1795-1857. 

104. Famous socialist and philosopher, 1809-1865. 

105. Emil Littre, philologue and one of the most learned men of his time, 
author of the ZHctionnaire de la langue fran^aise, 1801-81. 

> 106. Historian, 1795-1856. 

107. Adolph Thiers, lawyer, historian and president of the French Re- 
public, author of 1' Histoire de la Revolution francaise and of 1' Histoire du 
Oonsulat et de V Empire, 1797-1877. 108. Historian, 1796-1884. 

109. Statesman and historian, 1787-1874. 

110. Accomplished writer and historian, 1798-1874. 

111. Historian, 1811-1882. 112. Historian, born in 1811. 

113. Philosopher and professor, 1791-1870. 

114. Professor and critic, 1801-1873. 115. Critic, 1798-1873. 
116. Journalist, critic, 1804-1874. 117. Critic and lecturer, 1804-1869. 



MODELS FOR CORRESPONDENCE. 317 



SECONDE PARTIE. 

MODULES DE CORRESPONDANCES. 

COMMENCEMENTS DE LETTRES D'AFFAIRES. 

1 
45, Avenue de l'Opera. 

Paris, le 1 16 novembre 1895.* 
Monsieur Louis Collet, negotiant, 

26, rue de l'figlise, Bordeaux. 
Monsieur (ou Cher, ou Mon cher Monsieur 3 ), 

2 
Rue Nation ale, N° 238. 

Lille, 1 17 juillet 1896. 
Monsieur J. Durand fils, bijou tier. 
Cher Monsieur, 

3 

Ajaccto (Corse), le 4 mai '95. 
Messieurs Robespierre Jeune 4 et C. ie , avocats. 

Messieurs (ou Chers, ou Mes chers Messieurs 3 ), 

4 

Tours, 7 oct. '96. 
Messieurs Dubois freres, libraires-6diteurs. 
Messieurs et chers Correspondants, 

5 

Le Mans, le 10 juin 1896. 
Madame V.^ Toussaint et C. le , exp6diteurs. 6 
Madame (ou Chere Madame 3 ), 

1. The article can be placed or omitted before the date. 

2. This part of the letter is called en-Ute, heading. 

3. In commercial correspondence, monsieur, madame and mademoiselle 
are written with capitals, even in the body of the letter. 

4. Junior, to distinguish him from Robespierre ainS, senior. 

5. Abbreviation of veuve, widow. 6. Forwarders. 



318 viORTINA METHOD. 

6 

Les Fils de Jacques Cartier, 

162, rue St. Denis, 

Paris, 2 X. b " 7 1895. 
Mesdemoiselles Marie et Jeanne Lacroix, modistes, 
St. Malo, 

Ille-et-Vilaine, France. 
Mesdemoiselles, 

TERMINAISONS DE LETTRES D'AFFAIRES. 

1 
Nous vous prions d'agreer, 8 Monsieur, 3 nos salutations em* 
pressees. 9 

Paul Moulin. 
2 

Agreez, Monsieur, nos sinceres salutations. 

(Signature 10 ). 
3 
Je reste, Monsieur, 

Votre tout devou6, u 

X. 
4 

Recevez, Messieurs, nos cordiales salutations. 

Meunier et O. 
5 

Entierement a vos ordres, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. 

J. L. Dubuisson. 
6* 

Esperant une reponse favorable, nous vous prions d'agreer, 
eher monsieur, l'expression'de nos meilleurs sentiments. 

Joly freres. 

7 

Veuillez agreer, Madame, les salutations de 
Votre respectueux serviteur, 

Jean Pierre. 

8 

Agreez, Monsieur, les salutations de 

Vos devoues serviteurs, 

Drout, Michel et C ie . 

7. Abbreviation of decembre. 8. To accept, to receive favorably. 

9. Eager, zealous, warm. 10. Signature, from signer, to sign. 

11. Lit., Your all devoted ; idiomatically, yours truly. 



MODELS FOR CORRESPONDENCE. 319 

MODELES DE LETTRES COMMERCIALES. 



F. DUPONT ET ClE., ARMATEURS, 

76, rue de la Cannebiere, 

Marseilles, le 10 ianvier 1896. 
Messieurs 1 ' 2 S. Dalton et J. Robinson, 

Boston, Etats Unis d'Amerique. 
Messieurs, 

Nous avons Phonneur de vous accuser reception de votre 
lettre du 20 ecouie, 13 dont le contenu a eu toute notre attention. 
Nous nous empressons 14 de vous expedier par le vapeur en 
partance 15 deux (2) bonbonnes 16 d'huile d'olive vierge, premiere 
quality, aux conditions de notre contrat et pour lesquelles 
veuillez trouver facture sous ce pli. 17 

Esp6rant etre favorises de vos nouveaux ordres, nous vous 
prions d'agreer, Messieurs, nos sinceres salutations. 

F. Dupont et 0* 

2 
Jean Roger, ^diteur, 

Lille, le 7 mars 1896. 
Monsieur Frederic Durand, 

6, rue de 1' Arsenal, 

Besancon. 
Cher Monsieur, 

Votre honoree 18 du 5 courant m'est bien parvenue, 19 et je 
regrette de ne pouvoir faire droit 20 a votre reclamation ; Pes- 
compte 21 que je vous ai accorde est la reduction maximum que 
je puis faire sur mes publications, m6me pour les ordres en 
gros. 22 J'ose me flatter 23 que nous n'en continuerons pas moins 
nos bonnes relations ; et entretemps je vous prie d'agr£er, mes 
salutations tres empressees. 

Jean Roger. 

12. The abbreviations M. or MM. are not proper in the body of a letter, 
except when referring to a third party, whose name follows. 

13. Ultimo. 14. We hasten. 15. Ready to sail. 16. Carboy. 
17. Under this fold, inclosed. 18. Honored, esteemed. 

19. Has well reached me. 20. To admit the right, to consent. 

21. Discount. 22. Wholesale. 23. I dare flatter myself . 



320 CORTINA METHOD. 



Lettre de Credit.™ 
Messieurs J. Morgan et C. 1 *, 

New York. 
Messieurs, 

Nous avons l'honneur de vous informer que nous aecr6ditons 
aupres de vous 25 Monsieur Lambert — de qui vous trouverez ci- 
joint le specimen de signature' 26 — pour la somme de fr. 12,000 
(douze mille francs). Vous voudrez bien verser 27 a M. Lam- 
bert Fequivalent des sommes qu'il vous demandera jusqu'a 
concurrence de 28 fr. 12,000 sous deduction de tous vos frais 29 et 
contre ses recus en double 30 dont vous voudrez bien nous re- 
mettre un exemplaire. 
Eecevez, Messieurs, nos parfaites salutations. 

Laffitte, pere et fils. 

Lettees Privees. 

1 
{Entre amis intimes.) 

Bordeaux, le 22 juin 1896. 
Mon 31 cher ami, ou Lucien : 

Ton devoue, ou Bien a toi, 32 

2 

{Entre connaissances.) 
(Mon 31 ) Cher Monsieur (Dubois 31 ) • 

Croyez-moi, 

Votre bien devou6, ou Teut a vous, 

3 

( Un monsieur a une dame ou demoiselle), 
Madame, ou Ma chere dame {ou demoiselle), 



24. Letter of credit. 25. We credit with you, or with your firm. 

26. Herewith the specimen (facsimile) of the signature. 27. Payout. 

28. To the amount of. 

29. With deduction of all your expenses (charges). 

30. In exchange for his receipts (vouchers) in duplicate. 

31. Can be used or omitted. 

32. When writing to parents and relations, the letters begin and end with 
like expressions : cher pere, mere,frere, etc., ton fils, fr ere, etc., affectionni. 



MODELS FOR CORRESPONDENCE. 321 

Veuillez agreer Fexpression de mon profond respect, ou Cro 
yez-moi, chere dame (ou demoiselle), 

Votre tres respectueux, 
Paris, le 11 decembre 1895. 33 

4 
( Une dame a une autre dame.) 
Ma chere Madame (Blanc 31 ) ou Ma chere £milie r 3 * 

Recevez, Madame, Fexpression de mes affectueux sentiments ; 
ou Crois-moi, 

Ton affectionnee, 34 

5 
{Une dame & un monsieur.) 
Monsieur, ou Cher Monsieur (Limotte 31 ) : 

Veuillez agreer Fexpression de mes parfaits sentiments ; ou 
de mes sentiments distingues, 

6 

Invitation. 

67, Boulevard Malesherbes. 

Monsieur et Madame Paul Regagnon vous prient de leur 

faire Fhonneur de votre presence au diner qu'ils donneront 

jeudi, 15 octobre a 7 heures du soir, a Foccasion de leurs noces 

d' argent. 

Paris, le 10 octobre 1896. 
X Monsieur le g6n6ral Abry et a Madame la g^nerale. 35 

7 
(Acceptation.) 
Le g6n6ral Abry et moi acceptons avec plaisir Finvitation de 
Monsieur et Madame Regagnon pour leur diner d'anniversaire 
de jeudi, 15 octobre. 

G6n6rale 35 Abry. 
8 
(Hegrets.) 
Le ggngral et la generale Abry regrettent de ne pouvoir se 
rendre a Faimable invitation de Monsieur etc 

33. The date is often written at the bottom of a private letter. 

34. "When there is great intimacy. 

35. Generally the ladies are granted in France, the title of their husband's 
Office : madame la prtsidente, la marichale, etc. 



322 



CORTINA METHOD. 



ABBREVIATIONS USUELLES. 



Adj., adjectif. 

Adv., adverbe. 

affirm., affirmatif, -tive. 

ap. J. C, apres Jesus-Christ. 

Art., article. 

av. J. C, avant Jesus-Christ. 

B. B. F., bon pour francs. 
B. ou , B. ouue , baron, baronne. 

C. ou cent., centime. 
c.-a-d., c 5 est-a-dire. 
col., collectif. 
comp., comparatif. 
conj., conjonction. 
Cond., conditionneL 
C 0B ., commission, 
C. ie , compagnie. 

O., C. te8se , comte, comtesse. 

c. te , c.** c.*, comple, compte- 

C.\ courant. [courant. 

Cr., credit ou cr&diteur. 

dif., difference. 

dim., diminutif. 

Dr., cZ<$6^ ou debiteur. 

T>. T , docteur en droit, en m&* 

decine, etc. 
D6c. om X. bre , d&cembre. ' 
d.°, dito, 1 £e ou to mime. 
d. er , dernier, icoul6. 2 
E., est*. 

ens/, ensemble. 
escp. 1 *, escompte. 3 
Etc. , e£ ccetera, et le reste. 
&, e£. 

E/v., era w7Ze. 
Ex., exemple. 



Fab., Fab. 1 , fabrication, fab* 

F&v.,fevrier. [ricant. 

Fig., figure, figure" , -ement. 

F.°, /0W0. 

Fl., florin. 

Fr., franc. 

FF. res , ff. KS ,frdres. 

f. a b., franco d bord.* 

fern., feminin. 

G. 81 , g. al , general. 

gr. ou g. me , gramme. 

g. d , grand. 

Hectog., hectogramme. 

Hectol., hectolitre. 

Hectom., hectometre. 

lb. ou ibid., ibidem, au mSme 

Id., idem, le meme. [endroit.* 

Ind., indicatif. 

Int., intfr&t. 

Inv., invariable. 

ital., italique. 

Jan., Janvier. 

J. ne ,jeune. 

'}/&., jours de date. 

j/v., jours de vue. 

J et .,jeuillet. 

Kilog., kilogramme. 

Kilom., kilometre. 

LL., AA., Leurs Altesses. 

LL. El£m., Zewrs Eminences. 

1/c, te^re de credit. 

M me . ow Mad., madame. 

M. lle , mademoiselle. 

M. om Mr., monsieur. 

MM. ou Mrs., messieurs. 



1. Z>t'f7o, the same. 

3. Discount. 

5. in ZAe same place. 



2. Last, ultimo. 
4. .FVee (without charge) cm board. 



COMMON ABBREVIATIONS. 



323 



M. a , M. de , marchandj mar- 
M. l3e , marchandise. [chande. 
M. is , ~M. he , marquis, marquise. 
M. e , maitre, pour les avocats, 

notaires, etc. 
Mgr., monseigneur. 
m., m&ti-e. 
m/, mon, ma, mes. 
m/d., mois de date. 
m/v., mois de vue. 
masc, masculin. 
N., N. E., nord, nord-est. 
N.-D., Notre-Dame. 
N.-S. J.-C, Notre-Seigneur J€- 

sus- Christ. 
N.* ou N. 1 , negotiant. 
N. B., notez-bien. 6 
neg., negation, -tivement. 
N.°, num£ro. 
Nov. ow 9. bre , novembre. 
n/, nows, notre, nos. 
n/v., rcorfre vw*£e. 
O., owestf. 

Oct. ow 8. bre , octobre. 
o/, ordre. 
fo , pour cent, 
-p., par ou pour. 
p. p., participe passS. 
p. p. on , par procuration. 
p. p. c, pour prendre conge*. 1 
pers., per sonne. 
pr. sdn , prochain. 
prep., proposition. 
pi., pluriel. 

Y>r.,pronom. [droits. 

Pass., passim, en divers en- 
P. S., post-scriptum, apres 
q. er , quartier. [l'gcriture. 



q. te , quality ou quantity. 
qq., quelque ou quelqu'un. 
q. al , q. x , quintal, quintaux. 
R. P., reverend p&re. 
R. S. P., reponse sHl vous plait. 
S. ow S. 1 , S. te , SS., saint, sainte, 

saints, saintes. 
S. A. I. et R., £bn Altesse Im- 

periale et Royale. 
S. iCm. ou ^., £071 Eminence 

le cardinal. 
S. Exc, /Son Excellence le 

ministre. 
S. G., £a Grandeur V&v&que, 
S. M., #a Majeste le roi, I'em- 

pereur. 
S. S. ou S. P., tfa Saintete le 

pape ou Ze Saint-Pdre. 
S. r , /Sfewr pour monsieur dans 

les actes judiciaires. 
S., S. O., swd, sud-ouest. 
S. V. P., s'i£ vous plait. 
Sept. ow 7. bre , septembre. 
s.-e., sous-entendu. 
s. e. o. o., sauf erreur ou omis- 
sing., singulier. [sion. 

Subj., subjonctif. 
syn., synonyme. 
S. G. D. G., sans garantie du 
Tte., traite? [gouvernement. 
t. q., teZ aweZ. 

T. S. V. P., tournez sHl vous 
V. e ou v. ve , veuve. [plait. 

V. te , V. tesse , vicomte, vieomtesse. 
v/, vows, votre, vos, ville. 
val., valeur. 
v., i;o2>, voyez. 
\,paragraphe. 



6. jVota ^erze, note well. 



7. To ta&e Zeave. 



Draft. 



324: 



CORTINA METHOD. 



PROVERBES ET EXPRESSIONS IDIOMATIOCTES. 



A bon chat, bon rat. 

A fond. Aufond. 

A forger on devient forger on. 

Aide-toi et le del f aider a. 

A la bonne heure. A laportee. 

A la mode francaise. 

Apr&s la pluie, le beau temps. 

A quelque chose malheur est 

bon. [que ceinture dor€e. 
Bonne renomme'e vaut mieux 
Arrive qui plant e. 
Aussitdt dit, aussitdt fait. 
Avancer comme les 6crevisses. 
Beaucoup de bruit pour rien. 
Beau-monde. Bel esprit. 
Bien mat acquis ne profiteja- 
Bon gr& mal gre. \mais. 

Bon ton. Calembour, 
Carte blanche. 
Celui qui joue avec le feu, p&- 

rira par le feu. 
Chacun sait oil le bdt le 



Ce quefai ditje le maintiens. 
Chacun son me'tier. [sa maison. 
Charbonnier est maitre dans 
Charity bien ordonnfe com- 
mence par soi-mime. 
Chat e'chaude' craint Veau 
Ci-devant. Ci-joint. [froide. 
Contez cela a d'autres. 
Comme ilfaut. 
Coup de grdce. 
Coup de main. Coup d'oeil. 
Coup d'etat, [dent pour dent. 
Coup pour coup, ceil pour ceil, 
De bon augure. 
De bonne grdce* 



Set a thief to stop a thief. 
Thoroughly. To the bottom. 
Practice makes perfect, [self. 
God helps him who helps him- 
Well and good. Within reach. 
After the French fashion. 
After a storm comes a calm. 
There is no evil that may not 

be turned to good, [riches. 
A good name is better than 
Come what will. 
No sooner said than done. 
To retrograde. 
Much ado for nothing. 
Persons of fashion. Man of wit. 
Ill-gotten gains never prosper. 
Willing or unwilling. 
In good taste. Pun. 
Unconditional terms. 
He who loves danger mil 

perish by it. 
Everyone knows where his 

own shoe pinches. 
What I have said I abide by. 
Everyone to his trade. 
A man's house is his castle. 
Charity (properly understood) 

begins at home. 
A burnt child dreads the fire. 
Formerly. Herewith. 
Tell that to the marines. 
Properly, well bred. 
The finishing stroke. 
A bold enterprise. A glance. 
A stroke of state policy. 
Tit for tat. 
Of good omen. 
With good grace ; willingly. 



PROVERBS AND IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 325 



Des goitts et des couleurs il ne 

faut pas discuter. 
De temps en temps. 
Dieu et mon droit. 
Dis-moi qui tu hantes je te di- 

rai qui tu es. 
D'un seul coup. 
En moyenne. En passant. 
Entr'ouvert. En un mot. 
Erreur ne fait pas compte. 
Faire d?une pier re deux coups. 
Fermer la porte de Ve'curie 

quand le cheval est dehors. 
Fin contrefin. 
Fin de siecle. 
Grand ouvert. 
Gens de peu, de Hen. 
Gens du rnonde. 
Honni soit qui maly pense. 
H est bon d 'avoir deux cor des 

d son arc. [quHl est chaud. 
U faut battre le fer pendant 
U faut hurler avec les loups. 
II faut rendre d Cisar ce qui 

appartient d Cesar. 
H n'y a pas defumee sans feu. 
II faut semer pour r€colter. 
Jl ne faut pas juger sur les 

apparenees. [bien faire. 
Jl ri 1 est jamais trop tard pour 
II n'y a pas de roses sans epines. 
II n y y a pas de regies sans ex- 
ception. [do?-t. 
U n'y apire eau que Veau qui 
Ilplie mais ne rompt pas. 
II vaut mieux faire envie que 

piti€. 
H vaut mieux tard que jamais. 
Je donne ma langue au chien. 



There is no accounting for 
taste. 

Now and then. 

God and my right. 

Show me your company, I will 
tell you who you are. 

At one stroke. 

On an average. By the way. 

Ajar. In short. 

Error is no count. [stone. 

To kill two birds with one 

To lock the stable door after 
the horse is stolen. 

Diamond cut diamond. 

End of the century. 

Wide open. 

People of little, of no account. 

Fashionable people. 

Evil be to him that evil thinks. 

To have two strings to one's 
bow. 

Strike while the iron is hot. 

When in Rome do as the Ro- 

Give the devil his due. [mans, 
[some fire. 

There is no smoke without 

Who would reap must sow. 

One can never judge by ap- 
pearances. 

Never too late to mend. 

No roses without thorns. 

There is no rule without ex- 
ceptions. 

Still waters run deep. 

Better to bend than to break. 

It is better to have too much 
than to be in want 

Better late than never. 

I give it up. 



326 



CORTINA METHOD. 



L'amour est aveugle. 

La necessite est la m&re des 
inventions. [gris. 

La nuit tous les chats sont 

La parole est d 1 argent; le si- 
lence est d'or. [sonnement. 

L'appetit est le meilleur assai- 

L'appetit vient en mangeant. 

Les absents ont toujours 
tort. 

Les affaires avant les plaisirs. 

Les apparences sont trom- 
peuses. [amis. 

Les bons comptes font les bons 

Le soleil luit pour tout le 
monde. [nent Vamitie. 

Les petits presents entretien- 

Les petits ruisseaux font les 
grandes rivi&res. 

L 1 habit ne fait pas le moine. 

Uhistoire est vraie. [pose. 

L 1 homme propose et Dieu dis- 

Loin des yeux, loin du coeur. 

L 1 occasion fait le larron. 

Mieux vaut 6tre le premier 
dans un village que le second 
dans Borne. [bamfs. 

Mettre la charrue deva'nt les 

Necessite n'a point de loi. 

Nouveau balai balaye Men. 

Nul n'est prophete dans son 
pays. 

On connait I' ami au besoin. 

On n'a rien sans peine. 

Patience passe science. 

PauvretS n'est pas vice. 

Peu vaut mieux que rien. 

P&re avare, fits prodigue. [nid. 

Petit a petit Voiseau fait son 



Love is blind. 

Necessity is the mother of in- 
ventions, [cats are gray. 
When the candles are out, all 
Speech is silver; silence is 

gold. 
Hunger is the best sauce. 
Eating brings an appetite. 
The absent are always in the 

wrong. 
Business before pleasure. 
Appearances are often deceit- 
ful, [friends. 
Short reckonings make long 
The sun shines on the just and 
on the unjust. [ship. 
Little gifts keep up friend- 
Many a mickle makes a 
muckle. [man. 
The dress does not make the 
The tale is true. [poses. 
Man proposes and God dls- 
Out of sight, out of mind. 
Opportunity makes 1 lie thief. 
Where you had a high posi- 
tion do not be at a lower 
grade. [horse. 
To put the cart before the 
Necessity knows no law. 
New broom sweeps clean. 
No one is a prophet in his own 
country. [deed. 
A friend in need is a friend in- 
No gains without pains. 
Patience exceeds knowledge. 
Poverty is no crime, [bread. 
Half a loaf is better than no 
To miserly father, prodigal son. 
Light strokes fell great oaks. 



PROVERBS AND IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 327 



Pierre qui route n'amasse pas 

de mousse. 
Prendre quelqu'un au mot. 
Quand ily en a pour un, il y 

en a pour deux. 
Quand onparle du loup on en 

voit la queue. 
Qui casse les verres lespaie. 
Qui dort dine. 

Qui m'aime, aime mon chien. 
Qui ne dit mot consent. 
Qui s&me le vent recolte la 

tempSte. 
Qui se ressemble, s 1 assemble. 
Qui trop embrasse, mal etreint. 
Qui veut, peut. 
Qui vive ? Sur le qui vive. 
Pira bien qui rira le dernier. 
Pome n'a pas ete bdtie en un 
Sans cause ni motif. [jour. 
/Sans compliments. 
Sans rime et sans raison. 
Se coucher avec lespoules. 
Telpdre, telfils. 
Tel maitre, tel valet. 
Tout ce qui reluit n 1 est pas or. 
Toutes verites ne sont pas 

bonnes a dire. \attendre. 
Tout vient a point, d qui sait 
-Un averti en vaut deux. 
Un bienfait n } est jamais perdu. 
Une hirondelle ne fait pas le 

printemps. [seul. 

Un malheur ne vient jamais 
'Un tiens vaut mieux que deux 

tu V auras. \semble. 

Vite et Men ne vont pas en- 
Yivre & Ve'troit. 
Vogue la galore. 
22 



A rolling stone gathers no 

moss. 
To take one at his word. 
When there is plenty for one, 

there is enough for two. 
Speak of the devil and he is 

sure to appear. 
Who breaks, pays. 
Sleeping is as good as eating. 
He who loves me, loves my 
Silence gives consent. [dog. 
Who sows the wind reaps the 

whirlwind. [gether. 

Birds of a feather flock to- 
Grasp all, lose all. [way. 

Where there's a will there's a 
Who goes there ? On the alert. 
He laughsbest who laughs last. 
Rome was not built in a day. 
Without cause or motive. 
No ceremony, pray. 
Without rhyme or reason. 
To go to bed very early. 
Like father, like son. 
Like master, like man. 
All is not gold that glitters. 
The truth is not to be spoken 

at all times. 
Patient waiters are no losers. 
Forewarned is forearmed. 
A kindness is never lost. 
One swallow does not make a 

summer. 
Misfortunes nevercomesingly. 
A bird in the hand is worth 

two in the bush. 
Fast and well do not agree. 
To live in close quarters. 
Come what may. 



CORTINA METHOD. 



LISTE DES PR^NOMS LES PLUS EN USAGE. 1 



Adolphe, -ine, 2 

Agathe, 

Agnes, 

Albert, -ine, 2 

Alexandre,-ine, 

Alice. Anne, 

Alphonse, -ine, 

Ambroise, -ine, 

Andre, -e, 

Antoine, -ette, 

Arthur, . 

Barthelemy, 

Basile, 

Berthe, 

Blanche, 

Brigitte, 

Catherine, 

Cecile, 

Charles, -otte, 

Christine, 

Christophe, 

Denis, -e, 

Dorothee, 

Edmond, 

Edouard, 

JSleonore, 

Elisabeth, 

221isa, 

Emma, 

J2mile, -ie, 

Etienne, -ette, 

Fannie, 

Ferdinand, -e, 

Felicien, -ne, 

Florentin, -ce, 

Francois, -e, 



Adolphus. 

Agatha. 

Agnes. 

Albert. 

Alexander. 

Alice. Ann. 

Alphonso. 

Ambrose. 

Andrew. 

Anthony. 

Arthur. 

Bartholomew. 

Basil. 

Bertha. 

Blanche. 

Bridget. 

Catherine. 

Cecilia. 

Charles. 

Christine. 

Christopher, 

Dennis. 

Dorothy. 

Edmund. 

Edward. 

Eleanor. ■ 

Elzabeth. 

Eliza. 

Emma. 

Emit. 

Stephen. 

Fannie. 

Ferdinand. 

Felician. 

Florentin. 

Francis. 



Frederic, -ique, Frederick. 
Georges, -ette, George. 
Guillaume, William. 

Helene, Helen. 

Henri, -ette, Henri. 
Hughes, Hugh. 

Jacques, -eline, James. 
Jean, -ne, nette, John. 
Jerome, Jerome. 

Joseph, -ine, Joseph. 
Laurent, -rence, Lawrence. 
Louis, -e, Lewis. 

Marie, Maria, Mary, Maria* 
Madeleine,-line, Magdalen. 
Marguerite, Margaret* 
Marthe, Martha. 

Martin, -e, Martin. 

Michel, -ine, Michael. 
Mo'ise, Moses. 

Paul, -ine, Paul. 

Philippe, -ine, Philip. 
Pierre, -ette, Peter. 
Raphael, 



Raoul, 
Remy, -a, 
Richard, 
Robert, 
Sarah, 



Raphael. 

Ralph. 

Remy. 

Richard. 

Robert. 

Sarah. 



Sebastien, -ne, Sebastian. 
Theodore, -a, Theodore. 



Therese, 

Thomas, 

Theophile, 

Vincent, 

Victoire, 

Virginie, 



Theresa. 

Thomas. 

Theophilus. 

Vincent. 

Victoria. 

Virginia. 



1. List of the Christian names most in use. 

2. The fern, is omitted in English, as it is well known by the student. 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



329 



ALPHABETICAL ISDEX. 



Notes.— 1. The large figures refer to the numbers of the pages, those con- 
nected with a hyphen to the pai'agraphs in the text and the small figures, 
placed higher than the others, to the notes below the text. 

2. To find the conjugation of a verb, irregular, defective or impersonal, 
see the list, the page of which is given under the word " Verbs." 

3. Following are the abbreviations used so as to condense this Index as 
much as possible: ab., abbreviation; adj., adjective; adv., adverb; conj., 
conjunction ; conv., conversation ; dif., difference ; Eng., English ; F., France; 
fig., figured ; fern., feminine ; ful., future ; ind., indicative ; inf., infinitive ; 
imp., imperfect, impersonal ; imper., imperative ; interj., interjection ; 
masc, masculine; pr., pronoun; prep., preposition; pres., present; pron., 
pronunciation; sent., sentence; subj., subjunctive; term., termination; 
trans., translation ; v., verb ; vocab., vocabulary. 

A 139; numeral (cardinal), 110,142; (or- 

dinal), 122,142; of repetition, multi- 
ples, 173 ; possessive, 50 28 , 140, 141. 
Adverbs— place of, 135 s *, 165 49 , 185; 
irregular comparison, 119 29 ; modi- 
fying adjectives, 243 20 ; dif. with 
prep.. 237 19 ; of affirmation. 277; of 



A, different sounds, 7, 14 ; see "Table 
^of Sounds," 11. 

A, prep., derivation, 173 11 ; translated 
by at, 160 12 ; is omitted, 135 39 , 178«; 
translated by the possessive case, 
75; translated by to, 150 29 ; by in, 
623i, I60i2i3 ; preceding verbs, 166?; 
^repeated, 160 ia . 

A ce soir, idiom, 57 s2 . 

A la bonne heure, idiom, 124 13 . 

A present, maintenant, now,71 37 ,236 n . 

A ravir ! exclamation, 130 2 . See "Ex- 
clamations." 

About, Edmond, novelist, 314 s0 . 

Abbreviations, 181 22 , 20$*, 228 s5 , 231*3; 
list of, 322. 

Accent. fig. pron., 11, 12 ; acute, 15 5 , 17, 
20" 37; circumflex, 15, 18™, 19, 39, 
19221, 1932223 19632; grave, 14 2 , 15*, 17, 
18 9 , 38 ; and orthographical signs, 
36 ; tonic, 14 " Rule," 36. 

Adjectives, 136 to 142; place of, 141, 
170 34 , 185; different meanings ac- 
cording to place, 186; feminine 
form, 573", n 7 6 t 136, 185", 2296«; plu- 
ral, 139; degrees of comparison, 
184 ; irregular comparatives, 169 25 ; 
used as adverbs, 243 1920 ; discrimi- 
nated with pronouns, 142 3 , 143 8 , 
I441213; qualifying,136; demonstra- 
tive, 663 10 , 140, see ce ; determining, 



quantity. 227 49 , 276 ; which require 
de, ei 28 ,?^, 1752°,24320,276 16 ; of doubt, 
277 ; of place, 237 ; of manner, 243 ; 
of negation, 277; of order, 276. de- 
derived from the Latin, 185 4 ; of 
time, 237 ; of comparison, 184, 227* 9 , 
23822. 

Adverbial Expressions, 277. 

Adour, U, a river of France, 292. 

Affixes, see "Terminations." 

Age, old, 117 9 . 

Agriculture, vocab., 296. 

Ai, pron., 8/20,21583. 

Aie, pron., 20. 

A'ieul, grand-pere, grandfather, 230 5 . 

Aiguiere, water pitcher, 178 6 . 

Aim, ain, see "Sons nasaux," 21. 

Ain£, , elder, used after names, 317 4 . 

Ainsi que, 194 26 ; see "Conjunctions." 

Aise, ease, 18128. 

Aix-en-Provence, city of France, 293. 

Alphabet, French, 13. 

Aliments, food, vocab., 159. 

Allee, 23326. 

Alter chercher, to go and fetch, 169 28 . 

Allons! let us go! 13537. 



330 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Am, an, pron., see "Sons nasauz," 21. 

Amener, porter, to bring, to carry, 
dif.,98w. 

Amiens, a city of France, 294. 

An, annee, year, dif., 61 27 . 

Ancelres, ancestors, 230°, 251 2 . 

Angouleme, a city of France, 290. 

Animals, vocab., 243. 

Anneau, bague, ring, 236 4 . 

Auy, some, du, de la, des, partitive 
art., see "Article." 

Apostrophe, 39. 

Apprendre, meaning to learn, 228 s4 . 

Approfondie, profonde, dif., 24738. 

Apres, depuis, ensuite, puis, dif., 237 12 . 

Apres-midi, apres-diner, etc., 131 16 . 

Ardennes, France, 293 58 . 

Argent, silver, money, 113 30 . 

Ariege, river of France, 292 49 . 

Article— definite, 47™, 5133, 5529, 557 
72 ; when it is used, 51*3, 6231, 185 9 ; 
omitted, 228*9, 317*; repeated,217" *5 ; 
forms the superlative, 184; is an 
integral part of the noun, 231 12 ; is 
used instead of en, in, 62 31 ; — in- 
definite, 47 u , 73 ; when it is used, 
129 3 «, 14128; dif. W ith numeral, 110 u ; 
—partitive, 55 2 <\ 69 3 i, 73. 

Assez, enough, 61 28 . 

Assortir, to match, 189 15 . 

Atteindre, to reach, 175 25 . 

Au, and, ault, aut, aux, pron., 8, 20. 

Aufur et a mesure, idiom, 289 24 . 

Au plaisir, au revoir, 46 8 , 129 39 . 

Auberge, inn, 223 4 . 

Augier, Entile, playwright, 311 44 . 

Aujourd'hui, to-day, 109 1 . 

Aucun, nul, pas un, 141 27 , 145 20 . 

Aussi, also, too, thus, 177 30 ; compar- 
ative, as. ...as, 177 29 , 184; dif. with 
autant, 227 47 . 

Aussitol, as soon as, 181 27 . 

Autre, other, adj. and pr., 141 28 ; and 
autrui, 145 19 . 

Avancer, neuter verb, governs de, 
12933. 

Avoir, to have, 146 to 152 ; y avoir, 
there to be, 152. 

Avoir beau, idiom, 239 30 . 

Ay, pron., 8, 20. 



B, sound, 22; when it is mute, 22; 
when doubled, U8 21 ; see "Conso- 
nants, doubled." 

Bagage, 24033. 

Bague, anneau, ring, 236 4 . 

Baigno ire, bat h t u b, theater box,232 16 . 

Balzac, Louis de, writer, 299 -27 . 

Balzac, Honore de, novelist, 314 72 . 

Banlieup, suburb, 227 52 . 

Barriere, Theodore, author, 311 45 . 

Bassin, 56, sent. 15, 178". 

Baudelaire, writer, 313 62 . 



Be, to, see "Btre," also " Verbs, aux- 
iliaries." 
Beau, bel, fine ; dif., 56^, 57 3 o, 138 12 . 
Beam, old province of France, 291 46 . 
Beaucoup de, much, many, 61 28 . 
Beranger, song writer, 309 20 . 
Berceuse, rocking chair, 172 3 . 
Besanpon, a city of France, 293. 
Biarritz, a town of France, 291. 
Bibliolheque, library, bookcase, 172 4 . 
Bien, used instead of Ires, very, 51 34 . 
Bientdt, soon, 181 27 . 
Bimane, 212 9 . 
Bipede, 242*0. 

Birds, oiseaux, vocab., 306. 
Blanc, Louis, historian, 316 111 . 
Blois, a city of France, 290. 
Body, The, le corps, vocab., 285. 
Boileau, classical writer, 299 22 , 301. 
Bois, wood, timber, firewood, 29S 2 . 
Bordeaux, a city of France, 290. 
Bossuet, writer, 301 53 . 
Bottler, cordonnier, shoemaker, 182 31 . 
Boucles d'oreilles, de cheveux, 236 3 . 
Boudoir, 236 2 . 

Boulogne, bois de, 279 22 ; a city, 294. 
Bourdaloue, religious orator, 301 56 . 
Bourget, Paul, novelist, 313 69 . 
Bretagne,o\d province of France,294. 
i?refon,inhabitants of Brelagne,2dl w . 
Bring forth, to, amener, 98 10 . 
Buff on, writer, 303 79 . 
Bicvard, blotting paper, 242 3 . 



C, pron., 9, 22; see "Table of Sounds;" 
when doubled, 118 21 , see "Conso- 
nants, doubled." 

Ca, contraction of cela, 120 33 , 171 33 ; 
ca va, idiom, 240 34 . 

Cachet and timbre, stamp, dif., 242 4 . 

Calais, port of France, 294. 

Campagne and province, dif., 130 5 ; 
and champ, 295 3 . 

Capetiens, dynasty of Hughes Capet, 
289 2 5. 

Capital letters, see "Letters"; capi- 
tal of F., see "Paris." 

Car, parce que, for, because, 120 34 . 

Cardinal numbers, see " Numbers." 

Ce, cet, cette ; see "Adj., Pr., demon- 
strative"; dif., 142 3 ; followed by 
nouns with ci or la, 173 16 . 

Ceci, cela, this, that, 66 8 . 

Ce que, that which, 66 10 . 

Cenacle, 309 29 . 

C'esl, il est, 144 Remark 1; when used 
and dif., 124*5. C'est, ce sont, 180 21 . 

Ch, pron., 9, 23; see "Table of 
Sounds." 

Chacun, each one, 145 2 *. 

Chdlons-sur-Marne, France, 293. 

Champagne, France, 293 55 . 

Champfteury, novelist, 315 82 . 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



381 



Chaque, each, 141 30 . 

Charente, La, a river of France, 290. 

Charleville, a city of France, 294. 

Chateaubriand, famous writer, 307 9 . 

Chair ian, novelist, 314". 

Chasles, Philarete, critic, 316 U5 . 

Chaussee, rez de, 223 3 . 

Chaussetles, stockings, 59 20 . 

Chenier, Andre, poet, 304 95 . 

Cher! mon cher ! exclamations, 
dear ! my dear ! 133 31 ; see " Excla- 
mations." 

Chez, prep., by or at the place of, 71 36 , 

160!5. 

Ci, let, suffixes, see " Demonstrative 
Pr."; added to the nouns, 173 16 . 

City, The, la ville, vocab., 223, 230. 

Claretie, Jules, novelist, 314 81 . 

Clothing, vilements, vocab., 59. 

Coin, monnaie, 113 30 . 

Collective nouns, see "Nouns"; 
—numbers, see ''Numbers." 

Colon, deuz-poinls, 45. 

Colors, couleurs, vocab., 276. 

Combien, how, exclamation, 163 38 ; 
— de, how much, many, 175 20 . 

Comma, virgule, 45. 

Comparative of equality, superior- 
ity, inferiority, 177 29 , 184 ; — irreg- 
ular,119 23 ,169 25 ; feminine form,185 13 ; 
see '-Adverbs of Comparison." 

Complet, suit of clothes. 181 23 . 

Compound nouns, see ''Nouns." 

Compter, to count, to charge, 127 30 . 

Comle, Auguste, philosopher, 316 103 . 

CondUlac, philosopher. 303 82 . 

Conditional, see "Moods." 

Conjunctions, list of, 224 ; governing 
the ind. or the subj., 218, 224, 
22525 26 27 ; governing ne, 225 s8 . 

Conseiller, echevin, dif., 230 3 . 

Consonants, sounds of, 9, 22 ; sound- 
ed or mute at the end of words,22 2 ; 
—doubled. 42, 118 21 ; — &,248*; c,121« 
d,1847;/,130 1 «; #.269 37 ; Z,U8 25 ; m,Yl$P 
n, 29 13 , 203* 9 , 247 37 , 305 2 ; p, 11980 
r, 185", 2967; s, 124^, 133 28 ; t, 63*° 
1306, 2034 8 . 

Conversation, directions for, 6. 

Coppee, F)-ancois, poet, 313 67 . 

Coq, chapon, dif., 306 14 . 

Cordonnier, see "Bottier." 

Corneille, Pierre, author, 300 33 . 

Correspondence, Models of, 317. 

Countries of the World, vocab., 179 
231. 

Couple, paire, dif., 167 141516 . 

Cousin, Victor, historian, 316". 

Crockery, vaisselle, vocab., 178. 



D, sound, 23; sounded as I, 23, 184 3 ; 
mute, 23 ; doubled, 118 21 , see " Con- 
sonants, doubled." 

D'Alembert, mathematician, 303 81 . 



Bans, prep., in, 160 12 , 161 17 . 

Danton, orator, 304 <j0 . 

Dash, the, le tiret, 45 19 . 

Daudet, Alphonse, novelist, 315 88 . 

Davantage, plus, more, dif., 276 18 . 

Days of the week, 67, etymology, 
6719 20 , 129 38 . 

De, prep, translated by of, 161 18 ; by 
the possessive case, 75 ; by fronu, 
161 18 ; by ivith, 160^; is om'itted, 
121 38 ; repeated, 160 13 ; used instead 
of que, than,161 19 ; preceding nouns, 
166-; following verbs, 129 33 . 

De Banville, poet, 313 03 . 

De bonne heure, early, 124 13 . 

De Bornier, poet, 313 65 . 

De ce pas, idiom, presently, 233 20 . 

De meme, in the same way, 190 17 . 

Definite article, see "Article." 

Dejd, plus, already, no more, 237 13 . 

Delavigne, Casimir, poet, 309 2 i. 

Demander, to ask, to beg, ISO 17 . 

Demi, half, 119 27 , 129 323 s. 

Demonstrative adj., see "Adjec- 
tives"; pr., see "Pronouns.' 

Deptiis, since, 116 2 ; dif. with apres, 
ensuite, puis, after, 237 12 . 

Deroidede, Paid, poet, 313 68 . 

Des, of the (pi.) ; see "Article, defi- 
nite, partitive." 

Des, prep., since, as soon as, 160. 

Descartes, philosopher, 300 30 . 

Determining adjective, see "Adjec- 
tives." 

Deuxieme. second, second, differ- 
ence, 123 8 . 

Diderot, writer, ZQZ^. 

Dieppe, port of France, 294. 

Dieeresis, trema, 41, 88 26 . 

Dijon a city of France, 293. 

Diminutive formed with elte, 53 18 . 

Diner, dinner, to dine, 53 ; conversa- 
tion, 162. 

Diphthongs— simple, compound, na- 
sal, 42, 43. 

Directions of the Method, 1. 

Dites done! say, interj., 240 32 , see 
" Interjections." 

Division of syllables, 44; of time, 
vocab., 116, 117, 131. 

Doctor, conv. with the, 168. 

Done, conj., thus, 52 9 , 224"; dif. with 
aussi, 177 30 . 

Dont, whom, of which. 14415, 187 9 . 

Dordogne, La, a river of F., 290 38 . 

Double consonants, see "Conso- 
nants, doubled." 

Drap, cloth, sheet, 178 2 . 

Du, of the (masc). See "Article,defi- 
nite and partitive." 

Du tout, at all. 1165. 

Dumas, pere, novelist, 310 38 ; yi£s,play- 
wright, 31148. 

Dunkerque, port of F., 294. 

Dupanloup, Mgr., orator, 31 6 97 . 

Duruy, Victor, historian, 316 112 . 



332 



CUrtTINA METHOD. 



«& sounds. 7-2, 15; see "Table of 
Sounds." when mute,16; printed 
in italics for figured pron., 7 2 . 

Eaii, eaux, ei, sounds, 8, 20. 

Echevm, conseiUer, alderman, coun- 
cilor, 230*. 

Eclat, flash., luster, 300 32 . 

Eclore, to natch, to blow, to dawn, 

19837. 

Ecoulez ' listen ! 240 32 ; see " Inter- 

" jections." 

Effet, note, 1093. 

Elm, ein, em, en, see "Sons nasauz." 

Emphasis, see "Accent." 

Emplettes, achats, purchases, 66 3 . 

En, adv., pt\, when and how used, 
52^, 164*6, 165« 255 20 ; prep.. 160 12 ; gov- 
erns the pres. part., 160 1220 , 267 3 , 
270-2o. 

En gros, wholesale, 319 22 . 

En parlance, ready to leave port, 
31915. 

En ville, in town, 223* , ab., 322. 

Ensuite, apres, depuis, puis, after, 
dif., 237i 2 . 

E ntre, par mi, between, among, dif., 
16121; enlre, prefix, 166* see "Pre- 
fixes." 

Envers, vers, toward, dif., 161 22 . 

Environ, about, prep., 160. 

Envoy er chercher,dire, f aire, etc. ,W9- B . 

Erckmann, novelist, 314 79 . 

Especes, cash, 109* 5 . 

Est-ce que? is it that? 113 2B . 

El, and, when omitted, IIO1 5 ; its use, 
110i*i5; the I never carried, 64**. 

Etage, floor, 166*. 

Eire, to be, 201** ; see " Verbs, auxi- 
liaries"; &tre couche, 263*; elre en 
train de, 270 s ; elre en ville, 223 1 . 

Eu, o3u, sounds, 8, 20. 

Even, same, meme, 171* 3 . * 

Excepts, sauf, except, save, 161 27 . 

Exclamations, 130 2 *, 132, 13325 81,134, 
135^, 18334; see " Interjections." 

Expressions Idiomatiques ct Prover- 
bes. 324 ; — Impersonnelles, govern 
the inf., 267 2 ; — usuelles, 286, 297, 306. 

Ez, term., pron., 36 31 22. 



F, sound, 23 ; when mute, 24 ; when 
changed into v, 23; when doubled, 
II821, see " Consonants, doubled." 

Faillir, faire faillile. dif., 199*°. 

Falloir, to be necessary. H3 31 . 

Family, The, vocab., 47, 230. 

Faire, used idiomatically, 262 6 ; fol- 
lowed by an inf., 115 39 ; — accroire, 
to make believe, 266 33 ; — cuire, to 
cook, 107* 2 ; — du mal, to hurt ; 
— du tort, to do wrong, 245 30 ; — fai- 
llite, to fail, 199*0; — faire, to hav« 



or cause to be made, 115 39 ; — frire, 
to fry, 264 8 ; — mieux, to do better, 
169 2 ''; — droit, to consent, 319 20 . 

Fait, used as an auxiliary, 2731 3 . 

Farce, farce-comedy, 300 s9 . 

Feminine, formation of, 47 mG , 55 24 , 
58 3 , 59i 9 , 136, 248 ; — of nouns or adj., 
in aire, 109*; in al, 492*; in e, 47'«, 
53 16 ; in el, 49 2 *; in eux, 117 8 : in eau, 
5(j23 } 5700; i n i eih 4715; i n et, 63*"; in 
on, 49 2li ; of comparatives, 185 13 ; see 
"Adjectives," "Nouns," "Com- 
paratives." 

Fenelon, writer and orator, 301 55 . 

Fetch, to, trans, 16928. 

FeitiUet, Octave, novelist, 311 47 . 

Feasts of the year, vocab., 131. 

Finals, see "Terminations." 

Fireplace (the) and Appurtenances, 
vocab., 178. 

Fishes, poissons, vocab., 306. 

Fleur d'oranger, orange blossoms, 
305K-. 

Fleur ir, to bloom, to flourish, S9. 

Fleuve, riviere, river, 282™, 295*. 

Floor, Stage, pla.ncher, 166°. 

Flowers, The, vocab., 305. 

Fois, time, undeclinable, 173 15 . 

Fob; a city of France, 292. 

Fontaiiicbl'au, a city of France, 283. 

Forms, interrogative, 46*, 48* 8 . 50 29 , 
112-% 15233; — impersonal, 229 C7 ; see 
" Verbs, impersonate "; —passive, 
272' 1 ; si-e " Verbs, passive"; — pro- 
gressive, 156 Remark, 270«, 229 06 . 

Fort, instead of f res, very, 61 25 . 

Fou, for, folic, crazy, 138i 2 . 

Franc, coin, the money unit in 
France, 122*. 

France, d trovers la, 287. 

Frit, frite, trans., 163 37 . 

Froissart, historian, 298 u . 

Fruits, fruit trees, vocab., 305. 

Fumer, to smoke, 178". 

Furniture, meubles, vocab., 172. 

Future, see " Moods, indicative." 



G, sounds, 9, 24; see "Table of 
Sounds"; it is mute, 24; doubled, 
11821, see " Consonants, doubled." 

Garde-robe, wardrobe, 172 7 . 

Gare, station, station, dif.. 229 61 . 

Garonne, La, a river of France, 290 33 . 

Gascogne, La, a province of F.. 291*°. 

Gaule, La. Gaul or Gallia, 2S9 26 . 

Gaulier, Theaphile, writer, 310 36 . 

Gender, le genre, 73, 136, 248 ; see "Ad- 
jectives," "Nouns," "Masculine," 
"Feminine." 

Geneve, Geneva. 303 73 . 

GSnie, genius, 275 6 . 

Gn. pron., 25; in figured pron., see 
"Table of Sounds." 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



333 



Genitive or Possessive case, 75. 
Gentil, nice, well educated, 130 3 . 
Gironde, La, a river of France, 290 38 . 
Girondins, Les, 290 3 *. 
Glace, miroir, glass, mirror, 172 6 . 
Goncourt, Edmond and Jides, novel- 
ists, 31587. 

Grand, adj., when invariable, 230 6 . 
Grand-pere, aieul, grandfather, 230 5 . 
Greetings, forms of, see "Saluta- 
tions." 
Gucre, rather, little, 234 3 i. 
Guizot, historian, 316 109 . 
Guyenne, La, old province, 290 37 . 



JT,;sounds, 9, 25 ; in the figured pron., 
see " Table of Sounds." 

Have, to, see "Avoir." 

Hdvre, Le, a port of F., 231 12 , 294. 

Hear, to, meaning apprendre, 228 54 . 

Heures, hours, o'clock, 109"; how to 
express the time, 128 31 . 

Heureuz, happy, 133 27 . 

Hotel, conv. about an, 238. 

Hotel des Posies, post office, 223 5 . 

House, The, la maison, vocab., 166. 

How much, many, combien, 276 17 . 

How to Study by This Method, 1, 
278 1 ; —to form French words by 
suffixes analogous to English fi- 
nals, see " Terminations." 

Hugo, Victor, poet, 809 27 . 

Huit, eight, pron. of, 34. 

Huitres en coquille, trad., 162 33 . 

Hyphen, trait d' union, 41, 50 29 , see 
"Tiret." 



I, sounds, 8, 18 ; in the figured pron., 
see "Table of Sounds"; when 
omitted in si, 174 18 . 

II, ill. pronunciation, 27. 

II, pr., see "Pronouns, personal"; 
when used in an undetermined 
sense, 117 17 , 261 1 ; in a neuter sense, 
217 14 ; it est, c'esl, when to be used 
and dif., 124 15 ; il faut, it is neces- 
sary, 113 31 , 114 36 ; il y a, etc., there 
is, are, see Y avoir, 152. 
Im, in, pron., see "Sons nasauz." 
Image, metaphoric, 288 15 . 
Imperative, 98, 158 ; see "Moods." 
Imperfect, use of, 60 21 , 94, 9G 23 ; see 

"Moods." 
Impersonal verbs, see " Verbs." 
Importance of French, page viii. 
Indefinite article, see "Article." 
Indicative, 93 ; see " Moods." 
Infinitive, 267; used as a substan- 
tive, 233 21 , 267 2 ; see " Moods." 
Immeubles, real estate, 241 38 . 
Indefinite art., see "Article." 



Inhabitants of the World, 47, 179, 231. 
Interjections, 240 32 , 296. 
Interrogative form, see "Forms." 
Introduction, page v. 
Insects, vocab., 286. 
Irregularities of verbs, see "Verbs." 
Italic, letters, see " Letters." 
It is so, c'esl cela, 171 38 . 



J, sounds, 10, 26; in the fig. pron., 
see "Table of Sounds." 

Jamais, never, place of, 134 33 , 135 38 ; 
meaning forever, 135 38 ; see "Ad- 
verbs." 

Janin, Jules, art critic, 316 116 . 

Jardins anglais, trans., 233 24 . 

Jeanne d'Arc, 290. 

Jeune, young, after a name, 317 4 . 

Joinville, chronicler, 298 10 . 

Jouffroy, philosopher, 316 100 . 

Jour,journee. day, dif., 61 27 . 

Jusque,jusqu , d, till, until, 161 23 ; jus- 
qu'd ce soir, trans., ol 32 . 



K, when used, 13 9 , 26. 

Kings of France, dynasty, 2S9 25 . 



L, sounds of this letter, 10, 26 ; when 
doubled. 118- 1 , see " Consonants, 
doubled." 

La, le, les, the, 47 10 ; see "Article, defi- 
nite." 

Ld, ci, suffixes, how joined to other 
words, 42-6 ; added to pr., 143 ; to 
nouns. 173 16 . 

Ld-bas, la-haut, trans., 22963. 

La Bruyere, novelist, 30259. 

La Chaise, le Pere, Jesuit, 284". 

La Cordaire, religious orator. 316 95 . 

La Fayette, Mad. de, novelist. 30261. 

La Fontaine, classical writer, 30 l 52 . 

Lamartine, poet, 309 24 . 

Lamennais, religious orator, 316 94 . 

La Rochefoucauld, writer, 30258. 

Land, terre, vocab., 295. 

Languedoc, Le, old France, 291 43 . 

Le, art., the (masc. sing.) changed 
to V, 47 1( > 56 2 Vsee "Article,definite "; 
pr. it, 49 22 , 183 33 ; see "Pronouns, 
personal." 

Learn, to, apprendre, 4S 20 , 228 54 . 

Legouve, writer, 311 46 . 

Le NOtre, architect, 288". 

Lequel. laquelle, etc., see " Pronouns, 
relative." 

Leroux. Pierre, philosopher, 316 102 . 

Les, art. and pr., see "La" "Le." 



334 



COR'rLrA METHOD. 



Letters, genders of, 14 Remark, 
249-2°; sounded or mute at end of 
the words, 222; capital, 13 5 , 179^; 
italic, in the fig. pron., see "Table 
of Sounds." 

Leur, leurs, their, see "Adjectives, 
possessive "; them, 58 10 , 76, see 
"Pronouns, possessive." 

Liaison des Mots, 43, see letters D, 
F, G, H, S, T, X, Z; also "Conso- 
nants." 

Lierre, ivy, its emblem, 234, sent. 14. 

Lille, a city of France, 294. 

Limoges, a city of France, 290. 

Linen, linge, vocab., 178. 

Lisle, Leconte, de, poet, 313 61 . 

Lisle, Rouget de, 292, 304 96 . 

Litlerature classique, classic litera- 
ture, 298; moderne, modern, 307. 

LI, sound of, 10, 27; in the figured 
pron., see "Table of Sounds." 

Loire, La; a, river of France, 290. 

L'on, on, pr., 145 2324 ; see "Pronouns, 
indefinite." 

Lorraine, old province of F., 293. 

Loti, Pierre, novelist, 315 89 . 

Louis, golden coin, 240 35 . 

Louis XIV, King of France, 287. 

L'un, V autre, Vun et V autre, pr., 145 22 : 
see "Pronouns, indefinite." 

Lyon, a city of F., 293. 



M 

M, sounds of, 28 ; see "Sons nasaux "; 
in the fig. pron., see "Table of 
Sounds"; when doubled, 118 21 ; 
when mute, 28. 

M., MM., abbreviations of Monsieur 
and Messieurs, 181 22 . 

Macabre, devilish, 283". 

Madame, Mademoiselle, how to be 
used, 62 s3 , 228 s5 ; see "Monsieur." 

Ma foi! exclamation, indeed! 163 42 . 

Maitilenant, a present, dif, 71 37 „236 n . 

Maire, mere, mer, homonyms, 230 2 . 

Maistre, Qomte de, writer, 307 11 . 

Maitre d'hdlel, head waiter, 162 32 . 

Maizeroy, Rene de, novelist, 315 92 . 

Maladie, illness, sickness, 116 7 . 

Mai de me, mal d la tete, dif., 116 3 . 

Malesherbes, statesman, 279 17 . 

Malherbe, poet, 298 6 , 299. 

Mallarme, Stephen, writer, 313 n . 

Manche, canal de la, English Chan- 
nel, 294. 

Manchettes, cuffs, 53 13 , 59 18 . 

Manquer de, to fail of, 245 29 . 

Manteau, cloak, 226 44 . 

Marat, orator, 304 93 . 

Marengo, Sauce, 163 41 . 

Mardi-Gras, Shrove Tuesday, 131 21 . 

Marot, Clement, poet, 299 18 . 

Marseilles, sl city of France, 292. 

Marseillaise, La, 292. 



Masculine, 249-250; see "!Nouns," 

" Pronunciation." 
Matin, matinee, forenoon, dif., 61 27 . 
Maupassant, Guy de, novelist, 315 91 . 
Meals, The, les repas, vocab., 53, 53 12 , 

con?., 162, 
Meilleur, mieux, better, 66 7 , 71 33 , 119 29 . 
Mime, adj., same, 141 31 ; adv., even, 

also, conj., even that, 171 39 ; pr., 142. 
merit, ly, see "Terminations." 
Merimee, Prosper, novelist, 314 76 . 
Messeniennes, patriotic poetry, 309 22 . 
Meltre, to put, its compounds, 177 34 ; 

se meltre, to set at, 266 s5 . 
Meuse, La, a river of France, 293 57 . 
Mezeray, historian, 302 62 . 
Mezieres, a city of France, 293. 
Midi, minuit, noon, midnight, 128 31 ; 

see " Prefixes, ml" 
Mien, lien, sien, see " Pronouns, pos- 

SGSSiVG " 

MieJielel,' historian, 316 110 . 

Mille, mil, thousand, 11120. 

Mine, thine, etc., 144, Remark 1, see 
" Pronouns, possessive." 

Mirabeau, orator, 304 89 . 

Miroir, glace, mirror. 172 6 . 

Months, The, les mois, vocab., 116. 

Moods and Tenses of the Verbs. — 
Simple tenses, 93-96; Indicative, 
93, 157, and Subjunctive, dif., 217 13 ; 
Infinitive, 267; when used, 162 3 *; 
used as a noun, 267 2 , see "Infini- 
tive"; Conditional ,95,158; Impera- 
tive^, 158 ; Subj uncti ve, 113 31 ,11925, 
175 2 *, 177 33 , 20656, 216-218; compound 
tenses, 148, 150 27 , 151, 154 to 158 ; see 
" Forms, progressive, passive," 
" Participles, present, past," etc. 

Moi, toi, soi, when used and when 
repeated, 63 : », 68 s4 ; see "Pronouns, 
disjunctives." 

Moins, comparative, less; le moins, 
superlative, the least, 184. 

Moitie, demi, half, 167 u . 

Moliere, playwright. 300 40 , 301«. 

Mon, ma, etc., see "Adjective, pos- 
sessive." 

Mon vieux, mon cher, etc, exclama- 
tions, 133 31 , 183 34 . 

Money, monnaie, 113 30 ; see "Coin," 
also " Louis " and " Napol6on." 

Monsieur, composition and abbre- 
viation,49 2 y54 9 ,181 22 ; and Madame, 
Mademoiselle, art. omitted before 
these words, 228 59 ; when written 
with capital letters, 317 3 , 319i 2 

Montaigne, philosopher, 298 14 . 

Montalembert, statesman, 316 96 . 

Montesquieu, writer, 303 78 . 

Montpellier, France. 292. 

Morgue, 283 G9 . . 

Morue, codfish, 306 18 . 

Mou, viol, soft, 138*2. 

Multiples, vocab., 173. 

Muryer, Henri, writer, 315 83 . 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



!35 



N 

N, sounds of, 9, 2S ; " Nasal Sounds,"' 
see"So7is nasaux"; when doubled, 
118 21 , see "Consonants, doubled"; 
in the figured pronunciation, see 
"Table of Sounds"; when ruute, 
29. 

Nasal sounds, see "So7is nasaiix." 

Nations and Nationalities, vocabs., 
47, 179, 231. 

Nancy, France, 293. 

Napoleon, coin, 240 35 . 

Ne, non, pas, no, adv. of negation, 
465, 277; ne before a subjunctive, 
175 24 ; ne jxis, ne point, not, 226 39 i3 , 
23585 ; ne que, but, only, 134**. 

Neanmoins, notwithstanding, 224 13 . 

Negative form, see "Forms." 

Ni—ni, correlative conj., 224 14 . 

Nice, a city of France, 292. 

Nimes, France, 292. 

Nodier, Qharles, novelist, 314 74 . 

Noel, Christmas, etymology, 131 20 . 

Non, pas, not, w T hen used, 2382*. see 
u Ne "; non pas, no, emphatic, 22§» 8 ; 
non plus, no more, 116 6 . 

Normandie, Let, France. 294. 

Notre, voire, etc., see "Adjectives, 
possessive." 

Notre, le, Id, les, vdtre, etc., see " Pro- 
nouns, possessive." 

Nouns, compound, 252; of two gen- 
ders, 250; having two plurals, 251; 
gender of, 248; invariable, 252; 
proper, 253; used in the plural 
only, 228 60 , 252-2; see "Pronuncia- 
tion." 

Nous autres, vous autres, 133 29 , 13432. 

Nouveau, nouvel, new, 57 30 . 

Nuageux, cloudy, 177 32 . 

Nul, pas un, none, 141 2 ?. 

Numbers, cardinal, 110; its pecu- 
liarities, 110, 111 (notes); plural, 
11118; collective, 111 19 , 167; ordinal, 
122, 123, 1S5 4 : partitive, 167; see 
"Adjectives." 



O, sounds of, 8, 18; in the figured 
pronunciation, see "Table of 
Sounds "; when mute, 306 15 . 

Oeu, oi, sounds, 8. 20, 21. 

Of which, dont, IU™. 

Ora, on, see '■'■Sons nasaux. 11 

On, se, one, indefinite pr., 49 25 , 145 23 ; 
preceded by si, ou, et, 7ii, que, it is 
changed into Von. 145 24 ; see " Pro- 
nouns, indefinite." 

Or, conj., now, but, 224 1: . 

Ordinal numbers, see "Numbers." 

Orleans, a city of France, 289. 

Orthographical signs, see "Signs." 

Ou—ou, either— or, conj., 224 15 . 



Ou, where, etc., 70 32 ; and ou,, or, dif. 

of orthography, 38. 
Oui, si, adv., yes, dif., 277-. 
Outre, prep., besides, 161 23 . Oulre- 

mer, beyond the sea, 161 25 , 313 69 . 
Oysters on the half shell, trans, 16233. 



P, sounds of, 29; in the fig. pron.., 
see " Table of Sounds "; when dou- 
bled, 118 21 , see " Consonants, dou^ 
bled "; when mute, 29. 

Paire, couple, pair, couple, leT 1 * 1 ^ 16 . 

Paletot, coat, 181 24 . 

Par, prep., by, 161 26 . 

Par Jiasard, perchance, 277 26 . 

Parbleu, interj., 229 C2 ; see "Interjec 
tions." 

Parce que, par ce que, dif., 225 34 . 

Pardon, used as a negation, 277 24 . 

Paris, Une journSe a, 278. 

Participles — past, its term., 80, 82; 
considered as an adj.. 127 26 , 272-1; 
as a subst., 272-2; agreement of, 
260 3 , 272, 273, 274 ; preceded by en 
pr., 274-7-1°; see "Passive Verbs "; 
— present, its term., 78-2, 270 2 ; prep, 
which governs it, 161 2 ", 270-2° ; 
when the prep, is dropped, 270-2°; 
considered as a verb, 270-1; con- 
sidered as an adj., 271-2; see 
"Forms, progressive." 

Partitive numbers, see " Numbers." 

Pas, not, when used, 46 s , 61 26 ; when 
omitted, 120 31 ; non pas, 228 58 ; pas si, 
pas aussi, comp., 184; pas and 
point, strengthen the negation, 
226^ 23535 36; sometimes they are 
omitted, 22639; see "iVe." 

Pascal, Blaise, philosopher, 302 5 ". 

Passive, see " Forms " and " Verbs." 

Past, definite, when used, 60 21 , 95, 
157 1 ; —anterior, 158; —indefinite, 
157; see "Moods, Indicative." 

Patois, dialect, 2S9 28 . 

Pau, a city of France, 291. 

Pelouse, trans., 233 23 . 

Pendant, tandis, while, dif., 22S 35 . 

Pension, boarding, 239 27 . 

Perpigium, France, 292. 

Personal pronouns, see "Pronouns." 

Peu de, few, 61 2 *. 

Ph, sound, 29. 

Phocee, Greek colony, 292 51 . 

Phonograph, its use, 6. 

Phrases usuelles, usual phrases, 286, 
297, 306. 

Picardie. France, 294. 

Place, place, spot, 232". 

Plafond, ceiling, 166 5 . 

Plaisanter. to joke, 22750. 

Plait-il? if vou please, 174 18 . 

Plancher, floor, 166 5 . 

Pluperfect, 157, see " Moods." 



136 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Plural, formation of, 47", 56 28 , 573", 
74; see "Nouns"; — of adj. not 
changing, 173 15 ; see "Adjectives." 

Plus, more, comparative and super- 
lative, 119 2 9, 184; preceded by de, 
12137; pi us and davantage- dif., 276 18 ; 
plus and dijd, dif., 237". 

Plusieurs, several, indefinite adj., 
14232; pr>) 14525. ' 

Plutdt, plus t6L dif., 52». 

Poe, Edgar, poet, 283 72 . 

Pois, peas ; pelits pois, green peas ; 
—chiches, chick peas, 165 47 . 

Poissun, fish ; poison, poison, 32 2 *. 

Poitiers, France, 290. 

Porter, amener, to carry, to bring, 
98™; se porter, to feel, 1322*. 

Post office, hotel des Posies, 223 5 . 

Possessive case, 75. 

Pot, pitcher, in composition, vzas. 

Potage, soup, 16234. 

Pour, see "Par'''' and "For'*' pon- 
que, in order that, goY9rns „ne 
subj., 1773-3. 

Pourquoi, why, conj., 224**. 

Pourtant, however, c^nj., 224 18 . 

Prefixes, a, ad an«i variations, 173 11 ; 
co, con, 130 11 : Je, des, 166 2 ; di, dis, 
1868; e, ^JS^>'; em, en, 166 2 , en in 
comvM>sition of verbs, 171 36 ; entre, 
- mter, 166*; equ, et, 38 9 ; ex, 16335; il, 
\m, in, ir, 169 30 ; mal, mau, me, mes, 
26124; m i expressing division, 176 26 ; 
non, 228 58 , 238 24 ; per, 17734, 178 9 ; pre, 
1855 ; pr0j i7734 ? 27925 ; re, 46 8 , 183 3 2 ; 
sou, sub, su, 177 36 , 187 5 ; trans, 32, 
17734, 309'25. 

Premiere, unieme, first, 1225. 

frenez garde, take care, 266 2 3. 

Prepositions, 160, 161 ; those govern- 
ing an infinitive, 267-2 ; used after 
verbs, 268, 269; dif. with adv.,237i 9 . 

Pres, near ; pret, ready, 126 2 5. 

Present, 93 ; see " Moods." » 

Procureur, trans., 228 57 . 

Progressive form, see " Forms." 

Pronouns, 142 to 146, 254, 255"; place 
of, 5525, 109 8 , 11222 23. dif. with adj., 
1423, 1438, 14412 13; personal, 46*. 48" 
4922, 63 3 5, 75, 142, 188 n , 254 ; place of, 
69 28 , 254 6 , 255; repetition, 63 3 5, 68 2 4, 
2546; demonstrative, 66 8 ™, 142, 248 35 ; 
possessive, 143; relative, 144; in- 
terrogative, 112 22 , 145; indefinite, 
145; on, 49 2 °, 69 27 , see "O/i"; reflec- 
tive, 254, 255, 

Pronunciation, rules of, 7; fig. see 
"Table of Sounds"; dif. of the 
masc. and fern, forms, 137 9 , 138 13 ; 
of the sing, and pi., 139 15 . 

Proudhon, philosopher, 316 104 . 

Proverbs and idioms, 324. 

Province, country, 130 5 . 

Puis, after, et puis, then, 116 4 ; — de- 
puis, apres, ensuile, after, 237 12 . 

Puisque, as, conj., 224 19 . 



a 

Q, sound, 30; when mute, 30 1T . 
Qua, que, qui, sounds, 10, 30, 30 16 . 
Quand, adv.; quant d, prep., 180 18 . 
Que, qui, quoi, pr., 112 22 , 125 22 , 144. 
Que, combien, exclamations, 163 38 . 
Quel, quelle, etc., adj., 66 4 , 11541 142. 
Quelconque, whatever, adj., 142 3 3. 
^uelque, si, taut, so much, dif., 23822. 
Quelqu'un, someone,somebody,1452 fi . 
luerir, to fetch, 20759. 
Quiconque, whoever, 146 27 . 



B, 

R, sound of, 30, 31 19 ; in the fig. pron., 
see "Table of Sounds"; when 
doubled, 118 21 , see "Consonants, 
doubled "; when mute, 10 u , 31. 

Rabelais, writer, 298 13 . 

Racine, author, 300 37 . 

Railroad, chemin de fer, vocab., 67; 
conv., 68. 

Rambouillet, H6tel de, 299 2 °. 

Rapport, report, 252 s . 

Ravir, d, trans., 130 2 . 

Re, see " Prefixes." 

Reboul, poet, 31 3 60 . 

Receipt, model of, 240, sent. 18. 

Redingote, frock coat, 181 2 4. 

Registre, blank book, 242 7 . 

Remonter, to wind up, 122 3 . 

Renaissance, La, 299 17 . 

Reparlir, r&partir, dif., 189 14 . 

Reptiles, reptiles, vocab., 306. 

Rester a demeure, to live, 18335. 

Reussi, trans., 163 39 . 

Rhone, Le, a river of F., 293. 

Richelieu, Cardinal de, 299 21 . 

Richepin, poet, 313 70 . 

Riviere, fleuve, river, dif.,295 4 . 

Robespierre, orator, 304 92 . 

Roi-Soleil, 287 9 . 

Romanciers, novelists, 24632. 

Ronsard, poet, 299 19 . 

Rosbif, corruption of the Eng., 163 44 . 

Rot, roti, roast, 16343. 

Roubaix, France, 294. 

Rouen, France, 294. 

Rousseau, Jean Jacques, philoso- 
pher, 303 72 . 

Roussillon, France, 292. 5( > 

Royer-Collard, philosopher, 316 98 . 

rr., pron., 31 19 . 



8, sounds of, 10, 31 ; in the fig. pron., 
see " Table of Sounds "; when 
doubled, 118 21 , see "Consonants, 
doubled "; when mute, 32. 

Saillir, to gush, to project, 199 42 . 

Saint- Germain, France, 227 53 . 



ALPHABETICAL IXDEX. 



337 



Saint-Pierre, writer, 304 86 . 
Saint-Simon, author, 302 63 . 
Salutations, forms of greeting, 54 18 , 

582, 12939, 13117, 132 sent. 1. 
Same, even, mime, 171 39 . 
Sand, George, novelist, 314 73 . 
Sandeau, Jules, novelist, 314 78 . 
Saone, La, a river of France, 293. 
Sardou, Victorien, playwright, 311 49 . 
Sauf, prep., excepts, 161 27 . 
Sc, pron., 33. 

Scribe, Eugene, playwright, 311 42 . 
Scud'jry, Mile, de, novelist, 30260. 
Sea, flier, vocab., 295. 
Seasons, The, les saisons, vocab., 131. 
Second, deuxieme, dit, 123 8 . 
Seine, La, a river of F., 2S1 57 . 
S'en aller, to go away, 259. 
Send for, to, /aire chercher, 169 28 . 
Senses and sensations, vocab., 275. 
Sentir mauvais, to smell bad, 265 u . 
Sept, seven, pron. of, 34. 
Serve a la faille, trans., 181 25 . 
Serviette, towel, napkin, 178 3 . 
Sevigne, Mad. de, writer, 302 64 . 
Sewing Articles, articles de couture, 

236. 
Sh, figured pron., see "Table of 

Sounds." 
Shakespeare, English poet, 301 42 . 
Shells, coquillages, vocab., 306. 
Shoemaker, bootmaker, trans,, 182 31 . 
Shoes, chaussures, vocab., 59. 
Si, if, see "Adverbs "; used instead 

of oui, yes, 277-; and tant or tene- 
ment, demonstrative, 23S' 22 ; conj., 

when it drops the i, 174 18 . 
Signature, from signer, to sign, 317 10 . 
Signs, orthographical, 36, 39; in the 

fig. pron., see "Table of Sounds." 
Simon, Jules, statesman, 316 101 . 
Sinon, otherwise, conj., 224 21 . 
Sitot, si tot, dif., 57 31 . 
Soir and nuit, 58 s ; soiree, dif., 61 27 . 
Soiree, evening party, 130". 
Soil, conj., whether, 22422. 
Sole, a fish, 163 36 . 
Some, any, du, de la, des, 69 31 . 
Somme, La, a river of France, 294. 
Sons nasaux, 9, 21. 
Sounds— of the vowels, 7, 14 to 21 ; 

— of the consonants, 9, 21 to 36; 

—nasal, 9, 21 ; Table of, 11, 12. 
Soupe, potage, soup, 162 34 . 
Souvestre, Emile, novelist, 314 77 . 
Square, public garden, 223 16 . 
Stationery, papeterie, vocab., 242. 
St., see "Abbreviations." 
St. Marc Girardin, critic, 316 11 *. 
Stael, Mad. dc, writer, 307 10 . 
Ste. Beuve. critic, 316" 7 . 
Stores, The, les magasins, vocab., 67. 
Subjunctive, 216; see "Moods." 
Substantives, see "Nouns." 
Subject, place of, 68^, 6929, 11223, 11540, 

127 27 ; when repeated, 63 :S , 682*. 



Sue, Eugene, novelist, 314 76 . 
Suffixes, see "Terminations." 
Sully- Prudhomme, poet, 313 64 . 
Sully, duke de, 283 7 C 
Superlative, formation of, 119 29 , 169 25 ; 

184, 24422; se e "Comparative." 
Sur, prep., and adj., dif., 161 29 . 
Sur, sour, 16129. 



T, sounds, 10, 33; when mute, 33, 
110 14 ; when doubled, 118* 1 , see "Con- 
sonants, doubled "; when used for 
euphony, 6929. 

Table, The, la table, vocab., 53, 159. 

Tailor, tailleur, 58 12 , conv., 180. 

Tandis, tant, pendant que. dif., 225 35 . 

TantAant de, tant que, 227 49 ; tant and 
si, 23822; see "Comparative." 

Tarbes, a city of France, 292. 

te, suffix, see "Terminations." 

Tel, adj., such, 14235; pr ., 146. 

Tellement, so much, conj., 225 36 . 

Tenses of the verb, see "Moods." 

Terminations— able, 177 35 ; ade, 280 30 ; 
ain, aine, 111 19 ; aire, 109 4 ; al, 49 c "; 
ance, 109 2 ; ant, 115 37 ; at, ate, 161^; 
cle, 166 3 ; cy, 342»; di in the days of 
the week, 67 19 ; e, past part, of the 
verbs, 80, 127 28 ; corresponds to ed, 
171 35 ; ee, fern, form, 12726 23, saT ne 
in nouns, 61 27 , 171 35 ; ence, 276 1 '-'; 
ent, 66 5 , 166 6 ; esse. 248 3 ; ette, dim. 
form, 53 13 ; eur, 58 12 , 6826, 249-6 ; eux, 
5210; Ji eVj 2498; i, past part, of verbs, 
80 ; ible, 181 29 ; ide, 275 9 ; ier, er, 59^ 
125 21 , added to the name of the 
fruit forms that of the tree, 172 8 . 
305 1 ; ?Y,80-0; il, He, 247 39 ; in, t??e,167 9 ; 
ion, 117 10 , 11822; ique, 173 13 , 2422; isme, 
252*; ise,2o2~; iste,2AW; ma.me,W& & \ 
ment, 46 6 , 2421S; metlre, 17521; oire, 
1725; p he, phie, 235 39 ; vie, 67 17 ; Ze,38 9 , 
12140; tot, 5&, 57^,181*; u, past part., 
82; ule, 166 3 ; ure, 167 8 . 

That's it! c'esl cela! 171 38 , see "This." 

Theater, conv. about the, 232. 

Thermometer, Fahrenheit, Centi- 
grade, compared, 176 27 . 

Theuriet, poet and novelist, 313 66 . 

Thiers, statesman, 316 107 . 

Thierry, Augustin. historian, 316 106 . 

This, that, see "Adjectives, Pro- 
nouns, demonstrative." 

Tiens! exclamation, 58 8 . 

Till, see " Until." 

Timbre, cachet, stamp, 242 4 . 

Tire-bouchon, corkscrew, 159 10 . 

Tirer, to pull, 173 9 . 

Tiret, dash, 45 19 , 175 23 . 

To, prep., a, 150 29 , see " Prepositions." 

Toilette, toilet, articles of. vocab., 
236; various meaning 178 3 , 278*. 

Torchon, chiffon, rag, 178°. 

Tot, de bonne heure, early, 237 15 . 



338 



CORTINA METHOD. 



Toucher, to touch, collect, 109 9 . 
Toujours, always, 58 11 . 
Tour, avoir son, to be one's turn. 235 36 . 
Tour a tour, alternatively, 2442». 
Tour de force, 278 7 ; -de France, 287 3 ; 

— de promenade^ 232 18 . 
Tours, a city of France, 290. 
Tous, all, pron., 33 26 . 
Tout, adj., all, 14236; pr>) 146 Remark, 

146* 8 ; used as idiom, 116', m™, 12142, 

1303, 237™, 23929; —a Vheure, 58*; _a 

coup, d'un coup, 277 2 9. 
Toutefois, conj., nevertheless, 22S 23 . 
Toward, vers, envers, 161 22 . 
Trait d 'union, hyphen,41,see "TireV 
Tr avers, d, au, through, 287 1 . 
Trees, The, fruit trees, vocab., 305. 
Trema, diaeresis. 41. 
Tres, very, 15028, 175™, see "Fort"; 

used to form the superlative, 184. 
Trocaderq, Le, Paris, 28261. 
Tromper, se, to be mistaken, 227 51 . 
Trop lot, too early, 226*2, 
Troyes, a city of France, 293. 

TJ 

U, sounds of, 8, 19™; in the fig. pron., 
see " Table of Sounds." 

Ue, sound, 26 10 . 

Um, un, see "Sons nasaux." 

Un, une, a (an), see "Articles, indefi- 
nite"; numeral adj.. 110 11 . 

Unieme, premiere, first, dif., 122 5 . 

Un Tel, such one, So-and-So, 154™. 

Until, till, jusqu'd, 161 2 3. 

Use of Tenses, 93, 157, 216, 267. 



V, sounds, 34. 

Vaisselle, crockery, vocab., 178. 

Valenciennes, France, 294. 

Vaudeville, 311«. 

Vegetables, legumes, vocab., 159, 305. 

Venir chercher, trans., 169 2 8. - 

Verbs, 76 to 108, 146 to 158, 187 to 222, 
256 to 274; definition and division 
of, 76, 15130 3i 32 ? I54iii3 ; governing 
an inf. without any prep., 183 33 ; 

' list of, 267; governing it with the 
prep, d, 268; with de, 269; auxi- 
liaries— avoir, 146 to 152 ; Remarks, 
11223, 11325, H435, i5i Remark,156-4th; 
etre, 152 to 156 ; Remarks, 124"; see 
"Moods, compound tenses"; de- 
fective, 19733, 263, list of, 265 ; imper- 
sonal, 11331, 11436, 261 ; list of, 262; 
conv., 244; y avoir, lYflT, 15233; ir- 
regular, 187 to 216; list of, 219; 



passive, 260: reciprocal, 260; re» 
flexive, 1093, 256 ; list of, 256 ; conv., 
226, see " Forms, progressive "; reg- 
ular, 76 to 84 ; list of, 97; modifica- 
tions of the radical, 84 to 92 ; for- 
mation of tenses, 77 ; neuter, gov- 
erning de, 129 33 ; see " Moods." 

Verglas, trans., 2452s. 

Vergniaud, orator, 304 91 . 

Verlaine, Paul, writer, 313 71 . 

Vers, toward, 11720; — envers, 161 22 . 

Versailles, France, 287; les grandes 
eaux de, 288™. 

Veston, sack coat, 181 2 *. 

Veuillez, please, 122\ 21481. 

Vieux, vieil, old, 138™. 

Vigny, Alfred de, writer, 30926. 

Villehardouin, chronicler, 298 9 . 

Villemain, historian, 316 113 . 

Void, voild, here, there is, are, 69 s8 . 

Voiture, writer, 299 2 s. 

Volaille, fowl, poultry, 30613. 

Voltaire, writer, 30038, 302. 

Voire, see "Adjective," le vdtre, etc., 
see " Pronouns, possessive." 

Vous, see "Pronouns, personal"; 
vous antres, trans., I332 9 . 

Vowels, sounds, 7, 14 to 19 ; not fol- 
lowing the rules of pron., 20U, 27 : 
compound, 8, 20; "Sons nasaux," 
9,21. 

w 

w, 139. 

Walk, taking a, conv. 232. 
Watch, The, vocab., 122 ; conv., 124. 
Who, which, relative pr., see "Que, 

qui "; of which, 144™, see "Dont." 
World, Parts of the, vocab., 179. 
Writing Materials, articles de pape- 

terie, vocab., 242. 



X, sounds of, 10, 34 ; in the fig. pron., 
see " Table of Sounds "; when 
mute, 34. 



Y, sounds, 8, 19, 27ii; in the fig. pron n 

see "Table of Sounds." 
Y. adv. and pr., 523, 232™, 2.55-4°. 
Ym, yn, see "Sons nasaux." 



Z, sounds of, 35; in the fig. pron., 
see " Table of Sounds "; mute, W*-. 
Zola, Emile, novelist, 315*>. 



FIN. 



R. D. CORTINA'S TEXT BOOKS 

THE CORTINA METHODS 

Awarded Prizes by the Departments of Liberal Arts, at the Columbian 

Exposition, Chicago, 1893, and Pan-American 

Exposition, Buffalo, 1901. 

For Use in Schools and With or Without a Teacher, or in connection 
with the PHONOGRAPH. With a system of articulations, based on 
simple equivalents, indicating the most exact pronunciations of the 
different languages. 

No. 1. Spanish in Twenty Lessons. Text Book in the United States, 
England, Canada and the English and American colonies. Intro- 
ductory autograph letter from Don Carlos de Borbon. This book 
has had an extraordinary and unequalled success, as may be judged 
by the number of its editions. It is considered the standard work 
for mastering the Castilian language in the shortest possible time. 
One volume, octavo, NINETY-FIFTH EDITION, cloth, $1.50 
No. 2. Ingles en Veinte Lecciones. (English in Twenty Lessons.) 
Standard text book in colleges of Spanish America. The favorite 
book for learning English rapidly. Prologue by Don Emilio Castelar. 
• One volume, octavo, NINETY-SECOND EDITION, cloth, $1.50 

No. 3. French in Twenty Lessons. Based on the same plan and is 
- recommended by all experts in modern didactics. Revised by Prof. 
J. Leroux, U. S. Naval Academy. 

One volume, octavo, FOURTEENTH EDITION, cloth, $1.50 

No. 4. Frances en Veinte Lecciones. (French in Twenty Lessons.) 
Arranged as the preceding ones, for use in schools, academies, etc., 
for studying with or without a teacher, or by employing it in connec- 
tion with the phonograph. Prologue by Don Gaspar Nunez de Arce, 
the poet laureate of Spain. 
One volume, octavo, TWENTY-FOURTH EDITION, cloth, $1.50 

No. 5. Espafiol en Espanol. A complete method for teaching Spanish 

by the system of suggestion and association. This work presents 

clearly and forcibly the advan-ced methods of pedagogy which have 

led to the author's unparalleled success in the teaching of languages. 

Volume I, THIRD EDITION, cloth, $1.00 

No. 6. English in English. The same as the above, adapted to the 

English language. 

Volume I, FIFTH EDITION, cloth, $1.00 

No. 7. Francais en Francais. The same as the above, adapted to 

the French language. 

Volume I s FIRST EDITION, cloth, $1.00 



R. D. CORTINA'S TEXT BOOKS 

THE CORTINA METHODS 

No. 8. Deutsch auf Deutsch. The same as the above, adapted to 
the German language. 

Volume I, FIRST EDITION, cloth, $1.00 

The same, with Key in English, 1.50 

No. 9. Italiano in Italiano. The same as the above, adapted to the 
Italian language. 
Volume I, FIRST EDITION, cloth, $1.00 

The same, with Key in English, 1.50 

No. -10. English in English with Key in Portuguese. 

FIRST EDITION, $ 1. 50 

No. 11. Inglez. A practical text book for Portuguese-speaking people 
to learn English. Arranged for use in schools, universities, etc., for 
studying with or without a teacher or in conjunction with the phono- 
graph. 

One volume, octavo, FIRST EDITION, cloth, $1.60 

No. 12. Francez. A practical text book for Portuguese-speaking 
people to learn French. Arranged for use in schools, universities, 
etc., for studying with or without a teacher or in conjunction with 
the phonograph. 
. One volume, octavo, FIRST EDITION, cloth, s $1.50 

DICTIONARIES 

No. 1. Verbos Espanoles. "Diccionario de la Conjugacion Cas- 
tellana." Much enlarged and greatly improved. Containing all the 
Castilian Verbs: Regular, Irregular, Defective, Impersonal and Re- 
flexive—all CONJUGATED IN FULL, with the PREPOSITIONS 
following them and the ENGLISH EQUIVALENTS. A Practical 
Stud? of the Formation of Tenses precedes the list of verbs, thus as- 
suring their Correct Use and Complete Mastery. The only book of 
its kind in any language. 
One volume, 8°, SIXTEENTH EDITION, cloth, $1.00 

paper, 0.76 

No. 2. "Cortina's" SPANISH-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-SPAN- 
ISH VEST POCKET DICTIONARY AND INSTRUCTOR, con- 
taining, besides the lexicography, a guide to Spanish pronunciation; 
full lists of adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, abbreviations, de- 
clension of articles, adjectives, nouns and pronouns; and over ONE 
THOUSAND idioms and common expressions. The most conve- 
nient little Dictionary ever published. 
One volume, flexible cloth, double index, 46th EDITION, $0.25 



R. D. CORTINA'S TEXT BOOKS. 

THE CORTINA SERIES. 
BOOKS IN SPANISH AND ENGLISH. 

On opposite pages: Spanish on one side and English on the other, so 
that either may be used for reference. 

No. 2. El Indiano. This pretty prose comedy in three acts, used as a 
reader in universities, colleges and schools, in England, Spain, and in 
English- and Spanish-speaking countries, has been specially arranged 
for classes both in Spanish and English, and should be used in con- 
nection with The Cortina Methods for teaching either language. 
In order that this instructive and entertaining work may give satis- 
factory and practical results, the teacher must follow strictly* the 
"Directions" given on the first page of the methods. 

One volume, octavo, 18th EDITION, cloth, .75; paper, .50 

No. 4. Amparo. A most charming novel, arranged in the same man- 
ner as "El Indiano." In using this book the student does not need 
to memorize the text, but should become familiar with all the words 
and give an oral and prepare a written synopsis of each lesson. The 
teacher should facilitate these exercises with helpful suggestions. 
One volume, octavo, 15th EDITION, cloth, $1.00; paper, .75 

No. 7. Modelos para Cartas. Improved and corrected. Prologue 
by the famous Spanish orator and parliamentarian Don Juan 
Vazquez de Mella. This book is not only, as its title indicates, a 
complete series of the general styles of letters and documents of all 
kinds in English and Spanish, but also a most worthy assistant 
for acquiring a good selection of commercial vocabularies, copious 
in phrases, technical terms, idioms, abbreviations, etc. 

One volume, octavo, 34th EDITION, cloth, $1.00; paper, .75 

No. 10. Narraciones. A very instructive and interesting book. 
Gives graphic accounts of great historical events, as Trafalgar and 
Almansa, and sketches of prominent men such as Nelson, Villeneuve, 
Gravina, Churruca, etc. Explanatory notes of historical names and 
incidents, interpretation of Spanish idioms, grammatical remarks, 
etc., will be found among the notes at the end of the book. All 
preceded by a biography of the charming writer Fern AN Caballero : 
I. Biography of the authoress. II. Una Madre (an episode of the 
battle of Trafalgar). III. La Flor de las RufNAS (Narrative). 
IV. Conctencia (Narrative). V. El Escapulario (Narrative). 
One volume, octavo, 4th EDITION, cloth, $1.00; paper, .75 

No. 12. Episodios. A book of great historical interest. Three im- 
portant events of three remarkable ages. Arranged as the above 
and preceded by a biography and criticism of Don Antonio SolIs: 
I. Biographical sketch. II. Hernan Cortes (conquest of Mexico, 
time of Carlos V). III. Dos Rivales (Battle of St. Quentin, 
Reign of Felipe II). IV. Napole6n I. y el Parroco de Rambouil- 
LET (Epoch of Napoleon I). 

One volume, octavo, 4th EDITION, cloth, $1.00; paper, .75 



R. D. CORTINA'S TEXT BOOKS. 

THE CORTINA SERIES. 
BOOKS IN SPANISH, ANNOTATED IN ENGLISH. 

No. 1. Despues de la Lluvia El Sol. A very witty play in one act, 
well adapted for use in classes. Foot-Notes in English. 

A small volume, 8°, FIFTEENTH EDITION, cloth, .50 
paper, .25 

No. 3. El Indiano. _ Spanish Edition of this amusing comedy in 
three acts, extensively annotated in English at the end of the 
book. 

One volume, 8°, SIXTEENTH EDITION, paper, .40 

No.* 5. Amparo. Spanish Edition of this favorite novel with notes. 

One volume, 8°, FIFTEENTH EDITION, cloth, .75 ; paper, .50 

No. 6. El Final de Norma. The best novel of the celebrated Spanish 
writer, P. A. de Alarcon, specially arranged as a text book for col- 
leges, and copiously annotated in English at the end of the bock. 
One volume, 8°, THIRD EDITION, paper, .75 

No. 11. Narraciones. Spanish edition of this beautiful book, printed 
in large and clear type, and extensively annotated at the end of 
the text. Contains grammatical explanations and historical 
events. 

One volume, 8°, SECOND EDITION, cloth, .75; paper, .50 
No. 13. Episodios. Spanish edition of this select historical work. 
One volume, 8°, SECOND EDITION, cloth, .75; paper, .60 

CORTINA MILITARY SERIES. 

By Jean A. Picard. 

Cortina French-English Military Manual, bound in flexible cloth, 

$2.00 

Cortina French-English Red Cross Instructor, cloth covered, .50 

Cortina French-English Soldier's Handbook, cloth covered, .50 

Cortina French-English Military Dictionary, cloth covered, .35 








*» » c 









^•% 




// r> .<V 



V<£ ; 










** y ^ 



* ,v 






-^ » 



* \ 












*• ^ 









U^ 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 116 412 6 



mSnKn 






wMWM 




ill J 




111 I 




Vm 3 




■ 


■ ■• ■* 




Sk2< 








